SIMATIC MV420 / SIMATIC MV440
___________________
___________________
___________________
___________________
___________________
___________________
___________________
___________________
___________
___________________
___________________
___________________
___________________
___________________
___________________
___________________
___________________
___________________
SIMATIC Ident
Code Reader Systems
SIMATIC MV420 / SIMATIC MV440
Operating Instructions
10/2015
C79000
-G8976-C334-03
Preface
Description
1
Safety notices
2
Image processing
3
Network and system
interfacing
4
Installation
5
Connecting
6
Commissioning
7
Operator control and
monitoring
8
Process interfacing via an
automation system (PLC,
PC)
9
Alarm, fault and system
messages
10
Service and maintenance
11
Technical specifications
12
Dimension drawings
13
Components of the
product/spares/accessories
14
Appendix
A
ESD guidelines
B
List of abbreviations and
acronyms
C
ves
C79000-G8976-C334-03
Ⓟ
09/2015 Subject to change
Copyright © Siemens AG 2009 - 2015.
All rights reserved
Legal information
Warning notice system
This manual contains notices you have to observe in order to ensure your personal safety, as well as to prevent
damage to property. The notices referring to your personal safety are highlighted in the manual by a safety alert
symbol, notices referring only to property damage have no safety alert symbol. These notices shown below are
graded according to the degree of danger.
DANGER
indicates that death or severe personal injury will result if proper precautions are not taken.
WARNING
indicates that death or severe personal injury may result if proper precautions are not taken.
CAUTION
indicates that minor personal injury can result if proper precautions are not taken.
NOTICE
indicates that property damage can result if proper precautions are not taken.
If more than one degree of danger is present, the warning notice representing the highest degree of danger will
be used. A notice warning of injury to persons with a safety alert symbol may also include a warning relating to
property damage.
Qualified Personnel
The product/system described in this documentation may be operated only by
personnel qualified
for the specific
task in accordance with the relevant documentation, in particular its warning notices and safety instructions.
Qualified personnel are those who, based on their training and experience, are capable of identifying risks and
avoiding potential hazards when working with these products/systems.
Proper use of Siemens products
Note the following:
WARNING
Siemens products may only be used for the applications described in the catalog and in the relevant technical
documentation. If products and components from other manufacturers are used, these must be recommended
or approved by Siemens. Proper transport, storage, installation, assembly, commissioning, operation and
maintenance are required to ensure that the products operate safely and without any problems. The permissible
ambient conditions must be complied with. The information in the relevant documentation must be observed.
Trademarks
All names identified by ® are registered trademarks of Siemens AG. The remaining trademarks in this publication
may be trademarks whose use by third parties for their own purposes could violate the rights of the owner.
Disclaimer of Liability
We have reviewed the contents of this publication to ensure consistency with the hardware and software
described. Since variance cannot be precluded entirely, we cannot guarantee full consistency. However, the
information in this publication is reviewed regularly and any necessary corrections are included in subsequent
editions.
SIMATIC MV420 / SIMATIC MV440
Operating Instructions, 10/2015, C79000-G8976-C334-03 3
Preface
Validity of these operating instructions
This document contains information on the products listed below.
Valid for devices/licenses with the following article numbers
Article number
Device/license
6GF3420-0AA20
SIMATIC MV420 SR-B
6GF3420-0AX20
SIMATIC MV420 SR-B Body
6GF3420-0AA40 SIMATIC MV420 SR-P
6GF3420-0AX40
SIMATIC MV420 SR-P Body
6GF3440-1CD10
SIMATIC MV440 SR
6GF3440-1GE10
SIMATIC MV440 HR
6GF3440-1LE10
SIMATIC MV440 UR
6GF3400-0SL01
SIMATIC MV400 Text-Genius license
6GF3400-0SL02
SIMATIC MV400 Veri-Genius license
6GF3400-0SL03
SIMATIC MV400 Pat-Genius license
6GF3400-1SL01
SIMATIC MV400 Text-Genius-Plus license
The readers of the SIMATIC MV420 and SIMATIC MV440 families can be used for all optical
identification applications in manufacturing and logistics. Typical applications are product
tracking and production control.
These operating instructions apply to firmware version 7.0.
Product designation
In the remainder of this document, the term "reader" or "code reader" is also used instead of
the full product name "SIMATIC MV420" or "SIMATIC MV440".
Purpose of the operating instructions
These operating instructions contain all the information you need for commissioning and
using the device.
Preface
SIMATIC MV420 / SIMATIC MV440
4 Operating Instructions, 10/2015, C79000-G8976-C334-03
They are intended for persons installing the device mechanically, connecting it electrically,
assigning the parameters and commissioning it, as well as for service and maintenance
engineers.
Note
The operating instructions contain all the important information about the device
Read the operating instructions before starting to work with this device. The operating
instructions contain all the important information about
the device.
Noting and acting on this information:
•
Ensures the device functions correctly.
•
Saves you service costs.
New in this release
Editorial revision of the contents.
Integration of new functions compared to firmware V6.8, including
● PROFINET conformity according to Version 2.2, Conformance Class B
– The PROFINET functionality was updated to meet the requirements of the PROFINET
user organization (PNO).
● Usability: Support in setting up the reader
– Image sharpness indicator facilitates the focusing of the image even with screen set
up at a distance
● Step timeout in programs
– This function allows the distribution of the available cycle time to the program
processing steps. This allows the processing result to be optimized, especially in time-
critical applications
● Verification
– Web interface for the creation of verification reports according to ISO/IEC 29158
– Expansion of verification function according to ISO/IEC 29158
● Sample software
– Revised implementation of the archiving program (diagnostics) in C# is contained in
the product DVD
● Result output in the limit range
– As of firmware V7.0, each trigger generates a result even if the trigger time is during a
running image acquisition
● Expansion of character recognition/ OCR with Blob segmentation
– Display option for discarded segments
Preface
SIMATIC MV420 / SIMATIC MV440
Operating Instructions, 10/2015, C79000-G8976-C334-03 5
Additional expansions, including
● Output option for the actually required step and cycle processing times
● Monitoring of the digital trigger input (output via idle string)
● SNMP: Expansion of the functional description
● Incomplete read codes (such as they are possible with Interleave 2/5) can be reliably
filtered out
New as of firmware version V6.8
● Signed user interface
– The current version of user interface is signed by Siemens AG. The user interface
therefore satisfies the increased security requirements of the Java Runtime
Environment as of version 1.8. The signature ensures that the user interface is
actually from Siemens AG.
● Usability: Hiding the program template
– The program template can be hidden to simplify the representation.
● Start processing (SIMATIC MV440 only)
– The image acquisition time can be shortened by reducing the size of the acquired
image. This shortens the time interval between the start of the image acquisition and
the availability of the processing result
● Recognizing the object: Accelerated start of processing
– The waiting time until the start of the processing mode or until the completion of "Save
program" or "Update display" was significantly reduced for use of "Recognize object"
steps.
Replaced operating instructions
These operating instructions replace the operating instructions edition 07/2014.
Current operating instructions on the Internet
The operating instructions are part of the supplied DVD.
You will also find the latest version of these operating instructions on the Internet pages of
Siemens Industry Online Support under the following entry ID:
23379628 (https://support.industry.siemens.com/cs/us/en/ps/15147/man)
> Entry list > Entry type "Manuals"
Information
We point out that the contents of this product documentation shall not become a part of or
modify any prior or existing agreement, commitment or legal relationship. The Purchase
Agreement contains all obligations of Siemens AG and the complete and exclusive warranty
conditions. Any statements on the device versions described in the manual do not create
new warranties or modify the existing warranty.
Preface
SIMATIC MV420 / SIMATIC MV440
6 Operating Instructions, 10/2015, C79000-G8976-C334-03
The contents reflect the technical status at the time of printing. We reserve the right to make
technical changes in the course of further development.
Contacts worldwide
If you require further information or if unexpected problems occur, you can request the
necessary information from your contact. You will find details of your local contact on the
Internet.
Screenshots in the operating instructions
The screenshots shown in these operating instructions are based on the user interface
display of SIMATIC MV440. The user interface of SIMATIC MV420 is based largely on that
of SIMATIC MV440. The description points out functional deviations.
See also
Reader (Page 400)
History
This history establishes the correlation between the current documentation and the valid
firmware of the device.
The documentation of this edition is applicable for the following firmware:
Edition
Firmware
Remark
03/2009
V1.0.0
First edition (SIMATIC MV440 only)
12/2009 V2.1.0 Editorial revision of the contents.
04/2010 V3.0 Editorial revision of the contents.
Integration of new functions
• Optical character recognition (OCR) option for all SIMATIC MV440
readers
• User interface starts in seconds
• Advanced control commands for control via RS-232/TCP
Preface
SIMATIC MV420 / SIMATIC MV440
Operating Instructions, 10/2015, C79000-G8976-C334-03 7
Edition
Firmware
Remark
04/2011 V4.0 Editorial revision of the contents.
Adjustment for new hardware
• Ultra-high resolution for SIMATIC MV440
• Power over Ethernet (PoE) for SIMATIC MV440
• Veri-Genius license
• New ring lights for SIMATIC MV440
• IP67 protective lens barrel
Integration of new functions, including
• Support for Track&Trace applications
• Expanded image sequence evaluation
• Extended diagnostics logs
• Remote control of the digital outputs of the reader
• Configuration via remote client
• Verification according to the ISO/IEC 29158 standard
• Support for scanner portal applications
• User administration with expanded access protection
• License management
09/2012 V5.0 Editorial revision of the contents.
Adjustment for new hardware
• SIMATIC MV420 SR B/P BODY
• MV420 built-in IR ring light
• 16 mm MV420 lens kit
• 6 mm MV420 lens kit
• MV440 built-in ring light green
• MV420 built-in ring light red
• MV440 protective lens barrel metal PMMA
• Text-Genius Plus license
Integration of new functions, including
• High-performance optical character recognition with the Text-
Genius Plus license
• A modern, user-friendly user interface
• Multicode compatibility for scan mode and autotrigger
04/2013 V5.1 Editorial revision of the contents.
Integration of new functions, including
• DotCode decoder
• Results preview
• Open Web API interface
• TIA integration with Ident profile without communication module
• Control with FB 45 and Ident profile:
Initialization with program selection possible.
Preface
SIMATIC MV420 / SIMATIC MV440
8 Operating Instructions, 10/2015, C79000-G8976-C334-03
Edition
Firmware
Remark
11/2013 V6.0 Editorial revision of the contents.
Adjustment for new hardware
• SIMATIC MV440 built-in ring light infrared
•
External ring light red with 24 V power supply (MV400 LED ring light
metal red clear)
• External ring light infrared with 24 V power supply (MV400 LED ring
light metal IR clear)
Integration of new functions, including
• Object recognition with Pat-Genius license
• DMC verification according to ISO/IEC 29158
• Simplified handling for normalization and calibration (for verification)
• TCP server function for TCP/IP process interfacing
Preface
SIMATIC MV420 / SIMATIC MV440
Operating Instructions, 10/2015, C79000-G8976-C334-03 9
Edition
Firmware
Remark
07/2014 V6.5 Editorial revision of the contents.
Integration of new functions, including
• Expanded functions for image diagnostics via the user interface:
– Diagnostics images stored in the reader and images stored on
the PC can be used.
– In order to identify causes of errors, subsequent checking of im-
age acquisitions is enabled.
– Enables optimization of program settings in offline mode.
• DotCode decoder: This decoder has been further accelerated and
significantly increases the reading reliability.
• Uncalibrated verification according to ISO/IEC 29158 for all
SIMATIC MV440 readers and SIMATIC MV420 SR-P.
• Accelerated object recognition with Pat-Genius:
– New speed options accelerate object recognition.
– Acceleration of object recognition through use of the specifica-
tion in the match string.
• Accelerated character recognition with Text-Genius Plus:
– For plain text with high-contrast printing, good alignment, and
separation.
– Allows up to 1 500 reads/minute (twelve characters plain text).
– Allows more than 400 reads/minute for data matrix codes plus
four lines plain text OCV.
• Release of digital outputs for up to 100 mA: Observe the require-
ments in the technical specifications (Page 400).
• Other improvements and error corrections: See version information
for the firmware on the start page of the reader.
Preface
SIMATIC MV420 / SIMATIC MV440
10 Operating Instructions, 10/2015, C79000-G8976-C334-03
Edition
Firmware
Remark
10/2015 V7.0 Editorial revision of the contents.
Integration of new functions compared to firmware V6.8, including
• PROFINET conformity according to Version 2.2, Conformance
Class B
– The PROFINET functionality was updated to meet the require-
ments of the PROFINET user organization (PNO).
• Usability: Support in setting up the reader
– Image sharpness indicator facilitates the focusing of the image
even with screen set up at a distance
• Step timeout in programs
– This function allows the distribution of the available cycle time to
the program processing steps. This allows the processing result
to be optimized, especially in time-critical applications
• Verification
– Web interface for the creation of verification reports according to
ISO 29158
– Expansion of verification function according to ISO 29158
• Sample software
– Revised implementation of the archiving program (diagnostics)
in C# is contained on the product CD
• Result output in the limit range
– As of firmware V7.0, each trigger generates a result even if the
trigger time is during a running image acquisition
• Expansion of character recognition/ OCR with Blob segmentation
– Display option for discarded segments
Additional expansions, including
• Output option for the actually required step and cycle processing
times
• Monitoring of the digital trigger input (output via idle string)
• SNMP: Expansion of the functional description
• Incomplete read codes (such as they are possible with Interleave
2/5) can be reliably filtered out
New as of firmware version V6.8
• Signed user interface
– The current version of user interface is signed by Siemens AG.
The user interface therefore satisfies the increased security re-
quirements of the Java Runtime Environment as of version 1.8.
The signature ensures that the user interface is actually from
Siemens AG.
• Usability: Hiding the program template
– The program template can be hidden to simplify the representa-
tion.
Preface
SIMATIC MV420 / SIMATIC MV440
Operating Instructions, 10/2015, C79000-G8976-C334-03 11
Edition
Firmware
Remark
10/2015 V7.0 • Start processing (SIMATIC MV440 only)
– The image acquisition time can be shortened by reducing the
size of the acquired image. This shortens the time interval be-
tween the start of the image acquisition and the availability of
the processing result
• Recognizing the object: Accelerated start of processing
– The waiting time until the start of the processing mode or until
the completion of "Save program" or "Update display" was sig-
nificantly reduced for use of "Recognize object" steps.
Environmental protection
Devices described in this programming manual can be recycled owing to the low content of
noxious substances in their version. Please contact a certified waste disposal company for
eco-friendly recycling and to dispose of your old devices.
License conditions
Note
Open source software
Read the license conditions for open source software carefully before using the product.
You will find license conditions in the following document, which can be found on the
supplied data medium:
● OSS License Summary.pdf (> Documentation > Licenses & Copyrights)
Security information
Siemens provides products and solutions with industrial security functions that support the
secure operation of plants, solutions, machines, equipment and/or networks. They are
important components in a holistic industrial security concept. With this in mind, Siemens’
products and solutions undergo continuous development. Siemens recommends strongly
that you regularly check for product updates.
For the secure operation of Siemens products and solutions, it is necessary to take suitable
preventive action (e.g. cell protection concept) and integrate each component into a holistic,
state-of-the-art industrial security concept. Third-party products that may be in use should
also be considered. For more information about industrial security, visit
http://www.siemens.com/industrialsecurity.
To stay informed about product updates as they occur, sign up for a product-specific
newsletter. For more information, visit https://support.industry.siemens.com.
Preface
SIMATIC MV420 / SIMATIC MV440
12 Operating Instructions, 10/2015, C79000-G8976-C334-03
Note
Changing default passwords
For security reasons, make sure to change the
delivery-state passwords:
•
Use only secure passwords.
•
To make sure that you have access to user administration and the security settings in the
future, keep the passwords in a safe place.
Trademarks
The following and possibly other names not identified by the registered trademark sign ® are
registered trademarks of Siemens AG:
SIMATIC, SIMATIC MV, SIMATIC RF, SIMATIC NET
SIMATIC MV420 / SIMATIC MV440
Operating Instructions, 10/2015, C79000-G8976-C334-03 13
Table of contents
Preface ................................................................................................................................................... 3
1 Description ............................................................................................................................................ 19
1.1 Area of application .................................................................................................................. 19
1.2 Product characteristics............................................................................................................ 22
1.3 Design of the SIMATIC MV420 ............................................................................................... 26
1.4 Design of the SIMATIC MV440 ............................................................................................... 27
1.5 Structure of the nameplate ..................................................................................................... 28
1.6 System components ............................................................................................................... 29
1.7 System requirements .............................................................................................................. 30
1.8 Functional description ............................................................................................................. 32
2 Safety notices ....................................................................................................................................... 35
3 Image processing .................................................................................................................................. 39
3.1 Reading code (1D and 2D codes) .......................................................................................... 39
3.1.1 Area of application and sample applications .......................................................................... 39
3.1.1.1 Applications for two-dimensional codes.................................................................................. 40
3.1.1.2 Applications for one-dimensional codes ................................................................................. 42
3.1.2 Performance characteristics when reading codes .................................................................. 45
3.1.2.1 Demanding data matrix codes and VeriCodes with "ID-Genius" recognition ......................... 45
3.1.2.2 Good quality data matrix codes .............................................................................................. 47
3.1.2.3 QR codes ................................................................................................................................ 48
3.1.2.4 PDF417 codes ........................................................................................................................ 49
3.1.2.5 DotCodes ................................................................................................................................ 50
3.1.2.6 One-dimensional codes .......................................................................................................... 51
3.1.3 Reading multiple codes in the image ...................................................................................... 53
3.2 Code verification ..................................................................................................................... 55
3.2.1 Overview ................................................................................................................................. 55
3.2.2 Grading ................................................................................................................................... 57
3.2.3 Verification methods for different application scenarios ......................................................... 57
3.2.3.1 Verification of printed labels .................................................................................................... 57
3.2.3.2 Verification of direct part marks .............................................................................................. 58
3.2.3.3 Examples of defects in the marking quality ............................................................................ 60
3.2.3.4 Verification standards supported ............................................................................................ 61
3.2.4 Data matrix verification ........................................................................................................... 63
3.2.4.1 Siemens DPM ......................................................................................................................... 63
3.2.4.2 ISO/IEC 16022 ........................................................................................................................ 65
3.2.4.3 ISO/IEC 15415 ........................................................................................................................ 66
3.2.4.4 AS9132 Rev. A ....................................................................................................................... 68
3.2.4.5 ISO/IEC 29158 ........................................................................................................................ 70
3.2.4.6 Graphical support for analysis of verification errors ............................................................... 73
3.2.5 Barcode verification ................................................................................................................ 73
Table of contents
SIMATIC MV420 / SIMATIC MV440
14 Operating Instructions, 10/2015, C79000-G8976-C334-03
3.2.6 DotCode quality evaluation .................................................................................................... 75
3.2.7 Calibration and activating verification .................................................................................... 76
3.2.7.1 Calibrating the reader ............................................................................................................ 77
3.2.7.2 Basic requirements ................................................................................................................ 78
3.2.8 Formatted output of the verification ....................................................................................... 79
3.2.9 Verification result.................................................................................................................... 81
3.2.9.1 Standard report for Siemens DPM ......................................................................................... 82
3.2.9.2 Standard report for ISO/IEC 16022 "Standard" decoder ....................................................... 83
3.2.9.3 Standard report for ISO/IEC 16022 "ID-Genius" decoder...................................................... 83
3.2.9.4 Standard report for ISO/IEC 15415........................................................................................ 84
3.2.9.5 Standard report for AS9132, Rev A ....................................................................................... 85
3.2.9.6 Standard report for ISO/IEC 29158........................................................................................ 86
3.2.9.7 Standard report for ISO/IEC 15416........................................................................................ 86
3.2.9.8 Standard report for OCR and OCV ........................................................................................ 88
3.2.9.9 Standard report for Locator .................................................................................................... 88
3.2.9.10 Standard report for DotCode .................................................................................................. 88
3.3 Optical character recognition with "Text-Genius" and "Text-Genius Plus" (SIMATIC
MV440 only) ........................................................................................................................... 90
3.3.1 Text-Genius and Text-Genius Plus ........................................................................................ 90
3.3.2 Performance features of Text-Genius character recognition ................................................. 90
3.3.3 Performance features of Text-Genius Plus character recognition ......................................... 92
3.3.4 Supervised training ................................................................................................................ 93
3.3.5 Examples of plain text applications: ....................................................................................... 93
3.3.6 Quality characteristics in optical character recognition ........................................................ 100
3.4 Object recognition with Pat-Genius (SIMATIC MV440 only) ............................................... 101
3.4.1 The term "object recognition" ............................................................................................... 101
3.4.2 Performance features of Pat-Genius object recognition ...................................................... 102
3.4.3 Examples of object recognition tasks with Pat-Genius ........................................................ 104
3.4.4 Operation ............................................................................................................................. 109
3.4.5 Quality features during object detection .............................................................................. 110
3.5 Options for image acquisition and image processing .......................................................... 112
3.5.1 "Single trigger" image acquisition option ............................................................................. 113
3.5.2 "Auto trigger" image acquisition option ................................................................................ 114
3.5.3 "Scan" image acquisition option ........................................................................................... 116
3.5.4 Image acquisition in program sequence mode .................................................................... 118
3.5.5 Match options for Track&Trace tasks .................................................................................. 119
3.5.5.1 Trigger-synchronized matching (XMATCH command) ........................................................ 119
3.5.5.2 Simple match (MATCH mode and MATCH match) ............................................................. 122
4 Network and system interfacing ........................................................................................................... 125
4.1 Overview .............................................................................................................................. 125
4.2 System setup via PROFIBUS DP with ASM 456 and FB45 or Ident profile ........................ 126
4.3 System setup via PROFINET IO with RF180C, FB45 or Ident profile ................................. 128
4.4 System setup of the reader as PROFINET IO device and FB79 or Ident profile ................ 129
4.5 System setup via the RS-232 interface ............................................................................... 131
4.6 System setup via the Ethernet interface .............................................................................. 132
4.7 System setup for reader and RFID reader on a communication module ............................ 134
Table of contents
SIMATIC MV420 / SIMATIC MV440
Operating Instructions, 10/2015, C79000-G8976-C334-03 15
4.8 System setup for the reader with auto-trigger ...................................................................... 135
4.9 System setup reader and WinCC flexible ............................................................................. 136
4.10 System setup for the reader and HTML browser .................................................................. 137
4.11 System setup of reader and external light ............................................................................ 138
4.12 Other system extensions ...................................................................................................... 139
5 Installation .......................................................................................................................................... 141
5.1 Important notes on installation .............................................................................................. 141
5.2 Installing SIMATIC MV420/SIMATIC MV440........................................................................ 142
5.3 Installing the LED ring light for SIMATIC MV440 .................................................................. 146
6 Connecting ......................................................................................................................................... 149
6.1 Guidelines for installation free of electrical interference ....................................................... 149
6.2 Power over Ethernet (PoE) ................................................................................................... 150
6.3 Connecting the components ................................................................................................. 151
6.3.1 Wiring example ..................................................................................................................... 157
6.3.2 Operating the reader with external lighting ........................................................................... 159
7 Commissioning ................................................................................................................................... 165
7.1 Prerequisites ......................................................................................................................... 165
7.2 Establishing a connection to the reader and starting the user interface ............................... 167
7.3 Transferring optional licenses ............................................................................................... 177
7.3.1 Installing a license ................................................................................................................. 177
7.3.2 Removing a license ............................................................................................................... 187
7.4 Selecting connection alternatives ......................................................................................... 188
8 Operator control and monitoring .......................................................................................................... 191
8.1 Overview ............................................................................................................................... 191
8.2 User interface ........................................................................................................................ 192
8.2.1 Structure of the user interface .............................................................................................. 192
8.2.2 Adjustment - Adjust image .................................................................................................... 199
8.2.3 Connections .......................................................................................................................... 203
8.2.4 Programs .............................................................................................................................. 208
8.2.4.1 Graphic elements of the user interface ................................................................................. 210
8.2.4.2 Image acquisition step .......................................................................................................... 212
8.2.4.3 Read code (decoder step) .................................................................................................... 215
8.2.4.4 Read plain text (OCR step) ................................................................................................... 219
8.2.4.5 Recognize object (locator step) ............................................................................................ 223
8.2.4.6 Result step (overall result) .................................................................................................... 227
8.2.4.7 Save step .............................................................................................................................. 228
8.2.5 Libraries ................................................................................................................................ 229
8.2.5.1 Verification library ................................................................................................................. 229
8.2.5.2 Character font library ............................................................................................................ 233
8.2.5.3 Model library ......................................................................................................................... 238
8.2.6 Run........................................................................................................................................ 242
8.2.7 Options .................................................................................................................................. 245
Table of contents
SIMATIC MV420 / SIMATIC MV440
16 Operating Instructions, 10/2015, C79000-G8976-C334-03
8.2.8 Info ....................................................................................................................................... 251
8.2.9 Maintain ................................................................................................................................ 257
8.2.10 Stop ...................................................................................................................................... 260
8.3 User-defined user interface .................................................................................................. 262
8.3.1 Example of a user-defined user interface ............................................................................ 262
8.4 Monitoring via HTML pages ................................................................................................. 266
8.5 Use of saved images ........................................................................................................... 276
8.5.1 Use in the "Edit programs" task ........................................................................................... 276
8.5.2 Use for processing in trial mode .......................................................................................... 277
9 Process interfacing via an automation system (PLC, PC) ..................................................................... 279
9.1 Integration via Onboard PROFINET IO ............................................................................... 280
9.1.1 Configuration for using the Ident profile ............................................................................... 283
9.1.2 Configuration for using the FB 79 ........................................................................................ 284
9.1.3 Concept of device replacement ........................................................................................... 285
9.2 Integration via communication module (ASM) ..................................................................... 286
9.3 Control with FB 45 and Ident profile .................................................................................... 287
9.3.1 Setting parameters of FB45 ................................................................................................. 287
9.3.2 Configuring the Ident profile (RFID standard profile) ........................................................... 289
9.3.3 Control with MV commands via FB 45 or Ident profile......................................................... 291
9.3.3.1 Status displays of the MV reader ......................................................................................... 291
9.3.3.2 Initialization .......................................................................................................................... 292
9.3.3.3 WRITE commands/MV command interface ......................................................................... 293
9.3.3.4 READ commands................................................................................................................. 305
9.3.3.5 Result evaluation of a command .......................................................................................... 310
9.3.3.6 Preconditions for the commands ......................................................................................... 311
9.3.3.7 Group errors ......................................................................................................................... 312
9.4 Control with FB79................................................................................................................. 314
9.4.1 Assignment of the interfaces relevant to PROFINET IO ..................................................... 315
9.4.2 Sample program for data exchange if code length ≤ 27 bytes ............................................ 319
9.4.3 Programming data fragmentation ........................................................................................ 321
9.4.4 Function block 79 "VS130-2_CONTROL" ............................................................................ 322
9.4.4.1 Error information of FB79 ..................................................................................................... 332
9.5 Controlling the I/O interface "DI/DO" .................................................................................... 334
9.5.1 Control signals ..................................................................................................................... 334
9.5.2 Selecting modes................................................................................................................... 335
9.6 Control via TCP/IP and RS-232 ........................................................................................... 340
9.6.1 Overview .............................................................................................................................. 340
9.6.2 Trigger .................................................................................................................................. 341
9.6.3 Write match string ................................................................................................................ 341
9.6.4 Set DISA bit .......................................................................................................................... 343
9.6.5 Reset DISA bit...................................................................................................................... 343
9.6.6 Query status ......................................................................................................................... 344
9.6.7 Select program number ....................................................................................................... 345
9.6.8 Save program with internal trigger ....................................................................................... 346
9.6.9 Save program with external trigger ...................................................................................... 347
9.6.10 Reset command ................................................................................................................... 348
9.6.11 Writing a trigger-synchronized match string (XMATCH) ...................................................... 349
Table of contents
SIMATIC MV420 / SIMATIC MV440
Operating Instructions, 10/2015, C79000-G8976-C334-03 17
9.6.12 XMATCH user data (without header) .................................................................................... 350
9.6.13 Set digital out ........................................................................................................................ 354
9.7 Scanner portal application .................................................................................................... 356
9.7.1 Configuration ......................................................................................................................... 357
9.7.2 Output of the synchronized read result by the master reader .............................................. 361
9.8 Remote client ........................................................................................................................ 361
9.8.1 XML backup and XML restore .............................................................................................. 361
9.8.1.1 XML backup .......................................................................................................................... 362
9.8.1.2 XML restore .......................................................................................................................... 364
9.9 SNMP .................................................................................................................................... 368
9.10 Sample programs .................................................................................................................. 369
9.10.1 Introduction ........................................................................................................................... 369
9.10.2 Interfacing the reader with a SIMATIC controller using FB79 .............................................. 369
9.10.3 Archiving of images and diagnostic information on a PC ..................................................... 371
10 Alarm, fault and system messages ...................................................................................................... 375
10.1 Introduction ........................................................................................................................... 375
10.2 Reporting diagnostics information ........................................................................................ 375
10.2.1 Error messages ..................................................................................................................... 376
10.2.2 Warnings and notes .............................................................................................................. 382
10.2.3 Read results .......................................................................................................................... 384
10.2.4 Read and verification error messages .................................................................................. 384
10.2.5 Filter error messages ............................................................................................................ 388
10.2.6 Error messages when writing a trigger-synchronized match string (XMATCH) ................... 389
10.3 Diagnostics by evaluating the POWER, ETHERNET, STATE/SF LEDs .............................. 390
10.4 I/O device diagnostics ........................................................................................................... 391
10.4.1 Introduction ........................................................................................................................... 391
10.4.2 Reading out diagnostics information with S7 ........................................................................ 391
10.4.3 Diagnostics with PROFINET IO ............................................................................................ 392
11 Service and maintenance .................................................................................................................... 395
11.1 Maintenance and repair ........................................................................................................ 395
12 Technical specifications ...................................................................................................................... 397
12.1 General technical specifications ........................................................................................... 397
12.2 Reader .................................................................................................................................. 400
12.3 Built-in ring light (SIMATIC MV440) ...................................................................................... 403
12.4 External lighting unit.............................................................................................................. 403
12.5 Pin assignment of the interfaces ........................................................................................... 405
13 Dimension drawings ............................................................................................................................ 407
14 Components of the product/spares/accessories .................................................................................. 415
14.1 Readers ................................................................................................................................ 416
14.2 Accessories ........................................................................................................................... 418
14.2.1 SIMATIC MV420 / SIMATIC MV440 ..................................................................................... 418
14.2.1.1 Further accessories .............................................................................................................. 418
Table of contents
SIMATIC MV420 / SIMATIC MV440
18 Operating Instructions, 10/2015, C79000-G8976-C334-03
14.2.1.2 External lighting units ........................................................................................................... 418
14.2.1.3 Documentation for SIMATIC MV420 and SIMATIC MV440 ................................................ 420
14.2.2 SIMATIC MV420 .................................................................................................................. 421
14.2.2.1 Fittings for mounting ............................................................................................................ 421
14.2.2.2 Reader lens .......................................................................................................................... 421
14.2.2.3 Protective tube ..................................................................................................................... 423
14.2.2.4 Built-in ring light.................................................................................................................... 423
14.2.2.5 Cables .................................................................................................................................. 424
14.2.3 SIMATIC MV440 .................................................................................................................. 427
14.2.3.1 Fittings for mounting ............................................................................................................ 427
14.2.3.2 Reader lens .......................................................................................................................... 428
14.2.3.3 Protective lens barrel ........................................................................................................... 433
14.2.3.4 Built-in ring light.................................................................................................................... 435
14.2.3.5 Licenses ............................................................................................................................... 435
14.2.3.6 Calibration card .................................................................................................................... 436
14.2.3.7 PoE switch ........................................................................................................................... 437
14.2.3.8 Cables .................................................................................................................................. 437
A Appendix ............................................................................................................................................. 441
A.1 Service and Support ............................................................................................................ 441
A.2 Directives and declarations .................................................................................................. 442
B ESD guidelines .................................................................................................................................... 445
C List of abbreviations and acronyms ...................................................................................................... 447
Glossary .............................................................................................................................................. 451
Index ................................................................................................................................................... 461
SIMATIC MV420 / SIMATIC MV440
Operating Instructions, 10/2015, C79000-G8976-C334-03 19
Description
1
1.1
Area of application
The SIMATIC MV400 family of readers are optical code readers designed specifically for the
recognition and processing of numerous machine-readable codes and plain text in industrial
production.
The readers provide a wide range of options for identification:
● Reading numerous machine-readable 1D and 2D codes
● Reading plain text
● Model-based object recognition/classification
● A combination of the options listed above
Over and above this, the readers provide important functions for:
● Verification of the marking quality of machine-readable codes (according to standards)
● "OK"/"N_OK" evaluation based on numerous criteria.
● Position and orientation recognition, for example for "pick & place" tasks.
In the SIMATIC MV400 device family, particular emphasis was placed on:
● Ruggedness
● Reliability
● Ease of operation
This applies not only to the mechanical properties but also to the high-quality image
processing functions of all devices in the SIMATIC MV400 product family.
Key functions of the reader
● Reading machine-readable markings
The list of readable codes includes all common matrix and barcodes that can usually be
detected reliably regardless of the print technique or the carrier medium used.
● Reading plain text
For reading plain text, font libraries are stored for all commonly found fonts and these
already cover many important applications. For special fonts and applications, user-
defined character libraries can also be created and adapted optimally to the particular
application.
Description
1.1 Area of application
SIMATIC MV420 / SIMATIC MV440
20 Operating Instructions, 10/2015, C79000-G8976-C334-03
● Model-based object recognition
With the integrated object recognition, objects can be recognized, distinguished and
checked. In addition to this, extremely precise position and orientation recognition is
possible.
Objects can be stored in so-called model libraries and are then available for a variety of
recognition and checking tasks.
● Verification of the marking quality
One important function for quality control in production or even between different
production units is ensuring the readability of machine-readable codes. Uniform
standards worldwide allow comparisons to be made. SIMATIC MV400 code readers
provide the required verification reports for quality assurance.
● "OK"/"N_OK" evaluation
Whether for checking quality criteria, comparison criteria, position or angle of rotation
deviation with the help of SIMATIC MV400, actuators can be controlled directly to take
workpieces that do not match the requirements out of the production process.
● Position and orientation recognition
The model-based object recognition Pat-Genius returns extremely precise position and
angle information relating to the detected object position.
Available versions
SIMATIC MV420
● Available preassembled or ready to connect up with integrated lens and lighting.
● Class of protection IP67: Protected against environmental influence.
● Can be flexibly configured since it is available in parts (base unit, ring light, lens).
SIMATIC MV440
● Can be supplied with particularly powerful integrated lighting due to its own power output
stage.
● The device can be adjusted for nearly all read distances and code sizes with a C/CS
mount lens. IP67 degree of protection is also possible for this version with the protective
lens barrel.
● SIMATIC MV440 is also available in 3 different resolutions.
Industrial applications
Due to their ruggedness and high degree of protection, the readers are suitable for industrial
applications in which optical identification tasks are necessary. This applies equally to
production processes and logistics processes.
Description
1.1 Area of application
SIMATIC MV420 / SIMATIC MV440
Operating Instructions, 10/2015, C79000-G8976-C334-03 21
Communication Interfaces
The readers have all the common communications interfaces of industrial sensors and can
therefore be connected to a wide variety of systems. Through the communications module
interface, they can be seamlessly combined with the communications modules (ASM/CM) of
the RFID system, for example, via PROFIBUS.
Simple operation and commissioning
Despite the wide range of possible applications, a main feature of the readers is their ease of
operation and commissioning. For most applications, the parameters are set automatically.
If, however, readjustment becomes necessary, the parameters can be assigned using the
integrated Web server and an Internet browser without prior software installation.
As of release 04/2011, all SIMATIC MV440 readers can also be suppled by
Power over Ethernet (PoE) which further simplifies installation.
Description
1.2 Product characteristics
SIMATIC MV420 / SIMATIC MV440
22 Operating Instructions, 10/2015, C79000-G8976-C334-03
1.2
Product characteristics
The reader is a compact camera system with an integrated processing unit for industrial
applications with the following product characteristics.
Reading code
● For codes with maximum quality, the read reliability for data matrix code is 99.999 %
(compare quality grading).
● Reading speed:
– Max. of 80 reads per second (Rps) in SIMATIC MV440 SR
– Max. of 70 Rps (SIMATIC MV420 SR-P)
● SIMATIC MV440 only: Variable read distance thanks to exchangeable lenses (typically:
100 mm to 3000 mm)
● Object speed up to 10 m/s
● Code sizes (example: DMC) from 1 mm2 to 200 mm2
● Autotrigger and scan mode (not available for SIMATIC MV420 SR-B)
● Up to 15 parameter sets and code reading settings can be stored and selected (up to 5
with SIMATIC MV420 SR-B).
● Up to 150 codes can be read per image acquisition (SIMATIC MV440 UR)
Reading plain text
With Text-Genius license
High-performance optical character recognition (OCR) is available for all SIMATIC MV440
readers as of firmware version V3.0. The license can be ordered under the article number
6GF3400-0SL01.
● Flexible reading of numerous fonts without time-consuming training
● Fast and reliable reading (up to 1 000 reads per minute)
● Plain text and up to 50 machine codes (SIMATIC MV440 UR: 150) read simultaneously
● Automatic text localization
● Automatic line detection (up to 12 x 15 lines)
● Flexible reading of character heights of between 15 and 220 pixels
● Up to 12 image regions can be read with independent settings.
● Reading of mirrored, rotated and inverted text
● Numerous filter and comparison functions
Description
1.2 Product characteristics
SIMATIC MV420 / SIMATIC MV440
Operating Instructions, 10/2015, C79000-G8976-C334-03 23
With Text-Genius Plus license
Read tasks and functions above and beyond reading plain text with Text-Genius. The license
can be ordered under the article number 6GF3400-1SL01. Suitable for all
SIMATIC-MV440-readers as of firmware V5.0
● Can be adapted to customer-specific fonts
● Optimizes distinction of ambiguous characters by saving character styles.
Object detection
With Pat-Genius license
Suitable for all SIMATIC-MV440-readers as of firmware V6.0.
● Model-based object recognition
● Precise position and rotation recognition
● Resilient to fluctuations in object sizes (scaling)
● Resilient to masking, contamination and mirroring
● Reliable distinction of objects even when the objects are very similar
● Several objects of the same or different types can be recognized in one step
● OCR with any shape of symbol
● Checks for the completeness of workpieces
● Checks for the tolerance of the position and angle of rotation
● Position specification for OCR with Text-Genius and Text-Genius Plus
Code verification
Without Veri-Genius license
Without Veri-Genius license, the following methods are possible for determining the code
quality for all SIMATIC-MV440 readers and for SIMATIC MV420 SR-P:
● Code verification according to ISO/IEC 16022:2000 AIM specification
● Uncalibrated verification according to ISO/IEC 29158 (firmware version V6.5 or higher)
With Veri-Genius license
With Veri-Genius license (article number 6GF3400-0SL02, firmware version 4.0 or higher),
the following verification methods are possible for all SIMATIC-MV440 readers:
● ISO/IEC 15415:2004
● AS9132 Rev A, 2005 – previously IAQG
● ISO/IEC 29158:2011
● ISO/IEC 15416:2000 - ANSI X3.182-1990
● Siemens DPM
Description
1.2 Product characteristics
SIMATIC MV420 / SIMATIC MV440
24 Operating Instructions, 10/2015, C79000-G8976-C334-03
Integrated communications interfaces
● Ethernet 10/100 Mbps for TCP/IP and PROFINET IO
● 1 trigger input and 1 flash output
– Response time of the trigger input: 50-70 us
– Jitter (fluctuation of response time): max. 40 ns
Incoming triggers during an already running image acquisition do not interrupt it. Triggers
that are incoming during an image acquisition are processed as NOK processing
procedures and included in the processing statistics count (new as of V7.0).
● SIMATIC MV420
– MOBY-ASM or RS-232 with TxD and RxD
– 2 customizable digital outputs
● SIMATIC MV440
– RFID communications module interface
– RS-232 with TXD and RXD
– 4 cutomizable digital I/Os
Advanced communication via MOBY-ASM
● With ASM 456 communications module for PROFIBUS DP/V1
● With RF180C communications module for PROFINET
● With other MOBY communications modules
Power over Ethernet
For all SIMATIC-MV440-readers as of version 04/2011.
Robust construction, suitable for industry
Class of protection IP67
Description
1.2 Product characteristics
SIMATIC MV420 / SIMATIC MV440
Operating Instructions, 10/2015, C79000-G8976-C334-03 25
Optical system
● SIMATIC MV420
– Integrated continuously adjustable optic for different read distances
– HD lens with 16 mm field of vision now available in addition to the 6 mm standard lens
for extremely small codes and large read distances.
● SIMATIC MV440
– Lens can be selected - C/CS-mount lenses
Lighting
● With internal lamp
● With external lamp
User interface
● Via integrated Web server, no installation needed
● Extensive operator control and monitoring functions, even in processing mode
● Versatile HTML pages for monitoring the reader, for example in WinCC flexible.
● Extensive operator control and monitoring functions, even in processing mode
● Wide-ranging diagnostics and logging functions:
– Error image memory
– Event logging
● Firmware update
● System backup and restoration
● Option of user-defined, integrated user interfaces
Description
1.3 Design of the SIMATIC MV420
SIMATIC MV420 / SIMATIC MV440
26 Operating Instructions, 10/2015, C79000-G8976-C334-03
1.3
Design of the SIMATIC MV420
The figure below provides an overview of the SIMATIC-MV420-reader.
①
Rotatable protective lens barrel
⑤
LED displays for operating mode
②
Nameplate
⑥
Housing SIMATIC MV420
③
Ethernet socket
⑦
Internal lamp
④
Combined cable socket for the power
supply, I/O connectors and RS-
232/MOBY-ASM
Figure 1-1 Design of the SIMATIC MV420
Description
1.4 Design of the SIMATIC MV440
SIMATIC MV420 / SIMATIC MV440
Operating Instructions, 10/2015, C79000-G8976-C334-03 27
1.4
Design of the SIMATIC MV440
The figure below provides an overview of the SIMATIC MV440 reader.
①
LED display for operating mode
⑤
ASM female connector
②
Protective lens barrel ∅ 65
⑥
Combined cable socket for the power sup-
ply, I/O connectors and RS-232
③
Nameplate
⑦
Housing SIMATIC MV440
④
Ethernet connection socket (PoE) M12, 4-
pin, D-coded
⑧
Internal lamp
Figure 1-2 Design of the SIMATIC MV440
Description
1.5 Structure of the nameplate
SIMATIC MV420 / SIMATIC MV440
28 Operating Instructions, 10/2015, C79000-G8976-C334-03
1.5
Structure of the nameplate
The nameplate is located on the housing of the reader and shows the article number and
other important product information.
Nameplate right
Nameplate left
①
Manufacturer
⑦
Data matrix code
②
Product designation
⑧
Product designation with article number
and manufacturer code/serial number
③
Warning symbol
⑨
IP rating
④
C-Tick mark
⑩
MAC address, 12-character
⑤
CE mark
⑪
Product version of the device
⑥
KC symbol
Figure 1-3 Example of the SIMATIC MV440 nameplate
Note
A second MAC address is also reserved when the device supplied. This MAC address is the
MAC address on the nameplate + 1
.
Description
1.6 System components
SIMATIC MV420 / SIMATIC MV440
Operating Instructions, 10/2015, C79000-G8976-C334-03 29
1.6
System components
The figure below shows a typical system design with a SIMATIC-MV440-reader.
Figure 1-4 Example of a typical system configuration with conveyor system (illustration showing
SIMATIC MV440)
Note
While the SIMATIC
MV440 has a separate ASM socket (middle socket in the figure), the
ASM interface functio
n on the SIMATIC MV420 is integrated in the power IO RS-232 socket.
Description
1.7 System requirements
SIMATIC MV420 / SIMATIC MV440
30 Operating Instructions, 10/2015, C79000-G8976-C334-03
1.7
System requirements
Reader
To equip an application with the SIMATIC MV420 and SIMATIC MV440 readers, you require
the following hardware components:
● SIMATIC MV420 or SIMATIC MV440 basic unit
● Lens suitable for the code size and read distance (only for SIMATIC MV440)
● LED ring light, integrated in the protective barrel or external such as lighting unit for the
SIMATIC Vision Sensors (SIMATIC MV440 only)
● Depending on the application (SIMATIC MV440 only):
– Veri-Genius license for code verification
– Text-Genius or Text-Genius Plus license for reading plain text
– Pat-Genius license for object recognition tasks
● Power supply 24 V DC, 2 A (tolerance: 19.2 … 28.8 V)
– As an alternative over I/O cable or ASM cable
– Alternatively over Power Over Ethernet (SIMATIC MV440 and SIMATIC Body variants
only)
● Alternative communications connection over:
– RS-232 integrated in the I/O cable
– ASM cable
– Ethernet cable
Note
If you use a reader in conjunction with a MOBY communications module, the power
supply is via the ASM interface.
For SIMATIC
MV420, you need a special ASM cable, article no. 6GT3420-0AC00-
2CB0. See also section
"Cables" (Page 418).
Description
1.7 System requirements
SIMATIC MV420 / SIMATIC MV440
Operating Instructions, 10/2015, C79000-G8976-C334-03 31
PC/programming device
Apart from the components for operating the reader, you also require a PC/programming
device (PG) to commission the device:
● PC / PG with at least the following configuration:
– Ethernet interface with at least 100 Mbps
● Software:
– Operating system Microsoft Windows XP Professional SP1 or higher
– Internet Explorer V8.0, SP1 or higher (32-bit version).
– Java Runtime Environment, see java homepage (http://www.java.com).
Recommended: Java Runtime Environment 1.7.x.
The system requirements of SIMATIC-MV400-readers for communication partners in the
process depend on the selected communication connection described in Network and
system interfacing (Page 125).
Description
1.8 Functional description
SIMATIC MV420 / SIMATIC MV440
32 Operating Instructions, 10/2015, C79000-G8976-C334-03
1.8
Functional description
Image acquisition
The readers detect the object features required for the task using digital image acquisition.
Following image acquisition, the image is analyzed by a powerful digital signal processor.
Depending on the application, multilevel complex algorithms are used during the analysis:
● To find and decode the codes contained in the image.
● To verify codes.
● To find and read the plain text in the image.
● To perform object recognition.
The results of the evaluation are transferred to an automation system connected via the
communications interfaces.
When using the reader, the user is supported by numerous feedback messages:
● Live image display
● Autodetection for code type recognition
● Result and quality preview
● Display of diagnostics images
● Warning and error messages
● 6-language online help on the reader
User interface
The user interface is based on Web server technology. This means that only a computer with
an Internet browser connected via Ethernet is necessary. The reader is then called using its
IP address. The display of the user interface appears in the display window of the Internet
browser. Display via Ethernet allows convenient setting and control of all parameters of the
reader. Operator control of the readers is supported by context-sensitive online help.
If an automatic setting does not produce an ideal result due to special conditions, you can
readjust individual parameters of the reader manually using the user interface. You can store
15 different settings on the reader.
Depending on the task, up to 12 processing steps can be set as a sequence in one program.
The following processing steps are available:
● Decoder step for reading 1D/2D codes
● OCR step for reading plain text
● Locator step for object recognition tasks
You can store up to 15 different programs on the reader.
You must make the settings for communication with other devices on the user interface.
Description
1.8 Functional description
SIMATIC MV420 / SIMATIC MV440
Operating Instructions, 10/2015, C79000-G8976-C334-03 33
Processing
The actual processing is triggered by different events.
● In the simplest situation, the code reader generates the trigger event itself. The readers
have an auto trigger function for this purpose.
● Depending on the application, it may be advisable to provide the trigger event via the I/O
cable. In this case, the code reader obtains the signal, for example, from a light barrier.
The trigger signal immediately triggers image acquisition followed by evaluation. The
result of the evaluation is then transferred to the higher-level control system through the
selected communications connection. Once the evaluation result has been transferred,
reading can be started again.
User management and access protection
The functions of the reader can be protected from unauthorized access and manipulation.
The access rights can be assigned to various personified users in the form of user roles.
Configuration via remote client
The configuration of the reader can be backed up and restored automatically, for example,
when there is a shift change, using a connected PC. This means the validation of your
production plant can be restored at the press of a button.
Track&Trace support
With comprehensive match options and remote commands, badly marked parts can be
reliably ejected with the aid of the integrated digital outputs. This also applies to applications
with high parts rates and speeds.
Scanner portal support
If the ultra-high resolution of the SIMATIC MV440 UR reader means that the large field of
view is not adequate for covering a transport path in a given application, multiple
SIMATIC-MV400-readers can be configured as the portal. The readers synchronize with
each other. The master reader transfers the read result of the portal to the higher-level
controller.
Diagnostics functions
The reader has a wide range of diagnostics functions. If incorrect readings are made, the
diagnostics functions can be used to find reasons for the errors based on the recorded
images. This is, for example, necessary when problems occurred in the prior marking
process.
Description
1.8 Functional description
SIMATIC MV420 / SIMATIC MV440
34 Operating Instructions, 10/2015, C79000-G8976-C334-03
SIMATIC MV420 / SIMATIC MV440
Operating Instructions, 10/2015, C79000-G8976-C334-03 35
Safety notices
2
This device conforms to the pertinent safety regulations according to IEC, VDE and EN. If
you have questions about whether it is permissible to install the device in the planned
environment, please contact your service representative.
Qualified personnel
Startup and operation of the device/system in question must only be performed using this
documentation. Commissioning and operation of a device/system may only be performed by
qualified personnel. Qualified personnel as referred to in the safety guidelines in this
documentation are those who are authorized to start up, earth and label units, systems and
circuits in accordance with the relevant safety standards.
Proper use
The unit may be used only for the applications described in the catalog or the technical
description, and only in combination with the equipment, components and devices of other
manufacturers where recommended or permitted by Siemens. This product can only function
correctly and safely if it is transported, stored, set up, and installed correctly, and operated
and maintained as recommended.
Repairs
Repairs to the device may only be performed by authorized specialists.
WARNING
Risk of injury/material damage
Unauthorized opening or improperly performed repairs can cause considerable damage to
property or danger to users.
Safety notices
SIMATIC MV420 / SIMATIC MV440
36 Operating Instructions, 10/2015, C79000-G8976-C334-03
System expansions
Install only system expansions that are intended for this device. Installing other expansions
can damage the system or violate the safety provisions and regulations for radio interference
suppression. You can obtain information on system expansions suitable for installation from
the technical customer service or from the sales office responsible for your area.
NOTICE
Invalidation of the warranty
Any damage to the device caused by installing or replacing system expansion products will
void the warranty.
NOTICE
Voltage can destroy electrostatic-sensitive modules
The device contains modules that are sensitive to electrostatic discharge. Modules that are
sensitive to electrostatic discharge can be destroyed by voltages well below those that can
be perceived by human beings. Such voltages occur if you touch a component or electrical
connectors of a module without first discharging the static from your body. The damage
caused by overvoltage on a module cannot normally be detected immediately and only
becomes apparent after a longer period of operation.
Measures for protecting against discharge of static electricity:
• Before working with modules, make sure that you discharge static from your body, for
example by touching a grounded object.
• The devices and tools used must also be free of static charges.
• Disconnect the power supply.
• Pick up the modules only on their edges and do not touch any pins or printed
conductors.
Connecting the 24 V DC power supply
WARNING
The device should only be connected to a 24 V DC power supply which satisfies the
requirements of safe extra low voltage (SELV).
When the device is operated on a wall, in an open rack or other similar locations, an NEC
Class 2 current source is required for the compliance of the UL requirements (according to
UL 60950-1). In all other cases (according to IEC/EN/DlN EN 60950-1), a current source
with limited power (LPS = Limited Power Source) is required.
24 V DC supply voltage (19.2 to 28.8 V)
The generation of the 24 V DC supply voltage by the line-side power supply must be
implemented as functional extra-low voltage with safe electrical isolation according
(floating) to IEC 80364-4-41, or as SELV to IEC/EN/DlN EN 60950-1 and LPS/NEC class 2.
Safety notices
SIMATIC MV420 / SIMATIC MV440
Operating Instructions, 10/2015, C79000-G8976-C334-03 37
Overvoltage protection
NOTICE
Protection of the external power supply
If the reader is supplied via extensive supply lines or networks, interference by strong
electromagnetic pulses on the supply lines is possible, e.g. from lightning or the switching
of large loads.
The connection of the external power supply is not protected against strong
electromagnetic pulses. An external overvoltage protection module is required for this
purpose. The requirements according to EN 61000-4-5, Surge test on power supply lines,
are only met when a suitable protective element is used. A suitable device would be, for
example, the Dehn Blitzductor BVT AVD 24, article number 918 422, or a comparable
protective element.
Manufacturer:
DEHN+SÖHNE GmbH+Co.KG Hans Dehn Str.1 Postfach 1640 D-92306 Neumarkt,
Germany
Use in an area of plants with high-energy radiation
NOTICE
Protection of the image sensor from damaging radiation
When the SIMATIC MV440 reader is used in an environment of plants with high-energy
radiation, for example, laser light or arcs, the image sensor of the reader must be protected
from damaging radiation.
The image sensor is protected by means of suitable daylight filters:
• Radiation outside the visible light spectrum (IR and UV radiation) is filtered out.
• Visible light can pass without problem.
Safety notices
SIMATIC MV420 / SIMATIC MV440
38 Operating Instructions, 10/2015, C79000-G8976-C334-03
SIMATIC MV420 / SIMATIC MV440
Operating Instructions, 10/2015, C79000-G8976-C334-03 39
Image processing
3
3.1
Reading code (1D and 2D codes)
3.1.1
Area of application and sample applications
The reader reads the types of code listed below.
Two-dimensional codes
● DMC
● PDF417
● QR
● DotCode
● VeriCode (requires additional license)
One-dimensional codes
● Codabar
● Code 32
● Code 39 (without checksum)
● Code 39+CS (with checksum)
● Code 93
● Code 128
● EAN 8
● EAN 13
● GS1 Databar Expanded
● GS1 Databar Limited
● GS1 Databar Omnidirectional
● GS1 Databar Stacked
● Int. 2/5 (without checksum)
● Int. 2/5+CS (with checksum)
● Pharmacode
● Postnet
Image processing
3.1 Reading code (1D and 2D codes)
SIMATIC MV420 / SIMATIC MV440
40 Operating Instructions, 10/2015, C79000-G8976-C334-03
● UPC-A
● UPC-E
3.1.1.1
Applications for two-dimensional codes
Below, you will find several examples of data matrix codes, QR codes, PDF417 codes,
VeriCodes and DotCodes:
Printed code
Laser code (plastic surface)
Laser code (pcb)
Code created with an ink jet printer.
Punched code
Data Matrix ECC080
Image processing
3.1 Reading code (1D and 2D codes)
SIMATIC MV420 / SIMATIC MV440
Operating Instructions, 10/2015, C79000-G8976-C334-03 41
Data Matrix ECC100
Data Matrix ECC140
Printed QR code
Printed PDF417 code
VeriCode
DotCodes
Image processing
3.1 Reading code (1D and 2D codes)
SIMATIC MV420 / SIMATIC MV440
42 Operating Instructions, 10/2015, C79000-G8976-C334-03
3.1.1.2
Applications for one-dimensional codes
Codabar
Code 32
Code 39
Code 93
Code 128
EAN 8
Image processing
3.1 Reading code (1D and 2D codes)
SIMATIC MV420 / SIMATIC MV440
Operating Instructions, 10/2015, C79000-G8976-C334-03 43
EAN 13
Interleaved 2/5
GS1 Databar Expanded
GS1 Databar Limited
GS1 Databar Omnidirectional
GS1 Databar Stacked
Image processing
3.1 Reading code (1D and 2D codes)
SIMATIC MV420 / SIMATIC MV440
44 Operating Instructions, 10/2015, C79000-G8976-C334-03
Postnet
Pharmacode
UPC A
UPC E
Image processing
3.1 Reading code (1D and 2D codes)
SIMATIC MV420 / SIMATIC MV440
Operating Instructions, 10/2015, C79000-G8976-C334-03 45
3.1.2
Performance characteristics when reading codes
3.1.2.1
Demanding data matrix codes and VeriCodes with "ID-Genius" recognition
Note
ID-Genius not available for SIMATIC-MV420 SR-B-readers
The ID
-Genius recognition method is not available for SIMATIC-MV420 SR-B-readers.
Note
VeriCode support only with activated VeriCode® license
VeriCode is only supported by readers with an activated VeriCode® license. The license can
be activated by entering a license key in the user interface.
Note
Changing to time-saving image acquisition at half resolution
If the cells ar
e larger than 10 pixels, change to time-saving image acquisition at half
resolution. This change is also useful at high object speeds.
The self-adaptive recognition technique of the reader "ID-Genius" allows reliable and robust
reading of the most difficult codes. The most reliable recognition is reached by the reader
when you make adequate time available for the device to adapt itself by setting a high cycle
time limit.
Range of application
● Any alignment and position of the code in the image.
● The code can be printed both dark on a light background and light on a dark background.
● Reading codes even when cells overlap or are largely isolated.
● Reading of mirror-inverted codes.
● Tolerance of distortion due, for example, to inclined installation of the image sensor
(viewing angle down to a lower limit of approximately 40 degrees to the printed surface).
● Resistant to similar-looking foreign objects in the area of the code.
● Resistant to interference patterns (grooves, granularity) in the area of the code
● Wide tolerance of contrast fluctuations.
● Wide range of imaging sizes from 5 to 35 pixels per cell.
● Light shadows or shiny areas in cells are tolerated. The polarity of the cells compared
with the background must not, however, become inverted within a code.
● The ratio of the distance to the closest neighbor and the diameter of any cell can be
between 2 and 0.8.
Image processing
3.1 Reading code (1D and 2D codes)
SIMATIC MV420 / SIMATIC MV440
46 Operating Instructions, 10/2015, C79000-G8976-C334-03
● Although code dots must be printed according to a regular square grid pattern, individual
points can be displaced from their ideal position by up to 1/3 of the grid unit. Even slight
parallelogram-shaped distortions during printing are tolerated.
● With large-image but small-dimensioned codes, slight curves in the printed material
surface are tolerated. With larger dimension codes (for example, more than 14 x 14) or a
strongly inclined sensor axis, curves are not allowed.
● Large tolerance of background disturbances that cannot be described quantitatively
● Large tolerance of poor contrast conditions
● The reader reads codes with a maximum code dimension of 72 x 72 cells.
Image processing
3.1 Reading code (1D and 2D codes)
SIMATIC MV420 / SIMATIC MV440
Operating Instructions, 10/2015, C79000-G8976-C334-03 47
3.1.2.2
Good quality data matrix codes
Note
Changing to time-saving image acquisition at half resolution
If the cells are larger than 10 pixels, change to time
-saving image acquisition at half
resolution. This change is also useful at high object
speeds.
The "standard" recognition processes of the reader allow reliable and fast reading of printed
data matrix codes of good quality.
Range of application
● In this mode, the read rates achieved are higher than those when reading complex codes.
● The range of image sizes is from 1.5 to 35 pixels per cell. The range is static.
● The cells do not overlap or only slightly, nor are the majority isolated.
● The distortions are minimal, for example due to installation of the reader at an angle.
● There are no or only a few foreign objects in the area of the code.
● There are no interference patterns (grooves, granularity) in the area of the code.
● Fluctuations in contrast are slight.
Image processing
3.1 Reading code (1D and 2D codes)
SIMATIC MV420 / SIMATIC MV440
48 Operating Instructions, 10/2015, C79000-G8976-C334-03
3.1.2.3
QR codes
Note
Maximum code dimension/unsupported code types
•
Codes with a maximum code dimension of 89 x 89 can be read.
•
The following code types are not supported: Micro QR code, Macro QR code.
Note
Changing to time-saving image acquisition at half resolution
If the cells are larger than 10 pixels, change to time
-saving image acquisition at half
resolution. This change is also useful at high object speeds.
The recognition processes of the reader allow reliable and fast reading of printed QR codes
of good quality.
Range of application
● The range of imaging sizes ranges from 5 to 35 pixels per cell. The range is static.
● The codes can have any alignment in the image.
● The code can be printed both dark on a light background and light on a dark background.
● The viewing angle of the reader to the surface can be between 70° and 90°.
● The diameter of the cells must be uniform over the entire code field.
● The contrast between cells and the background must be approximately the same over the
entire code field.
● The image background must have a homogeneous brightness, for example no texture
such as stripes.
Image processing
3.1 Reading code (1D and 2D codes)
SIMATIC MV420 / SIMATIC MV440
Operating Instructions, 10/2015, C79000-G8976-C334-03 49
3.1.2.4
PDF417 codes
Note
Unsupported code types
The following code types are not supported: Truncated PDF417, Macro PDF417, Micro
PDF417.
Note
Changing to time-saving image acquisition at half resolution
With bar widths > 6 pixels, change
to time-saving image acquisition at half resolution. This
change is also useful at high object speeds.
The recognition processes of the reader allow reliable and fast reading of printed PDF417
codes of good quality.
Range of application
● The codes can have any alignment in the image.
● The code can be printed both dark on a light background and light on a dark background.
● Codes with a bar width ≥ 3 pixels and in which the height of a single row of symbols is ≥ 9
pixels can be read.
● The width of the black and white bars must be uniform over the entire code field.
● The viewing angle of the sensor to the surface can be between 70° and 90°.
● The code should not make contact with any other objects in the image, you can do this,
for example by keeping the quiet zone free with twice the column width.
● Within the code, the ratio of contrast (in other words, the difference between black and
white) to noise should be at least three. This ratio must be similar over the entire code
field.
● The image background must have a homogeneous brightness, for example no texture
such as stripes.
● The error correction codes (in other words, the lower part of the barcode) must not be
covered.
● At the minimum bar width, each symbol column requires 51 pixels. Along with the four
start and stop patterns, the width of the code with n code columns is at least:
Width = 51 x (n + 4) pixels.
Due to the limited image resolution, codes can be read as follows:
– SIMATIC MV440 SR reader up to 40 code lines and up to 6 code columns.
– SIMATIC MV440 HR reader up to 60 code lines and up to 12 code columns.
Image processing
3.1 Reading code (1D and 2D codes)
SIMATIC MV420 / SIMATIC MV440
50 Operating Instructions, 10/2015, C79000-G8976-C334-03
3.1.2.5
DotCodes
Note
Changing to time-saving image acquisition at half resolution
If the cells are >
10 pixels, change to time-saving image acquisition at half resolution. This
change is also useful at high
object speeds.
The recognition processes of the reader allow reliable and fast reading of printed DotCodes
of good quality.
Range of application
● The range of image sizes is from 4 to 40 pixels per cell. The range is static.
● The cells are isolated.
● The distortions are minimal, for example due to installation of the reader at an angle.
● There are no or only a few foreign objects in the area of the code.
● There are no interference patterns (grooves, granularity) in the area of the code.
● Fluctuations in contrast are slight.
Image processing
3.1 Reading code (1D and 2D codes)
SIMATIC MV420 / SIMATIC MV440
Operating Instructions, 10/2015, C79000-G8976-C334-03 51
3.1.2.6
One-dimensional codes
The recognition processes of the reader allow reliable and fast reading of printed one-
dimensional codes of good quality.
● If the code type has a checksum, the checksum is also transferred in the read result
(text).
● Do not work with variable string lengths with "Interleaved 2/5" or "Code 39".
To avoid incomplete codes being read, set the number of bars to "Saved" on the
"Advanced" tab of under speedup options.
● The "Full ASCII" coding of the code type "Code 39" is not supported.
– To read this code type with the reader, use code type "Code 39".
– To obtain the original text with the additional "Full ASCII" characters, you need to post-
edit the textual read result.
Reliable reading of Pharmacode
● Because the Pharmacode has a simple structure, set the following speedup parameters
to "Trained" in the "Advanced" tab under "Options":
– Height
– Length
– Module width
– Number of bars
– Minimum quiet zone length
– Sample spacing
● Save the program before reading. For the program to be successfully saved, the
Pharmacode to be saved must have both narrow and wide elements. This avoids reading
errors due to the absence of error correction of this code type.
● Since a Pharmacode on its head cannot be detected automatically, select the code type
"Pharmacode (0°)" or "Pharmacode (180°)".
● Standard code generators allow a maximum of 63 bars for a Pharmacode. The integrated
Pharmacode decoder is therefore also limited to maximum of 63 bars per code.
Range of application
● The codes can have any alignment in the image.
● The code can be printed both dark on a light background and light on a dark background.
● Codes with a height of 25 pixels and height/length ratio ≥ 0.15 are read.
● The viewing angle of the sensor to the surface can be between 80° and 90°.
● The codes must not be printed on a curved surface.
● The quiet zone around the code must be undisturbed.
Image processing
3.1 Reading code (1D and 2D codes)
SIMATIC MV420 / SIMATIC MV440
52 Operating Instructions, 10/2015, C79000-G8976-C334-03
● Code and background must have a homogeneous brightness.
● The following limit values for the bar width must not be exceeded:
– Code 39: 8 pixels
– Code128: 12 pixels
– Int. 2/5: 5 pixels
– EAN 13/UPC-A/UPC-E/EAN 8: 12 pixels
– Code 93: 14 pixels
– Codabar: 9 pixels
Range of applications for "low" codes
For special applications in the printing industry, optimization is available for 1D codes with
extremely low bar heights. This can be activated in the options on the "Speedup" tab.
The range of applications for 1D codes (see "Range of applications") is to be limited with the
following supplementary conditions:
● Bar height must be > 20 pixels.
● Bar height must be > twice the minimum bar width (1x width).
● The codes must be parallel to the axis (horizontal or vertical): Tolerance < ±5°.
● The print quality must be extremely good.
● The minimum quiet zone must be > 5.5 x the minimum bar width (1x width).
See also
Options (Page 245)
Image processing
3.1 Reading code (1D and 2D codes)
SIMATIC MV420 / SIMATIC MV440
Operating Instructions, 10/2015, C79000-G8976-C334-03 53
3.1.3
Reading multiple codes in the image
Note
Restricted availability of multicode
Multicode functionality is not available for:
•
QR codes
•
DotCodes
•
PDF417 codes
•
VeriCodes
Note
Order of output
Output is line by line starting with the code of the top left and finishing at the bottom right.
If the
order of the codes is required for an application (for example, for writing a "trigger-
synchronized match string"), make sure that the position and rotation of the selected object
remains constant during every image acquisition.
In "Multicode" mode, up to 50 codes per image acquisition can be decoded. SIMATIC
MV440 UR can decode up to 150 codes image acquisition.
Range of application
● Even different code types can be read in one image. Combined operation with "Text-
Genius" and "Text-Genius Plus" optical character recognition (OCR) is also possible.
● Available for data matrix codes that can be read with standard methods. See Good
quality data matrix codes (Page 47).
● The maximum number of codes and the code types used are specified when the program
is saved. Depending on the configuration, the actual number and the code types found in
processing mode can vary.
● Due to the multiple decoding, the processing time is extended approximately proportional
to the number of codes per image.
Image processing
3.1 Reading code (1D and 2D codes)
SIMATIC MV420 / SIMATIC MV440
54 Operating Instructions, 10/2015, C79000-G8976-C334-03
Example
With this function, you can record a one-dimensional code and a data matrix code on
packaging with one image acquisition and output the read result of both codes in the same
cycle.
Figure 3-1 Example: Reading multiple codes in the image
Image processing
3.2 Code verification
SIMATIC MV420 / SIMATIC MV440
Operating Instructions, 10/2015, C79000-G8976-C334-03 55
3.2
Code verification
3.2.1
Overview
Verification
The readability of a 1D or 2D barcode will never be better than at the time the barcode
leaves the marking device. With the help of code verification, it is possible to make sure that
the markings are correctly applied during the marking process and that readability is good
enough so that it will remain ensured throughout the entire life cycle. Verification makes sure
that corrections can be made to the marking procedure before it leaves a range of tolerance
and produces unusable or incomplete markings.
Marking quality
To recognize and ensure the readability and quality of a marking, a verifier is required
instead of a pure code reader.
A simple code reader merely outputs the result read or not read to inform the operator of
potential read errors. This means the reader does not provide any trending data to the
marking device or to the operator.
Figure 3-2 Sequence involved in marking quality when using a reader
The verifier assigns a quality grade from 4 to 0 to the readable markings. This grade informs
the marking device or operator when preventive maintenance is required. Based on this
knowledge, maintenance can be planned at a suitable time before the machine actually
becomes defective.
Image processing
3.2 Code verification
SIMATIC MV420 / SIMATIC MV440
56 Operating Instructions, 10/2015, C79000-G8976-C334-03
Figure 3-3 Sequence involved in marking quality when using a verifier
It is, however, important that the measuring procedure and marking quality are suitable for
the marking method used.
Depending on the particular requirements, there are several test standards. Data matrix
codes on labels can be tested with test systems according to ISO/IEC 16022. For directly
marked parts, however, a verification tailored to this purpose is necessary.
With direct part marking (DPM), the data matrix code is applied directly to the surface of the
object. Here, other marking errors occur that make it necessary to use verification specially
designed for this purpose.
The verifiers of the SIMATIC MV440 series support several verification standards for a wide
range of applications and marking processes. In contrast to the standards for DPM
verification, traditional standards can lead to false alarms or to serious marking errors being
overlooked.
Image processing
3.2 Code verification
SIMATIC MV420 / SIMATIC MV440
Operating Instructions, 10/2015, C79000-G8976-C334-03 57
3.2.2
Grading
Quality levels
The verifier reports the quality in five grades known as "quality levels".
Older verifiers identify these grades based on a single letter A to F (without E) with F being
the lowest quality level. Verifiers of the newer generations identify the value range
numerically from 4 to 0 with 0 being the lowest quality level.
With the verifiers of the SIMATIC MV440 series, the user can choose either of the quality
grading systems.
Evaluation
The evaluation is shown in the user interface as a value from 4 to 0 (or A to F without E). In
addition to this, each quality grade is assigned one of three evaluation levels
(good/adequate/poor). This evaluation not only allows fast visual checks of the quality using
the color coding of the display, but also automatic rejection of the read result as N_OK if it
falls below a certain quality threshold.
Old grade
New grade
Defaults for quality grading
User interface
Defaults for the read result
A
4
Good
Green2) = good
OK
B 3 Can be set specifically by
user
1)
C 2 Can be set specifically by
user
1)
Yellow2) = Fair OK
D 1 Can be set specifically by
user 1)
Red2) = Poor
N_OK (can be set specifically
by the user)
F
0
Poor
1)
The user-specific setting is only for ascending or descending order.
2) Color coding in the user interface.
Example
In an application in which only very good markings are acceptable, all grades below 4 are set
to "Poor". This allows the rejection of all unacceptable specimens.
3.2.3
Verification methods for different application scenarios
3.2.3.1
Verification of printed labels
In 1996, the "Association for Automatic Identification and Mobility" (AIM) published the data
matrix symbology specification with an evaluation procedure for print quality. According to
this evaluation procedure, test systems could evaluate a symbol according to its degree of
acceptability (4 to 0).
Image processing
3.2 Code verification
SIMATIC MV420 / SIMATIC MV440
58 Operating Instructions, 10/2015, C79000-G8976-C334-03
The specification later became the ISO/IEC 16022 standard. This type of test was developed
for paper labels with high contrast.
It allows a quantitative measurement of the print quality and allows the testing of printed 2D
codes based on a quality standard. Here, the important fact is that the printing of a data
matrix code on paper is a high-quality process.
White paper is printed with black ink to achieve a high contrast. With this background, the
threshold values for grading in the ISO/IEC 16022 standard are very restrictive because the
marking quality is so high.
Less exacting requirements are neither suitable nor useful in the printing industry. The AIM
standard identifies the following typical errors:
● Blocked ink jets
● Too much or too little ink
● Inconsistent application of the ink
● Inadequate contrast due to a combination of ink color and background color
3.2.3.2
Verification of direct part marks
Test procedure
In contrast to printed labels, most workpieces are not optimized for marking but rather for
their primary purpose.
It is, for example, more difficult to apply a laser marking to bare aluminum than to stainless
steel. Aluminum is, however, more suitable in the production of parts for aircraft because it is
lighter. The weight is therefore more important than markability. A test object with a marking
on aluminum does not normally pass the test according to the ISO/IEC 16022 standard due
to the low degree of contrast.
Here, a verification method suitable for DPM must be used. For open applications, a public
standard such as ISO/IEC 15415, ISO/IEC 29158 or AS9132A is normally used.
Use ISO/IEC 29158 for applications with demanding lighting conditions. In contrast to all
other verification standards, automatic exposure control is performed here to optimally
capture the code to be verified.
Siemens DPM
For closed applications with a focus on checking the marking quality, Siemens DPM
verification is the best choice. Siemens DPM verification can be configured very flexibly to be
able to test markings applied with a variety of marking methods on different materials.
The quality characteristics to be checked can be selected individually. In addition to this, a
separate quality evaluation (good/fair/poor) can be set for each selected quality
characteristic to give priority to certain characteristics. When combined with a flexible lighting
setting, the quality monitoring with Siemens DPM can also solve applications that are too
restrictive or simply unsuitable for the public standards.
Image processing
3.2 Code verification
SIMATIC MV420 / SIMATIC MV440
Operating Instructions, 10/2015, C79000-G8976-C334-03 59
Measuring the marking
Each marking is measured based on the quality characteristics defined in the relevant
verification process and assigned to a quality level. Deviations in the quality grade can
usually be attributed to the following causes:
● Changed marking parameters or errors in the marking device
● Changed material concepts or surface structure
● Parts incorrectly secured or traced
● Changes in a disturbed environment such as oil or light on the part
● Incorrect securing or tracing of parts
Provided with the data of the verifier, the production line remains operational because
necessary maintenance or modifications to improve the marking can be performed before
the markings become unreadable.
Image processing
3.2 Code verification
SIMATIC MV420 / SIMATIC MV440
60 Operating Instructions, 10/2015, C79000-G8976-C334-03
3.2.3.3
Examples of defects in the marking quality
The following pictures show examples of defects in the marking quality:
Figure 3-4 Incorrect or non-uniform cell size in the marking
Figure 3-5 Incorrect or non-uniform cell position in the marking
Figure 3-6 Incorrect overall geometry of the marking
Figure 3-7 Damaged surface of the marking or part
Figure 3-8 Very little or non-uniform contrast in the marking
Image processing
3.2 Code verification
SIMATIC MV420 / SIMATIC MV440
Operating Instructions, 10/2015, C79000-G8976-C334-03 61
3.2.3.4
Verification standards supported
Note
"Veri-Genius" only available for SIMATIC MV440 readers
This
option is available only for the SIMATIC MV440 readers.
For productive use, you require a Veri
-Genius license (article number 6GF3400-0SL02).
● The readers without a verification license support the following:
– Uncalibrated verification according to ISO/IEC 29158 and ISO/IEC 16022
● The readers with a "Veri-Genius" license also support the following standards:
– Data matrix verification to ISO/IEC 15415:2004
– Data matrix verification to AS9132 Rev A:2005 (previously IAQG) for dot peen
marking
– Siemens DPM
– Data matrix verification to ISO/IEC 29158:2011
– Barcode verification to ISO/IEC 15416:2000 (previously ANSI X3.182-1990)
Note
Uncalibrated verification
If you select the uncalibrated verification reference, data matrix codes are evaluated
according to ISO/IEC
16022 or ISO/IEC 29158 and barcodes are evaluated according
to ISO/IEC
15416, depending on the selection in the advanced settings of the decoder
ste
p. The evaluation is, however, made without any basic calibration. The standard
report corresponds to the
Standard report for ISO/IEC 16022 "Standard" decoder
(Page
83) or Standard report for ISO/IEC 29158 (Page 86) for data matrix codes or
the
Standard report for ISO/IEC 15416 (Page 86) for verifiable barcodes.
Image processing
3.2 Code verification
SIMATIC MV420 / SIMATIC MV440
62 Operating Instructions, 10/2015, C79000-G8976-C334-03
Note
Verification with the "ID-Genius" decoder
If you select the "ID
-Genius" decoder (Standard report for ISO/IEC 16022 "ID-Genius"
decoder
(Page 83)
), only uncalibrated verification is possible. The verification standard
to be used for this (ISO/IEC
16022 or ISO/IEC 29158) can be selected in the
advanced settings of the decoder step. Please note that the ID
-
Genius implementation
of the quality calcula
tion according to ISO/IEC 16022 deviates from the standard.
Note
Demo mode
To evaluate the verification standards, the readers of the SIMATIC MV440 series
support a demo mode. The demo mode is indicated in the "Task" drop
-
down list by the
addition of
"Demo".
In the demo mode, remember the following restrictions:
•
The check box "Evaluate quality 'Poor' as 'N_OK'" is disabled. No N_OK reads will
be generated due to the quality evaluation.
•
In the verification report, the four-digit quality values are replaced by the word
"DEMO". All quality grades will be output as '0' or 'F'.
Note
Compatibility
For the "verify" task, the readers of the SIMATIC VS130 series provided quality
parameters that were implemented according to the AIM specification. Please note
that the value calculation and output have changed compared with SIMATIC
VS130-
2.
Note
Manually readjusting exposure settings
You can readjust the read settings manually following normalization and calibration.
•
Deselect the "From reference" check box in the image settings.
Please note that the quality values calculated will no longer comply with the
standard.
•
For documentation, use the "formatted output of the verification" that contains the
read settings used for image acquisition.
For ambitious applications for which no public standard needs to be adhered to,
Siemens AG recommends the use o
f "Siemens DPM".
Image processing
3.2 Code verification
SIMATIC MV420 / SIMATIC MV440
Operating Instructions, 10/2015, C79000-G8976-C334-03 63
3.2.4
Data matrix verification
3.2.4.1
Siemens DPM
In Siemens DPM verification, the user can select the test parameters to be used and
configure the levels "Good", "Fair" and "Poor" for every test parameter individually.
The range of options for verification is ideal for process control in data matrix applications in
which no public standard needs to be adhered to.
Note
"Symbol contrast" and "Cell size"
The test parameters "Symbol contrast" and "Cell size" are not enabled in the default setting
because these parameters can only make limited statements regarding direct part marks.
The test parameters can be activated in the user interface.
Quality parameters
● Cell size:
The overall width divided by the number of columns or the overall height divided by the
number rows. The value output is the cell size in mils (milli-inches). The assignment to
the quality level is based on the number of pixels: See "Assignment of the numeric grade
of Siemens DPM to the quality levels".
● Center offset:
Measurement of the offset of the cell center to the center of the ideal grid starting at the
four corners of the codes.
● Size offset:
Measurement of the difference in cell sizes compared with each other.
● Cell modulation:
Measurement of the uniformity of the reflection values of the dark cells compared with the
light cells.
● Border match:
Percentage of border cells that match the pattern formed by the four borders of the data
matrix.
● Symbol contrast:
Difference between the average reflectance of the lightest pixels and the darkest pixels.
● Axial non-uniformity:
Difference between the height and width relative to the rows and columns.
● Print growth:
Positive or negative size ratio of the printed cells relative to the ideal grid.
Image processing
3.2 Code verification
SIMATIC MV420 / SIMATIC MV440
64 Operating Instructions, 10/2015, C79000-G8976-C334-03
● Unused error correction:
Proportion of error correction information not used for correction of the read result.
● Angle of distortion:
Difference between the two solid edges of the data matrix and the vertical edges
measured in degrees.
Assignment of the numeric grade of Siemens DPM to the quality levels
Grade (abbreviation)
4
3
2
1
0
Comment
Cell size (CS_)
≥ 10
≥ 9
≥ 7
≥ 5
< 5
In pixels
Center offset (CO_) ≤ 2.5 ≤ 5.0 ≤ 7.5 ≤ 10.0 > 10.0 Without unit
Size offset (SO_)
≤ 2.5
≤ 5.0
≤ 7.5
≤ 10.0
> 10.0
Without unit
Cell modulation (MOD) ≥ 90 % ≥ 80 % ≥ 70 % ≥ 60 % < 60 %
Border match (BM_)
≥ 95 %
≥ 90 %
≥ 85 %
≥ 80 %
< 80 %
Symbol contrast (SC_)
≥ 70 %
≥ 55 %
≥ 40 %
≥ 20 %
< 20 %
Axial non-uniformity (AN_)
≤ 6 %
≤ 8 %
≤ 10 %
≤ 12 %
> 12 %
Print growth (PG_)
≤ 10 %
≤ 20 %
≤ 30 %
≤ 40 %
> 40 %
Unused error correction (UEC)
≥ 62 %
≥ 50 %
≥ 37 %
≥ 25 %
< 25 %
Codewords in ECC 200
Angle of distortion (AOD)
≤ 2 %
≤ 4 %
≤ 6 %
≤ 7 %
> 7 %
Image processing
3.2 Code verification
SIMATIC MV420 / SIMATIC MV440
Operating Instructions, 10/2015, C79000-G8976-C334-03 65
3.2.4.2
ISO/IEC 16022
This standard is based on data for printing data matrix codes with black ink on white paper
and can normally only be used in such scenarios.
Note
As the second edition of the ISO/IEC 16022 standard, the ISO/IEC 16022:2006 document
refers to the ISO/IEC
15415 standard as a guideline for print quality.
Quality parameters
● Axial non-uniformity:
Difference between the height and width relative to the rows and columns.
● Print growth:
Positive or negative size ratio of the printed cells relative to the ideal grid.
● Contrast:
Difference between the average reflectance of the lightest pixels and the darkest pixels.
● Unused error correction:
Proportion of error correction information not used for correction of the read result.
Assignment of the numeric grade of ISO/IEC 16022 to the quality levels
Grade (abbreviation)
4
3
2
1
0
Comment
Axial non-uniformity (AN_)
≤ 6 %
≤ 8 %
≤ 10 %
≤ 12 %
> 12 %
Print growth (PG_)
≤ 15 %
≤ 21 %
≤ 26 %
≤ 30 %
> 30 %
Absolute value for x and y
Contrast (SC_)
≥ 70 %
≥ 55 %
≥ 40 %
≥ 20 %
< 20 %
Unused error correction (UEC)
≥ 62 %
≥ 50 %
≥ 37 %
≥ 25 %
< 25 %
Image processing
3.2 Code verification
SIMATIC MV420 / SIMATIC MV440
66 Operating Instructions, 10/2015, C79000-G8976-C334-03
3.2.4.3
ISO/IEC 15415
This standard is a specification for testing the print quality of barcodes for two-dimensional
symbols.
The ISO/IEC 16022:2006 document relates to this standard in the guidelines for print quality.
The functions described in the ISO/IEC 15415 standard "5-Scan Average" and "Extended
Reflectance Check" are not supported by the verifiers of the SIMATIC MV440 series.
Quality parameters
● Axial non-uniformity:
Difference between the height and width relative to the rows and columns.
● L/F fixed pattern damage:
Measure of the errors in the borders of the data matrix and all errors in the quiet zone
around the code necessary for decoding.
● Grid non-uniformity:
This is the deviation of the measured grid relative to the ideal grid starting from the four
corners of a data matrix.
● Modulation:
Measurement of the uniformity of the reflectance of the dark and light cells of the data
matrix.
● Print growth:
Positive or negative size ratio of the printed cells relative to the ideal grid. Is only
calculated as a reference, no quality grade is assigned.
● Reference decode:
A measurement of the data matrix with the result passed/failed. The measurement is
based on a binary image of the code to ISO/IEC 16022:2006.
● Symbol contrast:
Difference between the highest and lowest reflectance of the data matrix surface.
● Unused error correction:
Proportion of error correction information not used for correction of the read result.
Image processing
3.2 Code verification
SIMATIC MV420 / SIMATIC MV440
Operating Instructions, 10/2015, C79000-G8976-C334-03 67
Assignment of the numeric grade of ISO/IEC 15415 to the quality levels
Grade (abbreviation)
4
3
2
1
0
Comment
Axial non-uniformity
(AN_)
≤ 0.06 ≤ 0.08 ≤ 0.10 ≤ 0.12 > 0.12
L/F fixed pattern damage (FPD) This measurement is made in a three-stage process. There is no
direct correlation between the intermediate results and the quality
grade.
Grid non-uniformity (GN_)
≤ 0.38 ≤ 0.50 ≤ 0.63 ≤ 0.75 > 0.75
Modulation (MOD) This measurement is made in a three-stage process. There is no
direct correlation between the intermediate results and the quality
grade.
Print growth
Reference only, no grading X and Y
Reference decode (RD_)
pass
Failed
Symbol contrast (SC_)
≥ 0.70 ≥ 0.55 ≥ 0.40 ≥ 0.20 < 0.20
Unused error correction (UEC)
≥ 0.62
≥ 0.50
≥ 0.37
≥ 0.25
< 0.25
Image processing
3.2 Code verification
SIMATIC MV420 / SIMATIC MV440
68 Operating Instructions, 10/2015, C79000-G8976-C334-03
3.2.4.4
AS9132 Rev. A
This standard first appeared as a data matrix standard of the IAQG (International Aerospace
Quality Group).
This standard applies directly to three specific types of marking:
● Dot peen marking
● Laser marking
● Electrochemical etched markings
The readers of the SIMATIC MV440 series concentrate on the quality parameters of dot
peen markings that are the most commonly used. Module fill and contrast are calculated as
a reference but are not included in the overall grading.
Quality parameters of dot peen
● Angle of distortion: Difference between the two solid edges of the data matrix and the
vertical edges measured in degrees.
● Module center offset:
Linear deviation of the location of the center point of the cell compared with the center of
the ideal grid calculated as a percentage of the nominal cell size.
● Module size offset:
Difference in the apparent size of each individual data element in the data matrix.
● Module fill:
Measurement of the completeness of the ideal grid as a percentage.
● Nominal module size:
Average value of the two values nominal module size X and nominal module size Y.
– Nominal module size X: Width of the data matrix code in pixels divided by the number
of columns.
– Nominal module size Y: Height of the data matrix code in pixels divided by the number
of rows.
● Ovality:
Difference between the widest part of the round cell and the narrowest part of the round
cell.
● Contrast:
Difference between the average reflectance of the lightest pixels and the darkest pixels.
Calculated only as a reference
Note
No expanded quality parameters are used for laser marking and electrochemical etched
marking.
Image processing
3.2 Code verification
SIMATIC MV420 / SIMATIC MV440
Operating Instructions, 10/2015, C79000-G8976-C334-03 69
Assignment of the numeric grading of AS9132 Rev. A to the quality levels
Grade
4
3
2
1
0
Comment
Angle of distortion (AOD)
< 3.5
< 7
> 7
Module center offset (CO_) C1 < 2 % C2 < 2 % C2 > 2 % C1 is the number of modules
with a center offset less than
10% of the module size
C2 is the number of modules
with a center offset less than
20% of the module size
Module size offset (SO_) C1 < 2 % C2 < 2 % C2 > 2 % C1 is the number of modules
with a size offset between 70%
and 90% of the module size
C2 is the number of modules
with a size offset between 60%
and 105% of the module size
Module fill (MF_) 65 % ... 1
05 %
< 65 % or
>105 %
Reference only, 80% is ideal
Nominal module size (NMS)
Reference only, no grading
Ovality (OV_) C1 < 2 % C2 < 2 % C2 > 2 % C1 and C2 is the number of
modules with an ovality greater
than 20% of the module size
Contrast
Reference only, no grading
Image processing
3.2 Code verification
SIMATIC MV420 / SIMATIC MV440
70 Operating Instructions, 10/2015, C79000-G8976-C334-03
3.2.4.5
ISO/IEC 29158
This standard is based on ISO/IEC 15415 but includes modifications for more robust
measurements of Direct Part Marks. The standard can be used for a wide range of
applications, sectors and marking technologies.
The most noticeable differences are the use of automatic exposure control and a much
greater contrast tolerance.
Note
ISO/IEC 29158 uses its own algorithm for exposure control
The ISO/IEC 29158 standard uses its own algorithm for exposure control. With this, the
exposure time is adjusted so that the average gray scale value of the code to be verified is
between 70% and 86%. If such an exposure is not possible fo
r a particular code, a
verification error (
4707, 4708, or 4709 (Page 384)) is generated.
Automatic exposure control requires multiple decodings of the code to be verified. The time
needed for this can vary significantly depending on the type and marking quality of the code.
The "Timeout" parameter in the exposure se
ttings of a program can be used to limit the time
available for exposure. Occurrence of the verification error 4709 and, in particular, 4708
indicates that the value is too low.
Checking of the average gray scale value can be disabled by clearing the "From
reference"
check box in the exposure settings of a program (not recommended). The verification no
longer conforms to the standards in this case.
Note
Uncalibrated verification or verification not conforming to standards according to ISO/IEC
29158
Because the "Cell contrast" quality parameter in ISO/IEC 29158 is calculated depending on
the average gray value:
If the average gray value fluctuates from one image acquisition to another, the calculated
value is not informative. See also the note above o
n exposure control "ISO/IEC 29158 uses
its own algorithm for exposure control".
Therefore, when ISO/IEC
29158 is used for uncalibrated verification, the "Cell contrast"
quality parameter is not used by default for determining the overall quality. A poor gr
ade for
cell contrast thus does not affect the overall grade. The same applies if the "From reference"
check box is cleared for calibrated verification. If the "cell contrast" quality parameter is to be
used for the overall quality, select the "Evaluating
symbol contrast" check box in the
"Advanced" tab of decoder steps.
Note
Verification report
You can create a verification report according to ISO/IEC 29158 using the user interface, see
section
Monitoring via HTML pages (Page 266).
Image processing
3.2 Code verification
SIMATIC MV420 / SIMATIC MV440
Operating Instructions, 10/2015, C79000-G8976-C334-03 71
Quality parameters
● Axial non-uniformity:
Difference between the height and width relative to the rows and columns.
● Cell contrast:
Measure of the uniformity of the average reflectance of the light pixels and the dark
pixels. This corresponds to "symbol contrast" according to ISO/IEC 15415, however with
different details in the implementation.
● Cell modulation:
Measurement of the uniformity of the reflectance of the dark and light areas of the data
matrix. Similar to "Modulation" according to ISO/IEC 15415, however with different details
in the implementation and lower limits for the quality levels.
● L/F fixed pattern damage:
Measure of the errors in the borders of the data matrix and all errors in the quiet zone
around the code necessary for decoding.
● Grid non-uniformity:
This is the deviation of the measured grid relative to the ideal grid starting from the four
corners of a data matrix.
● Minimum reflectance:
The lowest reflectance of any area in the data matrix.
● Reference decode:
A measurement of the data matrix with the result passed/failed. The measurement is
based on a binary image of the code to ISO/IEC 16022:2006.
● Unused error correction:
Proportion of error correction information not used for correction of the read result.
● Print growth:
Positive or negative size ratio of the printed cells relative to the ideal grid. Calculated only
as a reference.
Image processing
3.2 Code verification
SIMATIC MV420 / SIMATIC MV440
72 Operating Instructions, 10/2015, C79000-G8976-C334-03
Assignment of the numeric grade of ISO/IEC 29158 to the quality levels
Grade
4
3
2
1
0
Comment
Axial non-uniformity (AN_)
≤ 6 %
≤ 8 %
≤ 10 %
≤ 12 %
> 12 %
Cell contrast (SC_) ≥ 30 % ≥ 25 % ≥ 20 % ≥ 15 % < 15 % Calculation different from ISO
15415
Cell modulation (MOD) This measurement is made in a three-stage process.
There is no direct correlation between the intermedi-
ate results and the quality grade.
Calculation different from ISO
15415
L/F fixed pattern damage (FPD) This measurement is made in a three-stage process.
There is no direct correlation between the intermedi-
ate results and the quality grade.
Calculation different from ISO
15415
Grid non-uniformity (GN_)
≤ 0.38
≤ 0.50
≤ 0.63
≤ 0.75
> 0.75
Minimum reflectance (RMI)
≥ 5 %
< 5 %
Reference decode (RD_)
pass
fail
Unused error correction (UEC)
≥ 62 %
≥ 50 %
≥ 37 %
≥ 25 %
< 25 %
Print growth
Reference only, no grading
Image processing
3.2 Code verification
SIMATIC MV420 / SIMATIC MV440
Operating Instructions, 10/2015, C79000-G8976-C334-03 73
3.2.4.6
Graphical support for analysis of verification errors
Searching for cause of marking problems
The information used by the reference decoder can be displayed to simplify troubleshooting
for marking problems.
● The detailed view is activated via "Options" - "Extras" tab/verification details.
You can see the results using the "Monitoring" link on the start page and in the user
interface (Page 266).
The following information is displayed:
● The grid lines by which the cells are separated.
● The incorrectly marked cells (shown in red).
● The correctly marked cells (shown in green).
Note
The identification of the incorrectly marked cells only ta
kes into account cells that were
recognized as being incorrectly set based on the error correction information. Other
quality parameters that cause lowering of the grade, such as inadequate modulation or
errors in the quiet zone, are not displayed.
Example
3.2.5
Barcode verification
The principles underlying barcode verification are similar to those of data matrix verification.
These principles are, however, diversified to make full use of the characteristics of one-
dimensional barcodes.
ISO/IEC 15416
The code is scanned in several parallel scan lines to obtain a reliable measured value for the
marking quality of a barcode.
Image processing
3.2 Code verification
SIMATIC MV420 / SIMATIC MV440
74 Operating Instructions, 10/2015, C79000-G8976-C334-03
Each scan line has its own set of quality grades and the lowest of these decides the overall
quality grade of the reflectance profile of the scan line. The average value of the quality
values of the reflectance profile is the overall quality grade of the code.
The reader uses ten scan lines that result in individual results for each of the following quality
parameters.
Quality parameters
● Scan grade:
Lowest grade of all characteristics of the reflectance profile for a scan line.
● Edge determination:
Clarity of the identification of element edges in the scan reflectance profile.
● Reference decode:
A symbology reference algorithm is used to decode based on the edge detection.
● Maximum reflectance:
Percentage of the reflectance of the lightest gap.
● Minimum edge contrast:
Lowest value of the edge contrast. The edge contrast is the difference between the bar
reflectance and the gap reflectance of two adjacent elements.
● Minimum reflectance:
Percentage of the reflectance of the darkest bar.
● Symbol contrast:
Difference between the maximum and minimum reflectance.
● Decodability:
The proportion of the available surrounding space (between the ideal dimension of an
element or a combination of elements and the relevant reference threshold value) that is
not used by the element or the combination of elements. The ratio is calculated for the
element or the combination of elements that deviates most from the ideal dimension.
● Defects:
Irregularities in elements and quiet zones measured based on the non-uniformity of the
reflectance of the elements.
● Modulation:
Ratio of the minimum edge contrast to the symbol contrast.
● Start quiet zone:
Area outside the start codeword with a length of 10 modules.
● Stop quiet zone:
Area outside the stop codeword with a length of 10 modules.
Image processing
3.2 Code verification
SIMATIC MV420 / SIMATIC MV440
Operating Instructions, 10/2015, C79000-G8976-C334-03 75
Assignment of the numeric grade of ISO/IEC 15416 to the quality levels
Grade
4
3
2
1
0
Comment
Scan reflectance profile
Lowest single grade per scan line
Edge determination pass fail
Reference decode
pass
fail
Minimum edge contrast
(MEC)
≥ 0.15 < 0.15
Minimum reflectance (RMI) ≤ 0.5Rmax > 0.5Rmax Rmax is the maximum
reflectance.
Symbol contrast (SC_)
≥ 0.70
≥ 0.55
≥ 0.40
≥ 0.20
< 0.20
Decodability (DEC)
≥ 0.62
≥ 0.50
≥ 0.38
≥ 0.25
< 0.25
Defects (DEF)
≤ 0.15
≤ 0.20
≤ 0.25
≤ 0.30
> 0.30
Modulation (MOD)
≥ 0.70
≥ 0.60
≥ 0.50
≥ 0.40
< 0.40
Quiet zone (QZ_) ≥ 10 mod-
ules
< 10 mod-
ules
3.2.6
DotCode quality evaluation
Quality characteristics
● Symbol contrast: The symbol contrast is the difference between the average brightness of
the points of the DotCode and the average brightness of the background.
● Grid non-uniformity: The value indicates the average deviation of the position of the
points from an ideal grid with same distances of grid points in parallel and vertical
alignment to the code in each case.
● Unused error correction: Proportion of error correction information not used for correction
of the read result.
● Print growth: The print growth specifies the ratio (subtracted from 1) of the average
diameter of the points to the average spacing of the points from each other.
● Cell size: Average diameter of the points in pixels.
Assignment of the numeric grading of DotCode to the quality levels
Grade
4
3
2
1
0
Symbol contrast
≥ 35 %
≥ 21 %
≥ 14 %
≥ 7 %
< 7 %
Grid non-
uniformity
≤ 0.1 ≤ 0.3 ≤ 0.4 ≤ 0.5 > 0.5
Unused error
correction
≥ 0.62 ≥ 0.50 ≥ 0.37 ≥ 0.25 < 0.25
Print growth
≥ 0.8 and ≤ 1.1
≥ 0.7 and ≤ 1.2
≥ 0.6 and ≤ 1.3
≥ 0.5 and ≤ 1.4
< 0.5 or > 1.4
Cell size
≥ 6 and ≤ 9
≥ 5 and ≤ 10
≥ 4 and ≤ 20
≥ 3 and ≤ 30
< 3 or > 30
Image processing
3.2 Code verification
SIMATIC MV420 / SIMATIC MV440
76 Operating Instructions, 10/2015, C79000-G8976-C334-03
3.2.7
Calibration and activating verification
Calibrate
To be able to use the reader as a verifier, a calibration must be performed.
Calibrating the reader ensures that with every test setup, correct and reproducible results are
returned in keeping with the selected standard.
● You will need to calibrate the reader the first time you commission it in your production
area.
Verification library
Calibrations are created as elements of the verification library according to the procedure
described below.
You can then reference a stored calibration in one or more programs.
Requirement: Stable lighting conditions
The conditions must be stable in the operating environment of the verifier. If the position of
the device or the ambient lighting or ambient temperature changes, recalibration is
necessary. Without calibration, the results may fluctuate considerably.
Regular recalibration it is necessary for stable results:
● If for example, you perform a verification once with high surrounding brightness and
another time with very low surrounding brightness.
After successful recalibration of an element of the verification library, all programs that
reference this element can be used immediately.
Siemens AG recommends that you operate the reader with its own lighting. You should also
shield the reader and the code to be measured from the surrounding light. Some verification
procedures (e.g. ISO/IEC 15415 and ISO/IEC 29158) require the use of certain lighting types
and lighting equipment. You will find detailed information on this in the relevant documents
from ISO/IEC.
Normalizing system and calibrating the reflectance
The "Veri-Genius" license is supplied with a calibration card; see section Calibration card
(Page 436).
Once you have set up the reader in the location where it will be used, the system needs to
be calibrated with the calibration card.
Image processing
3.2 Code verification
SIMATIC MV420 / SIMATIC MV440
Operating Instructions, 10/2015, C79000-G8976-C334-03 77
3.2.7.1
Calibrating the reader
The calibration determines suitable lighting parameters and obtains the correct calculation of
the contrast and the size measurements of the test system.
Procedure
Calibrate the reader as follows:
1. Make sure that you have stable and uniform illumination of the working area of the
reader, in particular the surrounding lighting. Refer also to the introductory remarks in
"Calibration and activating verification".
2. Place the calibration plate in the viewing range of the reader.
3. Position the data matrix code with approximately 80% contrast in the center below the
reader.
4. Align the borders of the code parallel to the borders of the image.
If, during processing, the code to be read is always positioned in a region below the
reader that is clearly offset from the center, you should also position the calibration code
in this region.
5. Check the image of the code. To set the ideal image sharpness, change to adjustment
mode if necessary. The value for the "Symbol contrast" can be used as an indicator for
the sharpness.
Using a small aperture achieves a greater depth of focus. A small aperture is also
advisable if the reader cannot be protected from surrounding light. A large aperture,
however, allows shorter exposure times and is therefore useful for fast applications and
for verification according to ISO/IEC 29158 (see also the note in step 7).
6. If there are other data matrix codes in the image field or the code is not located in the
center of the image due to the application, the calibration ROI will need to be adapted.
Adjust the ROI so that the code is located in the center. The exact size of the ROI is
unimportant but must contain the complete code and the quiet zone (minimum width:
1 code cell).
7. If required to meet the requirements of your application, configure the maximum exposure
time and brightness. To achieve a good image quality, the maximum brightness for the
verification is more restricted than when using the device as a reader.
– To minimize any possible deterioration of the measured code quality due to the image
acquisition procedure, the brightness is set to as low a value as possible during
calibration. The required exposure time is therefore relatively high in many cases. For
applications with direct part marking (DPM) a lower calibrated exposure time should
be selected under certain circumstances. This applies in particular if active exposure
control is used with ISO/IEC 29158. The exposure time can then be corrected during
processing mode to be able to verify parts with weak reflectance.
– To achieve a shorter exposure time, set a lower value for the maximum exposure
time. The maximum exposure time allowed in processing mode can be adapted in the
program settings (only ISO/IEC 29158).
8. Enter the values for contrast and maximum reflectance specified on the calibration card in
the appropriate boxes
9. Start the calibration and, if necessary, follow the instructions for eliminating errors.
Image processing
3.2 Code verification
SIMATIC MV420 / SIMATIC MV440
78 Operating Instructions, 10/2015, C79000-G8976-C334-03
See also
Warnings and notes (Page 382)
3.2.7.2
Basic requirements
Recommended cell sizes for verification of 2D codes
The following basic requirements must be met for a reliable verification:
● Recommended cell size calibration code: 10 pixels (min. 5 pixels)
● Recommended cell size target code: 10 pixels (min. 5 pixels)
● Quiet zone in double cell height contained all around the code the image
If the target code differs strongly from the calibration code in terms of its cell size, you must
make sure to select a sufficiently high resolution when you select the camera model. Based
on the basic requirements described above, the following table lists the approximate limits of
the print size of the codes to be verified depending on the camera resolution. For the
calculation it was assumed that only up to 80% of the image height is used to prevent
positioning accuracy errors.
Camera resolution
Min. print size
Max. print size
(16 x 16 cells)
Max. print size
(32 x 32 cells)
640 x 480 pixels
(SIMATIC MV440 SR)
8 mil 28 mil 16 mil
1024 x 768 pixels
(SIMATIC MV440 HR)
5 mil 46 mil 25 mil
1600 x 1200 pixels
(SIMATIC MV440 UR)
4 mil 72 mil 40 mil
Assump-
tion/requirement:
The calibration code is
mapped in such a way
that it takes up 80% of
the image height. To
then reach a mapping
of the target codes
with 10 pixels/cell,
these must have the
listed minimum print
sizes.
The calibration code is mapped with the minimum
of 10 pixels/cell. The listed maximum print sizes
results when the target code takes up a maximum
of 80% of the image height.
1 mil = 0.0254 mm
Recommended module widths for verification of 1D codes
● Minimum module width: 4 pixels
● Recommended module width: 5 pixels
● Maximum module width: 20 pixels
Image processing
3.2 Code verification
SIMATIC MV420 / SIMATIC MV440
Operating Instructions, 10/2015, C79000-G8976-C334-03 79
Camera resolution
Min. module width
Max. module width
640 x 480 pixels
(SIMATIC MV440 SR)
4 mil Depends on code type,
number of coded characters
1024 x 768 pixels
(SIMATIC MV440 HR)
3 mil
1600 x 1200 pixels
(SIMATIC MV440 UR)
2 mil
The calibration code is mapped
in such a way that it takes up
80% of the image height. To then
reach a mapping of the target
codes with 5 pixels/module,
these must have the listed mini-
mum print sizes.
1 mil = 0.0254 mm
3.2.8
Formatted output of the verification
One important feature of a verifier is the ability to document results. To allow this, the reader
provides verification reports that can be accessed over the various interfaces.
If a verification report has been configured, this is generated and output each time a read
was successful.
For some verification standards, the standard defines a verification report that can be
regarded as a summary of the verification result.
A detailed verification report consists of two parts:
● Verification settings
● Verification result
Verification report
With %R, you receive a verification report containing the overall quality and information on
the lighting used. The precise formatting and the values contained depend on the verification
standard that was used and are defined in the specific standard.
Note
Values enclosed in square brackets are
optional.
The verification report is not available for verification according to ISO/IEC
16022, AS 9132
Rev. A and Siemens DPM.
Image processing
3.2 Code verification
SIMATIC MV420 / SIMATIC MV440
80 Operating Instructions, 10/2015, C79000-G8976-C334-03
● Output for ISO/IEC 15415:
<overall grade>/<aperture or cell size>/<wavelength>/[<radiation angle ≠ 45°>]
● Output for ISO/IEC 29158:
DPM<overall grade>/<percentage aperture>/<wavelength>/[<radiation angle ≠ 45°>]
● Output for ISO/IEC 15416:
<overall grade>/<module size>/<wavelength>/
Verification settings
With %v (lower-case "v"), you obtain an output of the all the settings relevant for verification
in the printed order.
All field values are separated by semicolons. The field names are not part of the report.
Field name
Value
Exposure time
0000 … 9999
Brightness 0000 … 0999
Brightness offset (coarse)
-255 ... 0255
Brightness offset (fine) -255 ... 0255
Histogram peak low
0000 … 0255
Histogram peak high
0000 … 0255
Cell scaling * 100
0000 … 9999
Target contrast
0000 … 0100
Maximum reflectance
0000 … 0100
Minimum X dimension
0000 … 0999
Maximum X dimension
0000 … 0999
Avg. gray scale value
0000 … 0255
Calibrated exposure time
0000 … 9999
Calibrated brightness
0000 … 0999
Light source
Name of the lamp
Radiation angle
0000 … 9999
Wavelength
0000 … 9999
List of characteristics
Abbreviation: G[GFP][GFP][GFP]P
Note
Calibrated verification according to ISO/IEC 29158
Calibrated verification in compliance with the ISO/IEC
29158 standard works with automatic
exposure control. The value output for "Exposure time" in the verification settings therefore
differs
from the value of the "calibrated exposure time" and corresponds to the value
selected by the exposure control.
Image processing
3.2 Code verification
SIMATIC MV420 / SIMATIC MV440
Operating Instructions, 10/2015, C79000-G8976-C334-03 81
List of characteristics
The characteristics list consists of the abbreviation for a quality parameter followed by five
letters. The five letters represent the quality evaluation ([G]ood, [F]air, [P]oor) associated
with the possible grades 4, 3, 2, 1, 0 or A, B, C, D, F (in each case in this order).
For Siemens DPM, the characteristics list contains 10 entries since all the quality
characteristics can be configured individually here. For all other standards, only the overall
grade is output whose evaluation is relevant for all grades.
3.2.9
Verification result
%V (upper-case "V") gives you a standard test report with all valid grades and evaluations.
This report is automatically adapted to the verification standard stored in the program.
All field values (grades and evaluations) are separated by a semicolon.
The field names are not part of the standard report.
If you do not require all the grades and/evaluations, the test report can be composed of the
individual tags %Q or %q.
Note
Combination of multicode and verification
•
If you select "Uncalibrated" for the verification task, all the data matrix codes found are
evaluated according to ISO/IEC 16022 or ISO/IEC 29158 and all barcodes are evaluated
according to ISO/IEC 15416. The evaluation is, however, made without any basic
calibration. The standard test report is automatically adapted to the standard being used
for each code.
•
If you select a specific verification method, this is used for all matching code types, other
code types are not evaluated.
•
If a read code has not been evaluated, the output of the verification report for this code is
skipped.
Note
Verification error
Whenever a verification error occurs, all quality grades are output as "E" and the error
number is output instead of the quality values. Please see
Read and verification error
messages
(Page 384) for information on the meaning of the error number.
Image processing
3.2 Code verification
SIMATIC MV420 / SIMATIC MV440
82 Operating Instructions, 10/2015, C79000-G8976-C334-03
3.2.9.1
Standard report for Siemens DPM
Note
Grades and evaluations in the standard report for Siemens DPM
The standard report for Siemens DPM only ever contains the grades and evaluations whose
quality characteristics are activated in the user interface.
With the default setting, activated quality characteristics include
all characteristics except for
"Symbol contrast" and "Cell size".
Field name (TAG)
Value
Verification type (Qt) 5
If the exposure settings do not comply with the
standard: F
Evaluation (Qs)
3 (Good), 2 (Fair) or 1 (Poor)
Overall grade (Q0)
4, 3, 2, 1 or 0
Contrast grade (Q1)
4, 3, 2, 1 or 0
Contrast (q1)
0 ... 100
Axial non-uniformity grade (Q2)
4, 3, 2, 1 or 0
Axial non-uniformity (q2)
0.00 ... 1.00
Unused error correction grade (Q4)
4, 3, 2, 1 or 0
Unused error correction (q4)
0.00 ... 1.00
Cell modulation grade (Q6)
4, 3, 2, 1 or 0
Cell modulation 1 (q6)
0 ... 100
Cell modulation 2 (q6) 0 ... 100
Print growth grade (Q9)
4, 3, 2, 1 or 0
Print growth X (q9) -100 … 100
Print growth Y (q9)
-100 … 100
Cell size grade (Q10)
4, 3, 2, 1 or 0
Cell size (q10)
0.0 ... 99.9 mil
Center offset grade (Q19)
4, 3, 2, 1 or 0
Center offset (q19)
0.0 ... 99.9
Size offset grade (Q20)
4, 3, 2, 1 or 0
Size offset (q20)
0.0 ... 99.9
Border match grade (Q21)
4, 3, 2, 1 or 0
Border match (q21)
0 ... 100
Angle of distortion grade (Q22)
4, 3 or 0
Angle of distortion (q22)
-45 ... 45.0
ECCLevel (q14)
200
Height (q15)
0 ... 9.99 inch
Width (q16)
0 ... 9.99 inch
Angle (q17)
0 ... 360°
Image processing
3.2 Code verification
SIMATIC MV420 / SIMATIC MV440
Operating Instructions, 10/2015, C79000-G8976-C334-03 83
3.2.9.2
Standard report for ISO/IEC 16022 "Standard" decoder
Field name (TAG)
Value
Verification type (Qt) 4
If the exposure settings do not conform to the
standard or uncalibrated verification is active: E
Evaluation (Qs) 3 (Good), 2 (Fair) or 1 (Poor)
Overall grade (Q0)
4, 3, 2, 1 or 0
Contrast grade (Q1)
4, 3, 2, 1 or 0
Contrast (q1)
0 ... 100
Axial non-uniformity grade (Q2)
4, 3, 2, 1 or 0
Axial non-uniformity (q2)
0.00 ... 1.00
Print growth grade (Q9)
4, 3, 2, 1 or 0
Print growth X (q9)
-100 ... 100
Print growth Y (q9)
-100 ... 100
Unused error correction grade (Q4)
4, 3, 2, 1 or 0
Unused error correction (q4)
0.00 ... 1.00
Cell size (q10)
0 ... 99.9 mil
ECCLevel (q14)
200
Height (q15)
0 ... 9.99 inches
Width (q16)
0 ... 9.99 inches
Angle (q17)
0 ... 360°
3.2.9.3
Standard report for ISO/IEC 16022 "ID-Genius" decoder
Field name (TAG)
Value
Overall grade (Q0)
4, 3, 2, 1 or 0
Symbol contrast grade (Q1)
4, 3, 2, 1 or 0
Symbol contrast (q1)
0 ... 100
Axial non-uniformity grade (Q2) 4, 3, 2, 1 or 0
Axial non-uniformity (q2)
0.00 ... 1.00
Unused error correction grade (Q4)
4, 3, 2, 1 or 0
Unused error correction (q4)
0.00 ... 1.00
Print growth grade (Q9)
4, 3, 2, 1 or 0
Print growth (q9)
-999 ... 999
Image processing
3.2 Code verification
SIMATIC MV420 / SIMATIC MV440
84 Operating Instructions, 10/2015, C79000-G8976-C334-03
3.2.9.4
Standard report for ISO/IEC 15415
Field name (TAG)
Value
Verification type (Qt) 2
If the exposure settings do not comply with the
standard: C
Evaluation (Qs) 3 (Good), 2 (Fair) or 1 (Poor)
Overall grade (Q0)
4, 3, 2, 1 or 0
Reference decode grade (Q7)
4, 3, 2, 1 or 0
Contrast grade (Q1)
4, 3, 2, 1 or 0
Contrast (q1)
0 ... 100
Axial non-uniformity grade (Q2)
4, 3, 2, 1 or 0
Axial non-uniformity (q2)
0.00 ... 1.00
Grid non-uniformity grade (Q3)
4, 3, 2, 1 or 0
Grid non-uniformity (q3)
0.00 ... 1.00
Unused error correction grade (Q4)
4, 3, 2, 1 or 0
Unused error correction (q4)
0.00 ... 1.00
Grade L/F fixed pattern damage (Q5)
4, 3, 2, 1 or 0
Modulation grade (Q6)
4, 3, 2, 1 or 0
Print growth X (q9)
-100 … 100
Print growth Y (q9)
-100 … 100
Cell size (q10)
0 ... 99.9 mil
Aperture (q12)
0, 4 ... 20 mils (0 corresponds to automatic)
ECCLevel (q14) 200
Height (q15)
0 ... 9.99 inch
Width (q16)
0 ... 9.99 inch
Angle (q17)
0 ... 360°
Image processing
3.2 Code verification
SIMATIC MV420 / SIMATIC MV440
Operating Instructions, 10/2015, C79000-G8976-C334-03 85
3.2.9.5
Standard report for AS9132, Rev A
Field name (TAG)
Value
Verification type (Qt) 3
If the exposure settings do not comply with the
standard: D
Evaluation (Qs) 3 (Good), 2 (Fair) or 1 (Poor)
Overall grade (Q0)
4, 3, 2, 1 or 0
Module size offset grade (Q20)
4, 3 or 0
Module size offset 1 (q20)
0 ... 99.9
Module size offset 2 (q20)
0 ... 99.9
Module center offset grade (Q19)
4, 3 or 0
Module center offset 1 (q19)
0 ... 99.9
Module center offset 2 (q19)
0 ... 99.9
Angle of distortion grade (Q22)
4, 3 or 0
Angle of distortion (q22)
-45 ... 45
Ovality grade (Q23)
4, 3 or 0
Ovality (q23)
0.00 ... 99.9
Module fill X (q9)
0 ... 200
Module fill Y (q9)
0 ... 200
Contrast (q1)
0 ... 100
Nominal module size (q10)
0 ... 99.9 mil
ECCLevel (q14)
200
Height (q15) 0 ... 9.99 inches
Width (q16)
0 ... 9.99 inches
Angle (q17)
0 ... 360°
Image processing
3.2 Code verification
SIMATIC MV420 / SIMATIC MV440
86 Operating Instructions, 10/2015, C79000-G8976-C334-03
3.2.9.6
Standard report for ISO/IEC 29158
Field name (TAG)
Value
Verification type (Qt) 1
If the exposure settings do not conform to the
standard or uncalibrated verification is active: B
Evaluation (Qs) 3 (Good), 2 (Fair) or 1 (Poor)
Overall grade (Q0)
4, 3, 2, 1 or 0
Reference decode grade (Q7)
4, 3, 2, 1 or 0
Cell contrast grade (Q1)
4, 3, 2, 1 or 0
Cell contrast (q1)
0 ... 100
Axial non-uniformity grade (Q2)
4, 3, 2, 1 or 0
Axial non-uniformity (q2)
0.00 ... 1.00
Grid non-uniformity grade (Q3)
4, 3, 2, 1, or 0
Grid non-uniformity (q3)
0.00 ... 1.00
Unused error correction grade (Q4)
4, 3, 2, 1 or 0
Unused error correction (q4)
0.00 ... 1.00
Grade L/F fixed pattern damage (Q5)
4, 3, 2, 1 or 0
Cell modulation grade (Q6)
4, 3, 2, 1 or 0
Minimum reflectance grade (Q8)
4, 3, 2, 1 or 0
Minimum reflectance (q8)
0 ... 100
Print growth X (q9)
-100 … 100
Print growth Y (q9)
-100 … 100
Cell size (q10) 0 ... 99.9 mil
Current average gray scale value (q11)
0 ... 255
Aperture (q12)
0 ... 999
Percentage aperture (q13)
50, 80 or 0
ECCLevel (q14)
200
Height (q15)
0 ... 9.99 inch
Width (q16) 0 ... 9.99 inch
Angle (q17)
0 ... 360°
3.2.9.7
Standard report for ISO/IEC 15416
The verification report for barcode verification according to ISO 15416 is significantly larger
than the reports of other standards because the results are output separately for each of the
10 scan lines.
With a standard report (%V), the values are output sorted according to scan lines, in other
words, first the fields "Scan line grade", "Edge determination grade", "Minimum reflectance
grade", "Maximum reflectance grade", … for scan line 1, the same fields for scan line 2 etc.
The "Verification type" to "Overall grade" and "Module size " to "Angle" fields are output only
once in the standard report either at the very beginning or at the very end.
In an individually formatted verification report, the fields are sorted according to scan lines as
long as they follow each other directly without a separator in the formatting instruction.
Image processing
3.2 Code verification
SIMATIC MV420 / SIMATIC MV440
Operating Instructions, 10/2015, C79000-G8976-C334-03 87
Example
● "%Qt;%Q24%Q25" generates a report in the form:
Verification type;\r10 x [scan line grade; edge determination grade\r].
● "%Qt;%Q24;%Q25" generates a report in the form:
Verification type;\r10 x [scan line grade\r]; 10 x [edge determination grade\r];
Field name (TAG)
Value
Verification type (Qt) 6
If the exposure settings do not comply with the
standard: G
Status (Qs) 3 (Good), 2 (Fair) or 1 (Poor)
Overall grade (Q0)
4, 3, 2, 1 or 0
Overall grade (q0)
4.0 … 0.0
Scan line grade (Q24)
10 values: 4, 3, 2, 1, or 0
Edge determination grade (Q25)
10 values: 4, 3, 2, 1 or 0
Reference decode grade (Q7)
10 values: 4, 3, 2, 1 or 0
Minimum edge contrast grade (Q26)
10 values: 4, 3, 2, 1 or 0
Minimum edge contrast (q26)
10 values: 0 ... 100
Minimum reflectance grade (Q8)
10 values of 4, 3, 2, 1 or 0
Minimum reflectance value (q8)
10 values: 0 ... 100
Symbol contrast grade (Q1)
10 values: 4, 3, 2, 1 or 0
Symbol contrast (q1)
10 values: 0 ... 100
Modulation grade (Q6)
10 values: 4, 3, 2, 1 or 0
Modulation (q6)
10 values: 0.00 ... 1.00
Defects grade (Q27)
10 values: 4, 3, 2, 1 or 0
Defects (q27)
10 values: 0.00 ... 1.00
Decodability grade (Q28)
10 values: 4, 3, 2, 1 or 0
Decodability (q28)
10 values: 0.00 ... 1.00
Maximum reflectance value (q18)
10 values: 0 ... 100
Start quiet zone (q29) 10 values: 0.00 ... 10.00
Stop quiet zone (q30)
10 values: 0.00 ... 10.00
Nominal module size (q10) 0 to 99.9 mil
Aspect ratio 1 (q31)
1.00 ... 5.00
Aspect ratio 2 (q32)
1.00 ... 5.00
Aspect ratio 3 (q33)
1.00 ... 5.00
Height (q15)
0 to 9.99 inches
Width (q16)
0 to 9.99 inches
Angle (q17)
0 ... 360°
Image processing
3.2 Code verification
SIMATIC MV420 / SIMATIC MV440
88 Operating Instructions, 10/2015, C79000-G8976-C334-03
3.2.9.8
Standard report for OCR and OCV
The standard report uses OCR grades when OCR steps are used.
Field name (TAG)
Value
Verification type (Qt)
7
Poorest character quality (q40)
0 ... 255
Minimum character height (q42)
0 ... 255
Maximum character height (q43) 0 ... 255
Greatest confusion risk (q44)
0 ... 255
Average character quality (q45) 0 ... 255
Average confusion risk (q46)
0 ... 255
3.2.9.9
Standard report for Locator
The standard report uses Locator grades when Locator steps are used.
Field name (TAG)
Value
Verification type (Qt)
8
Match (q50)
0 ... 100
Conformity (q51)
0 ... 100
Combination of decoder and OCR steps
If you use decoder as well as OCR/locator steps in a program:
● The standard report belonging to the selected verification standard or, if "uncalibrated", to
the read code type is used.
● The OCR/locator grades can also be output via the relevant tags.
See also
Optical character recognition with "Text-Genius" and "Text-Genius Plus" (SIMATIC MV440
only) (Page 90)
3.2.9.10
Standard report for DotCode
Field name (TAG)
Value
Verification type (Qt)
9
Evaluation (Qs)
3 (Good), 2 (Fair) or 1 (Poor)
Overall grade (Q0)
4, 3, 2, 1 or 0
Contrast grade (Q1)
4, 3, 2, 1 or 0
Contrast (q1)
0 ... 100%
Grid non-uniformity grade (Q3)
4, 3, 2, 1 or 0
Grid non-uniformity (q3)
0.00 ... 1.00
Image processing
3.2 Code verification
SIMATIC MV420 / SIMATIC MV440
Operating Instructions, 10/2015, C79000-G8976-C334-03 89
Field name (TAG)
Value
Unused error correction grade (Q4)
4, 3, 2, 1 or 0
Unused error correction (q4) 0.00 ... 1.00
Print growth grade (Q9)
4, 3, 2, 1 or 0
Print growth (q9) 0.00 ... 1.40
Cell size grade (Q10)
4, 3, 2, 1 or 0
Cell size (q10)
0.0 ... m.n pixels
Image processing
3.3 Optical character recognition with "Text-Genius" and "Text-Genius Plus" (SIMATIC MV440 only)
SIMATIC MV420 / SIMATIC MV440
90 Operating Instructions, 10/2015, C79000-G8976-C334-03
3.3
Optical character recognition with "Text-Genius" and "Text-Genius
Plus" (SIMATIC MV440 only)
Optical Character Recognition and Optical Character Verification
"Optical Character Recognition" (OCR) allows not only machine-readable codes but also
human-readable plain text to be recognized and machine-processed.
With "Optical Character Verification" (OCV), the plain text read can also be compared with a
target specification and deviations in the read result can be detected. The readability of the
text can be accessed and rejected using a threshold value for the reading quality. However,
this OCV functionality is very different from a printing inspection, which involves comparison
of the printed image with a template. This task is not covered by the OCV functionality.
3.3.1
Text-Genius and Text-Genius Plus
There are two high-performance character recognition processes (Page 435) which can be
activated as required depending on the application requirements.
Text-Genius Plus offers all the benefits of Text-Genius character recognition plus additional
performance features.
3.3.2
Performance features of Text-Genius character recognition
Highlights of Text-Genius character recognition
● Flexible reading of multiple fonts such as OCR A, OCR B, without time-consuming
training
● Fast and reliable reading (up to 1 000 reads per minute)
● Lines of plain text and machine-readable codes can be flexibly combined and read in one
single image.
● Automatic text localization
● Automatic line detection (up to 12 x 15 lines)
● Flexible reading of character heights of between 15 and 220 pixels
● Reading of up to 12 image regions with independent settings
● Reading of mirrored, rotated and inverted text
● Numerous filter and comparison functions
Image processing
3.3 Optical character recognition with "Text-Genius" and "Text-Genius Plus" (SIMATIC MV440 only)
SIMATIC MV420 / SIMATIC MV440
Operating Instructions, 10/2015, C79000-G8976-C334-03 91
Integrated universal fonts
Fonts optimized for machine reading
The following fonts optimized for machine reading are supported:
Font
Typeface
OCR-A
OCR-B
Semifont M13
"Polyfont" setting
With the "Polyfont" setting, the following fonts (and similar fonts) are automatically detected
and read especially well and reliably.
Font
Typeface
Courier
Letter Gothic
Arial
Helvetica
Image processing
3.3 Optical character recognition with "Text-Genius" and "Text-Genius Plus" (SIMATIC MV440 only)
SIMATIC MV420 / SIMATIC MV440
92 Operating Instructions, 10/2015, C79000-G8976-C334-03
Font
Typeface
Century
Eurostile
Frutiger
Futura medium
Franklin Gothic
medium
Lucida Sans
Bookman medium
3.3.3
Performance features of Text-Genius Plus character recognition
Text-Genius Plus character recognition includes all Text-Genius character recognition
functions, but is far more advanced.
Highlights of Text-Genius Plus character recognition
● Text-Genius Plus provides all Text-Genius functions.
● Adjustment to printed image in the application:
– Special character fonts, e.g. with special characters
– Various different printing procedures (e.g. laser, ink, scribed, needled)
– Variations of characters
Image processing
3.3 Optical character recognition with "Text-Genius" and "Text-Genius Plus" (SIMATIC MV440 only)
SIMATIC MV420 / SIMATIC MV440
Operating Instructions, 10/2015, C79000-G8976-C334-03 93
● You can vary characters by creating your own fonts in the reader.
● Multiple styles can also be saved for each character.
● Up to five user fonts can be used in the reader.
● A wide range of standard fonts are available as a basis.
● Specific font creation ensures an optimal distinction between characters which are hard to
distinguish.
● Excellent performance:
– With 300 items/min: Up to 150 isolated characters + DMC per item
– With up to 1000 items/min: Up to 24 isolated characters per item
● High read reliability with very good print quality:
– > 99.5% with 24 isolated characters per item
– > 99.5% with 150 isolated characters with DMC match per item
● Optimization of custom fonts by supervised training in processing mode.
● Blob binarization method for accelerated reading:
– Up to 1500 items/min for up to 12 isolated characters per item
3.3.4
Supervised training
The Text Genius Plus character recognition supports process optimization through
supervised training. For this, character forms which were detected with less than optimal
quality are recorded in processing mode. The recorded data can be used to improve custom
fonts and optimize their reading reliability.
3.3.5
Examples of plain text applications:
The following examples illustrate applications that can be solved with the "Text Genius"
license and how some of the functions can be configured.
Prerequisites
Note
Change template: Template icon must be visible
To adjust the template, you need
to switch the Template icon to visible:
•
Activate the "Show program template" check box under "Options" > "Tools" > "View".
● SIMATIC-MV440 Code Reader (not SIMATIC MV420!)
● Firmware version V5.0 or higher (older versions can be upgraded)
● The Text Genius or Text-Genius Plus license must be have been transferred to the
reader (see "Transferring optional licenses (Page 177)" for more information)
Image processing
3.3 Optical character recognition with "Text-Genius" and "Text-Genius Plus" (SIMATIC MV440 only)
SIMATIC MV420 / SIMATIC MV440
94 Operating Instructions, 10/2015, C79000-G8976-C334-03
Application 1: Read single-line plain text on various materials
1. Select a program or the template from the "Programs" task.
2. Add a new OCR step.
3. In the "Read" tab in the image displayed, set the region of interest (ROI) containing the
text to be read in this OCR step.
4. Adjust the read settings to the image details.
5. Press the "Update" button in the "Read" tab in the image control to briefly check whether
your settings are correct.
If the settings are correct, a read result is displayed.
Remember the following
● Provide for adequate contrast for the text.
● The character height must be within the range of 15 to 55 pixels.
Character heights of up to 220 pixels are possible if you have configured the
undersampling function in the "Improve image" field.
● The text orientation should be approximately horizontal. The deviation from the horizontal
must be <± 5°.
● If possible, avoid dirty backgrounds and interfering edges in the text field.
The following images illustrate the capability for reading with the default settings, using a real
example:
Figure 3-9 Read results: 9238072
Image processing
3.3 Optical character recognition with "Text-Genius" and "Text-Genius Plus" (SIMATIC MV440 only)
SIMATIC MV420 / SIMATIC MV440
Operating Instructions, 10/2015, C79000-G8976-C334-03 95
Figure 3-10 Read results: 9230120
The following images demonstrate capability for reading using real examples with varying
character boldness:
Figure 3-11 Read results: F4KEWF4KWY7C
Image processing
3.3 Optical character recognition with "Text-Genius" and "Text-Genius Plus" (SIMATIC MV440 only)
SIMATIC MV420 / SIMATIC MV440
96 Operating Instructions, 10/2015, C79000-G8976-C334-03
Figure 3-12 Read results: 15010829006116
Figure 3-13 Read results: 15010826009503
Image processing
3.3 Optical character recognition with "Text-Genius" and "Text-Genius Plus" (SIMATIC MV440 only)
SIMATIC MV420 / SIMATIC MV440
Operating Instructions, 10/2015, C79000-G8976-C334-03 97
Application 2: Decoding a data matrix code and reading plain text in the same image
The task
Both the data matrix code and plain text must be read from the image in the same read
cycle. The plain text is located next to the data matrix code in this example. Both codes are
printed together, so they are always legible and do not overlap. The reading results must be
output via an interface.
1. If there is no decoder step yet, add a decoder step to the template under "Programs".
2. Add an OCR step and proceed as in application 1.
Image processing
3.3 Optical character recognition with "Text-Genius" and "Text-Genius Plus" (SIMATIC MV440 only)
SIMATIC MV420 / SIMATIC MV440
98 Operating Instructions, 10/2015, C79000-G8976-C334-03
Note
Avoid disturbing structures within the ROIs
If possible, avoid disturbing structures within this ROI, which might be confused with text:
e.g edges or portions of the data matrix codes.
3. Save these settings in the template and return to the "Adjustment - Set image" page.
Both the data matrix code as well as the plain text is found:
Preview of reading result
]d201086912345678902113234246797654304935\x1D1708031810X2512110004935(01)08
691234567890\x0A(21)132N246mN543o4935\x0A(17)080318\x0A(1o)x251211ooo4935\x0
A
Explanation of this reading result
● The reading result of code and plain text recognition is sequentially displayed.
● The "\x0A" output indicates that a new line in the read text begins at this point.
The result of the plain text recognition is still not correct using the default settings for
character recognition.
Note
Why does this happen?
Because plain text is not clearly defined, several reading tasks can be correctly performed
even by humans only due to their previous knowledge, expectations and experience. To
work reliably and consistently, mechanical optical character
recognition also requires this
type of previous knowledge. The more knowledge you can provide for your application, the
better.
Such reading errors can be easily eliminated if you provide some information for more
reliable and consistent character recognition.
Image processing
3.3 Optical character recognition with "Text-Genius" and "Text-Genius Plus" (SIMATIC MV440 only)
SIMATIC MV420 / SIMATIC MV440
Operating Instructions, 10/2015, C79000-G8976-C334-03 99
Go through the parameters of the OCR step in Programs/Template, starting with the "Read"
tab.
1. If the decoder step is the first processing step in the step sequence, set the ROI position
as "Follow ROI1".
This means that the ROI of the OCR step follows the position of the data matrix code in
the current image and is always positioned at exactly the correct position for reading.
2. Character spacing:
In the example, the characters are printed very close, so you change the setting from
"Default" to "Narrow".
3. Characters occurring:
Restrict the alphabet your application uses to the characters that are actually used, i.e.
'()0123456789X "(can also be entered as: "()[ 0-9] X")
After saving these settings, the read result in "Adjustment - Set image" appears as follows:
]d201086912345678902113234246797654304935\x1D1708031810X2512110004935(01)08
691234567890(21)13234246797654304935(17)080318(10)X2512110004935
The plain text has now been read correctly with these settings.
Many more options are available on the other OCR tabs, with which you can provide more
information and make further adjustments to your application. To do this, use the information
about the parameters in the online help!
Note
Increasing read reliability and processing speed
If you are
working with the Text-Genius Plus license and save the typeface as a user-
defined
character font, you will improve the reading reliability and increase the processing speed.
You create character fonts with the user interface of the reader in the character font library in
the Programs task You can use the "Monitored learning" function to easily change from an
integrated universal font to a user
-defined character font.
The processing speed of custom
-defined character fonts can also be increased by selecting
t
he "Fast+ (Blob)" binarization method.
You set this function on the user interface of the reader in the Programs task: Read plain text
-
OCR step - Read tab - Preprocessing - Text binarization.
See also
Read plain text (OCR step) (Page 219)
Image processing
3.3 Optical character recognition with "Text-Genius" and "Text-Genius Plus" (SIMATIC MV440 only)
SIMATIC MV420 / SIMATIC MV440
100 Operating Instructions, 10/2015, C79000-G8976-C334-03
3.3.6
Quality characteristics in optical character recognition
Fast feedback about the reliability of the character recognition
To obtain fast feedback about the reliability of the character recognition:
Just like during code verification, during optical character recognition, quality characteristics
are calculated and output on the user interface or via the interfaces.
Quality characteristic
Value output
Poorest character quality The value output is the poorest (lowest) probability value of all the
characters found.
Since plain text cannot be uniquely identified, a probability is calcu-
lated for a character that is found. This can be interpreted as a
match between the printed a theoretical, "ideal" character.
Highest confusion risk The value output is the poorest (lowest) probability difference of all
the characters found.
For each identified character position, up to seven character hypoth-
eses each with their own probability are calculated. The hypothesis
with the highest probability is selected as the read result for the
character position. The confusion risk is the difference in probability
between the two hypotheses with the highest evaluation.
Minimum character height Height in pixels of the smallest character found measured perpen-
dicular to the reading direction.
Maximum character height Height in pixels of the highest character found measured perpen-
dicular to the reading direction.
Average character quality
Average probability of all characters found
Average confusion risk
Average probability difference for all characters found
Assignment of the numeric evaluation of OCR to the quality levels
Grade
4
3
2
1
0
Poorest character quality (OCQ)
≥ 208
≥ 156
≥ 104
≥ 52
< 52
Highest confusion risk (OCC)
≥ 208
≥ 156
≥ 104
≥ 52
< 52
Minimum character height (OCL) > 26
and
≤ 30
> 30 and
< 40
≥ 20 and
< 25
or
≥ 40 and
< 45
≥ 45 and
< 50
< 20
or
≥ 50
Maximum character height (OCH) > 26
and
≤ 30
> 30 and
< 40
≥ 20 and
< 25
or
≥ 40 and
< 45
≥ 45 and
< 50
< 20
or
> 50
Average character quality (OAQ)
≥ 208
≥ 156
≥ 104
≥ 52
< 52
Average confusion risk (OAC)
≥ 208
≥ 156
≥ 104
≥ 52
< 52
Image processing
3.4 Object recognition with Pat-Genius (SIMATIC MV440 only)
SIMATIC MV420 / SIMATIC MV440
Operating Instructions, 10/2015, C79000-G8976-C334-03 101
3.4
Object recognition with Pat-Genius (SIMATIC MV440 only)
3.4.1
The term "object recognition"
Object recognition - definition
The term "object recognition" describes methods for identifying a known object within an
object space using optical, acoustic or other physical recognition processes. The presence of
an object and its position and orientation are determined in an image or section of the image.
Object recognition - optical recognition process Pat-Genius
Pat-Genius is an optical recognition process for object recognition. Prior to recognition, the
object is stored as a model in a so-called model library. With the help of this model, the
object can then be searched for and recognized in the image.
Object recognition - application
Object recognition is a function often required in industrial image processing. With Pat-
Genius object recognition, the SIMATIC MV440 reader has a very extensive, powerful and
flexible image processing library.
As of firmware V6.0, Pat-Genius object recognition can be integrated seamlessly into the
existing operator control and application concept of the SIMATIC MV440 readers.
● Objects that need to be recognized can be stored in up to five model libraries.
Depending on their size, several models and also very different objects can be stored in
each model library. This is done, as with SIMATIC MV440, interactively with the
integrated user interface.
● Model libraries are not only available for a specific program but can also be used by
several programs.
● In one program, up to twelve object recognition steps can activate different models of a
model library.
This means that a single program can flexibly implement a task that can be divided into a
maximum of twelve subtasks.
The subtasks can be very different and versatile: see section Performance features of
Pat-Genius object recognition (Page 102).
Image processing
3.4 Object recognition with Pat-Genius (SIMATIC MV440 only)
SIMATIC MV420 / SIMATIC MV440
102 Operating Instructions, 10/2015, C79000-G8976-C334-03
● Apart from the normal functions for object recognition such as determining the object
position, angle of rotation and quality, the Pat-Genius algorithm has the following
properties:
– Invariance (= insensitivity) to size scaling (selectable range)
– Very high accuracy
– Simultaneous recognition of up to 200 instances of one or more models in one step.
– Simultaneous search for different models.
– Important for classification tasks: Very good selectivity even with very similar objects.
● By means of comparisons with desired specifications in the form of the processing result
when saving the program, even complex presence checks can be created very quickly
and simply.
● A preview function is available in the tabs of the locator step. At all times, the preview
function provides feedback about the effects of the currently active settings.
● The very flexible parameter assignment of the result output using format tags also
provides many options for representing the object recognition results. This means that
results that are important for your application can always be transferred to the process.
You will find information on working with the Pat-Genius functions in the section Model
library (Page 238)
Note
Detailed description of the parameters in the online help
For a detailed
description of the parameters and possible values, refer to the online help.
3.4.2
Performance features of Pat-Genius object recognition
Requirements for using the Pat-Genius license
Note
No Pat-Genius license necessary for tracking search ROIs
To use
locator results for tracking search ROIs with "ROI-oriented", no Pat-Genius license is
necessary.
● SIMATIC MV440 code reader
● Firmware as of version V6.0; older versions can be upgraded.
● Pat-Genius license must have been transferred to the reader: See Transferring optional
licenses (Page 177)
Image processing
3.4 Object recognition with Pat-Genius (SIMATIC MV440 only)
SIMATIC MV420 / SIMATIC MV440
Operating Instructions, 10/2015, C79000-G8976-C334-03 103
Performance features
Pat-Genius object recognition is based on a fully developed and versatile implementation on
the reader. This means that many extremely different tasks can be solved. The most
important performance features of Pat-Genius object recognition are:
● Precise location of objects in the image, output or checks for:
– Position
– Angle of rotation
– Scaling
– Quality
– Number
– Object class
● Identification (classification)
– Reliable distinction of similar objects
– OK/N_OK distinction
– Tracking function e.g. for OCR
– OCR for any symbol
– Presence check
– Complex check for completeness
– Flexible combination of up to twelve subtasks
Image processing
3.4 Object recognition with Pat-Genius (SIMATIC MV440 only)
SIMATIC MV420 / SIMATIC MV440
104 Operating Instructions, 10/2015, C79000-G8976-C334-03
3.4.3
Examples of object recognition tasks with Pat-Genius
The following examples illustrate the applications that can be implemented with the Pat-
Genius license.
Examples of locating objects
Figure 3-14 Location of a reference mark and position output
Image processing
3.4 Object recognition with Pat-Genius (SIMATIC MV440 only)
SIMATIC MV420 / SIMATIC MV440
Operating Instructions, 10/2015, C79000-G8976-C334-03 105
Figure 3-15 Location of an object and output of the position, angle of rotation, scaling and quality
Figure 3-16 Location of the LEDs and lenses. Output of the position of the LEDs and angle of rotation
of the lens.
Image processing
3.4 Object recognition with Pat-Genius (SIMATIC MV440 only)
SIMATIC MV420 / SIMATIC MV440
106 Operating Instructions, 10/2015, C79000-G8976-C334-03
Examples of identification (classification)
Figure 3-17 Variants of chain links that need to be reliably identified
Figure 3-18 Reliable identification with result
Image processing
3.4 Object recognition with Pat-Genius (SIMATIC MV440 only)
SIMATIC MV420 / SIMATIC MV440
Operating Instructions, 10/2015, C79000-G8976-C334-03 107
Figure 3-19 N_OK if the arrangement is mirrored
Examples of OCR for any symbol
Figure 3-20 Detection of the Siemens logo and approval marks
Image processing
3.4 Object recognition with Pat-Genius (SIMATIC MV440 only)
SIMATIC MV420 / SIMATIC MV440
108 Operating Instructions, 10/2015, C79000-G8976-C334-03
Figure 3-21 Detection of Chinese labeling on packaging labels
Example of a presence check
Figure 3-22 Checking the presence of cover screws and the test label
Image processing
3.4 Object recognition with Pat-Genius (SIMATIC MV440 only)
SIMATIC MV420 / SIMATIC MV440
Operating Instructions, 10/2015, C79000-G8976-C334-03 109
Example of a complex presence check
Figure 3-23 Complex presence check: Lens, LEDs, Siemens label are present
3.4.4
Operation
The Pat-Genius object recognition is implemented by inserting a step of the type “Recognize
object”.
Note
In order to be able to insert an object recognition step, you first have to store the object to be
recognized in a model library. For more information on this refer to the section
Model library
(Page
238) and to the online help.
The parameters of "Recognize object" steps are assigned using four tabs that map the
logical order of object recognition.
Basic settings for the models to be searched for can be made in the "Model" tab. These
include the selection of the model library to be used and the models contained therein, the
position and size of the Region of Interest (ROI), and the parameters for optimizing the
feature search. The "Update display" function is used to execute a feature search in which
no assignment is yet made to models. All the features found in the ROI are plotted in the
image and allow you to check whether all the main features were found with the selected
settings.
The classification, which means the assignment of found features to the objects to be
recognized, is configured in the "Find" tab. The main settings include the number of objects
to be recognized and the tolerance with respect to scaling and rotation in relation to size and
rotation angle of the models stored in the model library. In the "Recognition" and
Image processing
3.4 Object recognition with Pat-Genius (SIMATIC MV440 only)
SIMATIC MV420 / SIMATIC MV440
110 Operating Instructions, 10/2015, C79000-G8976-C334-03
"Positioning" groups, the classification can be adapted to the application requirements
regarding accuracy / strictness and speed. Please note that a higher processing speed
usually comes at the expense of recognition accuracy.
The "Filter" tab is used to further process the results after the completion of the object
recognition, especially in the search for multiple objects. In the "Sorting" group, the output
order of the found objects can be adjusted (according to quality, position, etc.) for this
purpose. Information on the expected number and order can be entered in the "Reference"
group. Please note that to reliably apply the reference you must select a suitable object
ordering for the application, usually a position-based ordering such as "top-bottom" or
"String".
The "Result" tab is used mainly for output formatting. Various decision criteria for OK or
N_OK results can be selected for this purpose. The output per object and the combined
output of the step is defined using two format strings. When the reference function is used in
the "Filter" tab, an automatic comparison can be performed between the reference and the
actual result. In addition to the number and class of objects found, the deviation in rotation or
position can also be controlled.
Note
Detailed description of the parameters in the online help
For a detailed description of the parameters and possible values, refer to the online help.
3.4.5
Quality features during object detection
Fast feedback on the reliability of the object recognition
To obtain fast feedback about the reliability of the object recognition, execute a test
recognition in the "Find" tab by clicking the "Update" button. When you then click the "Show
details" button, you can select the individual objects. As is the case with code verification, the
following quality characteristics are then displayed for the selected objects:
Quality characteristic
Value output
Conformity (LFI) The output value indicates the normalized, average deviation from
matched model features and the currently found features of the
object instance.
• A value of 100 means an average deviation of zero.
• Accordingly, the value 0 signifies: No match.
Match (LMA) The output value indicates the proportion of matched model fea-
tures.
• A value of 100 means that 100% of the required model features
were successfully matched.
• A value of 0 means that none of the required model features
were matched.
Image processing
3.4 Object recognition with Pat-Genius (SIMATIC MV440 only)
SIMATIC MV420 / SIMATIC MV440
Operating Instructions, 10/2015, C79000-G8976-C334-03 111
Quality characteristic
Value output
Clear percentage (LCL) The output value describes the clear percentage of the instance.
• A value of 100 means that the found object instance is free of
disturbances.
Note
This value is calculated only if the "Minimum clear percentage" pa-
rameter is enabled in the "Find" tab of the relevant locator step.
Otherwise, the value 100 is output.
Rotation tolerance (LRT) The output value describes the adherence to the limit value set for
rotation deviation.
• A value of 100 means that the rotation of the found object in-
stance corresponds exactly to the stored rotation.
• A value of 0 means that the angle deviation was well off target
(but not exceeded).
Note
This value is calculated only if the "Max. angle deviation" parameter
is enabled in the "Result" tab of the relevant locator step. Otherwise,
the value 100 is output.
Position tolerance (LPT) The output value describes the adherence to the limit value set for
position deviation.
• A value of 100 means that the position of the found object in-
stance corresponds exactly to the stored position.
• A value of 0 means that the position deviation in the x or y direc-
tion was well off target (but not exceeded).
Note
This value is calculated only if the "Max. position deviation" parame-
ter is enabled in the "Result" tab of the relevant locator step. Other-
wise, the value 100 is output.
Assignment of the numeric evaluation of locator to the quality levels
Grade
4
3
2
1
0
Conformity (LFI)
≥ 84
≥ 63
≥ 42
≥ 21
< 21
Match (LMA)
≥ 84
≥ 63
≥ 42
≥ 21
< 21
Clear percentage (LCL)
≥ 84
≥ 63
≥ 42
≥ 21
< 21
Rotation tolerance (LRT) ≥ 84 ≥ 63 ≥ 42 ≥ 21 < 21
Position tolerance (LPT)
≥ 84
≥ 63
≥ 42
≥ 21
< 21
Image processing
3.5 Options for image acquisition and image processing
SIMATIC MV420 / SIMATIC MV440
112 Operating Instructions, 10/2015, C79000-G8976-C334-03
3.5
Options for image acquisition and image processing
Image acquisition options
The image acquisition options of the reader were developed for a wide range of applications.
There are three different ways of controlling image acquisition and processing:
● Single trigger
● Auto-trigger (not available for SIMATIC MV420 SR-B)
● Scan (not available for SIMATIC MV420 SR-B)
Architecture of the internal processing sequence
The principle underlying the processing performed by the reader is a buffered processing
method in three steps:
● Image acquisition
● Decoding (reading)
● Outputting.
Between each processing step, the reader has a buffer and you can configure the size of the
buffer depending on the application.
This allows the ideal throughput to be achieved in every processing step resulting in the
maximum overall throughput for the reader and a flexible application.
Figure 3-24 Architecture of the internal processing sequence
Image processing
3.5 Options for image acquisition and image processing
SIMATIC MV420 / SIMATIC MV440
Operating Instructions, 10/2015, C79000-G8976-C334-03 113
3.5.1
"Single trigger" image acquisition option
How it works
With this setting, one image is acquired per trigger followed by one read.
If several objects need to be acquired in a very short time, acquired images can be buffered
before they are processed.
Up to 50 objects can therefore be acquired at an image frequency of more than 80 images
per second and then processed (SIMATIC MV440 SR models at half resolution).
To allow this, the images can be buffered and the image buffer size can be selected:
● SIMATIC MV420 can buffer 15 images.
● SIMATIC MV440 SR and SIMATIC MV440 HR can buffer 50 images.
● SIMATIC MV440 UR can buffer 30 images.
The reader transfers the results of the reads as soon as it has processed them.
"Image buffer size 1" setting
If the image buffer size is set to the value 1, this mode corresponds to a sequential
processing chain of trigger ➜ image acquisition ➜ processing ➜ result transfer. The next
trigger comes only after processing is completed.
Figure 3-25 Time diagram of option single trigger for image buffer size 1
"Image buffer size > 1" setting
With image buffer sizes greater than 1, intermediate buffering takes place between image
acquisition and processing and between processing and result output.
Image processing
3.5 Options for image acquisition and image processing
SIMATIC MV420 / SIMATIC MV440
114 Operating Instructions, 10/2015, C79000-G8976-C334-03
Image acquisition can at times be performed in a faster sequence and processing can also
buffer results briefly prior to transfer. This allows brief periods of peak load to be handled.
Figure 3-26 Time diagram of option single trigger for image buffer size > 1; buffer = 2 in this example
3.5.2
"Auto trigger" image acquisition option
How it works
With this setting, codes entering the viewing field of the reader are read automatically. In this
case, the reader does not require any external trigger signals, for example from a light
barrier.
This option is particularly suitable for the following objects:
● Objects with which precise triggering using a light barrier is difficult.
The monitoring frequency with which the reader monitors the viewing field can be higher
than 90 Hz, for example SIMATIC MV440 SR with half resolution and good DMC quality.
The "Auto trigger" option operates in time with the steps. The acquired images are decoded
in the same clock cycle. The "Auto trigger" option can therefore be used continuously without
time limits.
To optimize the power used by this function, the monitoring can be started by an initial
trigger and can then terminate itself after a selectable time or a falling trigger edge.
Image processing
3.5 Options for image acquisition and image processing
SIMATIC MV420 / SIMATIC MV440
Operating Instructions, 10/2015, C79000-G8976-C334-03 115
Figure 3-27 Time diagram of the Auto trigger option
Auto trigger with initial trigger and timeout
1
Limit of the decoding time
2
Image acquisition time
3
Interval of image acquisition
4
Set timeout
Triggers after the procedure has started are ignored until the result has been transferred.
Figure 3-28 Time diagram auto trigger with initial trigger and timeout
Note
1 (limit of the decoding time) = 3 (interval of image acquisition)!
Number of acquired images = {(Timeout/Acquisition interval) - 1}
Image processing
3.5 Options for image acquisition and image processing
SIMATIC MV420 / SIMATIC MV440
116 Operating Instructions, 10/2015, C79000-G8976-C334-03
Auto trigger edge-triggered with timeout
1
Limit of the decoding time
2
Image acquisition time
3
Interval of image acquisition
4
Timeout
Rising trigger edges after the procedure has started are ignored until the result has been transferred.
Figure 3-29 Time diagram auto trigger with the edge-triggered start/stop option
Note
1 (limit of the decoding time) = 3 (interval of image acquisition)!
Number of acquired images = {(Timeout/Acquisition interval) - 1}
3.5.3
"Scan" image acquisition option
How it works
With this setting, the reader is suitable for scanning codes located, for example, on a rotating
axle.
In contrast to the "Auto trigger" option, acquired images can also be buffered and processed
later. Only one code is read per trigger signal. The code must be fully visible in one of the
acquired images.
If a code cannot be decoded in any of the acquired images, an N_OK read is output.
Image processing
3.5 Options for image acquisition and image processing
SIMATIC MV420 / SIMATIC MV440
Operating Instructions, 10/2015, C79000-G8976-C334-03 117
With the default settings, with first read success following triggering, the read result is output
and further processing of the scan sequence is exited. With the "Options"/"Image
sequences" function, you can change this behavior as follows:
● With the selection Result output: "Best read result", all configured image acquisitions are
made and evaluated. Following this, the qualitatively best read result is output.
● If you select "All read results", all the configured image acquisitions are made and
evaluated and all successfully evaluated image acquisitions are output.
By using the "edge-triggered start/stop" option, you can adapt the image acquisition
sequence dynamically to your process using a trigger signal.
1
Limit of the decoding time
2
Image acquisition time
3
Interval of image acquisition
Figure 3-30 Time diagram of the scan option with multiple trigger signals
Image processing
3.5 Options for image acquisition and image processing
SIMATIC MV420 / SIMATIC MV440
118 Operating Instructions, 10/2015, C79000-G8976-C334-03
1
Limit of the decoding time
2
Image acquisition time
3
Interval of image acquisition
Figure 3-31 Time diagram scan with the edge-triggered start/stop option
3.5.4
Image acquisition in program sequence mode
How it works
● You can enable the "Program sequence" option on the "Extras" tab in "Options".
With this option, you can evaluate several image acquisitions with different image settings for
each trigger, if, for example:
● Objects have a very large dynamic range in terms of contrast and reflectance, that cannot
be covered with one image acquisition setting.
● Codes or plain text must be searched for and read at different, defined positions.
● Several evaluations, including different evaluations (for example, with different program
settings) are to be performed for each object.
● The number of definable program steps of an individual program is not sufficient.
Image processing
3.5 Options for image acquisition and image processing
SIMATIC MV420 / SIMATIC MV440
Operating Instructions, 10/2015, C79000-G8976-C334-03 119
Evaluation attempts
In "Program sequence" mode, processing is attempted with up to five saved codes for each
trigger. With the default setting, a separate image is acquired and evaluated with the settings
saved in this program for each program in the program sequence. Following the first
successful evaluation, processing of the trigger is stopped and the result is output.
Each evaluated program uses the cycle time limit specified in this program. The maximum
cycle time for the complete program sequence thus corresponds to the sum of the maximum
cycle times of the activated programs.
"Best read result" and "All read results" settings
In program sequence mode, as with the image acquisition option "Scan", you can use the
"Best read result" and "All read results" settings.
● If you select "Best read result", an evaluation attempt is always made with all activated
programs. All successful evaluations are compared based on a selectable quality
criterion. The qualitatively best result is output.
● If you select "All read results", an evaluation attempt is also made with all activated
programs. All successful evaluations are output.
Same image settings for all programs to be evaluated
If you want the same image settings to be used for all programs to be evaluated, you can
also activate the "Use 1st image" option. In this case, only one image acquisition is made for
each trigger. The settings of the program in the program sequence that has the lowest
number are used. The image acquired is then used for processing for all programs in the
program sequence.
3.5.5
Match options for Track&Trace tasks
3.5.5.1
Trigger-synchronized matching (XMATCH command)
Note
Availability of XMATCH
The XMATCH function is not available for SI
MATIC MV420 SR-B.
The XMATCH function is extremely versatile and optimized specifically for Track&Trace
applications.
XMATCH is available via the interfaces TCP, RS-232 and ASM. The section "Process
interfacing via an automation system (PLC, PC)" (Page 279) explains the XMATCH
command.
Image processing
3.5 Options for image acquisition and image processing
SIMATIC MV420 / SIMATIC MV440
120 Operating Instructions, 10/2015, C79000-G8976-C334-03
Properties of this function
● The comparison default (match string) can be changed "on the fly" from object to object.
● The match default can be set separately and individually for all codes (including
multicode) and lines of plain text (OCR steps) to be read.
● A synchronization mechanism ensures the checking of each individual object without
gaps.
● The function is optimized for manufacturing processes including those with very high
object rates, in other words, for high manufacturing speed.
● Integration in the plant is possible via Ethernet/TCP, ASM or RS-232.
Example of an application
Image processing
3.5 Options for image acquisition and image processing
SIMATIC MV420 / SIMATIC MV440
Operating Instructions, 10/2015, C79000-G8976-C334-03 121
A typical example of the use of XMATCH it is a manufacturing process in which packaging is
printed with individual information:
● Use by date
● Serial number
● Manufacturing location etc.
The information can be represented both as 1D/2D code or as plain text. The task of the
reader is to check that the printing is correct and readable.
A match string is assigned using the three indexes trigger ID, program number and ROI ID
(OCR) or code index ("Read code").
Synchronization is achieved with a trigger ID. The trigger ID is a counter of the external
trigger signals. This counter is reset to "1" by the reader at the start of processing mode,
when there is a program change, and following an error.
The match strings are buffered. The match string buffer has the following size:
● Maximum of 200 KB with SIMATIC MV440 readers
● Maximum of 100 KB with SIMATIC MV420 SR-P
At the same time, it is also possible to buffer in advance:
● A maximum of 20 trigger IDs with SIMATIC MV440 readers
● A maximum of ten trigger IDs with SIMATIC MV420 SR-P.
With XMATCH, you can also send match strings with a "permanent flag" that become valid
starting at the next trigger or after a specific trigger ID.
Up to two permanent settings (XMATCH with permanent flag) can be buffered. If a third
permanent setting is received, the last received setting is overwritten.
Example
If the permanent buffer is empty, XMATCH commands with a permanent flag are received
with the trigger IDs 50, 150, and 100 one after the other. The buffer then contains the
corresponding match strings for the trigger IDs 50 and 100.
Availability of XMATCH
The availability of XMATCH depends on the image acquisition mode.
● With single trigger, autotrigger with initial trigger and scanning, the full functionality of
XMATCH is available.
● In the image acquisition mode "autotrigger" (no external trigger signal), XMATCH can
only be used with a permanent flag and trigger ID "0". This means that the new match
strings are valid starting at the next image acquisition.
Logging the received match strings
If enabled under Options/Diagnostics&Monitoring ("Match string frames" checkbox selected),
the match strings in the diagnostic data sets will also be logged.
Image processing
3.5 Options for image acquisition and image processing
SIMATIC MV420 / SIMATIC MV440
122 Operating Instructions, 10/2015, C79000-G8976-C334-03
3.5.5.2
Simple match (MATCH mode and MATCH match)
Note
MATCH command not suitable for changing during production
In contrast to the XMATCH command, the MATCH command is not suitable for changing
during production.
For comparison tasks that are not complex, the match string can:
● Be specified permanently when the program is saved.
● be specified by a simple MATCH command from a connected controller or a PC.
MATCH is available via the interfaces TCP, RS-232 and ASM. The section "Process
interfacing via an automation system (PLC, PC) (Page 279)" explains the MATCH command
and the structure of the MATCH command in detail.
Static match default when saving a program
For applications in which the match default is already known during commissioning, the
match can be defined and activated when the program is saved.
● Match options are available for 1D/2D codes on the "Decoder"/"Match options" tabs
under" "Options".
● To compare a plain text with "Text-Genius" optical character recognition:
The default can be specified separately for each OCR step in "OCR/Filter", "String
specification". The comparison is activated with "OCR"/"Output".
Simple comparison default by the connected controller/PC
The use of the MATCH command it is practical if, for example, the current date, the batch
number or similar needs to be updated prior to the start of production. The MATCH
command can be sent to the reader via the TCP, RS-232 and ASM interfaces.
The match string received by the reader is valid as of the next trigger.
The sent match string remains valid:
● until another match string is sent
● until processing mode is ended (for example by a fault)
If a further match string was sent and in the meantime no evaluation was triggered, the
previously sent match string is overwritten.
If the relevant comparison mode is enabled, a sent match string for the comparison of the
content is used in the following situations:
● A single 1D/2D code
● For each single 1D/2D code (with multicode)
● For each OCR step
Image processing
3.5 Options for image acquisition and image processing
SIMATIC MV420 / SIMATIC MV440
Operating Instructions, 10/2015, C79000-G8976-C334-03 123
Logging the received match strings
If the received match strings are not deactivated, the match strings are logged in the
diagnostics data records. With a suitable format text, used match strings can be output as
the result string and also logged in the diagnostics data records.
Image processing
3.5 Options for image acquisition and image processing
SIMATIC MV420 / SIMATIC MV440
124 Operating Instructions, 10/2015, C79000-G8976-C334-03
SIMATIC MV420 / SIMATIC MV440
Operating Instructions, 10/2015, C79000-G8976-C334-03 125
Network and system interfacing
4
4.1
Overview
You have the following options for the acquisition and processing of recognition values
during system configuration of the reader:
● PROFIBUS DP-V1 with ASM 456 and FB45 or Ident profile
● PROFINET IO with RF180C and FB45 or Ident profile
● Onboard PROFINET IO and FB79 or Ident profile
● RS232 interface *)
● Ethernet interface (TCP/IP)
● SIMATIC S7-300 with ASM475 and FB45
● SIMATIC ET 200M with ASM475 and FB45
● SIMATIC ET200pro with RF170C and FB45
● Ethernet/IP with RF181EIP
) With SIMATIC MV420 only available when the ASM interface is not being used.
Note
No separate ASM connector in the SIMATIC MV420
There is no separate ASM connector in the SIMATIC MV420. The ASM interface is
implemented via the digital I/O cable and must b
e connected via this when required. The
applications listed below are also available with SIMATIC
MV420.
Other possible combinations include:
● Reader and RFID reader on an ASM 456
● Auto-trigger
● Image display via WinCC flexible
● External lamp
Network and system interfacing
4.2 System setup via PROFIBUS DP with ASM 456 and FB45 or Ident profile
SIMATIC MV420 / SIMATIC MV440
126 Operating Instructions, 10/2015, C79000-G8976-C334-03
4.2
System setup via PROFIBUS DP with ASM 456 and FB45 or Ident
profile
Acquisition and output of recognition values in a PROFIBUS DP environment
Figure 4-1 Example: System setup via PROFIBUS DP-V1 with ASM 456 and FB45 or Ident profile
System characteristics
● Attachment to PROFIBUS is via the ASM interface of the reader and an ASM 456.
● The connection to an automation system is established via PROFIBUS DP.
● The reader is controlled via PROFIBUS DP-V1 by the automation system with a function
block FB45 or Ident profile.
● The results are output to the automation system via PROFIBUS DP.
● The power for the reader is supplied by the ASM 456 (SIMATIC MV440 only).
Network and system interfacing
4.2 System setup via PROFIBUS DP with ASM 456 and FB45 or Ident profile
SIMATIC MV420 / SIMATIC MV440
Operating Instructions, 10/2015, C79000-G8976-C334-03 127
● The reader is triggered either via the digital I/O or the automation system or by the
integrated autotrigger function.
● A PC/programming device is connected via the Ethernet port to allow adjustment of the
device.
Network and system interfacing
4.3 System setup via PROFINET IO with RF180C, FB45 or Ident profile
SIMATIC MV420 / SIMATIC MV440
128 Operating Instructions, 10/2015, C79000-G8976-C334-03
4.3
System setup via PROFINET IO with RF180C, FB45 or Ident profile
Acquisition and output of recognition values in a PROFINET IO environment
Figure 4-2 Example: System setup via PROFINET IO with RF180C, FB45 or Ident profile
System characteristics
● Attachment to PROFINET is via the ASM interface of the reader and an RF180C.
● The connection to an automation system is established via PROFINET.
● The reader is controlled via PROFINET by the automation system with a function block
FB45 or Ident profile.
● The results are output to the automation system via PROFINET.
● The power for the reader is supplied via an RF180C (SIMATIC MV440 only).
● The reader is triggered either via the digital I/O, the ASM (PROFINET) or by the
integrated auto-trigger function.
● A PC/programming device is connected via the Ethernet port to allow adjustment of the
device.
Network and system interfacing
4.4 System setup of the reader as PROFINET IO device and FB79 or Ident profile
SIMATIC MV420 / SIMATIC MV440
Operating Instructions, 10/2015, C79000-G8976-C334-03 129
4.4
System setup of the reader as PROFINET IO device and FB79 or
Ident profile
Acquisition and output of recognition values with a PROFINET IO device
Note
Power supply with "Power over Ethernet" (PoE)
If the reader is supplied by PoE, for example when connected to a SCALANCE
X108POE,
the power IO
RS-232 cable is not needed.
Note
PoE functionality not available for older devices
The PoE functionality is not available for older devices with the following article numbers:
•
6GF3440-0CD10
•
6GF3440-0GE10
•
6GF3440-0CD11
•
6GF3440-0GE11
•
6GF3440-0CD21
Network and system interfacing
4.4 System setup of the reader as PROFINET IO device and FB79 or Ident profile
SIMATIC MV420 / SIMATIC MV440
130 Operating Instructions, 10/2015, C79000-G8976-C334-03
Figure 4-3 Example: System setup of the reader as PROFINET IO device and FB79 or Ident profile
System characteristics
● There is a connection to a PROFINET IO compliant automation system via Ethernet and
a switch.
● The reader is controlled by the automation system.
● The results from the specimens are output to the automation system via PROFINET IO.
● The reader is triggered either via the digital I/O, PROFINET or by the integrated auto-
trigger function.
● A PC/programming device is connected via Ethernet and a switch to allow adjustment of
the device.
Network and system interfacing
4.5 System setup via the RS-232 interface
SIMATIC MV420 / SIMATIC MV440
Operating Instructions, 10/2015, C79000-G8976-C334-03 131
4.5
System setup via the RS-232 interface
Acquisition and output of recognition values via the RS-232 interface
Figure 4-4 Example: System setup via the RS-232 interface
System characteristics
● The reader results are output via the RS-232 interface.
● The reader is triggered either via the digital I/O, RS-232 or by the integrated auto-trigger
function.
● A PC/programming device is connected via Ethernet to allow adjustment of the device.
Network and system interfacing
4.6 System setup via the Ethernet interface
SIMATIC MV420 / SIMATIC MV440
132 Operating Instructions, 10/2015, C79000-G8976-C334-03
4.6
System setup via the Ethernet interface
Acquisition and output of recognition values with Ethernet
Note
Power supply with "Power over Ethernet" (PoE)
If the reader is supplied by PoE, for example when connected to a SCALANCE
X108POE,
the power IO RS
-232 cable is not needed.
Note
PoE functionality not available for older devices
The PoE functionality is not available for older devices with the following article numbers:
•
6GF3440-0CD10
•
6GF3440-0GE10
•
6GF3440-0CD11
•
6GF3440-0GE11
•
6GF3440-0CD21
Network and system interfacing
4.6 System setup via the Ethernet interface
SIMATIC MV420 / SIMATIC MV440
Operating Instructions, 10/2015, C79000-G8976-C334-03 133
Figure 4-5 Example: System setup via the Ethernet interface
System characteristics
● The reader results are output via the Ethernet interface.
● The reader can be triggered in the following ways:
– Digital I/O
– TCP/IP
– The integrated autotrigger function
● A PC/programming device is connected via Ethernet and a switch to allow adjustment of
the device.
Network and system interfacing
4.7 System setup for reader and RFID reader on a communication module
SIMATIC MV420 / SIMATIC MV440
134 Operating Instructions, 10/2015, C79000-G8976-C334-03
4.7
System setup for reader and RFID reader on a communication
module
Figure 4-6 Example: System setup for reader with RFID reader on a communication module
System characteristics
● To operate in mixed mode, the reader can be connected to an RFID SLG, for example of
the RF300 series on a communication module, for example, an ASM 456.
● Both the reader and the RFID reader are integrated in STEP 7 by the function block FB45
or Ident profile.
● A PC/programming device is connected via Ethernet to allow adjustment of the device.
Network and system interfacing
4.8 System setup for the reader with auto-trigger
SIMATIC MV420 / SIMATIC MV440
Operating Instructions, 10/2015, C79000-G8976-C334-03 135
4.8
System setup for the reader with auto-trigger
Figure 4-7 Example: System setup for reader with auto-trigger function
System characteristics
● Power supply and system integration are, for example, via an ASM 456 or via Ethernet.
● To trigger the reader, a light barrier or similar must be installed; the triggering itself is
performed on the reader as soon as a legible code enters the reader viewing field (auto
trigger).
● A PC/programming device is connected via Ethernet to allow adjustment of the device.
Network and system interfacing
4.9 System setup reader and WinCC flexible
SIMATIC MV420 / SIMATIC MV440
136 Operating Instructions, 10/2015, C79000-G8976-C334-03
4.9
System setup reader and WinCC flexible
Figure 4-8 Example: System setup reader with WinCC flexible
System characteristics
● The image is displayed on the Web pages of the reader (see also "System setup for
reader and HTML browser (Page 137)for WinCC flexible on a PC with WinCC flexible, an
HMI Panel MP 277 or MP 377.
● The results from the reader are obtained and displayed by WinCC flexible via a
connection to the automation system.
● A PC/programming device is connected via Ethernet to allow adjustment of the device.
Network and system interfacing
4.10 System setup for the reader and HTML browser
SIMATIC MV420 / SIMATIC MV440
Operating Instructions, 10/2015, C79000-G8976-C334-03 137
4.10
System setup for the reader and HTML browser
Figure 4-9 Example: System setup for the reader with HTML browser
System characteristics
● For visualization, an HTML browser is used: For example Microsoft Internet Explorer on a
PC/programming device, Panel PC or similar device.
● The reader can be monitored via the live image page or diagnostics pages with needing
Java VM on the PC/PG.
● A PC/programming device is connected via Ethernet to allow adjustment of the device.
Note
Further information
For further information, please see
"Monitoring via HTML pages" (Page 266).
Network and system interfacing
4.11 System setup of reader and external light
SIMATIC MV420 / SIMATIC MV440
138 Operating Instructions, 10/2015, C79000-G8976-C334-03
4.11
System setup of reader and external light
Figure 4-10 Example: System setup reader with external light
System characteristics
An external lamp, for example a lighting unit, can be controlled via an external power supply
unit and a stroboscope signal of the reader.
For the external lighting units MV400 LED ring light metal IR clear/metal red clear (article
numbers: 6GF3400-0LT01-7BA1 and 6GF3400-0LT01-8DA1), an additional power supply
unit is not needed for the power supply.
Network and system interfacing
4.12 Other system extensions
SIMATIC MV420 / SIMATIC MV440
Operating Instructions, 10/2015, C79000-G8976-C334-03 139
4.12
Other system extensions
System integration with FB45
Integration into further systems is possible with the FB45 function block:
● Into SIMATIC S7-300 or ET 200M with communication module ASM 475
● Into SIMATIC ET 200pro with communication module RF170C
System integration via EtherNet/IP connection
System integration via an Ethernet/IP connection is possible with the communication module
RF181EIP.
Network and system interfacing
4.12 Other system extensions
SIMATIC MV420 / SIMATIC MV440
140 Operating Instructions, 10/2015, C79000-G8976-C334-03
SIMATIC MV420 / SIMATIC MV440
Operating Instructions, 10/2015, C79000-G8976-C334-03 141
Installation
5
5.1
Important notes on installation
Note
When you install the reader, make sure
that the code to be read is visible to the reader with
the best possible quality. To install the reader, use "Adjust reader" in the user interface.
The following requirements must be met:
● The code must be clearly visible:
– There must be as little reflection in the code field as possible.
– The code field must be uniformly lit without shadows.
– All the code parts must be sharply imaged.
● The viewing angle to the code may vary between 40° to 90° and 80° to 90° depending on
the code type, see Performance characteristics when reading codes (Page 45).
● The distance between a two-dimensional code and image border must be at least 2 cell
widths.
● Maintain the quiet zone around the code.
Installation
5.2 Installing SIMATIC MV420/SIMATIC MV440
SIMATIC MV420 / SIMATIC MV440
142 Operating Instructions, 10/2015, C79000-G8976-C334-03
5.2
Installing SIMATIC MV420/SIMATIC MV440
The readers are separate compact devices that need to be mounted in a suitable location
and only require a lens, a power supply cable and a communications connection. The
SIMATIC MV440 reader has four threaded holes on both the front and back
(SIMATIC MV420: has two threaded holes) allowing flexible mounting of the device.
Installing the SIMATIC MV440 reader with protective lens barrel
To provide lighting when reading the codes, you have several options available. The
simplest and most space-saving option is the ring light integrated in the protective lens
barrel. The SIMATIC MV420 reader has a lens and light already integrated.
①
Built-in LED ring light
④
M2.5 hexagon socket-head screws
②
Lens
⑤
Protective lens barrel ∅ 65
③
Reader
Figure 5-1 Design of SIMATIC MV440 reader with protective lens barrel and built-in LED ring light
Installing the SIMATIC MV440
1. Remove the "protective cap of the lens threaded connector", see section:
2. Install the following:
– Your selected lens ②
– The LED built-in ring light ①
– Protective lens barrel ∅ 65 ⑤
3. Select a suitable location to install the device.
Installation
5.2 Installing SIMATIC MV420/SIMATIC MV440
SIMATIC MV420 / SIMATIC MV440
Operating Instructions, 10/2015, C79000-G8976-C334-03 143
4. Drill four holes with the following dimensions at the installation site/use the optional
mounting bracket.
Figure 5-2 SIMATIC MV440 reader drilling template
5. Mount the reader.
Installation
5.2 Installing SIMATIC MV420/SIMATIC MV440
SIMATIC MV420 / SIMATIC MV440
144 Operating Instructions, 10/2015, C79000-G8976-C334-03
Installing the SIMATIC MV440 reader with lighting unit
If you require a lot of light for the applications, you can connect an external lamp. The
external lamp is also used, for example, when the incident light is not parallel to the viewing
direction with strongly reflecting objects.
①
Lighting unit SIMATIC Vision Sensor
VS100
⑤
External ring light holder
②
Socket for lighting unit
⑥
Protective lens barrel ∅ 65
③
Reader
⑦
Securing screws
④
Hole for securing device
Figure 5-3 Setup of SIMATIC MV440 reader with lighting unit
Install the following:
1. Your selected lens
2. Protective lens barrel ∅ 65 ⑥
3. Ring light holder (external) ⑤
4. Lighting unit ①
5. At the installation site, screw the reader directly into the securing holes or to the "reader
mounting plate", see Dimension drawings (Page 407)
Installation
5.2 Installing SIMATIC MV420/SIMATIC MV440
SIMATIC MV420 / SIMATIC MV440
Operating Instructions, 10/2015, C79000-G8976-C334-03 145
Installing the SIMATIC MV420
1. Select a suitable location to install the device.
2. Drill two holes of the following dimensions at the installation site:
Figure 5-4 SIMATIC MV420 drilling template
3. Mount the reader.
See also
Dimension drawings (Page 407)
Installation
5.3 Installing the LED ring light for SIMATIC MV440
SIMATIC MV420 / SIMATIC MV440
146 Operating Instructions, 10/2015, C79000-G8976-C334-03
5.3
Installing the LED ring light for SIMATIC MV440
NOTICE
Only install the built-in LED ring light for SIMATIC MV440
The built-in LED ring light can only be used in conjunction with the SIMATIC MV440
readers (6GF3440-1CD10, 6GF3440-1GE10, 6GF3440-1LE10) and the D65 protective lens
barrel (6GF3440-8AC11, 6GF3440-8AC12, 6GF3440-8AC21).
Required components:
● 1 offset screwdriver SW 2
● 1 module LED built-in ring light
● 3 hexagon socket-head screws M2.5
①
Built-in LED ring light
④
M2.5 hexagon socket-head screws
②
Lens
⑤
Protective lens barrel ∅ 65
③
Reader
Figure 5-5 SIMATIC MV440 reader with protective lens barrel and built-in LED ring light
NOTICE
Disconnecting SIMATIC MV440 from the power supply
The LED ring light can only be fitted when the SIMATIC MV440 is disconnected from the
power supply.
Installation
5.3 Installing the LED ring light for SIMATIC MV440
SIMATIC MV420 / SIMATIC MV440
Operating Instructions, 10/2015, C79000-G8976-C334-03 147
1. Disconnect the SIMATIC MV440 reader ③ from the power supply.
2. Guide the built-in LED ring light ① over the lens ② onto the protective lens barrel ⑤:
At the same time, insert the connecting circuit board for the built-in LED ring light into the
lamp connection of the protective lens barrel ⑤.
3. Screw the built-in LED ring light ① into the protective lens barrel ⑤ using the three pre-
mounted hexagon socket-head screws ④.
4. Tighten the screws with maximum 0.45 Nm.
Installation
5.3 Installing the LED ring light for SIMATIC MV440
SIMATIC MV420 / SIMATIC MV440
148 Operating Instructions, 10/2015, C79000-G8976-C334-03
SIMATIC MV420 / SIMATIC MV440
Operating Instructions, 10/2015, C79000-G8976-C334-03 149
Connecting
6
6.1
Guidelines for installation free of electrical interference
To prevent interference, you will need to provide shielding for your system. Low-frequency
(LF) and high-frequency (HF) interference signals can result in an incorrect response if the
system is badly grounded or not shielded.
Interfering signals can be caused by:
● Switching relays or contactors (large, rapid changes in current or voltage and HF
interfering signals).
● Different ground potentials between two parts of the system (LF interfering signals).
NOTICE
Class A device to EMC
The reader can cause radio interference in residential areas. In this case, you will have
to take appropriate countermeasures to prevent radio interference.
Use/installation of interference-proof cables
● Only use the recommended cable to connect the reader.
● All cable connectors must be carefully and correctly connected.
● Do not lay signal lines and heavy current lines together. Use a separate cable duct at
least 50 cm from the heavy current lines.
Note
•
Refer to the instructions and guidelines in the installation manual SIMATIC Automation
System S7-300 Hardware and Installation, section "Wiring".
•
Please note the guidelines for use of PROFINET IO to control and/or transfer results.
Connecting
6.2 Power over Ethernet (PoE)
SIMATIC MV420 / SIMATIC MV440
150 Operating Instructions, 10/2015, C79000-G8976-C334-03
Only connect safety extra-low voltage (SELV) to IEC 60950/EN 60950/VDE 0805
WARNING
The device is designed for operation with safety extralow voltage (SELV). This means that
only safety extra-low voltages (SELV) complying with EC 60950/EN 60950/VDE 0805 can
be connected to the power supply terminals.
The power unit for supplying the device must comply with NEC Class 2 as described by the
National Electrical Code(r) (ANSI/NFPA 70).
The power of all connected power supply units must total the equivalent of a power source
with limited power (LPS limited power source).
6.2
Power over Ethernet (PoE)
"Power over Ethernet" (PoE) is a power supply technology for network components
complying with 802.3af.
● The power is supplied over the Ethernet cables that connect the individual network
components together. This makes an additional power cable unnecessary.
● MV440 is a powered device (PD) of type 1, class 2 (max. 6.49 W).
Restriction of the power supply type
The IEEE standard 802.3af specifies two types of power supply:
● Power via pairs of wires that are not used for data transmission (redundant wires).
● Power via pairs of wires that are used for data transmission (phantom power).
The Ethernet connector of the SIMATIC MV440 reader is four-wire. Power can only be
suppled via these four wires with phantom power. The device supplying the power must
provide the phantom power.
The following Siemens switches with PoE provide phantom power:
● SCALANCE X108POE
● SCALANCE X308-2M POE
● SCALANCE XR324-12M POE
● SCALANCE XR324-4M POE
Connecting
6.3 Connecting the components
SIMATIC MV420 / SIMATIC MV440
Operating Instructions, 10/2015, C79000-G8976-C334-03 151
6.3
Connecting the components
Connecting the 24 V DC power supply
WARNING
The device should only be connected to a 24 V DC power supply which satisfies the
requirements of safe extra low voltage (SELV).
When the device is operated on a wall, in an open rack or other similar locations, an NEC
Class 2 current source is required for the compliance of the UL requirements (according to
UL 60950-1). In all other cases (according to IEC/EN/DlN EN 60950-1), a current source
with limited power (LPS = Limited Power Source) is required.
24 V DC supply voltage (19.2 to 28.8 V)
The generation of the 24 V DC supply voltage by the line-side power supply must be
implemented as functional extra-low voltage with safe electrical isolation according
(floating) to IEC 80364-4-41, or as SELV to IEC/EN/DlN EN 60950-1 and LPS/NEC class 2.
NOTICE
Protection of the external power supply
If the reader is supplied via extensive supply lines or networks, interference by strong
electromagnetic pulses on the supply lines is possible, e.g. from lightning or the switching
of large loads.
The connection of the external power supply is not protected against strong
electromagnetic pulses. An external overvoltage protection module is required for this
purpose. The requirements according to EN 61000-4-5, Surge test on power supply lines,
are only met when a suitable protective element is used. A suitable device would be, for
example, the Dehn Blitzductor BVT AVD 24, article number 918 422, or a comparable
protective element.
Manufacturer:
DEHN+SÖHNE GmbH+Co.KG Hans Dehn Str.1 Postfach 1640 D-92306 Neumarkt,
Germany
Note
Maximum ASM cable length
•
You can use an ASM with the reader with a maximum cable length of 50 m.
•
In some situations, longer connecting cables up to 1000
m are possible. In this case, take
into account the current consumption of the reader of 0.17 A for SIMATIC MV420 and
0.27 A for SIMATIC MV440.
•
Avoid connecting more than two cable sections in series to create a longer cable due to
the connector resistance.
Connecting
6.3 Connecting the components
SIMATIC MV420 / SIMATIC MV440
152 Operating Instructions, 10/2015, C79000-G8976-C334-03
Cable sockets
Note
Only the SIMATIC
MV440 reader has an ASM socket.
Note
Power supply via for SIMATIC MV440 Ethernet also via Power over Ethernet
The power for the SIMATIC MV440 readers can also be supplied using Power over Ethernet
(PoE), for example when using PoE switches such as:
•
SCALANCE X108POE
•
SCALANCE X308-2M POE
•
SCALANCE XR324-12M POE
•
SCALANCE XR324-4M POE
Note
PoE functionality not available for older devices
The PoE functionality is not available for older devices with the following article numbers:
•
6GF3440-0CD10
•
6GF3440-0GE10
•
6GF3440-0CD11
•
6GF3440-0GE11
•
6GF3440-0CD21
Connecting
6.3 Connecting the components
SIMATIC MV420 / SIMATIC MV440
Operating Instructions, 10/2015, C79000-G8976-C334-03 153
①
Combined cable socket for the power supply, I/O connectors, ASM and RS-232
②
Ethernet socket
③
Combined cable socket for the power supply, I/O connectors and RS-232
④
ASM female connector
⑤
Ethernet connection socket (PoE) M12, 4-pin, D-coded
Figure 6-1 Cable sockets for SIMATIC MV420 (left) and SIMATIC MV440 (right)
Power IO RS-232 cable
The power IO RS-232 cable is used for the power supply, to connect the digital I/O
connectors and for the communications interface of an automation system via the RS-232
interface. The pin assignment of the Power IO RS-232 cable is shown in the table below.
Pin assignment of the Power IO RS-232 cable
NOTICE
INPUT - COMMON / OUTPUT - COMMON must be connected
INPUT - COMMON / OUTPUT - COMMON must be connected before you can use the
inputs and outputs detailed below.
Connecting
6.3 Connecting the components
SIMATIC MV420 / SIMATIC MV440
154 Operating Instructions, 10/2015, C79000-G8976-C334-03
Table 6- 1 SIMATIC MV440
Pin
Color
Signal name
Possible values
Default
Meaning
H
Red
24 V DC
Power supply
G Blue 0 V Power supply
K
Violet
INPUT1
TRG
TRG
Trigger input
D Yellow INPUT /
OUTPUT2
DISA, SEL0, SEL1, SEL2, SEL3, TRN,
RES, IN_OP, TRD, RDY, READ,
MATCH, N_OK, EXT_1, EXT_2,
EXT_3, EXT_4
IN_OP Freely selectable input
or output.
L Gray/
pink
INPUT /
OUTPUT3
DISA, SEL0, SEL1, SEL2, SEL3, TRN,
RES, IN_OP, TRD, RDY, READ,
MATCH, N_OK, EXT_1, EXT_2,
EXT_3, EXT_4
RDY Freely selectable input
or output.
C Green INPUT /
OUTPUT4
DISA, SEL0, SEL1, SEL2, SEL3, TRN,
RES, IN_OP, TRD, RDY, READ,
MATCH, N_OK, EXT_1, EXT_2,
EXT_3, EXT_4
READ Freely selectable input
or output.
B Brown INPUT /
OUTPUT5
DISA, SEL0, SEL1, SEL2, SEL3, TRN,
RES, IN_OP, TRD, RDY, READ,
MATCH, N_OK, EXT_1, EXT_2,
EXT_3, EXT_4
N_OK Freely selectable input
or output.
A White INPUT -
COMMON
P type inputs/outputs:
INPUT - COMMON = 0 V and
OUTPUT - COMMON = + 24 V DC
N type inputs/outputs:
INPUT - COMMON = + 24 V DC and
OUTPUT - COMMON = 0 V
Reference point 0 V or
24 V for inputs.
E Gray OUTPUT -
COMMON
Reference point 0 V or
24 V for outputs.
J Black STROBE
(OUTPUT)
Signal output for con-
necting external flashes
F
Pink
RS-232 TXD
RS-232 send line
M
Red/blue
RS-232 RXD
RS-232 receive line
Table 6- 2 SIMATIC MV420
Pin
Color
Signal name
Possible values
Default
Meaning
H
Red
24 V DC
Power supply
G
Blue
0 V
Power supply
K
Violet
INPUT1
TRG
TRG
Trigger input
D Yellow OUTPUT2 IN_OP, TRD, RDY, READ, MATCH,
N_OK, EXT_1, EXT_2, EXT_3, EXT_4
RDY Freely selectable output.
L Gray/
pink
OUTPUT3 IN_OP, TRD, RDY, READ, MATCH,
N_OK, EXT_1, EXT_2, EXT_3, EXT_4
READ Freely selectable output.
C Green ASM TxD_N TxD_N signal of the
ASM interface
B Brown ASM TxD_P TxD_P signal of the
ASM interface
Connecting
6.3 Connecting the components
SIMATIC MV420 / SIMATIC MV440
Operating Instructions, 10/2015, C79000-G8976-C334-03 155
Pin
Color
Signal name
Possible values
Default
Meaning
A White INPUT -
COMMON
P type inputs/outputs:
INPUT - COMMON = 0 V and
OUTPUT - COMMON = + 24 V DC
N type inputs/outputs:
INPUT - COMMON = + 24 V DC and
OUTPUT - COMMON = 0 V
Reference point 0 V or
24 V for inputs.
E Gray OUTPUT -
COMMON
Reference point 0 V or
24 V for outputs.
J Black STROBE
(OUTPUT)
Signal output for con-
necting external flashes
F Pink RS 232 TxD or
ASM RxD_P
RS-232 TxD, ASM RxD_P RS-232 TXD RS-232 send line or
ASM RxD_P of the ASM
interface
M Red/blue RS-232 RxD or
ASM RxD_N
RS-232 RxD,ASM RxD_N RS-232 RXD RS-232 receive line or
ASM RxD_N of the ASM
interface
MV400 push-pull power cable pin assignment
See Pin assignment of the interfaces (Page 405).
ASM cable
The connectors are already fitted to the ASM cable.
● Using the ASM cable, you connect the communication modules, for example RF180C
and ASM456.
For SIMATIC MV420, a special ASM cable with M16 socket is available. Refer to the
chapter "Cables" (Page 418).
The following cable assignment is defined for the connection to the ASM 475:
Connecting
6.3 Connecting the components
SIMATIC MV420 / SIMATIC MV440
156 Operating Instructions, 10/2015, C79000-G8976-C334-03
①
Status and error displays
②
Wiring diagram; the numbers of the connection refer to the X1 connector of the upper housing
Figure 6-2 Front panel and inside of the front door of the ASM475 module
Pin M16 socket
Wire color of the connecting cable
Terminal ASM475 (Channel 1/Channel 2)
H
Red
8 / 16
G
Blue
9 / 17
F
Pink
4 / 12
M
Red/blue
5 / 13
B
Brown
6 / 14
C
Green
7 / 15
Ethernet cable M12/RJ-45
● With a preassembled Ethernet cable, you connect a PC / PG to control and operate the
reader.
● Attach the Ethernet cable to a switch to connect the reader to an automation system via
onboard PROFINET IO.
Connecting
6.3 Connecting the components
SIMATIC MV420 / SIMATIC MV440
Operating Instructions, 10/2015, C79000-G8976-C334-03 157
6.3.1
Wiring example
I/O interface as P type
Wire the "Output Common" signal with + 24 V DC and the "Input Common" signal with 0 V.
Figure 6-3 I/O interface as P type
I/O interface as N type
Wire the "Output Common" signal with 0 V and the "Input Common" signal with + 24 V DC.
Figure 6-4 I/O interface as N type
Connecting
6.3 Connecting the components
SIMATIC MV420 / SIMATIC MV440
158 Operating Instructions, 10/2015, C79000-G8976-C334-03
Connecting up the power IO RS-232 interface as P type
Connecting up the power IO RS-232 interface as N type
Connecting
6.3 Connecting the components
SIMATIC MV420 / SIMATIC MV440
Operating Instructions, 10/2015, C79000-G8976-C334-03 159
6.3.2
Operating the reader with external lighting
Operating the reader with the external lighting units:
● SIMATIC VS100
● MV400 LED ring light metal IR clear/metal clear
● MV400 LED ring light metal red clear/metal clear
Connecting cables
Note
Use the strobe output signal to operate external lighting
If you use the strobe output signal, you can use external lighting. The strobe signal is high
active. The "high active" time corresponds to the ON period of the external lighting.
● If you use a reader with an external lighting unit in your application, wire up your
application according to the following wiring diagrams.
Connecting
6.3 Connecting the components
SIMATIC MV420 / SIMATIC MV440
160 Operating Instructions, 10/2015, C79000-G8976-C334-03
MV400 LED ring light metal IR clear/metal red clear
①
SIMATIC MV440 reader
②
External ring light holder
③
Lighting unit
④
Lamp cable
⑤
Power IO RS-232 cable
Figure 6-5 Circuit diagram for MV400 LED ring light metal IR clear/metal red clear
Connecting
6.3 Connecting the components
SIMATIC MV420 / SIMATIC MV440
Operating Instructions, 10/2015, C79000-G8976-C334-03 161
MV400 LED ring light metal IR clear/metal red clear with Y adapter
①
Y adapter
②
External ring light holder
③
Lighting unit
④
SIMATIC MV440 reader
⑤
Power IO RS-232 cable
Figure 6-6 Circuit diagram for MV400 LED ring light metal clear, mounting without cabling errors
Connecting
6.3 Connecting the components
SIMATIC MV420 / SIMATIC MV440
162 Operating Instructions, 10/2015, C79000-G8976-C334-03
SIMATIC VS100
①
SIMATIC MV440 reader
④
Lamp cable
②
External ring light holder
⑤
DIN rail power unit
③
Lighting unit
⑥
Bridging
⑦
Power IO RS-232 cable
Figure 6-7 Circuit diagram for SIMATIC VS100
Detailed circuit diagram
Note
Identical wiring for the SIMATIC MV420 reader
The wiring is identical for the SIMATIC
MV420 reader. However, the SIMATIC MV420
reader
does not have any drill holes for direct mounting of the VS100 lamp.
Connecting
6.3 Connecting the components
SIMATIC MV420 / SIMATIC MV440
Operating Instructions, 10/2015, C79000-G8976-C334-03 163
Figure 6-8 SIMATIC VS100
Figure 6-9 MV400 LED ring light metal IR clear/metal red clear
Connecting
6.3 Connecting the components
SIMATIC MV420 / SIMATIC MV440
164 Operating Instructions, 10/2015, C79000-G8976-C334-03
SIMATIC MV420 / SIMATIC MV440
Operating Instructions, 10/2015, C79000-G8976-C334-03 165
Commissioning
7
7.1
Prerequisites
To commission the device, you require a PC that meets the following requirements:
● Operating system Windows XP Professional SP 1 or Windows 7; .NET Framework v4.0
must be installed in addition.
● An Internet browser with Java Runtime Environment as of V1.2
– Always use the latest Java version. You will find information on this on the Internet at
(www.java.com) or ask your system administrator.
– The user interface is optimized for viewing with Microsoft Internet Explorer 8 and
Java Runtime Environment V.1.7.x.
Note
Names of "Java Runtime Environment"
Different names exist for "Java Runtime Environment":
•
Java Runtime
•
Runtime Environment
•
Runtime
•
JRE
•
Java Virtual Machine
•
Virtual Machine
•
Java VM
•
JVM
•
VM
•
Java download
● PRONETA is installed.
You will find PRONETA and the corresponding documentation (application description):
– On the supplied product DVD of the reader.
– As a free download on the Internet pages of the Siemens Industry Online Support
(https://support.industry.siemens.com/cs/us/en/view/67460624).
Refer to the documentation for information on how to install the tool.
PRONETA is a free commissioning and diagnostics tool for PROFINET networks.
The required WinPcap driver is part of the PRONETA installation package.
You can find more information on the Internet pages on PRONETA
(http://www.siemens.com/proneta).
● There is a network connection via Ethernet TCP/IP.
Commissioning
7.1 Prerequisites
SIMATIC MV420 / SIMATIC MV440
166 Operating Instructions, 10/2015, C79000-G8976-C334-03
Notes on installation
● You need administrator rights to edit the network settings of your PC:
– Check the settings of your PC.
● To work with the user interface, you require Java Runtime Environment. Java could be
installed on your PC but not activated:
– Check the settings of your Internet browser.
● For initial commissioning, you need the PRONETA or the SIMATIC Manager.
Using PRONETA or SIMATIC Manager:
– You can browse your network for the reader.
– Integrate the reader in your network.
– Configure the network connection of your reader.
Note
These operating instructions contain a practical example of the PRONETA procedure.
Commissioning
7.2 Establishing a connection to the reader and starting the user interface
SIMATIC MV420 / SIMATIC MV440
Operating Instructions, 10/2015, C79000-G8976-C334-03 167
7.2
Establishing a connection to the reader and starting the user
interface
Steps for initial commissioning
Step
Activity
1
Connect the reader and PC using an Ethernet cable.
2 Turn the reader on.
3 Select network adapter.
Configure the connection between reader and PC.
4 Start the user interface.
5
Adjust the reader using the user interface.
Note
The
user interface takes the form of a Java applet stored on the reader and can be activated
using an Internet browser.
Step 1
Connect the reader and PC using an Ethernet cable
Connect the reader directly to your PC/programming device over an Ethernet cable.
Note
You do not need a crossover cable because the reader is capable of autocrossing and
automatically detects the type of cable you are using.
Step 2
Turn the reader on
Turn on the power supply for the reader. The reader is supplied with power either via a
connected ASM cable or via the power IO RS-232 cable or PoE cable, see also Connecting
(Page 149) .
● Each time it is started, the reader runs a self-test. This is indicated by the Power LED
flashing.
● After a period of between several seconds and 2 minutes, the self-test is completed and
the Power LED shines green. The reader is ready for operation.
Commissioning
7.2 Establishing a connection to the reader and starting the user interface
SIMATIC MV420 / SIMATIC MV440
168 Operating Instructions, 10/2015, C79000-G8976-C334-03
Step 3
Select network adapter
Before you can work with PRONETA, you need to select the network adapter via which you
want to connect the reader to the PROFINET network.
1. Start PRONETA by double-clicking on the "Proneta.Gui.exe" file.
2. Click the "Settings" module in the PRONETA start screen.
Figure 7-1 Start screen - Settings
The "Settings" menu opens.
Commissioning
7.2 Establishing a connection to the reader and starting the user interface
SIMATIC MV420 / SIMATIC MV440
Operating Instructions, 10/2015, C79000-G8976-C334-03 169
3. Close the "Network Adapter Selection" dialog.
4. Select the hardware interface to be used with a double-click.
A green checkmark shows you the interface being used.
Figure 7-2 Select network adapter
Configuring the Ethernet connection between reader and PC
1. Start PRONETA by double-clicking on the "Proneta.Gui.exe" file.
2. Click the "Network Analysis" module in the PRONETA start screen.
Figure 7-3 Start screen - Network Analysis
Commissioning
7.2 Establishing a connection to the reader and starting the user interface
SIMATIC MV420 / SIMATIC MV440
170 Operating Instructions, 10/2015, C79000-G8976-C334-03
The "Topology View" network overview opens.
Figure 7-4 Network overview
3. Select the reader in the "Topology View".
4. Right-click and select "Configure Device" in the short-cut menu:
Figure 7-5 Network overview - Configuring the reader
5. The "Set Network Parameters" dialog box opens.
6. Activate the option "IP configuration".
Commissioning
7.2 Establishing a connection to the reader and starting the user interface
SIMATIC MV420 / SIMATIC MV440
Operating Instructions, 10/2015, C79000-G8976-C334-03 171
7. Enter values for the IP address and subnet mask as shown below in the "IP address" and
"Network mask" input fields.
Figure 7-6 Entering network parameters
Alternatively, you can make the "Configure Device" settings in the "Accessible Devices"
list.
8. Click "Set" to adopt the changed properties.
Note
Displaying the updated parameters
The updated parameters are not shown in the "Topology
View"/"Accessible Devices" list
immediately:
•
Complete the parameters by clicking "Refresh" .
IP address 192.168.100.100
•
Using the IP address 192.168.100.100 simultaneously configures the reader as a
DHCP server, which means that a connected PC can obtain an IP address from the
reader. You may use addresses that differ from this IP address and from 0.0.0.1 to
manually assign a static IP address to the reader. PCs operating in a network are
usually configured as DHCP clients and obtain their IP addresses from a server.
•
If your PC network is configured differently or you do not know how your PC is
configured, check with your network administrator.
Result
The reader now has the manually assigned IP address 192.168.0.8 and can be accessed at
this address by your PC.
Note
Depending on the mode being used, you may need to restart the reader by turning the power
off and on again.
Commissioning
7.2 Establishing a connection to the reader and starting the user interface
SIMATIC MV420 / SIMATIC MV440
172 Operating Instructions, 10/2015, C79000-G8976-C334-03
Step 4
Starting the user interface with PRONETA
1. Select the reader in the "Topology View" in PRONETA.
2. Right-click and select "Open in Web Browser" in the short-cut menu.
Figure 7-7 Network overview - opening the user interface of the reader
Note
Alternative: Starting the user interface with your Internet browser
You can also start the user interface of the reader with your Internet browser:
1.
Enter the IP address of the reader in the address field of your Internet browser.
2.
Confirm the instruction with the Enter key.
The home page of the reader is loaded.
Commissioning
7.2 Establishing a connection to the reader and starting the user interface
SIMATIC MV420 / SIMATIC MV440
Operating Instructions, 10/2015, C79000-G8976-C334-03 173
Note
Check the signature during the first call of the user interface
Check the following signature data during the firs
t call of the user interface. Make sure
that the user interface is actually that of the Siemens AG:
•
Name: SIMATIC MV400
•
Supplier, SIEMENS AG
The validity of the signature is indicated with the symbol
.
Note
Certification check when calling the user interface
As of Java Runtime
Environment version 1.7 update 25, a certificate revocation check is
performed when you call the user interface. Internet access is required for this check. If
no Internet access is available, the start of the user interface is delayed by about one
minute,
and a safety warning is displayed. In the Java Control Panel, carry out the
following steps to avoid the delay and the safety warning:
1.
Select the "Advanced" tab.
2.
In the "Conduct certificate revocation check on signed code for" area, select the "Do
not check (not recommended)" option.
Note that security will be compromised when you disable the certificate revocation check.
Therefore, the certificate revocation check should only be disabled in administered
environments.
Commissioning
7.2 Establishing a connection to the reader and starting the user interface
SIMATIC MV420 / SIMATIC MV440
174 Operating Instructions, 10/2015, C79000-G8976-C334-03
3. Now click on the image of the reader or the "Adjust" menu command.
The user interface of the reader will open after a brief loading period.
4. This is followed by the Adjustment page of the user interface in the Internet Explorer.
Result
● The reader is now connected and can be operated from the user interface.
● You can now perform the next step and adjust the reader and display the first read
results.
Step 5
Aligning the reader
Before you put the reader into productive operation, you must first align it correctly. Use the
user interface and click the "Adjustment" entry for this purpose. The dialog window shows
you an image as seen by the reader.
Note
Focus image (SIMATIC MV440 only)
In order to focus the image you may have to loosen the fixing screws on the lenses.
Commissioning
7.2 Establishing a connection to the reader and starting the user interface
SIMATIC MV420 / SIMATIC MV440
Operating Instructions, 10/2015, C79000-G8976-C334-03 175
Note
Access online help with the "?" button
In the top right corner of each page of the user interface there is a "?" button which can be
used to access the online help at any time. The online help opens with the context
-sensitive
help text relating to your current task.
Commissioning
7.2 Establishing a connection to the reader and starting the user interface
SIMATIC MV420 / SIMATIC MV440
176 Operating Instructions, 10/2015, C79000-G8976-C334-03
1. Position the reader so that the code to be read appears in the center of the image and is
focused sharply.
The reader automatically attempts to recognize and decode a data matrix code. You can
recognize a successful read by the green frame around the code. The more precise the
triggering and greater the contrast in the code, the greater the read reliability.
2. If necessary, correct the settings on this page:
– Exposure settings
– For example, if you wish to read an EAN13 code rather than a data matrix code, press
the "Recognize code type" button. The reader will launch code type recognition and
remember the code type it finds for subsequent reads.
– Correct the trigger settings to find the correct image acquisition time for moving
objects.
– Adjust distortion correction to correct significant distortion by the lens (only rarely
necessary!).
Note
If exposure =
Auto, the code must be completely in the image after the triggering until
the automatic exposure is completed (approximate value: 50 to 100 ms).
3. If you make modifications, save your new settings by clicking the "Apply" button.
Result
You have successfully commissioned the reader. You can now read codes for your
application. You can now make specific settings and save them to individual programs.
For detailed information on saving programs and processing, please see Operator control
and monitoring (Page 191).
Commissioning
7.3 Transferring optional licenses
SIMATIC MV420 / SIMATIC MV440
Operating Instructions, 10/2015, C79000-G8976-C334-03 177
7.3
Transferring optional licenses
7.3.1
Installing a license
Procedure
You can transfer an optional license to a SIMATIC code reader in three steps:
1. Installing the Automation License Manager
2. Install the MV plug-ins for code reader devices
3. Transfer a license to a SIMATIC code reader
Requirement
Note
Licenses are only transferable if they have been released for the target system
You can only successfully transfer licenses if they have been released for the target sy
stem.
You can, for example, transfer the Text
-Genius or Veri-Genius license to the SIMATIC
MV440 reader but not a STEP7 license.
First step: Installing the Automation License Manager
● Install the Automation License Manager (ALM) from the supplied product DVD of the
reader: Software" > "Automation License Manager (ALM)":
– If no Automation License Manager (ALM) is installed on your PC.
– If the ALM is older than V4.0 SP5.
● Follow the instructions in the setup program: Reboot the PC if necessary.
Commissioning
7.3 Transferring optional licenses
SIMATIC MV420 / SIMATIC MV440
178 Operating Instructions, 10/2015, C79000-G8976-C334-03
Second step: Install the MV plug-ins for code reader devices
● Install the MV plug-in from the supplied product DVD of the reader: Software" >
"Automation License Manager (ALM)"
Follow the instructions in the setup program:
Result
Your PC is now ready for the transfer of licenses to SIMATIC code readers.
Third step: Transfer a license to a SIMATIC code reader
NOTICE
Reader must be stopped for license transfer
The reader cannot be in RUN mode when transferring a license to the reader.
• Ensure that the reader is stopped.
Note
The reader only tolerates one Automation License Manager connection
The reader will only tolerate one Automation License Manager connection at a
given time.
You cannot connect two PCs to the reader at once.
•
Disconnect the first connection before attempting to establish a new connection from
another PC.
Commissioning
7.3 Transferring optional licenses
SIMATIC MV420 / SIMATIC MV440
Operating Instructions, 10/2015, C79000-G8976-C334-03 179
1. Run Automation License Manager.
Commissioning
7.3 Transferring optional licenses
SIMATIC MV420 / SIMATIC MV440
180 Operating Instructions, 10/2015, C79000-G8976-C334-03
2. Open the MV plug-in with "Edit" → "Connect target systems" → "Connect code reader
system":
Commissioning
7.3 Transferring optional licenses
SIMATIC MV420 / SIMATIC MV440
Operating Instructions, 10/2015, C79000-G8976-C334-03 181
3. Enter the IP address of the reader and press the "OK" button:
Commissioning
7.3 Transferring optional licenses
SIMATIC MV420 / SIMATIC MV440
182 Operating Instructions, 10/2015, C79000-G8976-C334-03
4. The reader will now appear in the tree in the left half of the window.
5. Navigate to the drive that contains the license to be transferred (for example, Text
Genius), and select the license with the mouse.
Commissioning
7.3 Transferring optional licenses
SIMATIC MV420 / SIMATIC MV440
Operating Instructions, 10/2015, C79000-G8976-C334-03 183
6. Then select the command, "Transfer" "Key" → "Transfer" in the "License Key" menu.
Commissioning
7.3 Transferring optional licenses
SIMATIC MV420 / SIMATIC MV440
184 Operating Instructions, 10/2015, C79000-G8976-C334-03
7. In the dialog that opens, select the reader as the destination drive and confirm with "OK".
Commissioning
7.3 Transferring optional licenses
SIMATIC MV420 / SIMATIC MV440
Operating Instructions, 10/2015, C79000-G8976-C334-03 185
Commissioning
7.3 Transferring optional licenses
SIMATIC MV420 / SIMATIC MV440
186 Operating Instructions, 10/2015, C79000-G8976-C334-03
Following the successful transfer, the license is displayed on the reader.
Result
You have successfully transferred the license and the license is now available on the reader.
Note
Open user interface during the transfer
If the user interface was open during the transfer, you must reopen it for the license to
become visible in the user interface.
Commissioning
7.3 Transferring optional licenses
SIMATIC MV420 / SIMATIC MV440
Operating Instructions, 10/2015, C79000-G8976-C334-03 187
● Then terminate the connection to the reader ("Disconnect target system").
7.3.2
Removing a license
Note
Open user interface during the transfer
If the user interface was open during the transfer, you must reopen it for the change to
become visible in the user interface.
If a license is no longer required on a reader:
● Transfer the license from the reader to a different destination drive.
● The functionality according to the license is available only in demo mode after removing
the license.
Commissioning
7.4 Selecting connection alternatives
SIMATIC MV420 / SIMATIC MV440
188 Operating Instructions, 10/2015, C79000-G8976-C334-03
7.4
Selecting connection alternatives
Note
Additional DHCP servers disrupt communication in the network
If you want to operate the reader as a DHCP server, there must be no other DHCP servers
in the network. Any additional DHCP servers cause disruptions in the communication in the
network.
When it is supplied, the reader is set to DHCP client and does not i
nterfere with
communication in the network.
Selecting the network configuration requires precise knowledge of the network environment
in which the reader will be used. In the simplest situation, the reader is connected directly to
a PC as described in Establishing a connection to the reader and starting the user interface
(Page 167).
During initial commissioning, you select the IP address which decides whether or not the
DHCP server integrated on the reader is enabled. If it is not, the device operates as a DHCP
client.
Operating modes
Note
When configuration is finished/check settings: Connecting with network
Operating the reader as DHCP server can disrupt communication in an existing network.
Do not connect the reader to the network until you have completed the configuration and
checked your settings carefull
y.
You can operate the reader in the following modes:
● DHCP
● Manual
● DHCP server
● PROFINET mode
These modes allow the reader to be operated as follows:
● As a direct connection with a PC with or without a DHCP server.
● In a network with several nodes with or without a DHCP server.
● As a PROFINET device in a PROFINET network.
You can change the network settings with the "Connections" menu command in the user
interface following initial commissioning.
Commissioning
7.4 Selecting connection alternatives
SIMATIC MV420 / SIMATIC MV440
Operating Instructions, 10/2015, C79000-G8976-C334-03 189
Operating the reader in DHCP client mode
In "DHCP" IP mode, the code reader obtains its network address from a DHCP server.
Note
Unique reader device identifier on the nameplate
Depending on the network structure, the DHCP server must be informed of the MAC
address, the unique device identifier of the reader. You will find the MAC address, for
example on the rating plate of the reader.
Note
DNS name for the reader
If your network administrator has assigned a DNS name (Domain Name Service) for the
reader, you can address the device using its name in much the same way as an intranet
server.
Operating the reader with a static IP address
Assign the network address manually in "Manual" IP mode. Enter the IP address and the
subnet mask to suit your network configuration and, if applicable, a gateway address.
Note
The IP address of the reader must be in the same subnet as the IP address of the
communications partner.
Note
Gateway not required for direct connection
A gateway is not necessary for a direct connection between the reader and a PC/PG.
Operating the reader in DHCP server mode
In "DHCP server" mode, a connected client can obtain its IP address from the reader. No
other DHCP server may be activated in the network. In this mode, you can connect up to
four PCs to the reader via a switch since a maximum of four IP addresses can be assigned
automatically.
Commissioning
7.4 Selecting connection alternatives
SIMATIC MV420 / SIMATIC MV440
190 Operating Instructions, 10/2015, C79000-G8976-C334-03
Operating the reader in PROFINET mode
In PROFINET mode, you can do the following with the reader:
● Connect the reader to the PC or programming device in your existing PROFINET IO
network.
● Integrate the reader as a device into a PROFINET IO network.
● Assign the reader the IP configuration of the PROFINET IO controller
Note
IP configuration cannot be set on the reader
The IP parameter settings for the reader are made in STEP 7. It is not possible to set the
parameters on the reader.
SIMATIC MV420 / SIMATIC MV440
Operating Instructions, 10/2015, C79000-G8976-C334-03 191
Operator control and monitoring
8
8.1
Overview
Web server technology
The user interface of the reader uses the Internet browser of your PC. The user interface is
stored on the reader, is loaded when the reader starts up and is executed in the Internet
browser.
This device version has the following advantages:
● You do not need to install the software on your PC.
● You can start the user interface from any PC.
● You can monitor the reader from more than one PC at the same time.
● The user interface always executes in a way suitable for your reader. This means that no
version conflicts occur.
You will find the requirements of your PC in the section Prerequisites (Page 165).
What options are there for operator control and monitoring?
● Operator control and monitoring with the user interface (Page 192)
● Monitoring using integrated HTML pages (Page 266)
● Operator control and monitoring with a user-defined user interface (Page 262) (as of
firmware V5.1)
Operator control and monitoring
8.2 User interface
SIMATIC MV420 / SIMATIC MV440
192 Operating Instructions, 10/2015, C79000-G8976-C334-03
8.2
User interface
8.2.1
Structure of the user interface
To open the user interface, follow the instructions in the chapter: Commissioning (Page 165).
The structure is presented here based on the example of the "Adjustment" task page in the
user interface. This information applies to all task pages of the user interface.
Figure 8-1 Structure of the user interface
Language setting
At the top right, there is drop-down list where you can select the language. You can change
the language setting for the entire user interface and online help at any time.
The following languages are available:
● English
● German
● French
● Spanish
Operator control and monitoring
8.2 User interface
SIMATIC MV420 / SIMATIC MV440
Operating Instructions, 10/2015, C79000-G8976-C334-03 193
● Italian
● Chinese (Simplified)
Online help
Note
Access to online help: with the "?" button or product DVD.
In the top right corner of each page of the user interface there is a "?" button which can be
used
to access the online help at any time. The online help opens with the context-sensitive
help text relating to your current task.
The online help is also saved on the product DVD supplied with the reader, which means it
can be used offline.
The user interface of the reader is based on a Web server and has the following dialog
boxes for image processing:
Tasks
In the left part of the user interface, you will find a selection of tasks in the form of buttons.
You can start the required task by clicking the appropriate button. The dialog for this task
then opens on the right side of the user interface. At the same time, the text of the buttons
changes to bold and the font color becomes white.
You can select the following tasks:
● Adjustment - Set image
● Connections - Specify interfaces and plant integration
● Programs - Specify processing task
● Programs - Edit libraries
● Process - Select and start program
● Options - Make general device settings
● Information - Access device, statistical and diagnostic information
● Maintain - Save/restore settings, run firmware updates and enter the VeriCode® license
● Stop - Stop processing mode
Operator control and monitoring
8.2 User interface
SIMATIC MV420 / SIMATIC MV440
194 Operating Instructions, 10/2015, C79000-G8976-C334-03
Image control
Figure 8-2 Image control
Image control is displayed for many of the task pages. Image control contains the image,
and for some tasks also the overlays.
"Image" drop-down list
You select the image source, for example, "Cyclic", "Triggered (live)", or "Program X".
Table 8- 1 "Image" drop-down list symbols
Update display
Updates the image display and also updates the result display, if necessary.
Show details
Enables and disables the display of result details in the image.
A right click on the button opens a shortcut menu in which the details to be displayed can be
selected.
Zoom
Switches between the display of the entire image (reduced) and the image section in full
resolution.
Full screen
Opens the image in full size and full resolution in a new window.
Load image
Opens a separate HTML page that allows you to load a stored image onto the reader.
Operator control and monitoring
8.2 User interface
SIMATIC MV420 / SIMATIC MV440
Operating Instructions, 10/2015, C79000-G8976-C334-03 195
Save image
Saves the currently displayed image on your PC.
Activates the display for grading the sharpness setting
The symbol is then only available in the "Adjustment > Set image" task and in the "Calibrate"
tab of the verification libraries.
Shows symbols and values which simplify the grading of the sharpness settings for manual
corrections on the lens.
The green triangle is displayed when the sharpness is improved by the section of the image
that is recognized by the ROI. The red triangle is displayed when the sharpness of this sec-
tion of the image deteriorates. When the sharpness setting remains constant for approx. 3
seconds, both triangles are displayed simultaneously in blue.
The percentage information in the bar graph indicates the ratio of the sharpness value cur-
rently measured in the ROI to an internally calculated, maximum sharpness value of ROI.
Note that this maximum sharpness value is rarely achieved in practice.
The range that contains the two triangles and the ROI can be freely positioned and scaled.
The same ROI used to set the "Auto" lighting setting is used to set the sharpness.
The display for grading the sharpness setting is also shown in full screen view.
Moving an ROI with the mouse or keyboard
Only available with the tasks "Adjustment" and "Programs":
You can change the size of the ROIs shown in the image control using drag and shift.
This option is also available with the keyboard:
● Shift:
– Using the arrow keys: larger increments (10 pixels)
– Ctrl + arrow keys: Shift pixel by pixel
● Pressing the shift key at the same time activates ROI size change with the arrow keys:
– Shift + arrow keys: Changes the size in larger increments.
– Shift + Ctrl + arrow keys: Changes the size pixel by pixel.
Users and user rights
The reader allows different levels of access control for different users.
Operator control and monitoring
8.2 User interface
SIMATIC MV420 / SIMATIC MV440
196 Operating Instructions, 10/2015, C79000-G8976-C334-03
Logging on users
The "logon" area is displayed above the tasks. Here, users log on and can then work with
the permissions assigned by the administrator.
Note
Hardware access protection (DISA bit) enabled
Hardware access protection (DISA bit) has been activated:
A user can only log on if the Options page
- Security tab is active.
To do this, click on the currently logged on user at the
top right, see the figure below.
The following users are set as defaults:
● WEB (default): General user who can perform tasks without explicitly logging on.
● WEB (WEB role)
● Service (role: Service)
● User1 (role: User1)
Users create and change passwords as required.
● Admin (role: Admin
The "Admin" user assigns rights for all users.
"Password" input box
Users enter their current password in the "Password" input box and then click the "Log on"
button.
The following table shows the defaults for the passwords.
User
Default password
WEB
WEB
Service
Service
User1
User1
Admin
Admin
Currently logged-on user and mode of the user interface
The following is displayed at the top right:
● The currently logged-on user (for example WEB).
● The following icons or no icon.
Operator control and monitoring
8.2 User interface
SIMATIC MV420 / SIMATIC MV440
Operating Instructions, 10/2015, C79000-G8976-C334-03 197
Padlock with red marking
Read-only mode, i.e. no further operator input is possible because the user interface of
another PC has control of the reader.
Padlock with gray marking
The logged-on user is not authorized to change settings.
Padlock with red/gray marking
DISA is active. Only users that have the "Take control" right are capable of taking over
control of the reader from the controller.
Padlock with green/gray marking
The user currently logged on has control of the reader or has taken over control from the
controller.
DMC code
The reader is active. Before you can make changes, you first have to change the reader to
STOP.
Note:
As an alternative, you can use the button at the bottom left to change to "Stop" mode
without leaving the current page.
The access protection is activated.
Controlling the reader via an automation system
If the reader is controlled via an automation system, i.e. with the DISA bit set, you will need
to log on to the reader as follows:
1. Make sure that only one PC is accessing the reader (padlock with red/gray markers).
2. Place the mouse pointer on the currently logged-on user (top right) and click. This brings
you to the "Security" tab on the "Options" page.
3. To control the reader, log on as "User1" or "Service" user. This is only possible if the
"Take control" check box is selected for the relevant user.
Remember that, by logging on, you intervene in reader control by the automation system.
This is only relevant for functions that require the DISA bit, for example program changes
and saving programs.
Operator control and monitoring
8.2 User interface
SIMATIC MV420 / SIMATIC MV440
198 Operating Instructions, 10/2015, C79000-G8976-C334-03
Status display
Figure 8-3 Status display (SIMATIC MV440)
The reader and its three status LED displays appear below the task buttons. The status
LEDs indicate the current status of the reader.
LED designation
Meaning
POWER
GREEN, permanently on
The reader must be switched on before it can be accessed via the user inter-
face. This LED therefore lights up a constant green.
ETHERNET
Permanently off
The reader is not connected to the Ethernet. Either the reader is off or the
Ethernet cable has been disconnected.
Flashing YELLOW
There is an active connection to the user interface.
STATE/SF
Permanently off
The reader is in "Stop" mode, i.e. there are no errors.
GREEN, permanently on
The reader is in RUN mode, i.e., there are no errors.
RED, permanently on
The reader is in "Group error" mode.
RED, flashing
For errors during operation with onboard PROFINET IO
Operator control and monitoring
8.2 User interface
SIMATIC MV420 / SIMATIC MV440
Operating Instructions, 10/2015, C79000-G8976-C334-03 199
8.2.2
Adjustment - Adjust image
With this page, you start the adjustment of the reader.
Figure 8-4 Adjust reader - Set image
Instructions
Brief instructions on setting up the reader are displayed in a text box at the top left.
Recognizing the code type
New as of V5.0: The reader supports machine-readable code for code type recognition.
● For example, if you wish to set up a new code, press the "Recognize code type" button.
The reader will detect the code type and add it to its decoding order.
Image settings
You will find all the necessary settings here for the correct configuration of image acquisition.
Operator control and monitoring
8.2 User interface
SIMATIC MV420 / SIMATIC MV440
200 Operating Instructions, 10/2015, C79000-G8976-C334-03
Image control
Figure 8-5 Image control
Image control is displayed for many of the task pages. Image control contains the image,
and for some tasks also the overlays.
"Image" drop-down list
You select the image source, for example, "Cyclic", "Triggered", "Triggered (live)", "Live".
Table 8- 2 "Image" drop-down list symbols
Update display
Updates the image display and also updates the result display, if necessary.
Show details
Enables and disables the display of result details in the image.
A right click on the button opens a shortcut menu in which the details to be displayed can be
selected.
Zoom
Switches between the display of the entire image (reduced) and the image section in full
resolution.
Full screen
Opens the image in full size and full resolution in a new window.
Load image
Opens a separate HTML page that allows you to load a stored image onto the reader.
Operator control and monitoring
8.2 User interface
SIMATIC MV420 / SIMATIC MV440
Operating Instructions, 10/2015, C79000-G8976-C334-03 201
Save image
Saves the currently displayed image on your PC.
Enables/disables the display for grading the sharpness setting
Shows symbols and values which simplify the grading of the sharpness settings for manual
corrections on the lens.
The green triangle is displayed when the sharpness is improved by the section of the image
that is recognized by the ROI. The red triangle is displayed when the sharpness of this sec-
tion of the image deteriorates. When the sharpness setting remains constant for approx. 3
seconds, both triangles are displayed simultaneously in blue.
The percentage information in the bar graph indicates the ratio of the sharpness value cur-
rently measured in the ROI to an internally calculated, maximum sharpness value of ROI.
Note that this maximum sharpness value is rarely achieved in practice.
The range that contains the two triangles and the ROI can be freely positioned and scaled.
The same ROI used to set the "Auto" lighting setting is used to set the sharpness.
The display for grading the sharpness setting is also shown in full screen view.
Moving an ROI with the mouse or keyboard
Only available with the tasks "Adjustment" and "Programs":
You can change the size of the ROIs shown in the image control using drag and shift.
This option is also available with the keyboard:
● Shift:
– Using the arrow keys: larger increments (10 pixels)
– Ctrl + arrow keys: Shift pixel by pixel
● Pressing the shift key at the same time activates ROI size change with the arrow keys:
– Shift + arrow keys: Changes the size in larger increments.
– Shift + Ctrl + arrow keys: Changes the size pixel by pixel.
Apply button
Applies and saves the settings made on this page to the template
Operator control and monitoring
8.2 User interface
SIMATIC MV420 / SIMATIC MV440
202 Operating Instructions, 10/2015, C79000-G8976-C334-03
"Save program >>" button
Saves the current image settings and switches to "Programs" task in which a new program is
created with the saved image settings.
Last result
Displays the result of the last successful processing, if available.
Information also appears below the results field about the current processing status.
Quality / value
The current values of the quality characteristics are displayed in the form of a bar according
to the selected verification standard. To obtain details of the quality characteristic, move the
mouse over the abbreviation for the quality (for example, "OCQ"), and a tooltip with more
information opens.
Table 8- 3 Bar color and meaning
Color
Length
Meaning
Green
Long
Quality grading is "Good"
Yellow Average Quality grading is "Fair"
Red
Short
Quality grading is "Poor"
Black The value is only for information and is not used to decide the
overall grade
● If you click on a bar, you can display the corresponding value.
● When you click on it again, the bar display is restored.
● If you click on the title of the quality characteristics, you change to the numeric display for
all characteristics.
● Clicking again returns you to the bar display.
Barcode quality characteristic display on the user interface
Ten scan lines which return individual results are used to measure the quality of barcode
marking. The overall grade is equivalent to the average quality of all scan lines; please see
Barcode verification (Page 73)
The individual grades displayed on the user interface each represent the average value of
the quality characteristic. However, these average values are calculated solely from scan
lines for which valid quality values could be calculated. For example, even if values can only
be calculated for one of ten scan lines, conclusions can still be drawn on individual quality
characteristics for extremely poor quality codes.
Note
Detailed description of the parameters in the online help
For a detailed description of the parameters and possible values, refer to the online help.
Operator control and monitoring
8.2 User interface
SIMATIC MV420 / SIMATIC MV440
Operating Instructions, 10/2015, C79000-G8976-C334-03 203
8.2.3
Connections
The Connections task consists of the following three parts:
● Interfaces
● Integration
● Digital I/O
Interfaces
On the "Interfaces" tab, you specify the communications interfaces and the parameters for
the interfaces.
Figure 8-6 Connections - "Interfaces" tab
The "Interfaces" tab has the following group boxes:
Ethernet
● Here, you set the parameters for the Ethernet port.
PROFINET IO
● Here, you set the parameters for the PROFINET IO interface. These input boxes are
enabled when you select "PROFINET mode" in the "IP mode" drop-down list.
Operator control and monitoring
8.2 User interface
SIMATIC MV420 / SIMATIC MV440
204 Operating Instructions, 10/2015, C79000-G8976-C334-03
ASM
● Here, you set the baud rate for communication with a communication module (ASM). The
communication module provides options for interfacing, for example with PROFIBUS DP.
CustomGUI
You set the access rights of a CustomGUI for the Web API interface.
RS232
● Here, you set the parameters for the integrated RS232 port.
TCP
● Here, you set the parameters of the TCP/IP connection via which, for example, you can
send the result string.
Archiving/MMI
● Here, you enter the address of a server to which you send images and/or data records for
diagnostics.
● Enter a monitoring time after which the system will re-check for a connection between
reader and server after failure to establish a connection.
● You can also specify the address of a remote client that is allowed to perform the
functions described in "Remote client" (Page 361).
Note
Detailed description of the parameters in the online help
For a detailed description of the parameters and possible values, refer to the online help.
Integration
You specify the following on the "Integration" tab:
● How the signals reach the reader.
● How the results and diagnostic data are output.
● How to operate SNMP on the reader.
Operator control and monitoring
8.2 User interface
SIMATIC MV420 / SIMATIC MV440
Operating Instructions, 10/2015, C79000-G8976-C334-03 205
Figure 8-7 Connections - "Integration" tab
Note
Detailed description of the parameters in the online help
For a detailed description of the parameters and possible values, refer to the online help.
Operator control and monitoring
8.2 User interface
SIMATIC MV420 / SIMATIC MV440
206 Operating Instructions, 10/2015, C79000-G8976-C334-03
Digital I/O
Figure 8-8 Connections - "Digital" I/O tab (SIMATIC MV420)
Operator control and monitoring
8.2 User interface
SIMATIC MV420 / SIMATIC MV440
Operating Instructions, 10/2015, C79000-G8976-C334-03 207
Figure 8-9 Connections - "Digital I/O" tab (SIMATIC MV440)
On the "Digital I/O" tab, you specify the assignment of digital inputs and outputs as well as
the assignment of the LED displays and of the beep tone.
Assignment of the inputs and outputs
SIMATIC MV420
The reader has one digital trigger input and three digital outputs. Two of the three outputs
can be freely assigned.
SIMATIC MV440
The reader has six digital inputs and outputs, four of which can be freely assigned. Each of
these four pins can be configured both as an input or an output.
LEDs
In the "LEDs" dialog box, you specify the output signal with which the freely programmable
LED displays are to be connected.
● SIMATIC MV420: One freely programmable LED display
● SIMATIC MV440: Two freely programmable LEDs
Operator control and monitoring
8.2 User interface
SIMATIC MV420 / SIMATIC MV440
208 Operating Instructions, 10/2015, C79000-G8976-C334-03
DI/DO
You set the switching time of the digital outputs READ, MATCH, N_OK and
EXT_1 to EXT_4.
Beep tone (acoustic signal)
You configure the acoustic sensor. The beep tone only exists with the SIMATIC MV420.
Table 8- 4 Configuring the acoustic sensor
Task
Possible val-
ues
Default
Meaning
Adjustment Off, READ READ Configures the acoustic signal (beep tone) for
adjustment mode.
• OFF: No signal
• READ: Short sound signal if it was possible
to read a code (the higher the tone, the bet-
ter the read reliability of the code).
Processing mode
Off, READ,
MATCH, N_OK
Off Configures the acoustic signal (beep tone) for
evaluation mode (RUN).
• OFF: No signal
• READ: Short sound signal if it was possible
to read a code (the higher the tone, the bet-
ter the read reliability of the code).
• MATCH: Acoustic signal when the code
comparison was successful.
• N_OK: Acoustic signal when reading was
not possible.
Note
Detailed description of the parameters in the online help
For a detailed description of
the parameters and possible values, refer to the online help.
8.2.4
Programs
The Programs task allows you to set the type of processing which the reader executes in a
cycle.
This task is the main task of the user interface and offers a wide range of options. They
enable you to adjust the reader to suit a wide range of read tasks in line with your
requirements.
Operator control and monitoring
8.2 User interface
SIMATIC MV420 / SIMATIC MV440
Operating Instructions, 10/2015, C79000-G8976-C334-03 209
Scope of programs
The "Programs" tasks includes:
● The image acquisition control functions
● The lighting selection
● Read task parameter assignment broken down into a sequence of read steps (steps)
● The output formatting of results
● The management and editing of the libraries for calibrations (verification), character fonts,
and models.
● The template that is used for creating new programs.
● The maximum number of programs: 15 (SIMATIC MV420-B: 5)
● Maximum number of read steps: 12 (SIMATIC MV420: 1)
Key function of the template
● The template contains the default settings that are used, for example, to create new
programs with just a few mouse clicks.
● The settings made in the Adjustment - Image task are saved in the template.
● The template is used to create new programs in the "Programs" task.
Note
Change template: Template icon must be active
To adjust the
template, you need to activate the Template icon:
•
Activate the "Show program template" check box under "Options" > "Tools" > "View".
Operator control and monitoring
8.2 User interface
SIMATIC MV420 / SIMATIC MV440
210 Operating Instructions, 10/2015, C79000-G8976-C334-03
8.2.4.1
Graphic elements of the user interface
Figure 8-10 Programs
The screenshot shows the user interface with its graphic elements.
Table 8- 5 Programs and template
Template for creating programs
Newly created program
Table 8- 6 Steps
Image acquisition step
Decoder step (variable number)
Character recognition step (OCR, variable number)
Object recognition step (locator, variable number)
Result step (fixed)
Operator control and monitoring
8.2 User interface
SIMATIC MV420 / SIMATIC MV440
Operating Instructions, 10/2015, C79000-G8976-C334-03 211
Table 8- 7 Step tab
For the read settings of a step
For the filter settings of a step
For the result settings/formatting of a step
Libraries
The "Libraries" button is used to open a list of available libraries. Clicking on an entry
opens the library view and allows you to edit the library and its entries.
Table 8- 8 Control elements
Save step (creates the program)
Inserts a program/step/library element
Delete a program / step / library element
Image control
Image control is displayed for many of the task pages. Image control contains the image,
and for some tasks also the overlays.
Operator control and monitoring
8.2 User interface
SIMATIC MV420 / SIMATIC MV440
212 Operating Instructions, 10/2015, C79000-G8976-C334-03
"Image" drop-down list
You select the image source, e.g. "Current", "Triggered (1x)", "New".
Table 8- 9 "Image" drop-down list symbols
Update display
Updates the image display and also updates the result display, if necessary.
Show details
Enables and disables the display of result details in the image.
A right click on the button opens a shortcut menu in which the details to be displayed can be
selected.
Zoom
Switches between the display of the entire image (reduced) and the image section in full
resolution.
Full screen
Opens the image in full size and full resolution in a new window.
Load image
Opens a separate HTML page that allows you to load a stored image onto the reader.
Save image
Saves the currently displayed image on your PC.
8.2.4.2
Image acquisition step
Image settings
Note
Detailed description of the parameters in the online help
For a detailed description of the parameters and possible values,
refer to the online help.
Operator control and monitoring
8.2 User interface
SIMATIC MV420 / SIMATIC MV440
Operating Instructions, 10/2015, C79000-G8976-C334-03 213
Figure 8-11 Image acquisition - "Image settings" tab
On the "Image settings" tab, you define all the settings which affect image acquisition:
● Image format
● Resolution
● Exposure time
● Brightness
● Exposure time offset: Correction of automatically calculated shutter speed
● Timeout
● Start processing: Proportion of the acquired image in relation to the maximum image size
● Trigger delay
● Image distortion correction
You can view the result of your settings "live" in the image control.
Operator control and monitoring
8.2 User interface
SIMATIC MV420 / SIMATIC MV440
214 Operating Instructions, 10/2015, C79000-G8976-C334-03
Control
Figure 8-12 Image acquisition - "Control" tab
You can define exactly how the reader acquires images.
The most important settings:
● Single trigger
● Autotrigger
● Scan
This is also where you specify the lighting connected:
further information in available in Image processing/image acquisition (Page 112)
Note
Detailed description of the parameters in the online help
For a detailed description of the parameters and possible values, refer to the online help.
Operator control and monitoring
8.2 User interface
SIMATIC MV420 / SIMATIC MV440
Operating Instructions, 10/2015, C79000-G8976-C334-03 215
8.2.4.3
Read code (decoder step)
Read
Figure 8-13 Decoder - "Read" tab
This tab is used to define:
● The decoding method you work with.
● The code types to be read.
● The ROI is limited in the image control:
Drag the rectangle with the mouse
● Whether the ROI follows the result of a preceding step.
● Whether one or more codes are read in the ROI.
Note
Detailed description of the parameters in the online help
For a detailed description of the parameters and possible values, refer to the online help.
Operator control and monitoring
8.2 User interface
SIMATIC MV420 / SIMATIC MV440
216 Operating Instructions, 10/2015, C79000-G8976-C334-03
Quality
Figure 8-14 Decoder - "Quality" tab
If you wish to assess the code quality (marking quality), you define the quality criteria here.
Note
Detailed description of the parameters in the online help
For a detailed description of the parameters an
d possible values, refer to the online help.
Operator control and monitoring
8.2 User interface
SIMATIC MV420 / SIMATIC MV440
Operating Instructions, 10/2015, C79000-G8976-C334-03 217
Result
Figure 8-15 Decoder - "Result" tab
This tab is used to define:
● The format in which the read result is output.
● The criteria by which the comparison with a specification was successful.
● The conditions under which the code did not meet the expectations, and the overall result
of the program may be "N_OK".
Note
Detailed description of the parameters in the online help
For a detailed description of the parameters and possible values, refer to the online help.
Operator control and monitoring
8.2 User interface
SIMATIC MV420 / SIMATIC MV440
218 Operating Instructions, 10/2015, C79000-G8976-C334-03
Advanced
Figure 8-16 Decoder - "Advanced" tab
In this tab, you can set parameters that may speed up the decoding process. In difficult read
conditions, the settings you make can help improve reader read reliability.
Note
Code must meet the specifications - otherwise decoding slows down considerably!
This tab contains expert settings which, when applied correctly, can speed up the decoding
process and improve read reliability in difficult conditions.
However: If a code to be read does not meet the specifications that have been set, decoding
can slow d
own considerably or even fail completely.
Note
Detailed description of the parameters in the online help
For a detailed description of the parameters and possible values, refer to the online help.
Operator control and monitoring
8.2 User interface
SIMATIC MV420 / SIMATIC MV440
Operating Instructions, 10/2015, C79000-G8976-C334-03 219
8.2.4.4
Read plain text (OCR step)
Note
OCR function only available for SIMATIC MV440
The OCR feature is only available for the SIMATIC MV440 reader and requires an additional
license.
In OCR steps, you configure the tasks for optical character recognition.
Read
Figure 8-17 OCR - "Read" tab
In this tab, you can set all options for image pre-processing and for the OCR algorithm:
● The character font
● The ROI in the image control
● Orientation and polarity of the text
● Character spacing
● Image enhancement filter
Operator control and monitoring
8.2 User interface
SIMATIC MV420 / SIMATIC MV440
220 Operating Instructions, 10/2015, C79000-G8976-C334-03
Note
Detailed description of the parameters in the online help
For a detailed description of the parameters and possible values, refer to the online help.
Filtering
Figure 8-18 OCR - "Filter" tab
The character recognition configured in the "Read" tab provides "character hypotheses" with
an associated quality value for ambiguous characters at each character position. "2" and "Z"
or "0" and "O", for example, are ambiguous character pairs.
Using the settings in this tab, you can provide information about your application and filter
out irrelevant results. This increases the reliability of the read result.
Note
Detailed description of the parameters in the online help
For a detailed description of the parameters and possible values, refer to the online
help.
Operator control and monitoring
8.2 User interface
SIMATIC MV420 / SIMATIC MV440
Operating Instructions, 10/2015, C79000-G8976-C334-03 221
Result
Figure 8-19 OCR - "Result" tab
In this tab, you then define:
● The format in which the read result of the selected step is output.
● The conditions you want for this ROI in relation to the MATCH and N_OK signals.
Note
Detailed description of the parameters in the online help
For a detailed description of the parameters and possible values, refer to the online help.
Operator control and monitoring
8.2 User interface
SIMATIC MV420 / SIMATIC MV440
222 Operating Instructions, 10/2015, C79000-G8976-C334-03
Advanced
Figure 8-20 OCR - "Advanced" tab
In this tab, you set parameters that can increase the reading accuracy in especially difficult
reading situations.
Note
Detailed description of the parameters in the online help
For a detailed description of the parameters and possible values, refer to the online help.
See also
Text-Genius and Text-Genius Plus (Page 90)
Operator control and monitoring
8.2 User interface
SIMATIC MV420 / SIMATIC MV440
Operating Instructions, 10/2015, C79000-G8976-C334-03 223
8.2.4.5
Recognize object (locator step)
Note
Locator function only available for SIMATIC MV440
The locator feature is only available for the SIMATIC MV440 reader and requires the
additional Pat
-Genius license.
In locator steps, you configure the tasks for object recognition. Before you configure, you
need to define a model library with at least one model.
Model
Figure 8-21 Locator - "Model" tab
In this tab, first select the following:
● The model library with which this step will work.
● The models of the model library which are to be detected in this step.
This is only possible if you have already generated a model library.
Other important settings in this tab:
● The region of interest (ROI) in the image control in which objects will be searched for.
● ROI position: fixed or following a previous step.
● Parameter settings for edge-based image preprocessing.
Operator control and monitoring
8.2 User interface
SIMATIC MV420 / SIMATIC MV440
224 Operating Instructions, 10/2015, C79000-G8976-C334-03
Note
Detailed description of the parameters in the online help
For a detailed description of the parameters and possible values, refer to the online help.
Find
Figure 8-22 Locator - "Find" tab
In this tab, you select typical settings for finding the objects.
With these settings, you can significantly influence the speed, accuracy and requirements for
matches with the stored models.
Operator control and monitoring
8.2 User interface
SIMATIC MV420 / SIMATIC MV440
Operating Instructions, 10/2015, C79000-G8976-C334-03 225
Filtering
Figure 8-23 Locator - "Filter" tab
In this tab, you make the settings for ordering and filtering the found objects.
The settings make up the input for forming the result in the next tab "Result".
Operator control and monitoring
8.2 User interface
SIMATIC MV420 / SIMATIC MV440
226 Operating Instructions, 10/2015, C79000-G8976-C334-03
Result
Figure 8-24 Locator - "Result" tab
This tab is used to define:
● The format in which the results of an individual object and the entire locator step will be
output.
● The conditions which will lead to an N_OK evaluation of the step.
● The conditions which will lead to a match error as compared to the specification.
Operator control and monitoring
8.2 User interface
SIMATIC MV420 / SIMATIC MV440
Operating Instructions, 10/2015, C79000-G8976-C334-03 227
8.2.4.6
Result step (overall result)
Figure 8-25 Result step
You specify how the results of the program steps are to be combined as an overall result.
You also adjust error messages to your application.
Note
Detailed description of the parameters in the online help
For a detailed description of the parameters and possible values, refer to the online help.
Operator control and monitoring
8.2 User interface
SIMATIC MV420 / SIMATIC MV440
228 Operating Instructions, 10/2015, C79000-G8976-C334-03
8.2.4.7
Save step
Figure 8-26 Save step
In the "Save" program step you can:
● Save newly created and changed programs.
● Save and then test newly created and changed programs.
● Delete newly created programs.
● Delete changes to existing programs.
● Save changes of the template
Note
Change template: Template icon must be visible
To adjust the template, you need to switch the Template icon to visible:
•
Activate the "Show program template" check box under "Options" > "Tools" > "View".
Note
Detailed description of the parameters in the online help
For a detailed description of the parameters and possible values, refer to the online help.
Operator control and monitoring
8.2 User interface
SIMATIC MV420 / SIMATIC MV440
Operating Instructions, 10/2015, C79000-G8976-C334-03 229
8.2.5
Libraries
The library concept available for SIMATIC MV400, version 5.0 and higher, allows you to
store central functions and settings in library elements. These library elements can then be
used more than once in several programs and program steps.
For example, you can generate and configure user-defined character fonts in the character
font library. You can save up to five user-defined character fonts as library elements in the
character font library. The defined character fonts can be referenced and used in multiple
OCR steps of a given program or indeed in multiple programs.
The libraries are accessed by clicking on the symbol in the top right of the
"Programs" task and selecting one of the available libraries:
8.2.5.1
Verification library
Note
Verification is only available for the SIMATIC MV440 reader.
The verification library is used to define verification settings and calibrate the reader for code
verification.
● You can run up to five calibrations and save them as library elements in the verification
library.
● You can then reference the calibrations in the image acquisition of a program.
Referencing specifies the parameters for code verification in this program for image
acquisition and the decoder steps.
● The calibrated image acquisition may not always be enough for applications with highly
specific image acquisition requirements. In this case, you can overwrite the settings
specified by calibration in image acquisition.
Note
Verification results no longer comply with standard
In this case, the verification results will not comply with the standard; this is indicated
by a
change in the verification type shown in the verification report.
Operator control and monitoring
8.2 User interface
SIMATIC MV420 / SIMATIC MV440
230 Operating Instructions, 10/2015, C79000-G8976-C334-03
Verify
Figure 8-27 Verification library - "Verify" tab
You specify the verification standard and define the lighting you want to use.
Note
Detailed description of the parameters in the online help
For a detailed description of the parameters and possible values, refer to the online help.
Operator control and monitoring
8.2 User interface
SIMATIC MV420 / SIMATIC MV440
Operating Instructions, 10/2015, C79000-G8976-C334-03 231
Calibrate
Figure 8-28 Verification library - "Calibrate" tab
1. Calibrate the reader on this page.
2. Save the result.
Regular calibration is necessary for good reproducibility
To achieve good reproducibility, the reader must be calibrated at regular intervals.
Calibration is required:
● When the setup is changed.
● When something changes in the surroundings, such as ambient brightness or ambient
temperature.
Achieving reproducible results
To obtain reproducible results:
● You must make sure during the commissioning of the reader that the device can be
operated without being influenced by changes in the brightness of the surroundings, for
example due to shielding.
● The setup must be implemented according to the requirements of the standard being
applied.
● Ensure that the resolution is correct (> 10 pixels with DMC).
Operator control and monitoring
8.2 User interface
SIMATIC MV420 / SIMATIC MV440
232 Operating Instructions, 10/2015, C79000-G8976-C334-03
● The complete code must be sharply imaged.
● No dirt on the lens or on the chip.
Note
Detailed description of the parameters in the online help
For a detailed description of the parameters and possible values, refer to the online help.
Save
Figure 8-29 Verification library – "Save" tab
"Name" input field
Specify the name under which the current calibration will be saved. The entry is optional.
Possible values: Letters, numbers and underscores. Maximum of 10 characters.
"Number" input field
Specify the number under which you want to save the current calibration.
Value range: 1 to 5
Operator control and monitoring
8.2 User interface
SIMATIC MV420 / SIMATIC MV440
Operating Instructions, 10/2015, C79000-G8976-C334-03 233
"Save now" button
Clicking this button saves the current calibration under the name specified
"Discard changes" button
This button discards the changes made since the calibration was last saved.
If the calibration is new and has not yet been saved, it will not be saved and will be lost.
"Discard new calibration" button
A newly created calibration in which no changes were made is removed and lost.
Note
Detailed description of the parameters in the online help
For a detailed description of the parameters and possible values, refer to the online help.
8.2.5.2
Character font library
Note
The character font library is only available for the SIMATIC MV440 reader.
You can use the character font library to define your own character fonts for use in OCR
steps.
A greater range of applications is possible with user-defined character fonts than with
predefined fonts. For example, special characters can be recognized and accurate
recognition of the printed image makes recognition more reliable. The processing time
required is also shorter than with predefined fonts.
● You can create up to five user-defined character fonts and save them as library elements
in the character font library.
● You can select any of the character font library elements as character fonts in the OCR
steps of a program.
Creating a user-defined character font
You can create your own, user-defined character font in four steps:
1. Compile image collection ("Image collection" tab)
2. Generate prototypes ("Create" tab)
3. Assign and evaluate prototypes ("Assign" tab)
4. Save character font ("Save" tab)
Operator control and monitoring
8.2 User interface
SIMATIC MV420 / SIMATIC MV440
234 Operating Instructions, 10/2015, C79000-G8976-C334-03
Image collection
Note
Saving necessary acquired images
All actions you perform in "Image collection" can affect the content of the diagnostic image
memory.
If you still require the acquired images which it currently contains, you will need to save
them;
"Information" task, "Diagnostics" tab (Page 251).
Figure 8-30 Character font library - "Image collection" tab
In this tab, you specify the acquired images on which you want to base the prototypes for
your custom font. The images that are currently in the diagnostic image memory of the
reader are displayed first.
● Use the "Remove" button to delete the acquired images you do not need.
● Use the "Add" button to add the image currently displayed in the image control to the
collection.
Operator control and monitoring
8.2 User interface
SIMATIC MV420 / SIMATIC MV440
Operating Instructions, 10/2015, C79000-G8976-C334-03 235
Note
Detailed description of the parameters in the online help
For a detailed description of the parameters and possible values, refer to the online help.
Generate
Figure 8-31 Character font library - "Generate" tab
In this tab, you define the image specifications for selecting the prototypes of the custom
character font. Character prototypes show the representation, form and typeface of the
characters in the character set.
The "Update display" button lets you preview the prototype search on the displayed image.
If the result matches your expectations:
● Click the button.
Operator control and monitoring
8.2 User interface
SIMATIC MV420 / SIMATIC MV440
236 Operating Instructions, 10/2015, C79000-G8976-C334-03
This extracts the prototypes for the user-defined character font.
The prototypes are extracted from all acquired images selected in the "Image collection" tab
with their current settings.
Note
Detailed description of the parameters in the online help
For a detailed description of the parameters and possible values, refer to the online help.
Assign
Figure 8-32 Character font library - "Assign" tab
This tab gives you an overview of:
● The generated character prototypes and their automatic assignment to a character class.
● The prototypes contained in the character font and their assignment to a character class.
In this tab, you can also:
● Add new prototypes to the character font and assign them to a character class.
● Delete prototypes you do not need from the character font.
● Correct wrong assignments by changing the assignment of a prototype to a character
class.
Operator control and monitoring
8.2 User interface
SIMATIC MV420 / SIMATIC MV440
Operating Instructions, 10/2015, C79000-G8976-C334-03 237
Assigned prototypes must be checked
Check whether the prototypes have been assigned to the right character class.
1. To do so, click on the character classes on the left.
2. Check whether the assigned prototypes match.
Note
Detailed description of the parameters in the online help
For a detailed description of the parameters and possible values, refer to the online help.
Save
Figure 8-33 Character font library - "Save" tab
"Name" input field
Enter the name under which the current character font is to be saved. The entry is optional.
Possible values: Letters, numbers and underscores. Maximum of 10 characters.
"Number" input field
Specify the number under which the character font is to be saved.
Operator control and monitoring
8.2 User interface
SIMATIC MV420 / SIMATIC MV440
238 Operating Instructions, 10/2015, C79000-G8976-C334-03
Value range: 1 to 5
"Save now" button
Clicking on this button saves the current character font under the name specified.
"Discard changes" button
This button discards the changes made since the character font was last saved.
If the character font is new and has not yet been saved, it will not be saved and will be lost.
"Discard new font" button
A newly created font in which no changes were made is removed and lost.
Note
Detailed description of the parameters in the online help
For a detailed description of the parameters and possibl
e values, refer to the online help.
8.2.5.3
Model library
Note
The model library is only available for the SIMATIC MV440 reader.
With the model library, you define models of objects that you can then use in locator steps,
for example for object recognition.
● A model library can contain several models depending on their size.
● You can create up to five model libraries.
Operator control and monitoring
8.2 User interface
SIMATIC MV420 / SIMATIC MV440
Operating Instructions, 10/2015, C79000-G8976-C334-03 239
Image collection
Figure 8-34 Model library - "Image collection" tab
The model image collection uses the image diagnostics memory. The images displayed in
this image collection come from the diagnostics buffer. See also Info (Page 251).
Note
Saving necessary acquired images
All actions you perform in "Image collection" can affect the content of the diagnostic image
memory.
If you still require the acquired
images currently contained, you will need to save them; refer
to the online help for the "Information" task, "Diagnostics" tab.
In this dialog, you select the image from the image collection that you want to use to
generate a new model.
● With the "New model" button, you start the model editor with the selected image.
● Use the "Remove" button to delete the acquired images you do not need.
● Use the "Add" button to add the image currently displayed in the image control to the
collection.
Operator control and monitoring
8.2 User interface
SIMATIC MV420 / SIMATIC MV440
240 Operating Instructions, 10/2015, C79000-G8976-C334-03
Generate
Figure 8-35 Model library - "Generate" tab
In this tab, you have the option of generating new models or editing existing models from the
model library.
1. In the image control, select the image with which you want to generate a new model.
2. In the image control, specify the ROI around the object from which you want to generate
a model:
To do this, specify a model name and the object class.
3. By clicking the "Generate" button, a model is created with the current settings.
4. The model can then be edited and saved.
Note
Detailed description of the parameters in the online help
For a detailed description of the parameters and possible values, refer to the online help.
Operator control and monitoring
8.2 User interface
SIMATIC MV420 / SIMATIC MV440
Operating Instructions, 10/2015, C79000-G8976-C334-03 241
Save
Figure 8-36 Model library - "Save" tab
"Name" input field
Specify the name under which the current model library will be saved. The entry is optional.
Possible values: Letters, numbers and underscores. Maximum of 10 characters.
"Number" input field
Specify the number with which you want to save the model library.
Value range: 1 to 5
"Save now" button
Click this button to save the current model library with the specified name.
"Discard changes" button
This button discards the changes made since the model library was last saved.
If the model was newly created and has not been saved since, it will not be saved and will be
lost.
Operator control and monitoring
8.2 User interface
SIMATIC MV420 / SIMATIC MV440
242 Operating Instructions, 10/2015, C79000-G8976-C334-03
"Discard new model library" button
A newly created model library in which no changes were made is removed and lost.
Note
Detailed description of the parameters in the online help
For a detailed description of the
parameters and possible values, refer to the online help.
8.2.6
Run
The change to "processing mode" means the start of the evaluation.
The selected program is run and the read results displayed. Machine-readable codes and/or
plain text can be read, compared and checked depending on the task of the selected
program.
The result of processing is displayed in processing mode.
Note
Operating and monitoring via the user interface can lead to longer cycle times.
Figure 8-37 Processing mode
Operator control and monitoring
8.2 User interface
SIMATIC MV420 / SIMATIC MV440
Operating Instructions, 10/2015, C79000-G8976-C334-03 243
Text box
At the top left of the dialog you will see a static text with important information on the
processing mode.
"Program" drop-down list ("program sequence" for program sequence mode)
Select the program you want to start.
"Start" button
Starts reader operation with the selected program.
"Release trigger" button
To optimize plant integration or read results, for example, you can send a trigger signal
manually during commissioning. This function is, however, only enabled for the user with the
"service" role when this user has the right to take over control.
Quality / value
The current values of the quality characteristics are displayed in the form of a bar according
to the selected verification standard. To obtain details of the quality characteristic, move the
mouse over the abbreviation for the quality (for example, "OCQ"), and a tooltip with more
information opens.
Table 8- 10 Bar color and meaning
Color
Length
Meaning
Green
Long
Quality grading is "Good"
Yellow Average Quality grading is "Fair"
Red
Short
Quality grading is "Poor"
Black The value is only for information and is not used to decide the
overall grade
● If you click on a bar, you can display the corresponding value.
● When you click on it again, the bar display is restored.
● If you click on the title of the quality characteristics, you change to the numeric display for
all characteristics.
● Clicking again returns you to the bar display.
Barcode quality characteristic display on the user interface
Ten scan lines which return individual results are used to measure the quality of barcode
marking. The overall grade is equivalent to the average quality of all scan lines; please see
Barcode verification (Page 73)
The individual grades displayed on the user interface each represent the average value of
the quality characteristic. However, these average values are calculated solely from scan
Operator control and monitoring
8.2 User interface
SIMATIC MV420 / SIMATIC MV440
244 Operating Instructions, 10/2015, C79000-G8976-C334-03
lines for which valid quality values could be calculated. For example, even if values can only
be calculated for one of ten scan lines, conclusions can still be drawn on individual quality
characteristics for extremely poor quality codes.
This procedure may result in the overall grade on the user interface being significantly poorer
than the individual grades.
Note
Detailed description of the parameters in the online help
For a detailed description of the parameters and possible values, refer to the online help.
Operator control and monitoring
8.2 User interface
SIMATIC MV420 / SIMATIC MV440
Operating Instructions, 10/2015, C79000-G8976-C334-03 245
8.2.7
Options
In the tabs of the "Options" task, enter the settings that are to apply to the entire device:
● For lighting that you cannot select directly using the article number.
● For user authorizations
● For saving information for diagnostic purposes.
● Extra functions
Lighting
These settings are only required if you are connecting lighting that cannot be selected by its
article number:
● In the image acquisition/control step in the Lighting group, select "Other (int.)" or "Other
(ext.)" as lighting. The lighting parameters set here will be used.
Figure 8-38 Options - "Lighting" tab
If you change the parameters of a selected lamp on this page or connect and select a
different lamp:
Programs and calibrations that use this lamp are marked as non-executable.
● In order for these to become executable again, you must check and save the calibrations
and programs again.
Operator control and monitoring
8.2 User interface
SIMATIC MV420 / SIMATIC MV440
246 Operating Instructions, 10/2015, C79000-G8976-C334-03
Alternatively:
● If you reconnect the lamp used for the calibration operation without changing the
parameters and select it in the lighting options, the calibration will become executable
again.
Note
Detailed description of the parameters in the online help
For a detailed description of the parameters and possible values, refer to the online help.
Security
In the "Security" tab, the administrator specifies which user role is permitted to execute
which tasks and, when necessary, changes the administrator password or the passwords of
the users.
Note
Only an administrator can change authorizations
The permissions can only be
changed by the administrator.
Note
Changing default passwords
For security reasons, make sure to change the delivery
-state passwords:
•
Use only secure passwords.
•
To make sure that you have access to user administration and the security settings in the
future, keep the passwords in a safe place.
Operator control and monitoring
8.2 User interface
SIMATIC MV420 / SIMATIC MV440
Operating Instructions, 10/2015, C79000-G8976-C334-03 247
Figure 8-39 Options - "Security" tab
The reader allows different levels of access control for different users.
Note
Detailed description of the parameters in the online help
For a detailed description of
the parameters and possible values, refer to the online help.
Operator control and monitoring
8.2 User interface
SIMATIC MV420 / SIMATIC MV440
248 Operating Instructions, 10/2015, C79000-G8976-C334-03
Diag.&monitoring
In the "Diag.&monitoring" tab, you specify the information that is to be stored for diagnostic
purposes.
Figure 8-40 Options - "Diag.&monitoring" tab
● In the "Image" box of the "Logging" group box, you specify which images will be stored in
which format on the reader.
● In "Report", you specify the format in which the diagnostics events will be stored on the
reader.
● In the "Time base" group box, you specify whether the time stamp of the diagnostics
events is supplied by the PC or by an SNTP server in the network. If you specify SNTP as
the source, you will also need to specify the IP address of the server.
● In the "Monitoring" group box, you specify whether or not a live image is displayed in
processing mode.
Operator control and monitoring
8.2 User interface
SIMATIC MV420 / SIMATIC MV440
Operating Instructions, 10/2015, C79000-G8976-C334-03 249
● In the “Persistence” group box, you specify which diagnostic information you want to store
permanently on the EPROM.
– When the "Save next error image" check box is selected, the image of the next NOK
signal are stored. If an image has already been stored, it will be overwritten when this
function is selected.
– When the "Save next data records" check box is selected, all diagnostics entries you
specify in the input box from the time of selection are entered in the EPROM. Existing
entries are deleted when you switch to On. If the diagnostics buffer in the EPROM
reaches the number of permanently storable diagnostic data records, no further
entries are made.
● In the "Character fonts" group box, you determine whether prototypes for the "Supervised
training" function should be recorded in processing mode.
Note
Detailed description of the parameters in the online help
For a detailed descr
iption of the parameters and possible values, refer to the online help.
Operator control and monitoring
8.2 User interface
SIMATIC MV420 / SIMATIC MV440
250 Operating Instructions, 10/2015, C79000-G8976-C334-03
Extras
In the "Extras" tab, you can specify the additional functions you want to use for image
processing.
Figure 8-41 Options - "Extras" tab
Program sequence
Note
A non-existent/non-executable program number prevents processing
You cannot use a program sequence for processing:
•
If the program sequence contains a program number which does not exist.
•
If the program sequence contains a program number which cannot be executed.
"Program sequence" mode allows you to acquire and process several images at the same
time with one trigger.
1. Select a program sequence number (between 1 and 15) in the "Program sequence" drop-
down list.
2. Under "Contains program", select the programs which are to be included in the program
sequence.
Operator control and monitoring
8.2 User interface
SIMATIC MV420 / SIMATIC MV440
Operating Instructions, 10/2015, C79000-G8976-C334-03 251
Scanner portal
Used to implement scanner portal applications (Page 356).
Verification
You can select whether quality grades are output as digits (4 to 0) or letters (A to F without
E).
View
By selecting/deselecting the "Show program template" you choose whether the template
icon is enabled or disabled under "Programs".
You can only adjust the template when the program template is activated.
Note
Detailed description of the parameters in the online help
For a detailed description of the parameters and possible values, refer to the online help.
8.2.8
Info
The Information task consists of three sections:
● Statistics
● Diagnostics
● Device information
Statistics
This part of the dialog shows you the statistics for recognition of the codes/code sequences
which are currently active.
Note
Quality statistics
Verification errors are recorded as "Poor evaluation" in the quality statistics. Furthermore, a
diagnostics image is recorded for a verification error if "Poor evaluation" is activated as
"Cause".
Operator control and monitoring
8.2 User interface
SIMATIC MV420 / SIMATIC MV440
252 Operating Instructions, 10/2015, C79000-G8976-C334-03
Figure 8-42 Info - "Statistics" tab
In this part of the dialog, you will see statistical values on the reading of the codes and read
quality. The meaning of the individual displays is explained in the online help that you can
access with the "Help" button.
● If you have switched off "Code sequence" mode (see Options - " Extras"), information on
the code currently used will be provided here.
● If you activated Code sequence mode, a drop-down list will be displayed. In the drop-
down list, you can decide whether the statistics of the entire code sequence or the
statistics of a specific code are displayed.
● If you simply want the statistics of the OK reads of a certain code, select the program
number of the relevant sequence from the drop-down list. With this setting, the "*" symbol
is displayed at several places.
● You can clear the statistics with the "Reset statistics" button if you have administration
authorization (see Options - "Security" tab).
Statistics are reset automatically if the program number is changed in processing mode.
Operator control and monitoring
8.2 User interface
SIMATIC MV420 / SIMATIC MV440
Operating Instructions, 10/2015, C79000-G8976-C334-03 253
Note
Detailed description of the parameters in the online help
For a detailed description of the parameters and possible values, refer to the online help.
Diagnostics
In this part of the dialog, you can display, delete and save diagnostics images and
diagnostics reports.
Figure 8-43 Information - "Diagnostics" tab
Images
Under “Images”, you can see the number of images currently in the image buffer.
● Clicking the "Reset" button deletes all images in the image buffer.
● Clicking the "Open" button opens a website with all images of the image buffer.
● Clicking on an image enlarges it.
● Clicking the "Save" button opens a website with all images of the image buffer. You can
save this website in various formats on your PC.
Operator control and monitoring
8.2 User interface
SIMATIC MV420 / SIMATIC MV440
254 Operating Instructions, 10/2015, C79000-G8976-C334-03
System image
The "Save diagnostics package" is used to save a complete system image in a diagnostics
package. In addition to diagnostics data, this diagnostics package also contains the device
parameter assignment and can be used by Support for error analysis.
Note
Do not operate reader during saving
Saving the diagnostics package can take several minutes. To ensure that the diagnostics
package is saved error
-free, do not operate the reader during saving.
•
Wait until the save operation of the diagnostics package has been fully completed.
•
If saving is terminated via the corresponding browser function, this has no influence on
the reader's transfer operation: You must wait until the reader has fully transferred the
diagnostics package.
Character fonts
"Character fonts" shows you the number of prototypes currently in the diagnostic buffer.
The prototypes are recorded with the "Supervised training" function.
● Clicking the "Reset" button deletes all prototypes in the diagnostic buffer.
Data records
The "Data records" group box shows you the number of diagnostics events currently in the
event buffer.
In "Content", you can use the check boxes to select the information you want to display
about the diagnostics events in the buffer:
Error
Information on the occurrence and acknowledgment (manual or automatic) of
errors
Results
Evaluation results
Image
Information on the image acquisition, for example exposure time, brightness
States
Mode change (change to RUN, ADJUST, Self-test, etc.)
Control
Changing control of the reader
Diagnostics
Changes that affect diagnostics, for example, changing the diagnostics options
or fetching a time stamp from an SNTP server
● If you click the "Save as CSV" button, a dialog opens in which you can store the events
currently selected under "Content" as a CSV file.
● Clicking the "Open & save" button opens a Web page with all the events of the events
buffer. You can save this website in various formats on your PC.
Operator control and monitoring
8.2 User interface
SIMATIC MV420 / SIMATIC MV440
Operating Instructions, 10/2015, C79000-G8976-C334-03 255
Persistent data records
Note
Activating persistent data records
The persistent data records option is activated, when necessary, in the "Diag.&monitoring"
tab under Options.
● Clicking the "Reset" button deletes all the entries in the event buffer including the entries
relating to temporary PROFINET I/O errors.
● Clicking the "Open & save" button opens a website with all the diagnostics entries saved
permanently on the reader. You can save this website on your PC.
● If you click the "Save as CSV" button, a dialog opens in which you can save the
diagnostics events permanently stored on the reader as a CSV file.
Note
Detailed description of the parameters in the online help
For a detailed description of the parameters and possible values, refer to the
online help.
Device information
This "Device information" tab provides information on the following:
● The reader
● The firmware
● The optionally integrated internal lamp
Operator control and monitoring
8.2 User interface
SIMATIC MV420 / SIMATIC MV440
256 Operating Instructions, 10/2015, C79000-G8976-C334-03
Figure 8-44 Information - "Device information" tab
Operator control and monitoring
8.2 User interface
SIMATIC MV420 / SIMATIC MV440
Operating Instructions, 10/2015, C79000-G8976-C334-03 257
8.2.9
Maintain
The "Maintain" task provides the following options:
● Saving or restoring settings and programs.
● Inputting the VeriCode® license number.
● Resetting the reader to the original factory state.
● When necessary, running required firmware updates.
● Loading a customized CustomGUI to the reader or backing it up from the reader.
Figure 8-45 Maintain
Settings and programs
Use the "Save/restore" button to open a website from which you can save all connection
settings, options, saved library elements, programs and the CustomGUI in an MV400 XML
parameter file. To restore the named settings, load this file again in the reader. Store the
MV400 XML parameter files in a safe place.
Operator control and monitoring
8.2 User interface
SIMATIC MV420 / SIMATIC MV440
258 Operating Instructions, 10/2015, C79000-G8976-C334-03
Firmware
Note
Control via automation system: DISA bit must not be set
If you control the reader from an automation system, make sure that the DISA bit is not set
durin
g the firmware update. This prevents an automation system from switching the reader
to RUN.
"Incremental update..." button
The "Incremental update..." button opens a Web page where you can update the firmware.
To do this, you require a vsz file.
An incremental update is only possible to a version in which the version has only changed in
the third digit compared with the previous version.
Example
● Updating with a vsz file from firmware version V3.0.0 to V3.0.1 is possible.
● Updating with a vsz file from firmware version V3.0.0 to V3.1.0 or V4.0.0 is not possible.
"Full update..." button
Note
Full update: Saving all settings and programs
During a full update, all settings and programs are lost:
•
Make sure that you save all settings and programs before running a full update.
You will find more detailed information on running a firmware update in the online help and
on the Web pages that open.
The "Full update..." button opens a Web page where you can update the firmware. To do
this, you require a bin file.
Operator control and monitoring
8.2 User interface
SIMATIC MV420 / SIMATIC MV440
Operating Instructions, 10/2015, C79000-G8976-C334-03 259
Figure 8-46 Updating the firmware of the reader
Operator control and monitoring
8.2 User interface
SIMATIC MV420 / SIMATIC MV440
260 Operating Instructions, 10/2015, C79000-G8976-C334-03
8.2.10
Stop
This page is displayed when the reader is in "Stop"mode.
Figure 8-47 Stop reader
Error display
If an error occurs, the STATE/SF LED will turn red and display:
● The corresponding error message
● The meaning of the error
● The options for eliminating the error
Acknowledge the error by clicking the "Acknowledge" button.
Operator control and monitoring
8.2 User interface
SIMATIC MV420 / SIMATIC MV440
Operating Instructions, 10/2015, C79000-G8976-C334-03 261
Figure 8-48 Error message
Operator control and monitoring
8.3 User-defined user interface
SIMATIC MV420 / SIMATIC MV440
262 Operating Instructions, 10/2015, C79000-G8976-C334-03
8.3
User-defined user interface
The supplied user interface and HTML pages are ideal tools for classic operator control and
monitoring tasks. For applications that are not covered by these tools, we recommend that
you create a user-defined user interface. The basis of these user-defined user interfaces is
the WebAPI communication of the Web server of the readers, which has been standardized
for the readers.
WebAPI communication is independent of the target hardware on which the user interface
will run. This means that you have numerous options. For example, you can program .NET
applications for the PC or apps for mobile end devices.
HTML pages with JavaScript in particular represent one special option. You can adapt the
HTML pages to your needs and upload them to the readers. You can access these HTML-
based, installed user interfaces from any Web browser.
An example of an HTML-based, user-defined user interface is already stored on readers as
of firmware V5.1. Based on this example, modifications or expansions can then be made.
Requirements and notes on the development of user-defined user interfaces
● The reader must have firmware V5.1 or higher.
● The documentation of the standardized WebAPI communication does not ship with the
product. It is intended for experienced developers and requires experience in Web-based
development of user interfaces.
● You will find information on uploading/downloading and access protection of the user-
defined user interface in the online help under the entries "Maintain" and "Connections"
(keyword "Custom GUI").
8.3.1
Example of a user-defined user interface
An example of an HTML-based, user-defined user interface is already stored on readers as
of firmware V5.1. You will find the example under the following URL:
http://<IP address of the reader>/cgui/CGUISample.html
NOTICE
Disclaimer of liability and warranty
Siemens AG accepts no liability or warranty for the product when user-defined user
interfaces are used.
Functions of the example
The example of a user-defined user interface that ships with the product includes the
following typical functions:
● Establishing a connection to MV4x0
● Message about a failed connection establishment
Operator control and monitoring
8.3 User-defined user interface
SIMATIC MV420 / SIMATIC MV440
Operating Instructions, 10/2015, C79000-G8976-C334-03 263
● Example page for opening, changing and saving a program
● Mode change between stop, adjustment, processing, editing of programs
● Program/sequence selection for processing mode
● Starting processing mode
● "OK"/"N_OK" display for processing mode
● Detailed image display
● Representation of the read result
● Changing settings in adjustment mode:
– Exposure
– Exposure time
– Brightness
– Exposure time offset
● Display of the operating status (incl. errors)
● Display of device information for device identification
● Acknowledging errors
Operator control and monitoring
8.3 User-defined user interface
SIMATIC MV420 / SIMATIC MV440
264 Operating Instructions, 10/2015, C79000-G8976-C334-03
HTML pages of the example
Figure 8-49 Adjustment mode and save program
Operator control and monitoring
8.3 User-defined user interface
SIMATIC MV420 / SIMATIC MV440
Operating Instructions, 10/2015, C79000-G8976-C334-03 265
Figure 8-50 Processing mode
Figure 8-51 Representation of the device information
Operator control and monitoring
8.4 Monitoring via HTML pages
SIMATIC MV420 / SIMATIC MV440
266 Operating Instructions, 10/2015, C79000-G8976-C334-03
8.4
Monitoring via HTML pages
The HTML pages integrated on the reader provide the opportunity of obtaining important
information from the reader and monitoring the recognition process in many environments.
Benefits
● Independent of the operating system or the browser you are using.
● Does not require Java Runtime on the visualization device.
● Requires little memory and performance on the visualization device.
● Can be integrated easily in existing applications.
● Display normally available in 6 languages, language can be changed online.
Available HTML pages
Home page
Shows current device information on:
● Device reader revision level
● Firmware version
Operator control and monitoring
8.4 Monitoring via HTML pages
SIMATIC MV420 / SIMATIC MV440
Operating Instructions, 10/2015, C79000-G8976-C334-03 267
● PROFINET IO device name
● Network identification
Live image display with links
Figure 8-52 Live image display with links
Displays the images acquired by the reader in adjustment mode or processing mode. If the
visualization device provides Java script support, the displayed image is automatically
updated. With the displayed links, you can call up other pages.
Operator control and monitoring
8.4 Monitoring via HTML pages
SIMATIC MV420 / SIMATIC MV440
268 Operating Instructions, 10/2015, C79000-G8976-C334-03
Live image display without links
Figure 8-53 Live image display without links
Displays the images acquired by the reader in adjustment mode or processing mode. If the
visualization device provides Java script support, the displayed image is automatically
updated. This page does not provide any links to other pages.
Operator control and monitoring
8.4 Monitoring via HTML pages
SIMATIC MV420 / SIMATIC MV440
Operating Instructions, 10/2015, C79000-G8976-C334-03 269
Last image
Figure 8-54 Last image
Purely display of the last recorded image without any further information and without
automatic image updating.
Operator control and monitoring
8.4 Monitoring via HTML pages
SIMATIC MV420 / SIMATIC MV440
270 Operating Instructions, 10/2015, C79000-G8976-C334-03
Monitor
Figure 8-55 Monitor
Non-embedded display of the last image processed in processing mode with colored overlay
showing the results of processing (ROIs and details view).
Requires JavaScript support and Internet Explorer as of Version 8.
Operator control and monitoring
8.4 Monitoring via HTML pages
SIMATIC MV420 / SIMATIC MV440
Operating Instructions, 10/2015, C79000-G8976-C334-03 271
Diagnostic images
Figure 8-56 Diagnostic images
Provides a dynamically created HTML page with which you can display diagnostic images
buffered on the reader along with additional information. In the Options/Diag. & monitoring
tab, you specify which images are buffered and displayed in the user interface.
Operator control and monitoring
8.4 Monitoring via HTML pages
SIMATIC MV420 / SIMATIC MV440
272 Operating Instructions, 10/2015, C79000-G8976-C334-03
Extended diagnostic images (optimized for touch panels)
Figure 8-57 Extended diagnostic images (optimized for touch panels)
Provides a dynamically created HTML page with which you can display diagnostic images
buffered on the reader along with additional information. In the Options/Diag. & monitoring
tab, you specify which images are buffered and displayed in the user interface.
This page combines a large format image display with the most important additional
information about the image such as the read result and display of the quality values.
This page is particularly suitable when using touch panels.
Navigation is made easier by the large area navigation symbols at the left edge.
Operator control and monitoring
8.4 Monitoring via HTML pages
SIMATIC MV420 / SIMATIC MV440
Operating Instructions, 10/2015, C79000-G8976-C334-03 273
Diagnostics recordings
Figure 8-58 Diagnostics recordings
Provides a dynamically created HTML page with which you can display diagnostics
recordings buffered on the reader relating to errors that occurred, signal changes etc.
Operator control and monitoring
8.4 Monitoring via HTML pages
SIMATIC MV420 / SIMATIC MV440
274 Operating Instructions, 10/2015, C79000-G8976-C334-03
Verification report
Figure 8-59 Verification report
Operator control and monitoring
8.4 Monitoring via HTML pages
SIMATIC MV420 / SIMATIC MV440
Operating Instructions, 10/2015, C79000-G8976-C334-03 275
Is used to create a verification report to document the results.
Note
A configured program that is suitable for WBM is required to use this; for more information
refer to the HTML page.
Note
The verification report is part of the example for the user
-defined user interface, see
section
User-defined user interface (Page 262). This means the HTML page can be adapted
to specific requirements. However, note that the verification report is no longer available
when the custom user interface is overwritten by a separate version.
Overview of available URLs
Using the following URLs, you can open the pages described above in the language of your
choice. Example of a URL: http://<IP address of reader>/peeklive.html
Overview of the HTML pages for monitoring the reader
Table 8- 11 English, Chinese, German
Page
English
Chinese
German
Home page
index_en.html
index_zh.html
index_de.html
Adjustment (user interface):
adj_en.cgi
adj_zh.cgi
adj_de.cgi
Diagnostics recordings
*)
diagrecs.cgi?rg=65535
diagrecs.cgi?rg=65535
diagrecs.cgi?rg=65535
Diagnostic images
*)
diagimgs.cgi?tn=1
diagimgs.cgi?tn=1
diagimgs.cgi?tn=1
Extended diagnostics
screens
*)
ediagimghtml.cgi ediagimghtml.cgi ediagimghtml.cgi
Live Image with links
peeklive.html
peeklive_zh.html
peeklive_de.html
Live image without links
*)
epeeklive.html
epeeklive.html
epeeklive.html
Last image *) live.cgi?d=0
(d=0: not-down sampled,
d=1 down sampled)
live.cgi?d=0
(d=0: not-down sampled,
d=1 down sampled)
live.cgi?d=0
(d=0: not-down sampled,
d=1 down sampled)
Monitoring *) drawresults.cgi drawresults.cgi drawresults.cgi
Verification report
cgui/verifireport_en.html
cgui/verifireport_en.html
cgui/verifireport_de.html
*) These HTML pages are displayed only in English.
Table 8- 12 Spanish, French, Italian
Page
Spanish
French
Italian
Home page
index_es.html
index_fr.html
index_it.html
Adjustment (user interface):
adj_es.cgi
adj_fr.cgi
adj_it.cgi
Diagnostics recordings
*)
diagrecs.cgi?rg=65535
diagrecs.cgi?rg=65535
diagrecs.cgi?rg=65535
Diagnostic images
*)
diagimgs.cgi?tn=1
diagimgs.cgi?tn=1
diagimgs.cgi?tn=1
Operator control and monitoring
8.5 Use of saved images
SIMATIC MV420 / SIMATIC MV440
276 Operating Instructions, 10/2015, C79000-G8976-C334-03
Page
Spanish
French
Italian
Extended diagnostics
screens
*)
ediagimghtml.cgi ediagimghtml.cgi ediagimghtml.cgi
Live Image with links peeklive_es.html peeklive_fr.html peeklive_it.html
Live image without links
epeeklive.html
*)
epeeklive.html
*)
epeeklive_it.html
Last image *) live.cgi?d=0
(d=0: not-down sampled,
d=1 down sampled)
live.cgi?d=0
(d=0: not-down sampled,
d=1 down sampled)
live.cgi?d=0
(d=0: not-down sampled,
d=1 down sampled)
Monitoring
*)
drawresults.cgi
drawresults.cgi
drawresults.cgi
Verification report
cgui/verifireport_en.html
cgui/verifireport_en.html
cgui/verifireport_en.html
*) These HTML pages are displayed only in English.
8.5
Use of saved images
The reader user interface provides the option of using the images stored on the PC for the
purpose of parameter assignment or for trial mode.
The resolution and format of the images must match the program selected at this time.
Possible image sources are, for example, the diagnostic images saved via the user interface
or images archived using diagnostics transfer (MMI).
An HTML5 capable web browser is required to use the function, for example, Microsoft
Internet Explorer version 10 or higher, Mozilla Firefox version 28 or higher or Google
Chrome version 38 or higher.
8.5.1
Use in the "Edit programs" task
You can open a separate page using the "Load image" button on the "Programs" page.
On this page you can select images that are then shown in a list. To transfer the specific
image to the camera, click "Upload this image". The image format and the resolution are
automatically checked during the transfer.
The uploaded image is displayed in the user interface and can be used to save programs or
also be added to the image collection in the character font or model library.
Operator control and monitoring
8.5 Use of saved images
SIMATIC MV420 / SIMATIC MV440
Operating Instructions, 10/2015, C79000-G8976-C334-03 277
The "Image" drop-down list in the user interface is permanently set to the entry "Loaded
image" as long as the "Load image" function is active. To disable the "Load image" function
again, you need to click the "Load image" button again. The "Load image" function is
automatically disabled when you exit the "Programs" page.
Note
Automatic adaptation to the image used for saving
When you save a program, the program automatically adapts to the image used for saving to
optimize the reading speed and reading reliability in processing mode. This means you
sho
uld always use only those images that correspond to the images acquired in processing
mode.
8.5.2
Use for processing in trial mode
An operation with saved images is also possible on the "Run" page.
NOTICE
Execution only by trained personnel
If this functionality is used incorrectly it can seriously disrupt the productive operation of the
reader. For this reason the function is protected by several mechanism and should only be
used by users who are very familiar with the operation of the device.
To use trial mode, the following requirements must be met:
● The user interface must be open.
● The logged on user must have the authorization "Take control". In the default setting,
user with the roles "Service" and "User1" have this authorization.
● Expanded access must be permitted under "Options > Security".
● Processing mode must be started.
If one of these requirements is no longer met, trial mode is terminated automatically.
To use trial mode, the HTML page "http://<Reader-ip>/iu/replay.html" must be opened in a
separate browser window.
Operator control and monitoring
8.5 Use of saved images
SIMATIC MV420 / SIMATIC MV440
278 Operating Instructions, 10/2015, C79000-G8976-C334-03
As in the "Load image" page, you can open images that are then shown in a list. The images
can then be either uploaded individually or automatically processed one after the other.
Every upload hereby corresponds to a (virtual) trigger signal, which means processing is
started automatically. The additionally available operator controls are as follows:
Operator control
Function
Starting automatic processing
Stopping automatic processing
Delay Wait time between completion of processing the current
image and loading the next image.
Removal of the currently loaded image (and stopping auto-
matic processing).
Images whose format or resolution do not match the saved program cannot be uploaded and
are skipped during automatic processing.
If no image is loaded for 100s, trial mode is terminated, which means the camera records a
live image again at the next trigger.
Note
Trial mode only with suitable operating modes
Trial mode is not suited for processing in the operating modes "Program sequence", "Scan"
or "Auto trigger". When trial mode is used together with one of
these operating modes,
unforeseeable behavior, such as multiple processing, may occur depending on the exact
parameter assignment.
SIMATIC MV420 / SIMATIC MV440
Operating Instructions, 10/2015, C79000-G8976-C334-03 279
Process interfacing via an automation system (PLC,
PC)
9
You can also control the reader from an automation system instead of with the user
interface. The automation system controls the reader and outputs read results and
verification results.
Note
Actions such as saving and changing programs using an automa
tion system are only
possible when the user interface is active if the "Take control" check box is not selected for
the current user on the "Security" tab in the "Options" task.
Figure 9-1 Overview of communication modules, MV400 interfaces and function blocks
Numerous interfaces are available for integration
A variety of interfaces are available for integration into your automation system:
● Integration using a communication module and FB45 or Ident profile.
● Using an Ident profile via PROFINET IO without additional communication module.
● The FB79 provides a PROFINET IO interface that is compatible with the VS130-2 reader.
Process interfacing via an automation system (PLC, PC)
9.1 Integration via Onboard PROFINET IO
SIMATIC MV420 / SIMATIC MV440
280 Operating Instructions, 10/2015, C79000-G8976-C334-03
Other available interfaces are:
● TCP/IP
● RS232
● DI/DO
This chapter describes the process connection options.
Note
Changed PROFINET compatibility response as of firmware V7
In firmware V7, the compatibility response of the code reader as PROFINET IO device was
changed in relation to PROFINET IO controllers. The
use of outdated firmware versions of
PROFINET IO controllers leads to a non
-functioning PROFINET connection or to a
configuration that may not be possible in the configuration software you are using. Therefore,
update the firmware of your PROFINET IO contr
oller or downgrade the firmware of your
code reader (e.g., to version 6.8).
9.1
Integration via Onboard PROFINET IO
MAC address
The reader has two MAC addresses. The MAC address printed on the housing is the
interface MAC address. The port MAC address is the interface MAC address plus 1.
Generic station description (GSD file)
The properties of the PROFINET IO device SIMATIC MV440 or SIMATIC MV420 are stored
in the supplied GSD file.
If the SIMATIC MV440/SIMATIC MV420 is not yet listed in the module catalog of HW Config
in your STEP 7 version, add the reader with the menu command "Extras > Install GSD
files...". In STEP 7 Professional, add the GSD file with the menu command "Extras >
Manage device description files (GSD)". This requires the corresponding bitmap files
"GSDML-002A-0B03-MV440.bmp" and "GSDML-002A-0B08-MV420.bmp" to be located in
the same directory as the GSD file.
Note
GSD files and BMP file can be downloaded from the Internet
If necessary, you can also download the two GSD files and the BMP file from the Internet at:
Downloading the GSD files
(https://support.industry.siemens.com/cs/us/en/ps/15147/dl)
The reader then appears in the HW Config module catalog under:
PROFINET IO \ Ident Systems \ SIMATIC Code Reading Systems \ MV44x or MV42x; see
figure below:
Process interfacing via an automation system (PLC, PC)
9.1 Integration via Onboard PROFINET IO
SIMATIC MV420 / SIMATIC MV440
Operating Instructions, 10/2015, C79000-G8976-C334-03 281
In STEP 7 Professional the module appears under:
Detect & monitoring \ Ident Systems \ PROFINET \ SIMATIC Code Reading Systems \
MV420 or MV440; see figure below:
The reader detects the transmission speed of PROFINET automatically. PROFINET
operates in 100 Mbps full duplex mode.
Process interfacing via an automation system (PLC, PC)
9.1 Integration via Onboard PROFINET IO
SIMATIC MV420 / SIMATIC MV440
282 Operating Instructions, 10/2015, C79000-G8976-C334-03
To assign the device name for the reader, follow these steps:
Step
Activity
1 1. Open the properties window of the reader in HW Config.
2. Enter the device name.
3. Optional: In the "Identification" tab, enter the plant designation, location designation,
installation date and additional information (I&M data records 1 to 3)
4. Save and compile the hardware configuration.
2 Inform the reader of the device name you have just assigned. There are three ways of doing
this.
Method 1:
1. In HW Config, select
PLC ➜ Ethernet ➜ Assign Ethernet Address...
2. Click the "Browse" button. All the devices connected to the PNIO system are then dis-
played.
Note
:
The reader must be in "PROFINET" IP mode; otherwise, it will not be displayed!).
3. Select the reader using its MAC address and identify it, if necessary, using the "Flash"
button (the "LINK" LED on the Ethernet connector of the reader then flashes).
4. Enter the device name.
5. Click the "Assign Name" button.
Method 2:
Setup with the Primary Setup Tool, see Establishing a connection to the reader and starting
the user interface (Page 167).
Method 3:
Assign and transfer the device name using the user interface, see "Connections", "Interfac-
es" tab, "PROFINET IO", "Device name" parameter.
Note
Reader does not support update times of less than 4 ms
The reader does not support any update
time shorter than 4 ms and cannot be set to update
times lower than this. If you configure in STEP 7 V5.3 + SP1, the lowest possible update
time therefore changes to 4 ms for all PROFINET
IO devices of the relevant PROFINET IO
system.
Note
When using a
CPU 317-2 PN/DP, you will need to select "Automatic Settings" for
"Transmission Medium/Duplex" in the "Options" tab of the properties window of the
PROFINET
IO system (slot X2).
Process interfacing via an automation system (PLC, PC)
9.1 Integration via Onboard PROFINET IO
SIMATIC MV420 / SIMATIC MV440
Operating Instructions, 10/2015, C79000-G8976-C334-03 283
9.1.1
Configuration for using the Ident profile
Note
Using the Ident profile with a communication module
To use the Ident profile with a communication module, follow the description in
Integration
via communication module (ASM)
(Page 286).
● To use the Ident profile (PIB_1KB, PIB_16KB, PIB_32KB) without a communication
module, select "Ident profile" in the HW Config catalog.
– The base addresses of the In/Out section must be identical and be within in the
process image of OB1 ("OB1-PI").
Note that input and output addresses are preset to "256" for the integration of the
reader. The size of the process image is set to "256" (0 to 255) for many controllers.
Therefore, you must either adjust the size of the process image or the input and output
addresses of the reader.
– The "ID" input parameter of the Ident profile block must match the addresses
accordingly. The base address is 256 in the configuration example (see figure).
Figure 9-2 HW Config with SIMATIC MV440 reader configured for use of the Ident profile
(screenshot for SIMATIC MV420: similar)
Process interfacing via an automation system (PLC, PC)
9.1 Integration via Onboard PROFINET IO
SIMATIC MV420 / SIMATIC MV440
284 Operating Instructions, 10/2015, C79000-G8976-C334-03
9.1.2
Configuration for using the FB 79
"FB79" must be selected in the HW Config catalog to use FB 79 or the associated
PROFINET IO interface without a function block.
Figure 9-3 HW Config with SIMATIC MV440 reader (screenshot for SIMATIC MV420: similar)
In the configuration example, the control byte of the reader was placed at output address 0
and the status byte at input address 0 of the CPU (slot 1). If these addresses are located in
the process image of OB1 (process image partition "OB1-PI"), you can work here in OB1
with process image access (for example, "A I0.6" or "S Q0.1"). If this is not the case, you will
have to work with direct I/O access (for example, "L PIB 0").
The start of the 16-word long consistent communication area of the reader is placed at input
address 256 and output address 256 (slot 2). If these addresses are located in the process
image of OB1 (process image partition "OB1-PI"), you can work with process image access
in OB1 (for example, "L IW 2", "T QB 1") without losing consistency. (This only applies to
CPUs that transfer consistent user data via the process image.)
If these addresses are not located in the process image of OB1, however, you will have to
access the communication area of the reader using SFCs 14 "DPRD_DAT" and 15
"DPWR_DAT" to ensure consistency.
Process interfacing via an automation system (PLC, PC)
9.1 Integration via Onboard PROFINET IO
SIMATIC MV420 / SIMATIC MV440
Operating Instructions, 10/2015, C79000-G8976-C334-03 285
9.1.3
Concept of device replacement
Note
Settings/programs of the reader being replaced as an XML file
For simple device replacement, you save the settings and programs of the reader you are
replacing as an XML file.
Note
The topology of the plant must be correctly configured
To replace the device without a removable medium, the topology of the system must be
correctly configured. Use the topology editor for this.
Select "Support device replacement without removable medium"
● For a simple device replacement, select the PROFINET functionality "Support device
replacement without removable medium":
With this setting, the new reader receives its device name directly from the IO controller. The
IO controller uses the configured topology and the neighborhood relations detected by the IO
devices.
Process interfacing via an automation system (PLC, PC)
9.2 Integration via communication module (ASM)
SIMATIC MV420 / SIMATIC MV440
286 Operating Instructions, 10/2015, C79000-G8976-C334-03
Replacing the device: Procedure
1. Replace the reader with a new reader with factory settings.
2. Wait until the new reader is automatically assigned the IP address of the device that was
replaced.
3. Start of the user interface using this IP address in the browser.
4. Start to restore the settings from the saved XML parameter file through the user interface.
Make sure that the options "TCP/IP settings" and "PROFINET IO settings" are selected.
5. Wait until the parameters have been restored.
6. Following the automatic restart, the reader is ready for operation.
9.2
Integration via communication module (ASM)
The reader supports a subset of MOBY commands.
The reader can be integrated via the RS 422 interface as a write/read device (compatible
with RF300) using a communication module (ASM).
The hardware integration of the communication modules is described in the operating
instructions of the respective device.
The following parameters must be set for the configuration of the communication module:
Table 9- 1 Configuration parameters
Parameter
Value
Note
USER_Mode
FB45 / FC45
RFID standard profile Use Ident profile (PIB_1KB,
PIB_16KB, PIB_32KB).
MOBY_Mode MOBY U / D/ RF300
normal addressing
Baud rate SLG RF300 /
MOBY U / D
• 19.2 kbaud
• 57.6 kbaud
• 115.2 kbaud
The selection must be identical
to the configuration of the read-
er.
Diagnostics with diagnostics
messages
none Standard diagnostics.
The diagnostics of the reader
uses a separate mechanism.
Process interfacing via an automation system (PLC, PC)
9.3 Control with FB 45 and Ident profile
SIMATIC MV420 / SIMATIC MV440
Operating Instructions, 10/2015, C79000-G8976-C334-03 287
9.3
Control with FB 45 and Ident profile
This section describes a process connection using FB45 or the Ident profile (PIB_1KB,
PIB_16KB, PIB_32KB):
● With communication module
● Without communication module (Ident profile only)
For an overview of the usable communication modules, see Figure 9-1 Overview of
communication modules, MV400 interfaces and function blocks (Page 279)
The functionality described in Functional description (Page 32) is provided by FB45 and the
Ident profile.
Note
Understanding the MOBY system architecture/MOBY commands required
To understand the following description, you
require knowledge of:
•
MOBY system architecture
•
MOBY commands
•
Ident profile system architecture and Ident profile commands.
You will find descriptions and software at Industry online support
(
https://support.industry.siemens.com/cs/us/en/).
Note
Stable synchronization after error
To ensure stable synchronization after an error has occurred, we recommend you check the
ERROR bit of the Ident profile after each command.
A reinitialization is
necessary after an error has occurred. This is accomplished by setting the
INIT bit. This procedure also applies to other undesirable behaviors during the connection.
See also
Process interfacing via an automation system (PLC, PC) (Page 279)
9.3.1
Setting parameters of FB45
For a detailed description of the parameter assignment and commissioning of FB45, refer to
the relevant FB45 Function Manual (J31069-D0166-U001-A2-0018).
The following blocks are required in the S7 project:
● "MOBY FB" (FB45) with instance DB.
● "MOBY Param": Parameter data block occupied by UDT10 or UDT11 (English or
German). In the S7 sample program "MOBY FB45", this is DB45.
Process interfacing via an automation system (PLC, PC)
9.3 Control with FB 45 and Ident profile
SIMATIC MV420 / SIMATIC MV440
288 Operating Instructions, 10/2015, C79000-G8976-C334-03
● "MOBY CMD": Command data block occupied by UDT20 or UDT21 (English or German).
In the S7 sample program "MOBY FB45", this is DB47.
● "Data DB": A data block for result or job data (command data area). In the S7 sample
program "MOBY FB45", this is DB48.
Input parameters
The variables should be assigned as follows:
Variable
Value/description
ASM_address
To match the start address in HW Config
ASM_channel 1 or 2, depending on the connection to the ASM
command_DB_number
Number of the "MOBY CMD" data block
command_DB_address
Start address of the command in "MOBY_CMD"
MDS_control
B#16#1
ECC_mode
FALSE
RESET_long
TRUE
MOBY_mode
B#16#5
scanning_time
B#16#0
option_1
B#16#2
distance_limiting
B#16#0
multitag
B#16#1
field_ON_control
B#16#0
field_ON_time B#16#0: INIT without program selection,
B#16#1 ... B#16#15:
Number of the program to be started (INIT with program selection)
reserved0
B#16#0
cancel
Not supported
command_start
TRUE = start of a command
repeat_command
FALSE, not supported
init_run For information on initializing the ASM, refer to the FB45 function man-
ual; for information on acknowledging a group error of the reader, refer
to chapter Group errors (Page 312).
ASM_failure
Refer to the description in the FB45 Function Manual.
Output parameters
The following output parameters have a different meaning from the description in the
function manual of FB45:
Variable
Description
ANZ_MDS_present No significance.
number_MDS Refer to the description in chapter Status displays of the MV reader
(Page 291)
ANZ_cancel
Not supported.
Process interfacing via an automation system (PLC, PC)
9.3 Control with FB 45 and Ident profile
SIMATIC MV420 / SIMATIC MV440
Operating Instructions, 10/2015, C79000-G8976-C334-03 289
Variable
Description
ANZ_ECC
Not supported.
LR_bat Not supported.
Battery_low
Not supported.
error_MOBY Refer to the description in chapter Result evaluation of a command
(Page 310)
9.3.2
Configuring the Ident profile (RFID standard profile)
For a detailed description of the parameter assignment and commissioning of the RFID
standard profile FB, refer to the relevant RFID function manual (J31069-D0179-U001-A1-
0018).
The following blocks are required in the S7 project:
● "RFID standard profile FB"
(FB101, FB116 or FB132 depending on the length of the data to be processed)
● "Instance DB RFID standard profile", field that can hold 10 commands.
A command is a complex variable of the type "PIB_COMMAND"
RXBUF and TXBUF for result or job data (command data area).
Input parameters
The following input parameters have a different meaning from the description in the function
manual of the RFID standard profile:
Variable
Value/description
INIT For information on initializing the ASM or on acknowledging a group error of the reader,
refer to chapter Group errors (Page 312).
Output parameters
The following output parameters have a different meaning from the description in the
function manual of the RFID standard profile:
Variable
Value/description
RPTACT
Not supported
TPC
No significance
TP
No significance
UIN0-1
See description Status displays of the MV reader (Page 291)
Initialization
During initialization (INIT), the Ident profile automatically executes the "WRITE-CONFIG"
command (see function manual for RFID Standard Profile, RFID Systems J31069-D0179-
U001-A2-0018).
Process interfacing via an automation system (PLC, PC)
9.3 Control with FB 45 and Ident profile
SIMATIC MV420 / SIMATIC MV440
290 Operating Instructions, 10/2015, C79000-G8976-C334-03
The parameter values of the "WRITE-CONFIG" command depend on whether the Ident
profile is used with or without a communication module.
WRITE-CONFIG
Table 9- 2 Command parameter
Variable
Value
Description
Config
3
Reset with configuration data
Length 16 Volume of parameter assignment data in
bytes
Table 9- 3 Command data attachment
Variable
Value
Description
Byte 1 4 Length of the following subparameters
Bytes 2 to
5
0
Byte 6
10
Length of the following subparameters
Byte 7
0
Byte 8
0
Byte 9
0
Byte 10
0x25
Setting of the MOBY operating mode.
Byte 11
2
Option
Byte 12
0
Byte 13
0
Byte 14
1
Number of MDS
Byte 15
0
Byte 16 0 ... 15 0: INIT without program selection
1 ... 15: Number of the program to be
started (INIT with program selection)
Table 9- 4 Command parameter
Variable
Value
Description
Config
1
Reset without configuration data
Length 0 (no data attachment) Number of parameter assignment data in
bytes. Here 0 since there is no data at-
tachment.
Process interfacing via an automation system (PLC, PC)
9.3 Control with FB 45 and Ident profile
SIMATIC MV420 / SIMATIC MV440
Operating Instructions, 10/2015, C79000-G8976-C334-03 291
The command parameters from the "Command data attachment" table are possible
(onboard PROFINET IO) only if no communications module is used. Resetting without
configuration data corresponds to INIT without program selection.
9.3.3
Control with MV commands via FB 45 or Ident profile
The reader is controlled with the MOBY commands "WRITE" and "READ" or with the Ident
profile commands "PHYSICAL-WRITE" and "PHYSICAL-READ". Chaining of commands is
not supported.
An RFID system typically has a linear memory area for each RFID tag from which data can
be read or to which data can be written. With a reader, the address space (in this case,
purely virtual) is used to map certain MV commands (Machine Vision commands). In
addition, the data that is "written" to a specific address, for example, has a defined semantic
meaning.
This section explains which address can be written to and which address can be read from
to achieve a specific response from the reader. The semantic meaning of the read data or
data to be written is also explained.
9.3.3.1
Status displays of the MV reader
Note
Startup of the reader with FB 45 or Ident profile
For startup of the reader you
need to ensure the following after power "ON" when using
FB
45 or the Ident profile (with or without communication module):
1.
Set a startup flag in OB100 of the controller.
2.
When the startup flag is set, you need to repeat the initialization ("init_run" or "INIT"
command) until positive acknowledgment is received.
3.
To generate an error in the automation system, also monitor the maximum wait time for
positive acknowledgment of the initialization and expected status bit values (only
necessary if there is initialization without program selection).
The status bits IN_OP (in operation) and RDY (ready) of the reader indicate whether the
device has a group error, is in processing mode or is in STOP mode:
RDY (ready)
IN_OP (in operation)
Description
X
0
Group error
1
1
Processing mode
0
1
Stop or adjustment mode
Depending on the status of the reader, various MV commands are permitted (see section
Preconditions for the commands (Page 311)) or an acknowledgement of the error (see
Group errors (Page 312)) is required before the next MV command can be sent.
Process interfacing via an automation system (PLC, PC)
9.3 Control with FB 45 and Ident profile
SIMATIC MV420 / SIMATIC MV440
292 Operating Instructions, 10/2015, C79000-G8976-C334-03
When there is a group error, this error must be acknowledged before further operation is
possible. The acknowledgment mechanism is explained in the section WRITE
commands/MV command interface (Page 293).
The status display is only valid after initialization has been successfully performed (Set
"MOBY Param".init_run bit in FB45 or "instance DB-RFID standard profile".INIT bit with the
Ident profile).
Table 9- 5 FB45
Output byte "num-
ber_MDS" ("MOBY
Param" DB)
Bit 3
Bit 2
Bit 1
Bit 0
Meaning These two bits are interpreted as an
unsigned value (bit 2 is the less sig-
nificant bit) that represents the num-
ber of available decoded codes. If the
value = 3, three or more decoded
codes are available.
Corresponds to
RDY bit of the
reader
Corresponds to
IN_OP bit of the
reader
Table 9- 6 Ident profile
Output bit
("Instance DB RFID
standard profile")
UIN3
UIN2
UIN1
UIN0
Meaning These two bits are interpreted as an
unsigned value (bit 2 is the less sig-
nificant bit) that represents the num-
ber of available decoded codes. If the
value = 3, three or more decoded
codes are available.
Corresponds to
RDY bit of the
reader
Corresponds to
IN_OP bit of the
reader
9.3.3.2
Initialization
To perform the initialization (FB45: init_run, Ident profile: INIT), you have the choice between
an initialization with program selection and initialization without program selection.
To react to a change in the operating mode and to check the preconditions to be fulfilled
(Preconditions for the commands (Page 311)):
● Monitor the operating mode of the reader regardless of the initialization method selected
by the automation system (Status displays of the MV reader (Page 291)).
Process interfacing via an automation system (PLC, PC)
9.3 Control with FB 45 and Ident profile
SIMATIC MV420 / SIMATIC MV440
Operating Instructions, 10/2015, C79000-G8976-C334-03 293
Initialization with program selection
Initialization with program selection enables:
● Initialization after startup
– After the self-test, the reader switches to processing mode with the selected program
number.
– With initialization during self-test, the initialization is acknowledged negatively. Wait for
the end of the self test and repeat the initialization until you receive a positive
acknowledgment.
● Reset of pending error with the subsequent start of the selected program. If the selected
program does not exist, the initialization is acknowledged negatively.
Initialization without program selection
Initialization without program selection enables:
● Initialization after startup
– After the self-test, the reader changes to the operating mode that it was in prior to
shutdown.
– Initialization is acknowledged positively as early as during the self-test. This means
that you need to determine the operating mode using the status display (Status
displays of the MV reader (Page 291)).
● Identification of pending error (Group errors (Page 312))
● Reset of pending error
9.3.3.3
WRITE commands/MV command interface
Supported MV commands
With the MOBY WRITE commands, you can send various MV commands (Machine Vision
commands).
An MV command is always a write command to the address 0x0000
("MOBY_CMD".address_MDS or "PIB_COMMAND".StartAddress = 0) with a length
depending on the command ("MOBY_CMD".length or "PIB_COMMAND".Length).
The first byte in the command data area codes the relevant MV command and determines
the meaning of any bytes that follow.
The following commands are supported and coded as follows:
MV command
Command identifier
Program change (write program number)
0x01
Activate read program number once
0x02
Write match string
0x03
Enable read match string once 0x04
Set DISA bit
0x05
Reset DISA bit
0x06
Process interfacing via an automation system (PLC, PC)
9.3 Control with FB 45 and Ident profile
SIMATIC MV420 / SIMATIC MV440
294 Operating Instructions, 10/2015, C79000-G8976-C334-03
MV command
Command identifier
Writing a trigger-synchronized match string
(XMATCH)
0x07
Set digital out 0x08
Process interfacing via an automation system (PLC, PC)
9.3 Control with FB 45 and Ident profile
SIMATIC MV420 / SIMATIC MV440
Operating Instructions, 10/2015, C79000-G8976-C334-03 295
Command: Program change (write program number)
To change programs, a WRITE command is sent with the data shown in the following table.
If it is possible to change to the program specified in the job, there will be a positive response
to the WRITE command, otherwise the response is negative.
Before the program is changed, the DISA bit is set automatically on the reader and is reset
again after the program change. If the DISA bit was set manually prior to the program
change, it will remain set.
The WRITE command must set the length 0x2 ("MOBY_CMD".length or "PIB_
COMMAND".Length = 0x2), otherwise the command will be acknowledged negatively. If an
attempt is made to change to an unsaved program or a program number > 0xF, the
command will also be denied and acknowledged negatively.
Table 9- 7 Moby_CMD
Command
[hex]
Sub_
Command
[hex]
Length
[dec]
Address_
MDS [hex]
DAT_DB_number
[dec]
DAT_DB_address
[dec]
01 - 2 0 Number of the
data DB (for example
48)
Pointer to the
start word
(for example 0)
Pointer to the user data to be sent to the
reader.
Table 9- 8 PIB_COMMAND
Parameter
Value
CMD
0x71
OffsetBuffer
0x00
UID
0x00
Length
0x02
StartAddress
0x00
Table 9- 9 Command data area (FB45: Data DB, RFID standard profile: TXBUF or RXBUF)
Address
Value
Meaning
0x0000 0x01 "Program change" command
identifier
0x0001
0x00 – 0x0F
Number of the program
Process interfacing via an automation system (PLC, PC)
9.3 Control with FB 45 and Ident profile
SIMATIC MV420 / SIMATIC MV440
296 Operating Instructions, 10/2015, C79000-G8976-C334-03
Command: Read program number
The "Read program number" command is used to prepare reading of the current program
number.
The MV command itself does not perform the actual read. For this reason, the data of the
WRITE command contains only the MV command itself.
The user sends the MV command "Read program number" with the WRITE command and
waits for a positive response. A READ command is then used to read out the actual program
number, see also READ commands (Page 305).
The WRITE command must specify a length of 0x1 ("MOBY_CMD".length or
"PIB_COMMAND".Length = 0x1), otherwise a negative response will be sent.
Table 9- 10 Moby_CMD
Command
[hex]
Sub_
Command
[hex]
Length
[dec]
Address_
MDS [hex]
DAT_DB_number
[dec]
DAT_DB_address
[dec]
01 - 1 0 Number of the
data DB (for example
48)
Pointer to the start
word
(for example 0)
Pointer to the user data to be sent to the
reader.
Table 9- 11 PIB_COMMAND
Parameter
Value
CMD
0x71
OffsetBuffer
0x00
UID
0x00
Length
0x01
StartAddress
0x00
Table 9- 12 Command data area (FB45: Data DB, RFID standard profile: TXBUF or RXBUF)
Address
Value
Meaning
0x0000 0x02 "Read program number" com-
mand identifier
Process interfacing via an automation system (PLC, PC)
9.3 Control with FB 45 and Ident profile
SIMATIC MV420 / SIMATIC MV440
Operating Instructions, 10/2015, C79000-G8976-C334-03 297
Match string
Note
Sent match string takes effect immediately
A sent match string takes effect immediately. The sent match string is not synchronized with
the trigger signal or the processing of buffered image acquisition.
•
Therefore, make sure that the match string is sent when no image acquisition is running.
Requirements for matching with OCR
Sending a match string with OCR
Sending a match string is only possible if, in "2. Filtering", the source "Filter with match text"
or "Character type at pos." is configured as the string specification.
The match string is then either a defined string or a syntax corresponding to "Character type
at pos.".
Identical formatting of the sent match string
The match string that is sent must be identical to the input made through the user interface.
Permitted non-printable special characters must be sent as one character. A line break (\n),
for example, as '\n' (ASCII value 0x0D) and not as '\''n' (ASCII values 0x2F and 0x6E).
Requirement for matching with 1D/2D codes
All match options ("All", "Position", "ID", "GS1") are supported for 1D/2D codes. The match
string that is sent must be formatted so that the information required for matching can be
extracted.
Command: Write match string
● This MV command allows the match string of the program currently loaded (non-
persistent) to be overwritten. Executing this command is possible only when the reader is
in processing mode. If the reader exits processing mode, for example by changing to
STOP mode or to the group error status, the overwritten match string is discarded. This
also applies to a program change.
● The structure of the command data area is outlined in the table below.
● The total length of the data to be written is the overall length of the match string + 3 bytes
for the length and the command identifier ("MOBY_CMD".length or
"PIB_COMMAND".Length = n + 3).
● If the new match string is applied to the current program, the command is acknowledged
positively.
If the match string cannot be overwritten, an extra entry is made in the diagnostic data.
Process interfacing via an automation system (PLC, PC)
9.3 Control with FB 45 and Ident profile
SIMATIC MV420 / SIMATIC MV440
298 Operating Instructions, 10/2015, C79000-G8976-C334-03
Table 9- 13 Moby_CMD
Command
[hex]
Sub_
Command
[hex]
Length
[dez]
Address_
MDS [hex]
DAT_DB_number
[dez]
DAT_DB_address
[dez]
01 - Match
string
length
+ 3
0 Number of the
data DB (for exam-
ple, 48)
Pointer to the start
word
(for example, 0)
Pointer to the user data to be sent to the
reader.
Table 9- 14 PIB_COMMAND
Parameter
Value
CMD
0x71
OffsetBuffer
0x00
UID
0x00
Length
Match string length + 3
StartAddress
0x00
Table 9- 15 Command data area (FB45: Data DB, RFID standard profile: TXBUF or RXBUF)
Address
Value
Meaning
0x0000 0x03 Command identifier
"Write match string"
0x0001
0x00-0xFF
Match string length high byte
0x0002
0x00-0xFF
Match string length low byte
0x0003
1st character of the match string
...
...
n + 2 (n-1)th character of the match
string
n + 3
nth character of the match string
Command: Read match string
● The "Read match string" MV command is used to prepare reading of the match string.
The actual read is not executed with the WRITE command.
● The command data area of the WRITE command contains only the command identifier.
● Send the "Read match string" command with the WRITE command and wait for the
positive response. Then read out the actual string with a READ command.
● The WRITE command must specify a length of 0x1 ("MOBY_CMD".length or
"PIB_COMMAND".Length = 0x1), otherwise a negative response is sent.
Process interfacing via an automation system (PLC, PC)
9.3 Control with FB 45 and Ident profile
SIMATIC MV420 / SIMATIC MV440
Operating Instructions, 10/2015, C79000-G8976-C334-03 299
Table 9- 16 Moby_CMD
Command
[hex]
Sub_
Command
[hex]
Length
[dez]
Address_
MDS [hex]
DAT_DB_number
[dez]
DAT_DB_address
[dez]
01 - 1 0 Number of the
data DB (for exam-
ple, 48)
Pointer to the start
word
(for example, 0)
Pointer to the user data to be sent to the
reader.
Table 9- 17 PIB_COMMAND
Parameter
Value
CMD
0x71
OffsetBuffer
0x00
UID
0x00
Length
0x01
StartAddress
0x00
Table 9- 18 Command data area (FB45: Data DB, RFID standard profile: TXBUF or RXBUF)
Address
Value
Meaning
0x0000 0x04 Command identifier
"Read match string"
Process interfacing via an automation system (PLC, PC)
9.3 Control with FB 45 and Ident profile
SIMATIC MV420 / SIMATIC MV440
300 Operating Instructions, 10/2015, C79000-G8976-C334-03
DISA bit
Command: Set DISA bit
The command data to be "written" in the WRITE command simply contains the command
identifier "Set DISA bit".
If the DISA bit of the reader is set, the command is acknowledged positively. If the DISA bit
is already set, it remains set.
The WRITE command must specify a length of 0x1 ("MOBY_CMD".length or
"PIB_COMMAND".Length = 0x1), otherwise a negative response will be sent.
Table 9- 19 Moby_CMD
Command
[hex]
Sub_
Command
[hex]
Length
[dez]
Address_
MDS [hex]
DAT_DB_number
[dez]
DAT_DB_address
[dez]
01 - 1 0 Number of the
data DB (for example
48)
Pointer to the start
word
(for example 0)
Pointer to the user data to be sent to the
reader.
Table 9- 20 PIB_COMMAND
Parameter
Value
CMD
0x71
OffsetBuffer
0x00
UID
0x00
Length
0x01
StartAddress
0x00
Table 9- 21 Command data area (FB45: Data DB, RFID standard profile: TXBUF or RXBUF)
Address
Value
Meaning
0x0000 0x05 Command identifier
"Set DISA bit".
Command: Reset DISA bit
The command data to be "written" in the WRITE command simply contains the command
identifier "Reset DISA bit".
If the DISA bit of the reader is reset, the command is acknowledged positively. If it was
already reset, this command has no effect but is nevertheless positively acknowledged.
Process interfacing via an automation system (PLC, PC)
9.3 Control with FB 45 and Ident profile
SIMATIC MV420 / SIMATIC MV440
Operating Instructions, 10/2015, C79000-G8976-C334-03 301
The WRITE command must specify a length of 0x1 ("MOBY_CMD".length or
"PIB_COMMAND".Length = 0x1), otherwise a negative response will be sent.
Table 9- 22 Moby_CMD
Command
[hex]
Sub_
Command
[hex]
Length
[dez]
Address_
MDS [hex]
DAT_DB_number
[dez]
DAT_DB_address
[dez]
01 - 1 0 Number of the
data DB (for example
48)
Pointer to the start
word
(for example 0)
Pointer to the user data to be sent to the
reader.
Table 9- 23 PIB_COMMAND
Parameter
Value
CMD
0x71
OffsetBuffer
0x00
UID
0x00
Length
0x01
StartAddress
0x00
Table 9- 24 Command data area (FB45: Data DB, RFID standard profile: TXBUF or RXBUF)
Address
Value
Meaning
0x0000 0x06 Command identifier
"Reset DISA bit".
Process interfacing via an automation system (PLC, PC)
9.3 Control with FB 45 and Ident profile
SIMATIC MV420 / SIMATIC MV440
302 Operating Instructions, 10/2015, C79000-G8976-C334-03
Command: Writing a trigger-synchronized match string (XMATCH)
NOTICE
Availability of XMATCH
The XMATCH function is not available for SIMATIC MV420 SR-B.
Requirements for matching with OCR
Sending a match string with OCR
A match string can only be sent:
● When the source "Filter with match text" is configured as the string specification for the
corresponding step (OCR type) under "Filter".
● When the source "Character type at pos." is configured as the string specification for the
corresponding step (OCR type) under "Filter".
The match string is therefore either a defined string or a corresponding "Character type at
pos." syntax.
Identical formatting of the sent match string
The match string that is sent must be identical to the input made through the user interface.
Permitted non-printable special characters must be sent as one character. A line break (\n),
for example, as '\n' (ASCII value 0x0D) and not as '\''n' (ASCII values 0x2F and 0x6E).
Requirement for matching with 1D/2D codes
All match options ("All", "Position", "ID", "GS1") are supported for 1D/2D codes. The match
string that is sent must be formatted so that the information required for matching can be
extracted.
Writing command data
The command data to be "written" in the WRITE command contains an XMATCH header
and the XMATCH user data.
● The command is acknowledged positively when the structure of the header and user data
is correct.
● The WRITE command must specify the total length of the XMATCH user data + 4,
otherwise a negative response is sent.
Process interfacing via an automation system (PLC, PC)
9.3 Control with FB 45 and Ident profile
SIMATIC MV420 / SIMATIC MV440
Operating Instructions, 10/2015, C79000-G8976-C334-03 303
Table 9- 25 Moby_CMD
Command
[hex]
Sub_
Command
[hex]
Length
[dez]
Address_
MDS [hex]
DAT_DB_num
ber
[dez]
DAT_DB_addr
ess
[dez]
01 - Total length of
the XMATCH
user data + 4
0 Number of the
data DB (for
example, 48)
Pointer to the
start word
(for example,
0)
Pointer to the user data to be
sent to the reader.
Table 9- 26 PIB_COMMAND
Parameter
Value
CMD
0x70
OffsetBuffer
0x00
UID
0x00
Length
Total length of the XMATCH user data + 4
StartAddress
0x00
Table 9- 27 Command data area (FB45: Data DB, RFID standard profile: TXBUF or RXBUF)
Address
Value
Meaning
0x0000
0x07
Command identifier XMATCH
0x0001
0x00
Reserved
0x0002
See chapter "Control over
TCP/IP and RS232" (Page 340)
XMATCH user data
…
0xN
Process interfacing via an automation system (PLC, PC)
9.3 Control with FB 45 and Ident profile
SIMATIC MV420 / SIMATIC MV440
304 Operating Instructions, 10/2015, C79000-G8976-C334-03
Command: Set digital out
Writing command data
The command data to be "written" in the WRITE command contains the command identifier
and six parameters.
● With this command, the four logical signals "EXT_1", "EXT_2", "EXT_3" and "EXT_4" can
be set and linked to other logical signals. These signals can only be set through an
automation system.
● These signals can also be applied to the available digital output pins using the user
interface.
● Receipt of this command is logged in the diagnostics data records. If the command
contains an invalid parameter, a negative acknowledgement is sent.
● The WRITE command must specify a length of "0x7" ("MOBY_CMD Length" or
"PIB_COMMAND Length" = 0x7), otherwise a negative response is sent.
Table 9- 28 Moby_CMD
Command
[hex]
Sub_
Command
[hex]
Length
[dez]
Address_
MDS [hex]
DAT_DB_num
ber
[dez]
DAT_DB_addr
ess
[dez]
01 - 7 0 Number of the
data DB (for
example, 48)
Pointer to the
start word
(for example,
0)
Pointer to the user data to be
sent to the reader.
Table 9- 29 PIB_COMMAND
Parameter
Value
CMD
0x71
OffsetBuffer
0x00
UID
0x00
Length
0x07
StartAddress
0x00
Table 9- 30 Command data area (FB45: Data DB, RFID standard profile: TXBUF or RXBUF)
Address
Value
Meaning
0x0000
0x08
Command identifier "Set digital out".
0x0001 0x1-0x4 Number of the logical external signal. Corre-
sponds to "EXT_1", "EXT_2", "EXT_3" and
"EXT_4".
Process interfacing via an automation system (PLC, PC)
9.3 Control with FB 45 and Ident profile
SIMATIC MV420 / SIMATIC MV440
Operating Instructions, 10/2015, C79000-G8976-C334-03 305
Address
Value
Meaning
0x0002 0x0-0x2 Level of the signal
• 0x0: Set level statically to "low".
• 0x1: Set level statically to "high".
• 0x2: Set level for configured pulse time to
"high".
0x0003 0x1-0x7 Link type
• 0x1: Logical "OR"
• 0x2: Logical "AND"
• 0x3: Logical "Exclusive OR"
• 0x4: no link
• 0x5: Logical "OR not"
• 0x6: Logical "AND not"
• 0x7: Logical "Exclusive OR not"
0x0004 0x0-0x5 Logical signal for linking.
If the link type is 0x4, the parameter has no signif-
icance.
• 0x0: Logical signal "IN_OP"
• 0x1: Logical signal "TRD"
• 0x2: Logical signal "RDY"
• 0x3: Logical signal "READ"
• 0x4: Logical signal "MATCH"
• 0x5: Logical signal "NOK"
0x0005 0x0 Reserved, must be 0x0 to retain upwards compat-
ibility.
0x0006 0x0 Reserved, must be 0x0 to retain upwards compat-
ibility.
9.3.3.4
READ commands
The following commands are supported:
MV command
● Trigger and read result string
● Read result string
● Read program number
● Read match string
Process interfacing via an automation system (PLC, PC)
9.3 Control with FB 45 and Ident profile
SIMATIC MV420 / SIMATIC MV440
306 Operating Instructions, 10/2015, C79000-G8976-C334-03
Command: Trigger and read result string
To activate a trigger and read the result string, you will need to send a READ command
starting at address 0x0000. The table below shows the content of the command data area
specified in the command ("MOBY_CMD".DAT_DB_number or "instance DB-RFID standard
profile".RXREF) after fully processing the READ command (assuming that 0x0000 was
selected as the start address for the read).
The total length of the result string is stored at the (virtual) addresses 0x0000 and 0x0001.
● If the result string is longer than the number of characters to be read
("MOBY_CMD".length or "PIB_COMMAND".Length), the character string is truncated at
the back.
● If the result string is shorter than the number of characters to be read, the string is
padded with the value 0x00.
You can also configure the format text so that the result bits "READ", "MATCH", "N_OK" are
inserted in the string.
If you do not know of the total length of the result string, send a READ command starting at
address 0x0002 ("MOBY_CMD".address_MDS or "PIB_COMMAND".StartAddress = 2).
You can also start to read from any start address, for example, when the result string is only
relevant starting at the 10th character in the code.
Table 9- 31 Moby_CMD
Command
[hex]
Sub_
Command
[hex]
Length
[dec]
Address_
MDS [hex]
DAT_DB_number
[dec]
DAT_DB_address
[dec]
02 - ≥length
of the
result
string
0 Number of the
data DB (for exam-
ple, 48)
Pointer to the start
word
(for example, 0)
FB45 stores the read result data here.
Table 9- 32 PIB_COMMAND
Parameter
Value
CMD
0x70
OffsetBuffer
0x00
UID
0x00
Length
≥ length of the result string
StartAddress
0x00
Process interfacing via an automation system (PLC, PC)
9.3 Control with FB 45 and Ident profile
SIMATIC MV420 / SIMATIC MV440
Operating Instructions, 10/2015, C79000-G8976-C334-03 307
Table 9- 33 Command data area (FB45: Data DB, RFID standard profile: TXBUF or RXBUF)
Address
Value
Meaning
0x0000 0x00-0xFF Length of the entire result string
(more significant byte)
0x0001 0x00-0xFF Length of the result string (less
significant byte)
0x0002
1st character of the result string
0x0003
2nd character of the result string
…
…
(n + 1) (n–1)th character of the result
string
(n + 2)
nth character of the result string
Command: Read result string
Using the same mechanism as "Read trigger + result string", it is possible to read out the
decoded string of a code through ASM.
● When the trigger source selected in the user interface is not "ASM", the READ command
does not activate a trigger but simply returns the result of the decoding.
● If a result is already available, this is returned. If there is not yet a result string available,
the system waits until a result string is available.
After processing the command, the result string is available in the command data area
specified in the command ("MOBY_CMD".DAT_DB_number "instance DB-RFID standard
profile".RXREF).
You can cancel processing of the command by setting the "MOBY Param".init_run (FB45) or
"instance DB-RFID standard profile".INIT bit (RFID standard profile).
Process interfacing via an automation system (PLC, PC)
9.3 Control with FB 45 and Ident profile
SIMATIC MV420 / SIMATIC MV440
308 Operating Instructions, 10/2015, C79000-G8976-C334-03
Command: Read program number
To have the current program number returned when a READ command is received, the MV
command "Read program number" (WRITE command) must be sent immediately before,
see WRITE commands/MV command interface (Page 293).
The READ command must specify the start address 0x0000 and a length of 0x1
("MOBY_CMD".address_MDS or "PIB_COMMAND".StartAddress = 0, "MOBY_CMD".length
or "PIB_COMMAND".Length = 1).
The byte read at address 0x0000 contains the number of the program currently selected and
is stored in the command data area specified in the command
("MOBY_CMD".DAT_DB_number or "instance DB-RFID standard profile".RXREF) after the
command is processed.
Table 9- 34 Moby_CMD
Command
[hex]
Sub_
Command
[hex]
Length
[dec]
Address_
MDS [hex]
DAT_DB_number
[dec]
DAT_DB_address
[dec]
02 - 1 0 Number of the
data DB (for exam-
ple, 48)
Pointer to the start
word
(for example, 0)
FB45 stores the read result data here.
Table 9- 35 PIB_COMMAND
Parameter
Value
CMD
0x70
OffsetBuffer
0x00
UID
0x00
Length
0x01
StartAddress
0x00
Table 9- 36 Command data area (FB45: Data DB, RFID standard profile: TXBUF or RXBUF)
Address
Value
Meaning
0x0000
0x0 – 0xF
Current program number
Process interfacing via an automation system (PLC, PC)
9.3 Control with FB 45 and Ident profile
SIMATIC MV420 / SIMATIC MV440
Operating Instructions, 10/2015, C79000-G8976-C334-03 309
Command: Read match string
To have the current match string returned when the READ command is received, the MV
command "Read match string" (WRITE command) must be sent immediately before, see
WRITE commands/MV command interface (Page 293).
After processing the READ command, the following data is available in the command data
area:
If the length of the data to be read ("MOBY_CMD".length or "PIB_COMMAND".Length) is not
n + 2 bytes (n = total length of the match string) the match string is truncated or the
command data area is padded with 0x00.
Table 9- 37 Moby_CMD
Command
[hex]
Sub_
Command
[hex]
Length
[dec]
Address_
MDS [hex]
DAT_DB_number
[dec]
DAT_DB_address
[dec]
02 - ≥ total
length
of the
match
string
+ 2
0 Number of the
data DB (for example
48)
Pointer to the start
word
(for example 0)
FB45 stores the read result data here.
Table 9- 38 PIB_COMMAND
Parameter
Value
CMD
0x70
OffsetBuffer
0x00
UID
0x00
Length
≥ total length of the match string + 2
StartAddress
0x00
Table 9- 39 Command data area (FB45: Data DB, RFID standard profile: TXBUF or RXBUF)
Address
Value
Meaning
0x0000 0x0 – 0xF Length of the total match string
(more significant byte)
0x0001 0x00-0xFF Length of the total match string
(less significant byte)
0x0002
1st character of the match string
…
…
n + 2 nth character of the match string
Process interfacing via an automation system (PLC, PC)
9.3 Control with FB 45 and Ident profile
SIMATIC MV420 / SIMATIC MV440
310 Operating Instructions, 10/2015, C79000-G8976-C334-03
9.3.3.5
Result evaluation of a command
The result of the command execution appears as follows:
● Through the "ready" bit in the command and status word "BEST" and the output bytes
"error_MOBY", "error_FB" and "error_BUS" ("MOBY Param").
● Through the output double word "STATUS" ("instance DB RFID standard profile").
In addition to the description in the relevant function manuals of FB45 and the RFID standard
profile, the following values have a specific meaning for the reader:
FB45:
Error_MOBY
Ident profile STATUS
Meaning
Byte 0
Byte 1
Byte 2
0x05 0xE6 0xFE 0x01 Command not permitted (Preconditions for the
commands (Page 311)) or the command was
aborted.
The precise error message can be obtained with
INIT without program selection. Possible causes:
• The send buffer is full
• Program damaged
•
Ethernet interface is in operation and there is a
problem
• The connected lamp is overloaded
0x0D 0xE1 0xFE 0x03
Bad parameter in MV command
Command is incorrectly structured, for example:
• The specified address for a WRITE command
is not 0x0000.
• Program change MV command
– length of the data to be written > 0x1.
– Program number transferred is > 0xF.
Program number transferred is not saved.
0x15 0xE6 0xFE 0x03 Initialization with program selection (init_run/INIT)
is not possible:
• Program number transferred is not saved.
• Reader is still in self-test.
Process interfacing via an automation system (PLC, PC)
9.3 Control with FB 45 and Ident profile
SIMATIC MV420 / SIMATIC MV440
Operating Instructions, 10/2015, C79000-G8976-C334-03 311
9.3.3.6
Preconditions for the commands
Command
Trigger
source
Result
(binary)
Result string
Control
DISA
No group error
Pro-
cessing
mode
Stop mode
Program
change (write
program num-
ber)
∼ ∼ ∼ ASM or
PROFINET
IO
∼ YES YES YES
Read program
number
∼ ∼ ∼ ASM or
PROFINET
IO
∼ YES ∼ ∼
Write match
string
∼ ∼ ∼ ASM or
PROFINET
IO
∼ YES YES NO
Read match
string
∼ ∼ ∼ ASM or
PROFINET
IO
∼ YES YES NO
Set DISA bit ∼ ∼ ∼ ASM or
PROFINET
IO
∼ YES ∼ ∼
Reset DISA bit ∼ ∼ ∼ ASM or
PROFINET
IO
∼ YES ∼ ∼
XMATCH1) ~ ~ ~ ASM or
PROFINET
IO
~ YES YES NO
Set digital out1) ~ ~ ~ ASM or
PROFINET
IO
~ ~ ~ ~
Read result ∼ ∼ ASM or
PROFINET IO
∼ ∼ YES YES NO
Trigger + read
result string
ASM or
PROFINET
IO
∼ ASM or
PROFINET IO
∼ ∼ YES YES NO
Acknowledge
group error
∼ ∼ ∼ ASM or
PROFINET
IO
∼ NO NO NO
1) Not available on SIMATIC MV420 SR-B
∼
Selection is unimportant.
YES
State must be satisfied.
NO
State is not permitted.
ASM
If the "PROFINET IP (Ident profile)" mode is set, you must select PROFINET
IO;
otherwise, select ASM.
If you want to send a command, make sure that the selection criteria are met according to
the table above. If the selection criteria are not met, the command is acknowledged
negatively.
Process interfacing via an automation system (PLC, PC)
9.3 Control with FB 45 and Ident profile
SIMATIC MV420 / SIMATIC MV440
312 Operating Instructions, 10/2015, C79000-G8976-C334-03
The columns "Trigger source", "Result", "Result string" and "Control" correspond to the
selection in the user interface (
Connections ➜ Integration ➜ Connection
).
As a general rule, "ASM" must be selected for at least one option so that the reader is
accessible via the RS-422 interface.
Note
The following applies to all commands
•
The state of the DISA bit is irrelevant
•
There is no group error.
If there is nevertheless a group error, first acknowledge the error.
9.3.3.7
Group errors
If a correct command is acknowledged negatively even though all the preconditions are met,
there is a group error ("IN_OP" bit not set).
Acknowledging the group error
To acknowledge a group error through ASM or PROFINET IO, "ASM" or "PROFINET IO"
must be configured as the controller in the user interface (
Connections
➜
Integration
➜
Connection
).
Initialization with program selection
1. Acknowledge the error by initializing with program selection.
The reader changes to processing mode again with the required program. To change to
processing mode, the DISA bit is set automatically and reset again after the status
change. If the DISA bit was set manually before, it remains set after the status change.
Process interfacing via an automation system (PLC, PC)
9.3 Control with FB 45 and Ident profile
SIMATIC MV420 / SIMATIC MV440
Operating Instructions, 10/2015, C79000-G8976-C334-03 313
Initialization without program selection
If the cause of the group error is to be identified using FB 45 or the Ident profile, initialization
without program selection needs to be used. Note that when using the Ident profile without a
communication module, PROFINET diagnostics can be used.
1. Run the initialization without program selection.
The group error is not acknowledged by this. A value identifying the group error is,
however, present in the output byte "error_MOBY" ("MOBY Param") or output double
word "STATUS" ("instance DB RFID standard profile"). You can find a list of possible
group errors and the corresponding error codes in section Alarm, fault and system
messages (Page 375).
2. Finally, repeat the initialization (if required with program selection) to acknowledge the
group error.
After the acknowledgment, the reader returns to processing mode. To change to
processing mode, the "DISA" bit is set automatically and reset again after the status
change. If the "DISA" bit was set manually before, it remains set after the status change.
3. Check the "IN_OP" status bit. This bit is normally set automatically.
Process interfacing via an automation system (PLC, PC)
9.4 Control with FB79
SIMATIC MV420 / SIMATIC MV440
314 Operating Instructions, 10/2015, C79000-G8976-C334-03
9.4
Control with FB79
Principle of data transmission via PROFINET IO
The following figure shows the reader interfaces relevant for data transmission via
PROFINET IO (FB79).
Figure 9-4 Principle of data transmission via PROFINET IO (FB79)
Note
Bytes 1 to 31 of the "Send" user data interface are relevant. Bytes 1 to 4 of the "Receive"
user data interface are relevant.
Process interfacing via an automation system (PLC, PC)
9.4 Control with FB79
SIMATIC MV420 / SIMATIC MV440
Operating Instructions, 10/2015, C79000-G8976-C334-03 315
9.4.1
Assignment of the interfaces relevant to PROFINET IO
Control byte
Bit no.
Corresponds to
signal
Function
0 DISA Disable: Disables manual keyboard input, program selection and pro-
gram saving, error acknowledgment, starting the reader
1
SEL0
Select 0: Program selection bit 0
2 SEL1 Select 1: Program selection bit 1 (when TRN=0) / Save program (when
TRN=1)
3
SEL2
Select 2: Program selection bit 2
4
SEL3
Select 3: Program selection bit 3
5
TRN
Save program: Saves new program.
6
TRG
Trigger: Processing starts on a positive edge.
7
RES
Reset: Reset error.
Note
The SEL0, SEL1, SEL2, SEL3, and TRN signals are effective
only when DISA=1.
Status byte
Bit no.
Corresponds to
signal
Function
0 IN_OP In operation:
• 0 = error message is displayed.
• 1 = reader functioning, no error
1 TRD Program saved:
• In run:
– 0 = Selected program has not been saved.
– 1 = Selected program has been saved.
• When saving program (TRN=1)
– 0 = Save program active
– 1 = Acknowledgment signal (RDY=0)
2 RDY Ready:
• 0 = Startup of reader or reader in stop
• 1 = Reader in run
3
READ
Processing result: Code was localized and decoded.
4
MATCH
Processing result: Code matches the trained code.
5 N_OK Code was not legible.
Process interfacing via an automation system (PLC, PC)
9.4 Control with FB79
SIMATIC MV420 / SIMATIC MV440
316 Operating Instructions, 10/2015, C79000-G8976-C334-03
Bit no.
Corresponds to
signal
Function
6
-
Current status of the trigger input
7 - Reserved
Note
Writing the control byte and reading and evaluating the status byte must be performed in the
same way as in the time
diagrams shown under "Select program".
"Send" user data interface
Byte no.
Meaning
0
Reserved
1
Consecutive number of the data packet to be transferred to the I/O controller.
2
Total net length of the data to be transferred in bytes in STEP 7 format.
3
4
Data ID of the supplied data
5
1st user data byte
...
...
31
27th User data byte
Note
The "data ID of the supplied data" defines the data transferred. The coding matches byte 4
of the "Receive" user data interface. With a read job on
the "Receive" user data interface,
the ID of the data currently being transferred is entered here.
"Receive" user data interface
Byte no.
Meaning
0
Reserved
1
Consecutive number of the current data packet received correctly by the I/O controller
2
Reserved
3
Reserved
4
Data ID of the requested data.
5
Reserved
...
...
31
Reserved
Process interfacing via an automation system (PLC, PC)
9.4 Control with FB79
SIMATIC MV420 / SIMATIC MV440
Operating Instructions, 10/2015, C79000-G8976-C334-03 317
The "data ID of the requested data" defines the data to be read. The data ID can have the
following values:
ID (B#16#)
Meaning
09 • User data byte 1: Outputs the program number selected on the reader.
• User data byte 2: When the DISA bit is set, the display indicates whether a
user who has the right to overrule the DISA signal is logged on through the
user interface: 00H: "Take control" is enabled, 01H: "Take control" is disa-
bled.
81
Result string
82
Quality characteristics
83 Quality characteristics as absolute values and result string
84
Quality characteristics in classes
85
Quality characteristics in classes and result string
86
Quality characteristics in classes and absolute quality characteristics
87 Quality characteristics in classes, absolute quality characteristics and result
string
88
Position of the data matrix code
89
Position and result string
8A
Position and absolute quality characteristics
8B
Position, quality characteristics as absolute values and result string
8C
Position and quality characteristics in classes
8D
Position, quality characteristics in classes and result string
8E
Position, quality characteristics in classes and absolute quality characteristics
8F Position, quality characteristics in classes, absolute quality characteristics and
result string
Note
•
The code qualities will only be output correctly when a program is set with the "Read
code" task and calibrated or uncalibrated verification according to ISO 16022. Otherwise
the quality codes are not calculated when the code is read and cannot be output.
•
Use the definition of the "Format string" in the "Result" tab (result step) under "Programs"
to output the quality values when another type of verification is selected. The quality
values are then output according to the parameter settings along with the read result.
Note
•
If no data ID is entered, processing takes place but no data is transferred.
•
When the data ID is B#16#09, no trigger is necessary.
Process interfacing via an automation system (PLC, PC)
9.4 Control with FB79
SIMATIC MV420 / SIMATIC MV440
318 Operating Instructions, 10/2015, C79000-G8976-C334-03
The table below specifies what content and which data types are returned when the data ID
contains the position or the quality characteristics. The order of the code properties in the
table is identical to the order of the code properties in the data packet. If applicable, the
result string is returned after the code properties.
Data to be read
consists of ...
Data type of each component
Position of the data matrix code
Note:
Viewing angle is only output for
DMC quality = ambitious
• X position
• Y position
• Rotation angle
• Viewing angle
INT
Absolute quality characteristics • Symbol contrast
• Print growth
• Axial non-uniformity
• Unused error correction
REAL
Quality characteristics as clas-
ses
• Symbol contrast
• Print growth
• Axial non-uniformity
• Unused error correction
• Overall grade
CHAR
Note
When the data to be read contains the absolute quality characteristics, remember that the
value of the "Swap" parameter (in the user interface in Connections
➜
Interfaces
in
PROFINET IO or "Swap") must be taken into account.
Process interfacing via an automation system (PLC, PC)
9.4 Control with FB79
SIMATIC MV420 / SIMATIC MV440
Operating Instructions, 10/2015, C79000-G8976-C334-03 319
9.4.2
Sample program for data exchange if code length ≤ 27 bytes
Below, you will find a sample program for data exchange when the code length is a
maximum of 27 bytes.
Note
The sample program can only
run on the following S7 CPUs:
•
On a CPU 318 and the S7-400 CPUs as of firmware version V3.0.0
•
On S7-300 CPUs with MMC
On all other S7
-300 and S7-400 CPUs, you must use SFCs 14 and 15 for all access to the
two user data interfaces.
Explanation of the program
● Only the pure result string with data ID B#16#81 is output.
● The I/O controller does not check how many bytes the reader has returned but always
reads 27 bytes. The I/O controller does not monitor anything.
● The start of the "Send" user data interface is at address 4 of the process image input.
The start of the "Receive" user data interface is at address 4 of the process image of the
outputs.
● To ensure the consistency over the entire area of 32 bytes, there must be no update of
the process image during the program shown here.
● The user data is stored in data block DB17 starting at byte 4.
STL program
//Enter data ID (in principle only necessary in the first cycle)
L
B#16#81
// Only result string
T
QB 8
// Check number of data packet for 1
L
IB 5
// Number of data packet from reader
L
1
<>
I
// If number does not equal 1
JC
m001
// ... user data is not available yet
// Read user data from reader
L
ID 9
// Read first 4 bytes of user data
T
DB17.DBD 4
// Store in DB
L ID 13 // Read next 4 bytes of user data
T
DB17.DBD 8
// Store in DB
Process interfacing via an automation system (PLC, PC)
9.4 Control with FB79
SIMATIC MV420 / SIMATIC MV440
320 Operating Instructions, 10/2015, C79000-G8976-C334-03
//Enter data ID (in principle only necessary in the first cycle)
L ID 17 // Read next 4 bytes of user data
T
DB17.DBD 12
// Store in DB
L
ID 21
// Read next 4 bytes of user data
T
DB17.DBD 16
// Store in DB
L
ID 25
// Read next 4 bytes of user data
T
DB17.DBD 20
// Store in DB
L
ID 29
// Read next 4 bytes of user data
T
DB17.DBD 24
// Store in DB
L
IW 33
// Read second last 2 bytes of user data
T
DB17.DBW 28
// Store in DB
L
IB 35
// Read last byte of user data
T
DB17.DBB 30 /
// Store in DB
// Acknowledge with no. of data packet
m001: L IB 5 // Number of data packet
T
QB 5
// Send as acknowledgment to reader
BEU
Process interfacing via an automation system (PLC, PC)
9.4 Control with FB79
SIMATIC MV420 / SIMATIC MV440
Operating Instructions, 10/2015, C79000-G8976-C334-03 321
9.4.3
Programming data fragmentation
Handshaking
The following sections introduce a handshaking procedure that ensures the consistency of
all the data transferred from the reader to the I/O controller regardless of any configured
consistency mechanisms in PROFINET. This procedure must be used with every data
transfer, even if the transfer only consists of one data block, for example when reading out
the program number selected on the reader.
Remember that you need to enter the required data ID in byte 4 of the "Receive" user data
interface.
Note
Handshaking can only run on the following S7 CPUs
Handshaking using the method described here is only possible on the following S7
-CPUs:
•
On a CPU 318 and the S7-400 CPUs as of firmware version V3.0.0
•
On S7-300 CPUs with MMC
On all other S7
-300 and S7-400 CPUs, you must use SFCs 14 and 15 for all access to the
two user data interfaces.
Step
Activity in the user program of the PROFINET IO controller
1 Scan byte 1 of the "Send" user data interface cyclically. As long as this byte has the value 0, there is no
new data available. If it has the value 1, go to step 2.
2 The value 1 in byte 1 of the "Send" user data interface has the following meaning: The reader has started
data transfer.
Read out the net total length of the data to be transferred from bytes 2 and 3 of the "Send" user data inter-
face and the user data of the 1st data packet from bytes 5 to 31.
3 Acknowledge correct receipt of the 1st data packet by writing the value 1 to byte 1 of the "Receive" user
data interface.
The reader scans byte 1 of the " Receive" user data interface cyclically. As soon as it reads the value 1, it
fills bytes 5 to 31 of the "Send" user data interface with the user data of the 2nd data packet and enters the
number of this data packet (in this case 2) in byte 1.
4 Scan byte 1 of the "Send" user data interface cyclically. As long as this byte contains the number of the
previously transferred data packet (1), there is no new data available. As soon as byte 1 has the value 2
(number of the next data packet), go to step 5.
5
Read the user data of the 2nd data packet from bytes 5 to 31.
6 Acknowledge correct receipt of the 2nd data packet by writing the value 2 to byte 1 of the "Receive" user
data interface.
...
...
Last - 4 Scan byte 1 of the "Send" user data interface cyclically. As long as byte 1 contains the number of the sec-
ond last data packet, the data of the last data packet is not yet available. As soon as byte 1 contains the
number of the last data packet, go to the next step.
Last - 3
Read the user data of the last data packet from bytes 5 to 31.
Process interfacing via an automation system (PLC, PC)
9.4 Control with FB79
SIMATIC MV420 / SIMATIC MV440
322 Operating Instructions, 10/2015, C79000-G8976-C334-03
Step
Activity in the user program of the PROFINET IO controller
Last - 2 Acknowledge receipt of the last data packet by writing the number of the last data packet to byte 1 of the
"Receive" user data interface.
The reader scans byte 1 of the " Receive" user data interface cyclically. As soon as it reads the number of
the last data packet, it writes the value 0 to bytes 2 and 3 of the user data interface and also to byte 1. The
value 0 in byte 1 signals the end of data transfer to the I/O controller.
Last -1 Scan byte 1 of the "Send" user data interface cyclically. As soon as you read the value 0, go to the last
step.
Last Acknowledge correct receipt of all the data by writing the value 0 to byte 1 of the "Receive" user data inter-
face.
Reaction to disruptions, timeouts and errors
The reader performs the following monitoring functions:
● The time between the arrival of two acknowledgements of the I/O controller is monitored
for the value configured in the Connections ➜ Interfaces ➜ PROFINET IO ➜ Time limit
window.
● The correct order of the data packets acknowledged by the I/O controller is monitored.
If an error occurs, the reader enters B#16#FF in byte 1 of the "Send" user data interface
which causes the current data transfer to abort.
Siemens recommends that you implement the following monitoring functions in the user
program of the I/O controller.
● Monitor the time between the arrival of two consecutive data packets.
● Monitor the correct order of the data packets sent by the reader.
● Check whether the total length of the user data actually transferred matches the net total
length indicated by the reader at the beginning of the data transfer.
If an error occurs, you can abort the current data transfer by writing B#16#FF to byte 1 of the
"Receive" user data interface.
9.4.4
Function block 79 "VS130-2_CONTROL"
To control the functions of the reader, there is a function block FB79 for PROFINET IO
operations.
In addition to the SIMATIC S7 system mechanisms for integrating the reader in a
PROFINET IO environment, FB79 makes the software integration in control programs
easier.
Note
•
The description of the support provided by FB79 and the associated user data interface is
mainly to retain compatibility with the VS130-2 reader.
•
The integration design with the highest performance
is based on the Ident profile with or
without a communication module. Siemens recommends the use of this concept for new
plants.
Process interfacing via an automation system (PLC, PC)
9.4 Control with FB79
SIMATIC MV420 / SIMATIC MV440
Operating Instructions, 10/2015, C79000-G8976-C334-03 323
Description
You will need to process the following bits of the control byte outside the FB:
● TRG (Trigger): Start processing
● RES (Reset): Acknowledge an error (refer to the error messages)
The FB monitors only the data exchange between the reader and the controller, in other
words, the DONE parameter provides no information about the actual read result. To obtain
a good/bad evaluation, you will need to evaluate the following result bits of the status byte:
● READ
● MATCH
● NOK
The following jobs are possible
● Cancel current job
● Select program
● Save a program
● Output result strings
● Output the position of the code
● Output the quality characteristics of the currently read code
● Output the number of the currently selected program
● Output the current mode of the reader
● Reset the DISA control signal
Whether or not a job can execute successfully depends on the current status of the reader
and its parameter settings. Which job can execute in which status of the reader is described
further below.
With almost all jobs, FB79 sets the DISA control signal on the reader to TRUE. This is
intended to prevent the reader being controlled from an HMI device at the same time. The
following four jobs are exceptions:
● Reset the DISA control signal
● Cancel current job. The FB does not change DISA with this.
● Output the number of the currently selected program. The FB does not change DISA with
this.
● Output the current mode of the reader. The FB does not change DISA with this.
When a new job is started, the output parameters are reset.
Note
Multiple FB79 calls with the same instance are not permitted
Multiple FB79 calls with the same
instance are not permitted.
Process interfacing via an automation system (PLC, PC)
9.4 Control with FB79
SIMATIC MV420 / SIMATIC MV440
324 Operating Instructions, 10/2015, C79000-G8976-C334-03
Remember that you can influence the execution of the FB with the parameters of the user
interface "
Connections
➜
Integration
":
● If you want to read out a result string using the FB, the output of the result string must be
set to PROFINET IO. With the jobs "Select program" (COMMAND =W#16#0001), "Save
a program" (COMMAND =W#16#0002) and "Output currently selected program"
(COMMAND =W#16#0003), the number of the selected program is queried on the
reader. For this reason, output of the result string must also be set to PROFINET IO in
these cases.
● The interface for the DISA, SEL0 to SEL3, TRN, RES, IN_OP, TRD, RDY signals must
always be set to PROFINET IO.
● The setting of the interface for the result bits READ, MATCH, N_OK is irrelevant for the
FB.
How it works
FB79 "VS130-2_CONTROL" is an asynchronous block, in other words, its execution may be
spread over several FB calls. You start job execution, by calling the FB with a job number >
0.
Job execution is completed when ACTIVE changes to the value FALSE and either DONE or
ERROR has the value TRUE (positive edge). Please note that various jobs can be handled
in one CPU cycle and ACTIVE does not therefore change to the value TRUE. This involves
the "Read out status" and "Reset DISA bit" jobs. In this case, it may also not be possible to
detect an edge change at DONE or ERROR.
You should therefore evaluate the DONE and ERROR parameters at each block call. If the
job completed without error, DONE is set = TRUE. In this case, you should also evaluate
ERRCODE to learn of warnings from the FB.
As long as ACTIVE has the value TRUE, you will need to call the FB with the identical
assignment of the COMMAND input parameter. It is also not possible to start a new job
during this time.
Read jobs are cyclic jobs. This means that after the start of a job with
COMMAND=W#16#0081 to 008F, ACTIVE has the value TRUE. ACTIVE retains this value
until the job is stopped again.
The read cycle (in other words, the transfer of a complete result string) is completed when
ACTIVE has the value TRUE and either DONE or ERROR has the value TRUE (positive
edge). If you want to start a different job while a read job is running, you will need to cancel
the read job first. You do this by calling the FB with COMMAND=W#16#0000. In this case,
ACTIVE changes its value to FALSE. Depending on whether a result string is currently being
transferred, either DONE or ERROR has the value TRUE. If ERROR has the value TRUE,
ERRCODE has the value DW#16#00010007.
Note
If an error has occu
rred that changes the reader to STOP, eliminate and acknowledge the
error. You can then return the reader to RUN by changing program (COMMAND =
W#16#0001).
Process interfacing via an automation system (PLC, PC)
9.4 Control with FB79
SIMATIC MV420 / SIMATIC MV440
Operating Instructions, 10/2015, C79000-G8976-C334-03 325
Parameter
Parameter
Declaration
Data type
Address
(instance DB)
Default
Description
LADDR_
STEUER
INPUT WORD 0.0 W#16#0000 Address of the control byte of the reader.
The address must be in the process image of
the CPU you are using.
LADDR_
STATUS
INPUT WORD 2.0 W#16#0000 Address of the status byte of the reader.
The address must be in the process image of
the CPU you are using.
LADDR_
SEND
INPUT WORD 4.0 W#16#0000 Start address of the "Send" user data inter-
face of the reader.
LADDR_
RECV
INPUT WORD 6.0 W#16#0000 Start address of the "Receive" user data inter-
face of the reader.
COMMAND INPUT WORD 8.0 W#16#0000 Job number:
The permitted values are described following
this table.
PARAM1 INPUT BYTE 10.0 B#16#00 Number of the program to be selected (rele-
vant only for jobs W#16#0001 and
W#16#0002).
RESET
INPUT
BOOL
11.0
FALSE
Reset pending error and FB initialization.
RECV INPUT ANY 12.0 Receive area for the result string. Only data
block areas and the BYTE data type are per-
mitted.
You must interconnect this parameter and the
data block must be at least as large as the
maximum DMC string that can be expected.
ACTIVE OUTPUT BOOL 22.0 FALSE ACTIVE = TRUE: Processing of the last job
has not yet completed.
DONE OUTPUT BOOL 22.1 FALSE DONE = TRUE: Job was completed without
errors.
With read jobs (COMMAND = W#16#0081 to
008F), this simply means that the transfer
between the reader and FB (CPU) was error-
free. To find out whether the DMC evaluation
was successful, you will need to evaluate bits
READ (bit 3), MATCH (bit 4) and N_OK (bit 5)
in the status byte of the reader.
ERROR
OUTPUT
BOOL
22.2
FALSE
ERROR = TRUE: An error has occurred.
ERRCODE OUTPUT DWORD 24.0 DW#16#
00000000
Error information:
• DW#16#0000 0000: No error
• DW#16#0000 wxyz: Warning
• DW#16#0001 wxyz: Internal FB error
• DW#16#0002 wxyz: Error of the reader
(see information table at the end of this
section)
Process interfacing via an automation system (PLC, PC)
9.4 Control with FB79
SIMATIC MV420 / SIMATIC MV440
326 Operating Instructions, 10/2015, C79000-G8976-C334-03
Parameter
Declaration
Data type
Address
(instance DB)
Default
Description
STATE OUTPUT WORD 28.0 W#16#0000 Operating status of the reader:
• W#16#0000: Status not up to date
• W#16#0001: RUN (processing mode with
output of the result string), in other words,
the IN_OP and RDY bits in the status byte
are set.
• W#16#0002: STOP (including Save pro-
gram and Adjustment mode), i.e. the
IN_OP bit in the status byte is set; the
RDY bit, however, is not.
• W#16#0003: ERROR, in other words, the
IN_OP bit in the status byte is not set.
CODE_OUT OUTPUT BYTE 30.0 B#16#00 Number of the program currently selected on
the reader
LENGTH
OUTPUT
WORD
32.0
W#16#0000
Length of the result string in bytes
Permitted values for the COMMAND parameter
Value (W#16#...)
Meaning
0000
Cancel current job or no job
0001
Change program
0002
Save program
0003
Output number of the program currently selected on the reader
0004
Output the current status of the reader
0005
Reset DISA control signal
0081
Output the (possibly modified) result string
0082
Output absolute quality parameters
0083
Output absolute quality parameters and output result string
0084
Output quality parameters as classes
0085
Output quality parameters as classes and output result string
0086
Output quality parameters as classes and in absolute format
0087
Output quality parameters as classes and in absolute format and output result string
0088
Output code position
0089
Output code position and result string
008A
Output code position and absolute quality parameters
008B
Output code position and absolute quality parameters and output result string
008C Output code position and quality parameters as classes
008D
Output code position and quality parameters as classes and output result string
008E
Output code position and quality parameters as classes and in absolute format
008F Output code position and quality parameters as classes and in absolute format and output result
string
Process interfacing via an automation system (PLC, PC)
9.4 Control with FB79
SIMATIC MV420 / SIMATIC MV440
Operating Instructions, 10/2015, C79000-G8976-C334-03 327
Note
To process this job, the following parameters must be set in PROFINET
IO:
•
Connections
➜
Integration
➜
Text: PROFINET IO
Output of the result string (except commands 4 and 5)
•
Connections
➜
Integration
➜
Controller: PROFINET IO
Interface for the DISA, SEL0 to SEL3, TRN, RES, IN_OP, TRD, RDY signals
Parameters not interconnected with the block (static local data)
Parameter
Declaration
Data type
Address
(instance DB)
Default
Description
X_POSITION STATIC INT 34.0 0 X position of the center point of the code
relative to the center of the image. Normal-
ized to the full resolution for the current
image.
Y_POSITION STATIC INT 36.0 0 Y position of the center point of the code
relative to the center of the image. Normal-
ized to the full resolution for the current
image.
ROT_ANGLE
STATIC
INT
38.0
0
Roll angle of the code center point
INCLINE STATIC INT 40.0 0 Viewing angle
(angle between the axis of the reader and
the surface of the code field)
CONTRAST_F STATIC CHAR 42.0 .. Symbol contrast as class
(value valid if not equal to ' ')
GROWTH_F STATIC CHAR 43.0 .. Print growth as class
(value valid if not equal to ' ')
NONUNIF_F STATIC CHAR 44.0 .. Axial non-uniformity as class
(value valid if not equal to ' ')
ERR_CORR_F STATIC CHAR 45.0 .. Unused error correction (value valid, if not
equal to ' ')
Note:
If a "ReadErr" occurs, the old result data is
retained because no new data is available.
QUALITY_F STATIC CHAR 46.0 .. Overall grade as class
(value valid if not equal to ' ')
CONTRAST STATIC REAL 48.0 -1.0e+0 Symbol contrast as absolute value
(value valid if not equal to -1.0e+0)
GROWTH STATIC REAL 52.0 -1.0e+0 Print growth as absolute value
(value valid if not equal to -1.0e+0)
NONUNIF STATIC REAL 56.0 -1.0e+0 Axial non-uniformity as absolute value
(value valid if not equal to -1.0e+0)
ERR_CORR STATIC REAL 60.0 -1.0e+0 Unused error correction as absolute value
(value valid if not equal to -1.0e+0)
Process interfacing via an automation system (PLC, PC)
9.4 Control with FB79
SIMATIC MV420 / SIMATIC MV440
328 Operating Instructions, 10/2015, C79000-G8976-C334-03
Job execution
Whether or not a job can execute successfully depends on the current status of the reader.
The table below shows which jobs are possible in the various statuses of the reader. You will
find the job number in the table of parameters.#
Reader status
Job number = (hexadecimal)
0000
0001
0002
0003
0004
0005
0081 to 008F
RUN (RDY=1)
(processing mode
with output of the
result strings)
X X X X X X X
STOP
X
X
X
X
X
X
-
ERROR
(IN_OP=0)
X X - X X X -
Sequence when canceling a job (COMMAND = W#16#0000)
Canceling a job is possible only with read jobs:
● Read jobs (COMMAND = W#16#0081 to W#16#008F)
The block signals completion of the job cancel with ACTIVE = FALSE.
If a transfer is currently active when the job is canceled, the transfer aborts and the error is
reported with an appropriate error message in the ERRCODE parameter. ERROR then has
the value TRUE and DONE the value FALSE. A transfer is active when DONE and ERROR
have the value FALSE.
If there is no transfer currently active when the job is canceled, on completion of the job, the
ERRCODE parameter has the value 0, ERROR the value FALSE and DONE the value
TRUE.
Sequence when changing jobs
If you want to change to a different job from a read job, the currently active job must be
canceled (see above).
Sequence when changing a program (COMMAND = W#16#0001)
If the reader is currently executing a read job, follow these steps:
1. Call FB79 with COMMAND=W#16#0000. This cancels the output of the result string (job
W#16#0081).
2. Make a program change by calling FB79 with COMMAND=W#16#0001 and PARAM= call
new program number. When the job is triggered, the parameters DONE and ERROR
have the value FALSE. The ACTIVE parameter has the value TRUE. The block changes
the program selected on the reader to the value at the PARAM1 parameter. It then
queries the program now selected on the reader and outputs this program at the
CODE_OUT parameter. If the program now selected matches the program specified at
the PARAM1 parameter, the ACTIVE parameter has the value FALSE and the DONE
parameter the value TRUE. If the program now selected does not match the program
Process interfacing via an automation system (PLC, PC)
9.4 Control with FB79
SIMATIC MV420 / SIMATIC MV440
Operating Instructions, 10/2015, C79000-G8976-C334-03 329
specified at the PARAM1 parameter, the ACTIVE parameter has the value FALSE and
the ERROR parameter the value TRUE. The ERRCODE parameter contains an
appropriate error message. The system also checks whether the program change is
being blocked by a "Service" or "User1" user logged on to the user interface who has
taken control of the reader, and whether the newly selected program has been saved. If
an error is detected, the ACTIVE parameter has the value FALSE and the ERROR
parameter has the value TRUE. The ERRCODE parameter contains an appropriate error
message.
3. Call FB79 again cyclically with COMMAND=W#16#0081.
If you attempt to cancel a current change program job, the ERRCODE parameter will change
to DW#16#00000002; however, processing for the job will be completed.
Note
•
When there is a program change, the reader changes to STOP for at least 150 ms (refer
to selecting modes "Select program"). In isolated cases, a program change can take up to
15 s.
•
If you specify the value 0 in the PARAM1 parameter, the previously selected program will
be retained.
•
The value of PARAM1 must not be changed before the job is completed.
Sequence when saving a program (COMMAND = W#16#0002)
To allow the FB to trigger the saving of a code, the parameter Connections > Integration >
Control must have the value "PROFINET IO".
The job can only be sent when the reader is not in the ERROR status (see also the status
table following the parameter table).
When the job is triggered, the parameters DONE and ERROR have the value FALSE. The
ACTIVE parameter has the value TRUE.
The block saves the program specified at the PARAM1 parameter.
Note
•
In isolated cases, saving a program can take up to 35 s.
•
The value of PARAM1 must not be changed before the job is completed.
It then queries the program now selected on the reader and outputs this program at the
CODE_OUT parameter.
If the program now selected matches the program specified at the PARAM1 parameter, the
ACTIVE parameter has the value FALSE and the DONE parameter the value TRUE.
If the program now selected does not match the program specified at the PARAM1
parameter, the ACTIVE parameter has the value FALSE and the ERROR parameter the
value TRUE. The ERRCODE parameter contains an appropriate error message.
The system also checks whether program saving is being blocked by a "Service" or "User1"
user logged on to the user interface who has taken over control of the reader, and whether
program saving has been successful. If an error is detected, the ACTIVE parameter has the
Process interfacing via an automation system (PLC, PC)
9.4 Control with FB79
SIMATIC MV420 / SIMATIC MV440
330 Operating Instructions, 10/2015, C79000-G8976-C334-03
value FALSE and the ERROR parameter has the value TRUE. The ERRCODE parameter
contains an appropriate error message.
If you attempt to cancel a current save program job, the ERRCODE parameter will change to
DW#16#00000002; however, processing for the job will be completed.
Sequence when outputting the currently selected program (COMMAND = W#16#0003)
When the job is triggered, the parameters DONE and ERROR have the value FALSE.
The ACTIVE parameter has the value TRUE.
The block then queries the program now selected on the reader and outputs this program at
the CODE_OUT parameter.
If no error occurs in the transfer of the program number, the ACTIVE parameter will have the
value FALSE and the DONE parameter the value TRUE.
Sequence when outputting the status of the reader (COMMAND = W#16#0004)
Based on the status byte of the reader, the block recognizes the current status and outputs
this in the STATE parameter:
● If the IN_OP bit is not set, status 3 (ERROR) is output.
● If the IN_OP but not the RDY bit is set, status 2 (STOP) is output.
● If the IN_OP and the RDY bit are set, status 1 (RUN) is output.
The DONE parameter then has the value TRUE and ACTIVE the value FALSE.
Note
Because the job completes in one CPU cycle, no edge change can be detected at the
ACTIVE parameter. If the DONE parameter already has the value
TRUE from a previous job,
it is also not possible to detect an edge change.
Sequence when resetting the DISA bit (COMMAND = W#16#0005)
The block resets the DISA bit in the control byte of the reader. The DONE parameter then
has the value TRUE and ACTIVE the value FALSE.
Note
Because the job completes in one CPU cycle, no edge change can be detected at the
ACTIVE parameter. If the DONE parameter already has the value TRUE from a previous job,
it is also not possible to detect an edge change.
Process interfacing via an automation system (PLC, PC)
9.4 Control with FB79
SIMATIC MV420 / SIMATIC MV440
Operating Instructions, 10/2015, C79000-G8976-C334-03 331
Sequence with the read jobs (COMMAND = W#16#0081 to W#16#008F)
Meaning of the COMMAND parameter with read jobs.
Value (W#16#...)
Meaning
0081
Output result string
0082 Output absolute quality characteristics
0083
Output absolute quality characteristics and output result string
0084
Output quality characteristics as classes
0085
Output quality characteristics as classes and output result string
0086
Output quality characteristics as classes and in absolute format
0087
Output quality characteristics as classes and in absolute format and output result string
0088
Output code position
0089
Output code position and result string
008A
Output code position and absolute quality characteristics
008B
Output code position and absolute quality characteristics and output result string
008C
Output code position and quality characteristics as classes
008D
Output code position and quality characteristics as classes and output result string
008E
Output code position and quality characteristics as classes and in absolute format
008F
Output code position and quality characteristics as classes and in absolute format and output result
string
The read jobs can only be sent when the reader is not in the RUN status (see also the status
table following the parameter table).
In contrast to all other jobs, the read jobs are "permanent jobs". This means that the ACTIVE
parameter retains the value TRUE even after fetching the current read result and/or the
current position and/or the quality characteristics from the reader.
You should therefore evaluate the DONE and ERROR parameters at each block call. If the
transfer was successful, DONE = TRUE is set. However, this only means that the transfer
between the reader and the FB (CPU) was error-free. To find out whether the DMC
evaluation was successful, you will need to evaluate bits READ (bit 3), MATCH (bit 4) and
N_OK (bit 5) in the status byte of the reader. You fill find the reaction of FB79 in the table
below. You should also evaluate ERRCODE to learn of warnings from the FB.
Reader
Target area RECV
The code could not be decoded.
FB79 enters the string set in "ReadErr".
The code was successfully decoded; how-
ever, you have not set any specifications.
FB79 enters the result string.
The code was successfully decoded but
does not match your specifications.
FB79 enters the string set in "MatchErr" or "FilterMsg" if the match or filter
function is selected in the parameter settings. If both of these functions are
selected, FB79 enters the string set in "MatchErr". For more detailed infor-
mation on "MatchErr" and "FilterMsg", refer to section 5.
The code was successfully decoded and
matches your specifications.
FB79 enters the result string.
Process the data entered in RECV before the next trigger; otherwise there is no guarantee of
the consistency of this data. At the same time, you should also evaluate the LENGTH
parameter because the receive area is written only up to this length.
Process interfacing via an automation system (PLC, PC)
9.4 Control with FB79
SIMATIC MV420 / SIMATIC MV440
332 Operating Instructions, 10/2015, C79000-G8976-C334-03
You can cancel a current read job by calling FB79 with COMMAND = W#16#0000.
If an error occurs when processing a job or when a current read job is canceled, ERROR =
TRUE is set. In this case, the ERRCODE parameter contains an ID indicating the cause of
the error. FB79 writes B#16#00 to the RECV target area.
Startup behavior
If an error occurs (ERRCODE <> DW#16#0000 0000), you need to initialize the FB once
with RESET=TRUE after calling an interrupt OB (for example OB82) and after a STOP-RUN
change on the CPU. Please include a suitable first call in your user program.
9.4.4.1
Error information of FB79
Error information
If an error has occurred, ERROR = TRUE is set. The precise cause of the error is then
displayed in ERRCODE. There are also warnings for which ERROR is set to FALSE. They
indicate error situations that do not cause the current job to be canceled.
If ERRCODE <> DW#16#0000 0000 following an FB call, you will need to call the FB again
with RESET=TRUE to reset the error information in the FB.
Note
By calling the FB with RESET=TRUE, you acknowledge only the error codes of the FB.
To
acknowledge errors of the reader (for example, transmit error), you need to set the RES bit
of the control byte (see assignment of the interfaces of the reader relevant for PROFINET IO
or error messages).
ERRCODE (DW#16#)
ERROR
Explanation
0000 0000
0
No error
0000 0001
0
New job inactive as long as old job is active.
0000 0002
0
Job cannot be canceled.
0001 0001
1
Illegal job number (COMMAND parameter).
0001 0002
1
The job cannot be processed in the current status of the reader.
0001 0003 1 During normal operation (not startup and no error has occurred), the FB was called
with RESET=TRUE or the user data interface is already occupied by a different FB
instance.
0001 0004
1
Send/receive user data interface not available or incomplete
0001 0005 1 The selected program number does not match the number specified at the FB, be-
cause control of the reader may have been taken over by the user interface.
0001 0006 1 Invalid program number (PARAM1 parameter). Program numbers 1 to 14 (save pro-
gram) and 0 to 15 (change program) are permitted.
0001 0007
1
Job canceled by user.
0001 0008 1 Program saving is not possible, because control of the reader may have been taken
over by the user interface.
Process interfacing via an automation system (PLC, PC)
9.4 Control with FB79
SIMATIC MV420 / SIMATIC MV440
Operating Instructions, 10/2015, C79000-G8976-C334-03 333
ERRCODE (DW#16#)
ERROR
Explanation
0001 0009
1
Illegal receive area. Only data blocks and the BYTE data type are permitted.
0001 8092 1 The receive area does not exist.
0001 8323
1
The receive area is too short.
0001 8325 1 Illegal data area.
0001 8330
1
The receive area is write-protected.
0002 0003
1
The selected program number is not saved.
0002 0004 1 Program cannot be saved. Position the code within the image or improve the image
quality.
0002 0005
1
Job canceled by reader.
Note
If you receive error information that differs from that listed above, this originates from SFC 20
"BLKMOV" that is used to enter the result string in the receive area. You will find its error
information in the online help of the system functions/function blocks.
Process interfacing via an automation system (PLC, PC)
9.5 Controlling the I/O interface "DI/DO"
SIMATIC MV420 / SIMATIC MV440
334 Operating Instructions, 10/2015, C79000-G8976-C334-03
9.5
Controlling the I/O interface "DI/DO"
9.5.1
Control signals
Note
Control via DI/DO can
only be used as selected in the parameter settings in the user
interface in "Connections
➜
Digital I/O
".
Input signals
Name
Function
DISA Disable: Disables manual keyboard input, program selection and program saving
via digital I/O, error acknowledgment, starting the reader.
SEL0
Select 0: Program selection bit 0
SEL1
Select 1: Program selection bit 1 (when TRN=0) / Save program (when TRN=1)
SEL2
Select 2: Program selection bit 2
SEL3
Select 3: Program selection bit 3
TRN
Train: Saves new program
TRG
Trigger: Processing starts on a positive edge.
RES
Reset: Reset error.
Note
The SEL0, SEL1, SEL2, SEL3, and TRN signals are effective only when DISA=1.
Process interfacing via an automation system (PLC, PC)
9.5 Controlling the I/O interface "DI/DO"
SIMATIC MV420 / SIMATIC MV440
Operating Instructions, 10/2015, C79000-G8976-C334-03 335
Output signals
Name
Function
LED
IN_OP In operation:
• 0 = error message is displayed.
• 1 = reader functioning, no error
Displayed by
LED1
or
LED2
according to your
parameter set-
tings
TRD Trained:
• In run:
– 0 = Selected program has not been saved.
– 1 = Selected program has been saved.
• When saving program (TRN=1):
– 0 = Save program active.
– 1 = acknowledgment signal (RDY=0)
RDY Ready:
• 0 = startup of reader or reader in stop
• 1 = reader in run
READ Processing result: Code was localized and decoded.
MATCH
Processing result: Code matches the trained code.
N_OK
Code was not legible.
9.5.2
Selecting modes
The following modes are available:
● Select program
● Save program
● Start processing
You will find a description of the modes under Operation of the reader.
Process interfacing via an automation system (PLC, PC)
9.5 Controlling the I/O interface "DI/DO"
SIMATIC MV420 / SIMATIC MV440
336 Operating Instructions, 10/2015, C79000-G8976-C334-03
Select program
To select a program, apply the relevant bit pattern at the inputs SEL0 to SEL3. You can
select programs 1 to 15. When you select program 0, the program last selected is retained.
Process interfacing via an automation system (PLC, PC)
9.5 Controlling the I/O interface "DI/DO"
SIMATIC MV420 / SIMATIC MV440
Operating Instructions, 10/2015, C79000-G8976-C334-03 337
Step
Input
Output
Description
1 DISA=1
TRN=0
TRG=0
RES=0
Program selection is prepared.
DISA must have the value 1. No edge change is necessary.
2 SEL0=1
SEL1=1
SEL2=0
SEL3=1
Select program, for example, program 11.
3 TRD=0
RDY=0
Program selection is started.
5 TRD=1
RDY=1
Program change is completed after approximately 150 ms to 15 s.
Note
If the selected program is not
saved, TRD and RDY will retain the value 0.
Process interfacing via an automation system (PLC, PC)
9.5 Controlling the I/O interface "DI/DO"
SIMATIC MV420 / SIMATIC MV440
338 Operating Instructions, 10/2015, C79000-G8976-C334-03
Save program
The diagram below shows the program saving procedure, using program 11 as an example.
Note that the trigger signal must be present for at least 5 ms.
Process interfacing via an automation system (PLC, PC)
9.5 Controlling the I/O interface "DI/DO"
SIMATIC MV420 / SIMATIC MV440
Operating Instructions, 10/2015, C79000-G8976-C334-03 339
Note
After an error has occurr
ed, you will need to set the signals SEL0 to SEL3 and the TRN
signal to 0 and then reset the error with the RES signal. The DISA signal must have the
value 1 (no edge change).
Description of the program saving procedure
Step
Input
Output
Description
1 DISA=1
Apply for at least 100 ms:
SEL0 = 1
SEL1 = 1
SEL2 = 0
SEL3 = 1
Disable keyboard control. DISA must have the
value 1. No edge change is necessary.
Select program to be saved, for example code 11.
2 TRN = 1
SEL0, SEL1, SEL2, SEL3
= 0
Start program saving
TRD=0
RDY=0
TRD signal changes to FALSE
RDY signal changes to FALSE
3 Wait at least 200 ms
SEL1=1
Feed in object with data matrix code.
Save program
Apply for at least 5 ms:
TRG=1
Trigger signal
4
TRD = 1
Selected program has been saved.
SEL1=0
Reset signals.
5
TRN = 0
Exit program saving.
TRD = 0
TRD signal changes to FALSE for 150 ms.
TRD = 1
TRD signal changes to TRUE.
RDY=1
Program saving is exited.
Start processing
Processing starts immediately on completion of the program saving.
Step
Input
Output
Description
1
You select a program, for example, program 11.
2
READ
MATCH
N_OK
The outputs are set as follows depending on the processing result:
Code was localized and decoded.
Code matches the trained code.
Code was not legible.
Process interfacing via an automation system (PLC, PC)
9.6 Control via TCP/IP and RS-232
SIMATIC MV420 / SIMATIC MV440
340 Operating Instructions, 10/2015, C79000-G8976-C334-03
9.6
Control via TCP/IP and RS-232
9.6.1
Overview
You can control the reader using a TCP/IP or RS-232 connection.
Note
Upload process not yet completed: Control commands are discarded
Until the reader completes the restart, all control commands are discarded.
•
To find out whether or not the reader is ready for operation, you will need to query the
status (Page 344) until the reader sends a response frame.
This applies even when you use a TCP/IP connection. In this case, an exi
sting TCP/IP
connection does not mean that the reader has already completed the restart.
Requirement
To trigger a command via TCP/IP or RS-232, the specific transport connection must be
configured as a trigger source in the user interface. The appropriate transport connection
must be configured as a source for the controller for all other commands
(Connections → Integration → Connection).
When you use the TCP/IP transport connection, the reader is either the client or server
(Connections → Interfaces → TCP).
● As client, the reader actively establishes the connection to the partner. In this case, the
partner must be the server and accept an incoming connection at the configured port
(Connections → Ports → TCP).
● As server, the reader accepts an incoming connection of a client at the configured port
(Connections → Ports → TCP).
Note
Restriction with identical transport connection for trigger and control
The following restriction applies when an identical transport connection is configured as the
source for trigger and control in the user interface (Connections
→ Integration → Connection):
•
When "M" is configured as trigger string, the remaining control commands can no longer
be used.
•
When "MATCH" is configured as trigger text, the command to overwrite the match strings
can no longer be used.
You can use this connection for:
● Triggering
● Overwriting the match string of the current program (non-persistent)
● Setting and resetting the DISA bit
Process interfacing via an automation system (PLC, PC)
9.6 Control via TCP/IP and RS-232
SIMATIC MV420 / SIMATIC MV440
Operating Instructions, 10/2015, C79000-G8976-C334-03 341
● Changing the program
● Saving programs
● Querying the status of the reader and acknowledging group errors
● Writing a trigger-synchronized match string (XMATCH)
● Setting "Digital out"
A control command is triggered in each case by the corresponding string.
Overview of all commands with a string
Command
String
Trigger Identical to the configured string in the user inter-
face
Write match string
See "Write match string" (Page 341)
Set DISA bit
MDIH
Reset DISA bit MDIL
Query status
MGST
Program change (select program number)
MR<program number>
Save program with internal trigger
MI<program number>
Save program with external trigger
MT<program number>
Reset command
MRES
XMATCH command See "XMATCH command (writing a trigger-
synchronized match string)" (Page 349) and
"XMATCH user data (without header)"
(Page 350).
Set digital out
MO<p1><p2><p3><p4><p5><p6>
9.6.2
Trigger
When the reader receives a character string that is identical to the configured character
string in the user interface support, it triggers image acquisition and processing.
9.6.3
Write match string
Note
Sent match string takes effect immediately
A sent
match string takes effect immediately. The sent match string is not synchronized with
the trigger signal or the processing of buffered image acquisition.
•
Therefore, ensure that the match string is sent when no image acquisition is running.
Process interfacing via an automation system (PLC, PC)
9.6 Control via TCP/IP and RS-232
SIMATIC MV420 / SIMATIC MV440
342 Operating Instructions, 10/2015, C79000-G8976-C334-03
Requirements for matching with OCR
Sending a match string with OCR
Sending a match string is only possible if, in "2. Filter", the source "Filter with match text" or
"Character type at pos." is configured as the string specification.
The match string is then either a defined string or a syntax corresponding to "Character type
at pos.".
Identical formatting of the sent match string
The match string that is sent must be identical to the input made in interface support.
Permitted non-printable special characters must be sent as one character. A line break (\n)
for example as '\n' (ASCII value 0x0D) and not as '\''n' (ASCII values 0x2F and 0x6E).
Requirement for matching with 1D/2D codes
For 1D/2D codes all match options ("All", "Position", "ID", "GS1") are supported. The match
string that is sent must be formatted so that the information required for the comparison can
be extracted.
The following command must be sent to overwrite the match string:
Structure / description
Character no.
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
…
n-1
n
Meaning
Command identifier More significant byte
of the length m of the
following match
string
Less significant byte
of the length m of the
following match
string
New match string with a
length m
Val-
ue/character
M A T C H 0x00-0xFF 0x00-0xFF All printable characters
● The characters 5 and 6 are interpreted as an unsigned 16-bit word and form the overall
length of the new match string starting at character 7.
● It is only possible to overwrite a match string if the reader is in processing mode and
matching was activated during program saving for the current program.
● When the new match string is saved, this is not persistent: If the reader exits processing
mode, for example by changing to STOP mode or to the group error status, the
overwritten match string is discarded. This also applies to a program change.
● The characters of the command must be sent as a contiguous command. If the spacing
between the individual characters is too long, reception of the new match string is
aborted.
Note
If the match string cannot be overwritten, an entry is made in the diagnostic data.
Process interfacing via an automation system (PLC, PC)
9.6 Control via TCP/IP and RS-232
SIMATIC MV420 / SIMATIC MV440
Operating Instructions, 10/2015, C79000-G8976-C334-03 343
9.6.4
Set DISA bit
This command sets the DISA bit.
Character string
"
MDIH
" (
M
achine command set
DI
sable signal
H
igh)
9.6.5
Reset DISA bit
This command resets the DISA bit.
Character string
"
MDIL
" (
M
achine command set
DI
sable signal
L
ow)
Process interfacing via an automation system (PLC, PC)
9.6 Control via TCP/IP and RS-232
SIMATIC MV420 / SIMATIC MV440
344 Operating Instructions, 10/2015, C79000-G8976-C334-03
9.6.6
Query status
This command returns the status byte, the current program number and an error number in
the response string.
Character string
"MGST" (
M
achine command
G
et
ST
ate)
Response string
RGST
<statusbyte><currentprogramnumber><errornumber><end identifier>" (
R
eply Get
ST
ate)
● <status byte> - Non-displayable ASCII character that corresponds to the status byte (see
section "Assignment of the interfaces relevant to PROFINET IO (Page 315)").
● <currentprogramnumber> - Currently selected program number.
– Two displayable ASCII characters with value "0" to "9".
– Valid range of values: 00 to 15.
● <error no> - Error code of the currently pending error (see section "Error messages
(Page 376)").
– Coding corresponding to <current program number>
– No error pending if the value is 00.
● <end identifier> - Non-displayable ASCII character with the value 0x04.
Process interfacing via an automation system (PLC, PC)
9.6 Control via TCP/IP and RS-232
SIMATIC MV420 / SIMATIC MV440
Operating Instructions, 10/2015, C79000-G8976-C334-03 345
9.6.7
Select program number
This command changes the program or switches to processing mode with the specified
program number, if one exists.
Character string
"
MR
<program number>" (
M
achine command
R
un program <program number>)
<program number>-Number of the program saved.
● Two displayable ASCII characters with value "0" to "9".
● Valid range of values: 00 to 15.
This command returns no response string.
● Using the "Query status" command, you then check if the program change has been
successful. If, for example, program number 5 is selected and the status is queried, the
string "MR05MGST" can be sent.
● Using <statusbyte> and <currentcodenumber>, you can check whether the reader is in
processing mode with the new program number.
If the DISA bit is not set already, the reader will set it automatically to save the program and
then reset it.
Process interfacing via an automation system (PLC, PC)
9.6 Control via TCP/IP and RS-232
SIMATIC MV420 / SIMATIC MV440
346 Operating Instructions, 10/2015, C79000-G8976-C334-03
9.6.8
Save program with internal trigger
Note
This command is only possible when the identical transport connection is configured as the
trigger and the c
ontrol source.
This command starts the program saving procedure and internally generates a trigger for
image acquisition. The code is saved with the specified number.
● If a program has already been saved with this number and no error occurred during the
save procedure, this program will be overwritten.
● If the save procedure is successful, the reader then goes into processing mode with the
appropriate program number.
Character string
MI
<program number>" (
M
achine command
I
mmediate store code <program number>)
<program number>-Number of the program saved.
● Two printable ASCII characters with the value "0" to "9".
● Valid range of values: 01 to 5.
This command returns no response string.
● Using the "Query status" command you then check if the save procedure was successful.
If, for example, program number 5 is selected and the status is then queried, the string
"MI05MGST" can be sent.
● Using <status byte>, <current program number> and <error number>, check:
– Whether the reader has successfully stored the program and is in processing mode.
– Or whether an error has occurred.
If the DISA bit is not set already, the reader will set it automatically to save the program and
then reset it.
Process interfacing via an automation system (PLC, PC)
9.6 Control via TCP/IP and RS-232
SIMATIC MV420 / SIMATIC MV440
Operating Instructions, 10/2015, C79000-G8976-C334-03 347
9.6.9
Save program with external trigger
Note
Set DISA bit beforehand
In order to execut
e this command, the DISA bit must be set beforehand.
1. This command starts the program saving procedure.
2. Subsequently, a trigger signal is sent/set separately at the earliest after receipt of the
response string.
The program is saved with the specified number.
● If a program has already been saved with this number and no error occurred during the
save procedure, this program will be overwritten.
● If the save procedure is successful, the reader then goes into processing mode with the
new program number.
Character string
MT
<program number>" (
M
achine command s
T
ore code <program number>)
<program number>-Number of the program saved.
● Two printable ASCII characters with the value "0" to "9".
● Valid range of values: 01 to 5.
Response string
RTRDY
<end identifier>" (
R
eply s
T
ore program
R
ea
DY
)
<end identifier> - Non-displayable ASCII characters with the value 0x04.
After this response string is received, a trigger can be sent via an external source.
● If this response string is not sent, either the DISA bit has not been set or <program no> is
outside the valid range.
● If "RTRDY" is received and the trigger is sent, the status must be queried cyclically with
"MGST". The query is used to check whether the save procedure is completed.
● When the save procedure is completed, the reader will be in processing mode with
<program no>.
● If the reader is not in processing mode and there is no error state, the save procedure is
not finished or it is still waiting for the trigger signal.
Once the save procedure is completed, the DISA bit is reset.
The save procedure can be canceled with Reset command (Page 348) (upon receipt of
"RTRDY").
Process interfacing via an automation system (PLC, PC)
9.6 Control via TCP/IP and RS-232
SIMATIC MV420 / SIMATIC MV440
348 Operating Instructions, 10/2015, C79000-G8976-C334-03
Example string sequence
Send
MDIH
MGST
MT05
T
...
MGST
Receive
RGST…
RTRDY
...
RGST…
Explana-
tion
Set DISA
bit.
Status query
If no error is pending,
start the save proce-
dure.
Start the
save pro-
cedure.
Wait for
acknowl-
edgement.
Trigger
Here, with
the default
trigger
text,
whereby
trigger
source =
control
source.
Trigger
also pos-
sible via
DI/DO, for
example.
Cyclic status query; recommended
time interval: 1 s.
• If the reader is in processing
mode with program number 05,
the save procedure has been
successful.
• A pending error means that the
program could not be saved
(e.g. no code in the image).
•
If the reader is not in processing
mode and there is no group er-
ror, the save procedure is not
yet finished.
9.6.10
Reset command
This command acknowledges an error or cancels "Save program with external trigger".
Character string
"
MRES
" (
M
achine command
RES
et)
This command returns no response string.
● Send "MRESMGST" to get acknowledgment.
If "Save program with external trigger" is cancelled with the reset command, the reader will
briefly be in an error state (error in sequence). The error state is automatically exited or
acknowledged.
Process interfacing via an automation system (PLC, PC)
9.6 Control via TCP/IP and RS-232
SIMATIC MV420 / SIMATIC MV440
Operating Instructions, 10/2015, C79000-G8976-C334-03 349
9.6.11
Writing a trigger-synchronized match string (XMATCH)
Note
Availability of XMATCH
The XMATCH function is not available for SIMATIC MV420 SR
-B.
Requirements for matching with OCR
Sending a match string with OCR
A match string can only be sent:
● If the source "Filter with match text" is configured as the string specification for the
corresponding step (OCR type) under "Filter".
● If the source "Character type at pos." is configured as the string specification for the
corresponding step (OCR type) under "Filter".
The match string is therefore either a defined string or a corresponding "Character type at
pos." syntax.
Identical formatting of the sent match string
The match string that is sent must be identical to the input made in interface support.
Permitted non-printable special characters must be sent as one character. A line break (\n)
for example as '\n' (ASCII value 0x0D) and not as '\''n' (ASCII values 0x2F and 0x6E).
Requirement for matching with 1D/2D codes
For 1D/2D codes all match options ("All", "Position", "ID", "GS1") are supported. The match
string that is sent must be formatted so that the information required for the comparison can
be extracted.
Note
GS1 start symbol "]d2" is optional
For match strings used for the match option "GS1", the GS1 start symbol "]d2" is optional.
Character string
To send an XMATCH command, the string "XMATCH" must be sent as the header followed
by the XMATCH user data.
Process interfacing via an automation system (PLC, PC)
9.6 Control via TCP/IP and RS-232
SIMATIC MV420 / SIMATIC MV440
350 Operating Instructions, 10/2015, C79000-G8976-C334-03
9.6.12
XMATCH user data (without header)
Note
Only parts of new program structure can be used
The XMATCH frame reflects the program structure of
firmware versions V4 and lower
(1D/2D code + up to 5 OCR steps).
You cannot make full use of the new program structure with the XMATCH frame.
Backward compatibility with firmware version V4
XML import enables compatible mapping. Following an XML import or your programs or
codes, firmware version V4, you can continue to use the identical XMATCH frames.
The compatibility image as follows:
● Previous code index match strings are always assigned to step 1.
● OCR ROI 1 to 5 are mapped to steps 2 to 6.
Logical structure of the user data
The logical structure of an XMATCH frame is outlined in the table:
Trigger
ID
Perma-
nent
flag
Code
No
Cnt n
Code
No
Code
Idx
Cnt c
Code
Idx
String
length cl
String
length
cm
ROI ID
Cnt r
ROI ID
String
length rl
String
rm
c times
t times
Trigger ID and permanent flag
Based on the trigger ID, all match strings of this frame are assigned to a specific trigger
signal.
● If the permanent flag is set in this frame, the match strings are a valid as of this trigger ID.
● If the permanent flag is set in this frame and the trigger ID is "0", the match strings are
valid as of the next trigger.
The trigger ID is assigned to the value of the internal trigger counter of the reader.
The internal trigger counter is set to 1:
● When processing mode starts up
● When there is a program change
● After an error (IN_OP not set)
Following this, the internal trigger counter is incremented by 1 following each trigger.
When the counter reaches the value 32767, it continues with 1 (not 0). The value 0 is
reserved to accept match strings permanently as of the next trigger.
Process interfacing via an automation system (PLC, PC)
9.6 Control via TCP/IP and RS-232
SIMATIC MV420 / SIMATIC MV440
Operating Instructions, 10/2015, C79000-G8976-C334-03 351
Code No Cnt n and Code No
Code No Cnt n must always be 1. Code no. must match the code number that is in
processing mode.
Code Idx Cnt c
● With an application in which no 1D/2D codes are read, Code Idx Cnt = 0 must be set.
● If code Idx Cnt ≠ 0, this value matches the number of code match strings in the frame;
with a non-multicode application, this value is 1. Depending on the code Idx Cnt c, then
code Idx , string length cl and the string follow c times.
Code Idx, String length cl and String cm
Code Idx is the index of the code to which the new match string will be assigned. String
length cl corresponds to the length of the following match string cm.
ROI ID Cnt r
● With an application in which no plain text is read (OCR), ROI ID Cnt r = 0 must be set.
● If ROI ID Cnt r ≠ 0, this value corresponds to the number of OCR ROI match strings in the
frame. Depending on ROI ID Cnt r, ROI ID, String length rl and String rm follow r times in
the frame.
ROI ID, String length rl and String rm:
● ROI ID corresponds to the number of the OCR ROI match strings to be assigned to the
new match string.
● String length rl corresponds to the length of the following match string rm.
Detailed structure of the user data
Note
Data type BYTE and WORD
•
BYTE: 8 bits
•
WORD: 16 bits, in Big Endian format ("S7 format")
Process interfacing via an automation system (PLC, PC)
9.6 Control via TCP/IP and RS-232
SIMATIC MV420 / SIMATIC MV440
352 Operating Instructions, 10/2015, C79000-G8976-C334-03
Meaning
Data type
Value range
Comment
Total length in bytes (exclud-
ing the length itself = starting
at trigger ID)
WORD max. 32768 Area over which the check-
sum is formed.
Trigger ID WORD 1 ... 32767
Flags BYTE Bit 0: Permanent flag
Bit 1 to 7: Reserved, must be 0
Code No Cnt n
BYTE
1
Code No
BYTE
1 ... 14
Code Idx Cnt c BYTE SIMATIC MV440 UR: 0 ... 150
All other readers: 0 ... 50
Code Idx BYTE SIMATIC MV440 UR:
1 ... 150
All other readers:
1 ... 50
c times
String length cl
WORD
1 ... 3001
String cm cl BYTEs Any
ASCII characters
ROI ID Cnt r
BYTE
0 ... 5
ROI ID
BYTE
1 ... 5
t times
String length rl
WORD
1 ... 255
String rm rl BYTEs Any
ASCII characters
XOR checksum BYTE 0 ... 255 Checksum = 0 means no
checksum
Checksum
The user data contains a checksum byte whose use is recommended when using the RS-
232 interface.
● If the checksum is not used and will not be checked by the reader, the checksum byte
must have the value 0.
● To calculate the checksum, all bytes as of the total length (inclusive) up to the byte of the
checksum (exclusive) are XORed.
Bad frames
If an XMATCH frame with an incorrect structure is received, the error is logged in the
diagnostics data records as a temporary error (transient error) and the frame is discarded.
● Bad structure: For example String length cl > 3 001 characters or checksum incorrect.
Even with a correct frame structure, the XMATCH command can be invalid. The error is also
logged in the diagnostics data records as a temporary error (Page 389).
Process interfacing via an automation system (PLC, PC)
9.6 Control via TCP/IP and RS-232
SIMATIC MV420 / SIMATIC MV440
Operating Instructions, 10/2015, C79000-G8976-C334-03 353
Examples of XMATCH user data
Application: 1D/2D code reading
● Current program number is "5".
● new match string for trigger number 42
● No OCR
● No multicode
Total length
19
Trigger ID
42
Flags
0
Code No Cnt
1
Code No 5
Code Idx Cnt
1
Code Idx
1
String length
8
String
"SN012345"
ROI ID Cnt
0
XOR checksum
0
Application: 1D/2D code reading + OCR
● Current program number is "5".
● New 1D/2D code match string and new match string for OCR ROI 1 and 2 for trigger
number 42
● No multicode
Total length
33
Trigger ID
42
Flags
0
Code No Cnt
1
Code No
5
Code Idx Cnt
1
Code Idx
1
String length
8
String
"SN012345"
ROI ID Cnt 2
ROI ID
1
String length
2
String
"SN"
ROI ID
2
String length
6
Process interfacing via an automation system (PLC, PC)
9.6 Control via TCP/IP and RS-232
SIMATIC MV420 / SIMATIC MV440
354 Operating Instructions, 10/2015, C79000-G8976-C334-03
String
"012345"
XOR checksum
0
Application: Evaluate two 1D/2D codes per image (multicode)
● Current program number is "5".
● New 1D/2D code match string for code index 1 and 2 for trigger number 42
● No OCR
Total length
30
Trigger ID 42
Flags
0
Code No Cnt
1
Code No
5
Code Idx Cnt
2
Code Idx
1
String length
8
String
"SN012345"
Code Idx
2
String length
8
String
"SN612345"
ROI ID Cnt
0
XOR checksum
0
9.6.13
Set digital out
Note
Availability of "Digital Out"
The "Digital out" function is not available for SIMATIC MV420 SR
-B.
Writing command data
● With this command, the four logical signals "EXT_1", "EXT_2", "EXT_3" and "EXT_4" can
be set and linked to other logical signals. These signals can only be set via an automation
system.
● These signals can also be applied to the available digital output pins using the user
interface.
● Receipt of this command is logged in the diagnostics data records.
Process interfacing via an automation system (PLC, PC)
9.6 Control via TCP/IP and RS-232
SIMATIC MV420 / SIMATIC MV440
Operating Instructions, 10/2015, C79000-G8976-C334-03 355
String "MO
<p1><p2><p3><p4><p5><p6
>"
(
M
achine command set digital
o
ut)
Parameter
Meaning
p1 Number of the logical external signal.
• Two displayable ASCII characters with value "1" to "4"
– Corresponds to "EXT_1", "EXT_2", "EXT_3" and "EXT_4"
p2 Level of the signal
• ASCII characters with the value "0" to "2".
– 0: Set level statically to "low".
– 1: Set level statically to "high".
– 2: Set level for configured pulse time to "high".
p3 Link type
• ASCII characters with the value "1" to "7"
– 1: Logical "OR"
– 2: Logical "AND"
– 3: Logical "Exclusive OR"
– 4: no link
– 5: Logical "OR not"
– 6: Logical "AND not"
– 7: Logical "Exclusive OR not"
p4 Logical signal linked to.
If p3 = "4", the parameter has no significance.
• ASCII characters with the value "0" to "5"
– 0: Logical signal "IN_OP"
– 1: Logical signal "TRD"
– 2: Logical signal "RDY"
– 3: Logical signal "READ"
– 4: Logical signal "MATCH"
– 5: Logical signal "NOK"
p5 and p6
Reserved, must be "0" to retain upwards compatibility.
Process interfacing via an automation system (PLC, PC)
9.7 Scanner portal application
SIMATIC MV420 / SIMATIC MV440
356 Operating Instructions, 10/2015, C79000-G8976-C334-03
9.7
Scanner portal application
Introduction
The section "Scanner Portal application" explains how you can implement a scanner portal
application with several readers.
In a scanner portal application, there is a large field of view that is covered by several
individual readers. Here, the areas of the field of view of the readers overlap. To prevent the
same code being output more than once, the individual readers (slaves) send their read
result to a master reader. The master reader synchronizes the individual results and
prevents the output of multiple read results. The master reader itself is also a slave that
searches for 1D/2D codes in the field of view.
Restrictions of the scanner portal application
The scanner portal application is subject to the following restrictions:
● All readers must operate in the untriggered image acquisition mode "Autotrigger".
● If several different 1D/2D codes with identical contents are read one after the other, the
content is output only once.
● The master reader can only output the synchronized result via the TCP interface.
● The formatting options of the result string of the master camera are restricted.
● A maximum of five readers (4 slaves, and 1 master) are supported.
● If a slave reader is in an error state, the master reader does not change to an error state.
● The master reader does not monitor the number of connected slave readers.
● Maximum results of 2048 characters including a formatting instruction required for
synchronization can be synchronized.
Process interfacing via an automation system (PLC, PC)
9.7 Scanner portal application
SIMATIC MV420 / SIMATIC MV440
Operating Instructions, 10/2015, C79000-G8976-C334-03 357
9.7.1
Configuration
Slave and master
Both on the slave readers and on the master, you need to make the following settings in the
user interface.
Image acquisition, "Control" tab
● To control the image acquisition, select the "Auto trigger" mode (without "Initial trigger").
"Recognize double reads" must be set to 1 in this case.
The acquisition interval must be adequately high so that 1D/2D codes can be read in the
image. The interval must be identical on all slave and master devices.
Process interfacing via an automation system (PLC, PC)
9.7 Scanner portal application
SIMATIC MV420 / SIMATIC MV440
358 Operating Instructions, 10/2015, C79000-G8976-C334-03
Connections/integration
● Under "Connection", "integration". select TCP as "String".
Process interfacing via an automation system (PLC, PC)
9.7 Scanner portal application
SIMATIC MV420 / SIMATIC MV440
Operating Instructions, 10/2015, C79000-G8976-C334-03 359
Programs - Overall result
● The program format string on all readers must be "\02[CamId]\03%s\04".
– [CamId] can be selected freely and is used to identify the reader that read the 1D/2D
code in the field of view.
– "\02\03%s\04" is also valid if no identification of the reader is required when the result
is output.
Slave
In addition to the settings made in the section "Slaves and master", you also need to make
the following settings on all the slave readers.
Connections/interfaces: TCP
● IP Address: IP address of the master reader
● port: 666
● Time limit: 3 s
Connections/integration
● In the "Connection monitoring" group, the TCP idling string must be: "\04".
Process interfacing via an automation system (PLC, PC)
9.7 Scanner portal application
SIMATIC MV420 / SIMATIC MV440
360 Operating Instructions, 10/2015, C79000-G8976-C334-03
Options/Extras
● Disable the "Master reader" check box in the "Scanner portal" group.
Master
You also need to make the following additional settings on the master reader.
Connections/interfaces: TCP
● IP Address: IP address of the TCP partner of the master reader
● port: Port number of the TCP partner of the master reader
Options/Extras
● Enable the "Master reader" check box in the "Scanner portal" group.
Process interfacing via an automation system (PLC, PC)
9.8 Remote client
SIMATIC MV420 / SIMATIC MV440
Operating Instructions, 10/2015, C79000-G8976-C334-03 361
9.7.2
Output of the synchronized read result by the master reader
Output via the TCP interface
The master reader synchronizes the results of the slave readers and outputs the
synchronized result via the TCP interface. The result string of the slave reader that first
reads the 1D/2D code is output. To compare the 1D/2D codes read, the master device
compares the string between "\03" and "\04". The entire result string is output although "\02",
"\03" and "\04" are first removed.
If a slave reader sends the result string "\02Slave01:\03DMC123\04" and read the"DMC123"
code first, the master reader sends the "Slave01:DMC123" string to its TCP partner.
9.8
Remote client
Introduction
The remote client interface is an HTTP-based interface. The remote client can send HTTP
requests to the reader to bring about a certain functionality. To do this, an IP address
corresponding to the address of the client must be configured in the user interface. The
reader only processes HTTP requests if the sender has this IP address.
9.8.1
XML backup and XML restore
Note
Do not control through the control interface / only when the DISA bit is not set
You must make sure with the automation process that when the functions "XML
Backup" and
"XML
Restore" are executed there is no control through the control interface. Otherwise, the
"XML Backup" and "XML Restore" functions cannot be executed. Especially, the DISA bit
must not be set.
Note
Backing up the diagnostic images before execution of the "XML Backup" and "XML Restore"
functions
When you run the "XML
Backup" und "XML Restore" functions, any diagnostic images in the
memory of the reader are deleted.
•
If required, save the diagnostic images before you execute one of these functions.
Process interfacing via an automation system (PLC, PC)
9.8 Remote client
SIMATIC MV420 / SIMATIC MV440
362 Operating Instructions, 10/2015, C79000-G8976-C334-03
Note
Keep the XML backup file in a safe place
The XML backup file contains sensible data (password hash):
•
For security reasons, keep the XML backup file in a safe place.
To run an XML Backup and an XML Restore, there is a separate HTTP request for each.
After receiving the relevant HTTP request, the following steps are performed first in both
cases assuming that the preconditions are met:
1. The connection to the user interface is terminated.
If the user interface is opened while the HTTP request is being processed by the reader,
this is only possible in "READ ONLY mode".
2. The reader changes to the "Stop" mode.
3. The IN_OP bit is et to "0".
9.8.1.1
XML backup
Once the reader has sent the HTTP response, the IN_OP bit is set and access through the
user interface is permitted again.
Request
● URI: http://<IP address of the reader>/xml/backup.cgi e.g.
http://192.168.0.42/xml/backup.cgi
● HTTP method: GET
Response
Note
Parameter "<filename>"
The filename is made up of the reader name and the firmware version.
● HTTP status code 200 (OK)
● Content type: text/xml; name="<filename>.xml"
● Content disposition: attachment; filename="<filename>.xml"
Data: The data corresponds to the file content of an xml file that is used to restore the
settings and programs.
Process interfacing via an automation system (PLC, PC)
9.8 Remote client
SIMATIC MV420 / SIMATIC MV440
Operating Instructions, 10/2015, C79000-G8976-C334-03 363
Pseudocode example
C# Pseudocode XML Backup
// Create new xml file
FileStream newXml = File.Open("C:\\mv400para.xml", FileMode.Create);
// Create http request
HttpWebRequest myRequest =
(HttpWebRequest)WebRequest.Create("http://192.168.0.42/xml/backup.cgi");
myRequest.Method = "GET";
myRequest.ContentLength = 0;
try
{
// Get response
HttpWebResponse myHttpWebResponse = (HttpWebResponse)myRequest.GetResponse();
// Get response stream
Stream streamResponse = myHttpWebResponse.GetResponseStream();
// Read stream and write to file (stream == xml data)
byte[] readBuffer = new byte[256];
int count = streamResponse.Read(readBuffer, 0, readBuffer.GetLength(0));
while (count > 0)
{
newXml.Write(readBuffer, 0, count);
count = streamResponse.Read(readBuffer, 0, readBuffer.GetLength(0));
}
Console.WriteLine("XML backup succeeded.");
}
catch (System.Net.WebException we)
{
Console.WriteLine("NO PERMISSION FOR XML BACKUP!");
}
Process interfacing via an automation system (PLC, PC)
9.8 Remote client
SIMATIC MV420 / SIMATIC MV440
364 Operating Instructions, 10/2015, C79000-G8976-C334-03
9.8.1.2
XML restore
Note
Frequent use of XML restore can reduce the working life of the reader
With each XML restore, there are write operations to the flash memory. If the XML restore
function is used frequently, this can reduce the working life of the reader.
Disable import of the remote client IP address
If the remote client IP address currently set on the reader does not correspond with the IP
address of the imported XML restore file:
Remote client connection and data transfer are no longer possible.
● Prevent the import of the remote client IP address by disabling in the XML restore file the
"importremoteclientip" using the "form-data" datum.
The reader can still be connected to the remote client: Data transfer takes place without
problems.
Request
● URI: http://<IP address of the reader>/xml/restore.cgi e.g.
http://192.168.0.42/xml/restore.cgi
● HTTP method: POST
● Content Type: "multipart/form-data; boundary=[REMOTEXMLUPLOADPARA]\r\n"
POST data
Note
Notation
<xmlDoc>
Corresponds to the string with the content of a backup XML file.
<on|off>
•
If the parameter group is to be imported: Use the string "on"
•
If the parameter group is not to be imported:
Use the string "
off
".
"[REMOTEXMLUPLOADPARA]
Content-Disposition: form-data; name="xmlfile"
Content-Type: text/xml
<xmlFile>
[REMOTEXMLUPLOADPARA]
Content-Disposition: form-data; name="importtcp"
Process interfacing via an automation system (PLC, PC)
9.8 Remote client
SIMATIC MV420 / SIMATIC MV440
Operating Instructions, 10/2015, C79000-G8976-C334-03 365
<on|off>
[REMOTEXMLUPLOADPARA]
Content-Disposition: form-data; name="importdp"
<on|off>
[REMOTEXMLUPLOADPARA]
Content-Disposition: form-data; name="importserial"
<on|off>
[REMOTEXMLUPLOADPARA]
Content-Disposition: form-data; name="importsec"
<on|off>
[REMOTEXMLUPLOADPARA]
Content-Disposition: form-data; name="importcodes"
<on|off>
[REMOTEXMLUPLOADPARA]
Content-Disposition: form-data; name="importcustomgui"
<on|off>
[REMOTEXMLUPLOADPARA]
Content-Disposition: form-data; name="importremoteclientip"
<on|off>
[REMOTEXMLUPLOADPARA]
"
Response
● HTTP status code 200 (OK)
● Data:
– "2" -> XML upload and import were only partially successful.
The reader restarts. To obtain an error analysis, the XML import must be repeated
through the user interface.
– "1" -> XML upload and import was only successful.
The reader restarts.
– "0" -> Error importing.
To obtain an error analysis, the XML import must be repeated through the user
interface. The IN_OP bit is set and access through the user interface is permitted
again.
Pseudocode example
C# Pseudocode XML Restore
byte[] buffer;
Stream newStream;
string xmlDoc = File.ReadAllText("C:\\MV400_para.xml");
ASCIIEncoding encoding = new ASCIIEncoding();
Process interfacing via an automation system (PLC, PC)
9.8 Remote client
SIMATIC MV420 / SIMATIC MV440
366 Operating Instructions, 10/2015, C79000-G8976-C334-03
// Prepare POST data: Restore everything except the Remote Client's IP
string postData =
"[REMOTEXMLUPLOADPARA]\r\nContent-Disposition: form-data;
name=\"xmlfile\"\r\nContent-Type: text/xml\r\n\r\n" + xmlDoc + "\r\n" +
// set value to off if TCP settings shall not be imported
"[REMOTEXMLUPLOADPARA]\r\nContent-Disposition: form-data;
name=\"importtcp\"\r\n\r\non\r\n" +
// set value to off if PROFINET settings shall not be imported
"[REMOTEXMLUPLOADPARA]\r\nContent-Disposition: form-data;
name=\"importdp\"\r\n\r\non\r\n" +
// set value to off if serial communication settings shall not be imported
"[REMOTEXMLUPLOADPARA]\r\nContent-Disposition: form-data;
name=\"importserial\"\r\n\r\non\r\n" +
// set value to off if security settings shall not be imported
"[REMOTEXMLUPLOADPARA]\r\nContent-Disposition: form-data;
name=\"importsec\"\r\n\r\non\r\n" +
// set value to off if programs, calibrations, fonts and models shall not be imported
"[REMOTEXMLUPLOADPARA]\r\nContent-Disposition: form-data;
name=\"importcodes\"\r\n\r\non\r\n" +
// set value to off if Custom GUI shall not be imported
"[REMOTEXMLUPLOADPARA]\r\nContent-Disposition: form-data;
name=\"importcustomgui\"\r\n\r\non\r\n" +
// set value to on if the Remote Client's IP shall be imported (off recommended)
"[REMOTEXMLUPLOADPARA]\r\nContent-Disposition: form-data;
name=\"importremoteclientip\"\r\n\r\noff\r\n" +
"[REMOTEXMLUPLOADPARA]\r\n";
buffer = encoding.GetBytes(postData);
// Create http request
HttpWebRequest myRequest =
(HttpWebRequest)WebRequest.Create("http://192.168.0.42/xml/restore.cgi");
myRequest.Method = "POST";
myRequest.ContentType = "multipart/form-data; boundary=[REMOTEXMLUPLOADPARA]\r\n";
myRequest.ContentLength = buffer.Length;
// Send the data.
newStream = myRequest.GetRequestStream();
newStream.Write(buffer, 0, buffer.Length);
// Close stream
newStream.Close();
try
{
// Get response
HttpWebResponse myHttpWebResponse = (HttpWebResponse)myRequest.GetResponse();
// Get response data
int response = myHttpWebResponse.GetResponseStream().ReadByte();
if (response != -1)
{
Char value = (Char)response;
if (value.Equals('1'))
Console.WriteLine("XML restore succeeded, device is restarting...");
else if (value.Equals('2'))
Process interfacing via an automation system (PLC, PC)
9.8 Remote client
SIMATIC MV420 / SIMATIC MV440
Operating Instructions, 10/2015, C79000-G8976-C334-03 367
Console.WriteLine("XML restore succeeded only partially, not all programs
could be imported. Device is restarting. Please retry via graphical user interface
for more information.");
else
Console.WriteLine("XML restore failed. Please retry via graphical user
interface for detailed error description.");
}
// Close response
myHttpWebResponse.Close();
}
catch (System.Net.WebException we)
{
Console.WriteLine("NO PERMISSION FOR XML RESTORE!");
Console.WriteLine(we.Status.ToString());
Console.WriteLine(we.ToString());
}
catch (Exception e)
{
Console.WriteLine(e.ToString());
}
Process interfacing via an automation system (PLC, PC)
9.9 SNMP
SIMATIC MV420 / SIMATIC MV440
368 Operating Instructions, 10/2015, C79000-G8976-C334-03
9.9
SNMP
SNMP (Simple Network Management Protocol)
SNMP is a protocol for managing networks and nodes in the network. To transmit data,
SNMP uses the connectionless UDP protocol.
The information on the properties of SNMP-compliant devices is entered in MIB files (MIB =
Management Information Base).
For basic information on this topic, refer to the manual "Diagnostics and configuration with
SNMP" under the following entry ID:
103949062 (https://support.industry.siemens.com/cs/ww/en/view/103949062)
Scope of performance of the code reading system as SNMP agent
The code reading system supports data query in the following SNMP versions:
● SNMPv1 (standard)
For the code reading system, only SNMP variables from the following MIBs are supported:
● LLDP-MIB
● Standard MIB II (according to RFC1213)
– Group "System"
– Group "Interfaces"
Write access is permitted only for the following MIB objects of the system group:
● sysContact
● sysLocation
● sysName
For all other MIB objects / MIB object groups, only read access is possible for security
reasons.
Traps are not supported by the code reading system.
Access permissions using community names
The code reading system uses the following community strings to control the access rights to
the SNMP agent:
Table 9- 40 Access rights in the SNMP agent
Type of access
Default community string 1)
Read access
public
Read and write access private
1) Note the use of lowercase letters.
Process interfacing via an automation system (PLC, PC)
9.10 Sample programs
SIMATIC MV420 / SIMATIC MV440
Operating Instructions, 10/2015, C79000-G8976-C334-03 369
NOTICE
Change community string
The default community string is generally known and does not provide any write protection
as it is factory-set to "private".
When setting up the devices, you must change the default community string for security
reasons.
9.10
Sample programs
9.10.1
Introduction
Examples
Example 1
Program for interfacing the reader with a SIMATIC controller using FB79
Example 2
Program for archiving diagnostic information on a PC
Example 3
An application example for communication of a reader with a SIMATIC S7-1200-/S7-1500
controller is available on the Siemens Industry Online Support pages under the following
entry ID:
103528928 (https://support.industry.siemens.com/cs/us/en/view/103528928)
9.10.2
Interfacing the reader with a SIMATIC controller using FB79
You can find the program described in this section on the product DVD supplied with the
reader under: "Software" > "Network configuration".
Process interfacing via an automation system (PLC, PC)
9.10 Sample programs
SIMATIC MV420 / SIMATIC MV440
370 Operating Instructions, 10/2015, C79000-G8976-C334-03
Including FB79 in a STEP 7 program
In the accompanying STEP 7 program, the FC1 function contains a simple example for
outputting the result string. You can execute a program change using the FC2 function.
When supplied, only FC1 is called in OB1. To activate FC2, you will need to either delete the
first network with the FC1 call or skip it.
Note
You may only assign the value W#16#0081 for the COMMAND parameter (output result
string) when bit 2 (corresponds to the RDY signal) is set to TRUE in the status byte.
Otherwise the "Illegal mode" error will result.
Process interfacing
The reader is connected with a programmable logic controller via PROFINET IO. A light
barrier or a Bero is used additionally for triggering and must be read in via a digital input
module. The received data is stored in data block DB48 in bytes 0 to 500.
Adding program change
Specify the number of the required program in memory byte MB200. The program change
runs automatically. The correct order of the commands is adhered to. The FB changes to the
program specified at PARAM1.
CAUTION
Avoiding undefined plant states
To avoid undefined plant states, you should only change programs when the plant is in
manual mode or is not in operation.
Startup OB OB100
In OB100, you set the RESET input of FB79 to initialize the FB. This input is reset again by
calling FB79.
Bits of the control and status bytes used
The following control and status bits need to be processed in your program in addition to the
FB79 call:
Bit no.
in
Corresponds to
signal
Function
Q x.6
Control byte
TRG
Processing starts on a positive edge.
Q x.7
Control byte
RES
Reset sensor error
Process interfacing via an automation system (PLC, PC)
9.10 Sample programs
SIMATIC MV420 / SIMATIC MV440
Operating Instructions, 10/2015, C79000-G8976-C334-03 371
Bit no.
in
Corresponds to
signal
Function
I x.0 Status byte IN_OP 0: error or startup,
1: Sensor is functional
I x.2 Status byte RDY 1: Sensor is in RUN, in other words ready to process
codes.
You can use this signal to enable the feed of work
pieces.
9.10.3
Archiving of images and diagnostic information on a PC
You can find the program described in this section on the product DVD supplied with the
reader under: "Software" > "Sample programs".
With MMIDiagnosticsGUI, you archive diagnostic data records in csv file format and
diagnostic images as bitmaps on a PC. In addition to the diagnostics images, a text file
containing details of the image is also transferred.
Prerequisites
● .NET Framework v4.0 must be installed to operate the demo program.
● The PC must be connected with the reader over the Ethernet interface.
Settings in the user interface
Make the following settings in the user interface:
● "Connections" task, "Interfaces" tab:
Enter the IP address and the port of the PC on which you want to archive the diagnostic
information under "Archiving/MMI".
● "Connections" task, "Integration" tab:
In “Diagnostic transfer”, select the data you want to archive from the drop-down lists: Only
diagnostics data records, only diagnostics images or both.
Operation of the sample program
● Start the sample program by double-clicking "MMIDiagnosticsGUI.exe".
Process interfacing via an automation system (PLC, PC)
9.10 Sample programs
SIMATIC MV420 / SIMATIC MV440
372 Operating Instructions, 10/2015, C79000-G8976-C334-03
Connection
Accept the entries for IP address and port which you have configured in the user interface
under "Connections" > "Interfaces" > "Archiving/MMI":
● Select the IP address from the "Local IP Adress" drop-down list.
● Enter the port in the input box "Port".
Timeout [sec]
● In the input box "Timeout [sec]", enter the period of time after which the sample program
terminates the connection to the reader if the sample program does not receive a
response from the reader after a specific period of time.
● Enter "0" in the input box to disable Timeout monitoring.
Output
"Save Bitmaps to ..." and "Save CSV files to ...":
● Enter the storage location where the diagnostic images and CSV files are to be stored.
"Bitmap Filename Template" and "CSV Filename Template":
Process interfacing via an automation system (PLC, PC)
9.10 Sample programs
SIMATIC MV420 / SIMATIC MV440
Operating Instructions, 10/2015, C79000-G8976-C334-03 373
In these input boxes, enter a default name for the generated files.
You can use the following placeholders:
● %Date%
Is replaced with the current date or the date stamp of the image acquisition in the "Year-
Month-Day" format.
● %Time%
Is replaced with the current time or the time stamp of the image acquisition in the "Hours-
Minutes-Seconds-Milliseconds" format.
● %DeviceType%
Is replaced with the device type of the connected reader, e.g.: "MV440-HR".
Use a backslash ("\") to define subfolders. The subfolders are created below the output
folders.
"max. Entries per CSV":
● In the input box, enter the maximum number of lines a CSV file is to contain.
A new CSV file is created as soon as the maximum number of lines is exceeded.
Control
Setting up connection/Starting diagnostic data transfer:
1. Click the "Open Connection" button to set up the connection between PC and reader.
2. Once the reader has set up the connection with the PC:
● Start the transfer of the diagnostic data by clicking the "Start Recording" button.
Note
Connection cannot be set up
If the r
eader cannot set up a connection to the PC, the message "Waiting for Connection..."
appears on the screen:
1.
First check whether the connection settings are configured correctly in the sample
program and in the reader.
2.
Check the firewall settings if the reader cannot set up a connection despite correct
configuration.
In this case, contact the network administrator, if necessary.
Exit diagnostic data transfer/Terminate connection:
1. Exit the transfer of the diagnostic data by clicking the "Stop Recording" button.
2. Click the "Close Connection" button to terminate the connection between PC and reader.
Status
Here, the current status of the sample program is displayed.
Process interfacing via an automation system (PLC, PC)
9.10 Sample programs
SIMATIC MV420 / SIMATIC MV440
374 Operating Instructions, 10/2015, C79000-G8976-C334-03
When recording is active, the following is displayed:
● The last image received in 320x240 pixel format.
● The number of images and diagnostic entries already received.
The program status is also shown in the left sheet bar of the dialog box.
SIMATIC MV420 / SIMATIC MV440
Operating Instructions, 10/2015, C79000-G8976-C334-03 375
Alarm, fault and system messages
10
10.1
Introduction
If there are operator errors or errors in processing mode, the reader outputs diagnostic
information. This diagnostic information is output:
● As a message via the user interface.
● Via the POWER, ETHERNET and STATE/SF LED displays.
● When using onboard PROFINET and FB79 or the Ident profile in the device diagnostics.
● When using FB45 and the Ident profile in the diagnostics.
10.2
Reporting diagnostics information
Overview
The messages are divided into the following types:
● Error messages
● Warnings/notes
● Read results
All three messages are displayed in the user interface.
Most messages of the "error message" type trigger a diagnostic interrupt on the relevant
PROFINET controller.
All the messages, their meaning and the ways to deal with them are described in "Error
messages", "Warnings/notes" and "Read results".
Alarm, fault and system messages
10.2 Reporting diagnostics information
SIMATIC MV420 / SIMATIC MV440
376 Operating Instructions, 10/2015, C79000-G8976-C334-03
10.2.1
Error messages
With error messages, the "IN_OP" signal (in operation) is reset and the STATE/SF LED is lit
RED permanently.
In addition, the Ready or Done bit is reset with a connection via FB45 or the Ident profile.
If the reader is connected to PROFINET IO, these error messages trigger a diagnostics
interrupt on the relevant I/O controller if there is a number in the "Value (PROFINET)"
column in the following table. How to read out and evaluate the diagnostic information
available on the reader is described in I/O diagnostics.
Message
Value
(onboard
PROFINET
diagnostics)
Value
(TCP/IP and
RS-232)
Value
(FB45, er-
ror_MOBY)
Value
(Ident
profile,
STATUS
byte)
(byte 0,
byte 1,
byte 2)
Description
How to remedy the prob-
lem
Fault in inter-
nal interface
to the image
sensor
W#16# 5000 01 01 E1, FE, 02 There is a fault in
the connection of
the internal inter-
face to the image
sensor.
If the error continues to
occur after the device
has been turned on
again, contact technical
support.
Fault in inter-
nal interface
to the image
sensor
W#16#5001 01 01 E1, FE, 02 There is a fault in
the internal inter-
face to the image
sensor.
If the error continues to
occur after turning on the
device again, contact
technical support.
Error during
DISA signal
change
W#16#5003 03 02 E6, FE, 04 When the program
is saved, the DISA
signal is changed
at an invalid loca-
tion.
Check the sequence of
applied signals. Start the
program saving process
again.
Error in se-
quence
W#16#5004 04 02 E6, FE, 04 While the program
is being saved, the
time sequence of
applied signals is
not adhered to.
Check the sequence of
applied signals. Start the
program saving process
again.
Error - Pro-
gram cannot
be started
W#16#5005 05 04 E1, FE, 06 Not enough
memory or program
damaged.
1. Reduce the memory
requirements.
2. Repeat "Save pro-
gram".
Error internal
file error
W#16#5005 05 13 E4, FE, 04 An error occurred
while saving to
read-only memory.
Please contact technical
support if this error oc-
curs frequently.
Alarm, fault and system messages
10.2 Reporting diagnostics information
SIMATIC MV420 / SIMATIC MV440
Operating Instructions, 10/2015, C79000-G8976-C334-03 377
Message
Value
(onboard
PROFINET
diagnostics)
Value
(TCP/IP and
RS-232)
Value
(FB45, er-
ror_MOBY)
Value
(Ident
profile,
STATUS
byte)
(byte 0,
byte 1,
byte 2)
Description
How to remedy the prob-
lem
Transfer error
TCP or RS-
232
W#16#5007 07 0A E1, FE, 04 The send buffer is
full because the
data cannot be sent
in an adequately
short time.
Reduce the trigger fre-
quency.
With TCP: Process the
results faster on the
server.
A high load on the net-
work to which the reader
is connected can also
block the transfer of the
data. If necessary, check
the network connection.
With RS-232: Increase
the baud rate. The image
buffer size in "Program"
can also be increased
under "Image acquisi-
tion", "Control" tab to
expand the send buffer.
Error - trans-
fer error ar-
chiving/
MMI
W#16#5007 07 0A E1, FE, 04 The send buffer is
full because the
data cannot be sent
in an adequately
short time or the
server is not con-
firming receipt of
the data in time.
Reduce the trigger fre-
quency or reduce the
amount of diagnostic
data to be archived.
Process the results on
the server faster. A high
load on the network to
which the reader is con-
nected can also block
the transfer of the data. If
necessary, check the
network connection.
Error - trans-
fer error
PROFINET
IO
W#16#5007 07 0A E1, FE, 04 The send buffer is
full because the
data cannot be
queried in an ade-
quately short time.
Reduce the trigger fre-
quency or process the
results faster. If neces-
sary, change the update
time in the PROFINET
configuration.
Alarm, fault and system messages
10.2 Reporting diagnostics information
SIMATIC MV420 / SIMATIC MV440
378 Operating Instructions, 10/2015, C79000-G8976-C334-03
Message
Value
(onboard
PROFINET
diagnostics)
Value
(TCP/IP and
RS-232)
Value
(FB45, er-
ror_MOBY)
Value
(Ident
profile,
STATUS
byte)
(byte 0,
byte 1,
byte 2)
Description
How to remedy the prob-
lem
Error - trans-
fer error
ASM/PROFI
NET IO
W#16#5007 07 0A E1, FE, 04 The send buffer is
full because the
data cannot be
queried in an ade-
quately short time.
Reduce the trigger fre-
quency or process the
results more quickly on
the CPU. If necessary,
the baud rate on the
ASM connection can
also be increased.
To cover short peaks,
the image buffer size of
the program can be
increased under "Image
acquisition", "Control"
tab.
Error - Save
program
W#16#500A 10 02 E6, FE, 04 The program could
not be created.
Adapt the parameter
assignment, the place-
ment of test objects in
the image or the image
quality.
Error - match
error
W#16#500B 11 0E E1, FE, 07 The program could
not be created due
to faulty match
settings.
Adapt the match settings
or use a suitable test
object.
Error
TCP commu-
nication
W#16#500E 14 0C E1, FE, 01 Connection error in
communication
over a TCP con-
nection or when
using an Ethernet
RS-232 converter:
There is no TCP
connection or the
data transfer can-
not be completed
within the set time
limit.
Make sure that the con-
nected TCP partner is
correctly configured and
ready to receive.
Error
Archiving/
MMI commu-
nication
W#16#500E 14 0C E1, FE, 01 Error in communi-
cation over the
archiving connec-
tion: There is no
TCP connection,
the server does not
respond within the
set time limit or
violates the archiv-
ing protocol.
Check the connection to
the server. Make sure
that the data is pro-
cessed by the server in
an adequately short time
and that the protocol is
maintained.
Alarm, fault and system messages
10.2 Reporting diagnostics information
SIMATIC MV420 / SIMATIC MV440
Operating Instructions, 10/2015, C79000-G8976-C334-03 379
Message
Value
(onboard
PROFINET
diagnostics)
Value
(TCP/IP and
RS-232)
Value
(FB45, er-
ror_MOBY)
Value
(Ident
profile,
STATUS
byte)
(byte 0,
byte 1,
byte 2)
Description
How to remedy the prob-
lem
Error - lamp
overload
W#16#500F 15 10 E4, FE, 06 The connected
lamp was over-
loaded. The config-
ured or default
"Maximum duty
cycle" under "Op-
tions", "Lighting"
tab, was exceeded.
Decrease the trigger
frequency, reduce the
exposure time or use a
more powerful lamp.
Error - Invalid
program
number
W#16#5010 16 02 E6, FE, 04 An attempt is being
made to save a
program under an
invalid number via
the interface set in
"Controller".
Select a program num-
ber between 1 and 15.
For
SIMATIC MV420 SR-B,
valid program numbers
are 1 to 5 and 15.
Error
PROFINET
IO connection
error
- 18 - - PROFINET IO
connection termina-
tion
The connection to the
PROFINET IO controller
was interrupted. Check
the connection to the I/O
controller.
Error
PROFINET
IO controller
status
"STOP"
- 21 - - PROFINET IO
controller is in
"STOP" status
Note
No diagnostic inter-
rupt is sent to the
I/O controller
The PROFINET control-
ler is in "STOP" status,
which means it cannot
receive commands from
the code reader. Make
sure that the I/O control-
ler changes back to
"RUN" status.
Error
PROFINET
I/O configura-
tion error
W#16#5016 22 - - Faulty PROFINET
IO configuration
The PROFINET IO con-
figuration of the code
reader and of the com-
munication partner do
not match. Check the
PROFINET mode in the
code reader and in the
I/O controller.
Alarm, fault and system messages
10.2 Reporting diagnostics information
SIMATIC MV420 / SIMATIC MV440
380 Operating Instructions, 10/2015, C79000-G8976-C334-03
Message
Value
(onboard
PROFINET
diagnostics)
Value
(TCP/IP and
RS-232)
Value
(FB45, er-
ror_MOBY)
Value
(Ident
profile,
STATUS
byte)
(byte 0,
byte 1,
byte 2)
Description
How to remedy the prob-
lem
Error
PROFINET
IO compatibil-
ity error
W#16#5017 23 - - Version of the
PROFINET IO
controller incompat-
ible with the I/O
device (code read-
er)
The version of the I/O
controller is out of date
and not compatible with
the current version of the
code reader. Keep in
mind that this behavior of
the code reader does not
occur before version 7.0.
To rectify this error, we
recommend that you
update the I/O controller
or downgrade the code
reader to version 6.8.
No message - - - E4, FE, 84 Error in last com-
mand sequence
Note
No diagnostic inter-
rupt is sent to the
I/O controller
May occur if triggering is
too fast. The Ident profile
can only process one
command at a time be-
fore a new command
can be executed.
Self-acknowledging connection errors
The following connection errors are self-acknowledging:
● Error TCP communication
● Error Archiving/MMI communication
● Error PROFINET IO connection error
● Error PROFINET IO controller STOP status
As soon as the connection is re-established after an interruption, the reader exits the error
status. The reader returns to the mode prior to the occurrence of the error, for example, back
to processing mode.
The occurrence of these errors and their automatic acknowledgement are stored in the
diagnostic data records and are not overwritten by new errors.
Alarm, fault and system messages
10.2 Reporting diagnostics information
SIMATIC MV420 / SIMATIC MV440
Operating Instructions, 10/2015, C79000-G8976-C334-03 381
If such entries exist, this is indicated on the user interface in the "Run" and
"Information/Statistics" tasks.
Note
PROFINET IO error/OB 86 not programmed
•
The occurrence of a PROFINET
IO error causes OB 86 (rack failure OB) to be called on a
SIMATIC S7 CPU.
•
Unless you have programmed OB86, the CPU changes to STOP.
Alarm, fault and system messages
10.2 Reporting diagnostics information
SIMATIC MV420 / SIMATIC MV440
382 Operating Instructions, 10/2015, C79000-G8976-C334-03
10.2.2
Warnings and notes
Error messages for "normalization":
Error code
Error message
2 Normalization failed!
No adequately bright image could be set.
Remedy:
• Set a larger aperture on the lens.
• Increase the maximum exposure time and brightness.
• Use a brighter light source.
3 Normalization failed!
The dynamic range of the image brightness is too small.
Remedy:
• Make sure the position of the frame is correct.
• Select a smaller aperture on the lens.
• Reduce surrounding brightness.
4 Normalization failed!
Not enough memory.
Remedy:
• Restart the reader.
5 Normalization failed!
An adequate dynamic range can only be achieved with an illuminated image.
Remedy:
• Make sure the position of the frame is correct.
• Select a smaller aperture on the lens.
• Reduce surrounding brightness.
6 Normalization failed!
No valid setting found.
Remedy:
• Change the aperture on the lens.
• Reduce the maximum exposure time and brightness.
• Use a different light source.
8 Normalization failed!
Error when saving.
Remedy:
• Delete a saved program.
• Firmware update on the reader.
Alarm, fault and system messages
10.2 Reporting diagnostics information
SIMATIC MV420 / SIMATIC MV440
Operating Instructions, 10/2015, C79000-G8976-C334-03 383
Error messages for "calibration"
Error code
Error message
18 Calibration was not successful!
The cell scaling could not be identified.
Remedy:
• Use the Siemens calibration card.
19 Calibration was not successful!
The contrast parameters could not be taken as valid.
Remedy:
• Repeat the normalization step using a tighter frame.
• Restore the conditions used for normalization.
20 Calibration was not successful!
The code could not be read.
Remedy:
• Make sure the position of the code is correct.
21 Calibration was not successful!
Not enough memory.
Remedy:
• Restart the reader.
24 Calibration was not successful!
Error when saving.
Remedy:
• Delete a saved program.
• Firmware update on the reader.
Alarm, fault and system messages
10.2 Reporting diagnostics information
SIMATIC MV420 / SIMATIC MV440
384 Operating Instructions, 10/2015, C79000-G8976-C334-03
10.2.3
Read results
Cons.
no.
Message
Description
How to remedy the problem
1
Read error (<reason>)
The processing was not successful in
processing mode.
For possible causes, refer to "Read and
verification error messages" for the error
messages.
2
Filter error (<reason>)
The selected result string filtering
was not possible with the read code.
1. Check whether the code just read is
correct.
2. Check and, if necessary, correct the
selected result settings in the decoder
step in the "Result" tab.
3
Match error(<read result> !
<Match string>)
•
The configured comparison option
was not found in the code to be
compared.
• The string defined for training
does not match the current string
of the code or the plain text.
1. The code or plain text that has just
been read deviates from the trained
code (and is therefore incorrect), or the
wrong code was trained.
2. Check the selected result settings.
4
Format error(<reason>)
The configured format text does not
match the definition.
Check the selected settings.
You can find additional information in
"Overall result" in the online help.
The undefined formatting command is
issued as <reason>.
Note
Changing error texts
Please note that the error texts on the "Results" tab (results step) under "Programs" can
change.
10.2.4
Read and verification error messages
If there is a read error or verification error, the following error codes or English message
strings are output. For further information, please refer to "Overall results" in the online help.
Note
The causes of error 4700 to 4722 are also output in the verification report if there is a
verification error
All verification grades are output in the report as "E". The verification values correspond to
the error code.
Alarm, fault and system messages
10.2 Reporting diagnostics information
SIMATIC MV420 / SIMATIC MV440
Operating Instructions, 10/2015, C79000-G8976-C334-03 385
Note
Evaluating verification errors as read errors
If
the "Evaluate quality 'Poor' as 'N_OK'" check box has been selected in the decoding
settings, a verification error will also be evaluated as 'N_OK'.
Error code
(%c)
Message (%s)
Description
0001
No 1D/2D code found in step n
No code was found in step #n.
0002 Cycletime too short The processing was not completed within the cycle
time limit.
0003
Trigger too fast
The processing was interrupted by a trigger signal.
0004 Non ECC200 Code in step n A data matrix code was found in step #n that does not
correspond to ECC200.
Note
The check for ECC200 is performed only in adjust-
ment mode and during "Save program".
0005 Step n: Structured Append DMC not supported A "Structured Append" DMC type was found in step
#n. This DMC type is not supported.
0006 Step n: Reader Programming DMC not supported A "Reader Programming Code" DMC type was found
in step #n. This DMC type is not supported.
0007 Step n: QR ECI encoding not supported A QR code with "ECI encoding" was found in step #n.
This QR type is not supported.
0008 Step n: QR Byte encoding not supported
A QR code with "Byte encoding" was found in step #n.
This QR type is not supported.
0009 Step n: QR Kanji encoding not supported A QR code with "Kanji encoding" was found in step
#n. This QR type is not supported.
0010 Step n: Structured Append QR code not support-
ed
A "Structured Append" QR type was found in step #n.
This QR type is not supported.
0011 Step n: QR FNC1 encoding not supported A QR code with "FNC1 encoding" was found in step
#n. This QR type is not supported.
0012 Code quality is poor in step n A code with "poor" quality evaluation was read in
step #n during verification.
0013 Nothing found "Scan" or "Autotrigger edge triggered" mode: All im-
age acquisitions were decoded without result.
0014 Found m instead of the expected number of
1D/2D codes in step n
Only m codes instead of the expected number of
codes were found in step # n during multicode decod-
ing.
0015 Maximum number of codes per image (m) was
exceeded in step n
More than the maximum number of codes were found
with multicode decoding (per image (50, MV440 UR:
150).
0016 The maximum amount of data which can be de-
coded was exceeded in code m of step n
A maximum of 3001 bytes can be decoded per step.
This length was exceeded in step #n for code #m.
0017 Trigger during image acquisition The trigger signal was applied during image acquisi-
tion. In this case, no additional image acquisition is
started. Instead, image acquisition and processing are
being continued and an N_OK result is generated
immediately upon completion.
Alarm, fault and system messages
10.2 Reporting diagnostics information
SIMATIC MV420 / SIMATIC MV440
386 Operating Instructions, 10/2015, C79000-G8976-C334-03
Error code
(%c)
Message (%s)
Description
0018
Step timeout reached in step n
In step #n, the defined time limit was reached.
1006 No text found in step n OCR: No text was found in step #n.
1007 Text length is less than minimum specified in step
n
OCR: The text found in step #n is shorter than the
minimum setting.
1008 Text length exceeds the maximum specified in
step n
OCR: The text found in step #n is longer than the
maximum setting.
1009 Quality violates limit values in step n OCR: The text found in step #n is below the quality
threshold setting.
1010 Match failed in step n OCR: The match performed in step #n was not suc-
cessful.
1011 Reference text missing in step n OCR: There is no string specification available for
step #n.
4700
Verification failed in step n
The read code could not be verified.
4701 Verification for code type found in step n not sup-
ported
The selected verification method is not supported for
the code type found in step #n.
4707 Mean light outside of range in step n: Maximum
exposure time reached
The average brightness needed for ISO/IEC 29158 is
outside the valid range (see also error code 4709).
The specified maximum value for the exposure time
was reached during automatic exposure control.
To resolve this error:
1. Use brighter lighting or enlarge the aperture of the
objective (lower aperture number).
2. Perform a new calibration.
4708 Mean light outside of range in step n: Cycle time
limit of the automatic exposure control reached
The average brightness needed for ISO/IEC 29158 is
outside the valid range (see also error code 4709).
The automatic exposure control was unsuccessful
because the necessary decodings could not be com-
pleted within the time limit.
To resolve this error:
• Reduce the exposure ROI of the program.
• Change the resolution to half-image or increase
the time limit of the exposure control.
• Also ensure that the code is completely within the
exposure ROI until conclusion of the image acqui-
sition process.
4709 Mean light outside of range in step n The average brightness needed for ISO/IEC 29158 is
outside the valid range (70% to 86%) in step #n.
4710 Verification failed in step n: Data Matrix ECC200
required
Verification requires a data matrix code according to
ECC200 specification (only for verification according
to ISO/IEC 15415 or ISO/IEC 29158).
4711 Verification failed in step n: Aperture too small The cell size of the data matrix code in step #n is too
large for the configured aperture (only for verification
according to ISO/IEC 15415).
4712 Verification failed in step n: Aperture too large The cell size of the data matrix code in step #n is too
small for the configured aperture (only for verification
according to ISO/IEC 15415).
Alarm, fault and system messages
10.2 Reporting diagnostics information
SIMATIC MV420 / SIMATIC MV440
Operating Instructions, 10/2015, C79000-G8976-C334-03 387
Error code
(%c)
Message (%s)
Description
4713 Verification failed in step n: Not enough space
around the Data Matrix
The inactive zone around the data matrix contained in
the image is too small. For verification, an inactive
zone of at least the size of two cells is required (only
for verification according to ISO/IEC 15415 or 29158).
4714 Verification failed in step n: RDA could not find
the horizontal timing pattern
The reference decoding according to
ISO/IEC 16022:2006 signals an error when searching
for the horizontal timing pattern (only for verification
according to ISO/IEC 15415 or ISO/IEC 29158).
4715 Verification failed in step n: RDA could not find
the vertical timing pattern
The reference decoding according to
ISO/IEC 16022:2006 signals an error when searching
for the vertical timing pattern (only for verification
according to ISO/IEC 15415 or ISO/IEC 29158).
4716 Verification failed in step n: RDA found an incor-
rect number of rows and columns
The reference decoding according to
ISO/IEC 16022:2006 signals an error when determin-
ing the number of rows or columns (only for verifica-
tion according to ISO/IEC 15415 or ISO/IEC 29158).
4717 Verification failed in step n: RDA could not locate
the finder pattern
The reference decoding according to
ISO/IEC 16022:2006 signals an error when searching
for the finder pattern (only for verification according to
ISO/IEC 15415 or ISO/IEC 29158).
4719 Verification failed in step n: RDA error correction
failed
The reference decoding according to
ISO/IEC 16022:2006 signals an error when determin-
ing the error correction (only for verification according
to ISO/IEC 15415 or ISO/IEC 29158).
4720 Verification failed in step n: Number of Data Ma-
trix rows/columns is too high
The maximum supported code size for verification
according to ISO/IEC 15415 or ISO/IEC 29158 is
104x104 cells.
4721 Verification failed in step n: Cell size is smaller
than the specified Min.X Dim.
During verification, a cell size was measured that is
less than the minimum X-dimension setting (only for
verification according to ISO/IEC 29158).
4722
Verification failed in step n: Cell size is larger than
the specified Max.X Dim.
During verification, a cell size was measured that is
greater than the maximum X-dimension setting (only
for verification according to ISO/IEC 29158).
5000 Not enough resources to process step n Step #n could not be executed due to a lack of re-
sources (memory).
5001
No objects found in step n
Locator: No objects were found in step #n.
5002 Too few objects found in step n Locator: The number of objects found in step #n is
lower than the minimum setting.
5003 Too few objects found in step n: Required feature
is missing
Locator: The number of objects found in step #n is
lower than the minimum setting. At least one instance
was rejected because of a missing required feature.
5004 Too few objects found in step n: Rotation range
exceeded
Locator: The number of objects found in step #n is
lower than the minimum setting. At least one instance
was rejected because it did not comply with the rota-
tion constraint.
5005 Too few objects found in step n: Scaling range
exceeded
Locator: The number of objects found in step #n is
lower than the minimum setting. At least one instance
was rejected because it did not comply with the scale
constraint.
Alarm, fault and system messages
10.2 Reporting diagnostics information
SIMATIC MV420 / SIMATIC MV440
388 Operating Instructions, 10/2015, C79000-G8976-C334-03
Error code
(%c)
Message (%s)
Description
5006 Too few objects found in step n: Contours not
adequate
Locator: The number of objects found in step #n is
lower than the minimum setting. At least one instance
was rejected because insufficient contours were
found.
5008 Too few objects found in step n: Details not rec-
ognized
Locator: The number of objects found in step #n is
lower than the minimum setting. At least one instance
that was identified at the outline level was rejected at
the detail level.
5009 Too few objects found in step n: Outline not rec-
ognized
Locator: The number of objects found in step #n is
lower than the minimum setting. No instance was
found at the outline level.
5010 Too few objects found in step n: Clear percentage
violated
Locator: The number of objects found in step #n is
lower than the minimum setting. At least one instance
was rejected because it did not comply with the clear
percentage constraint.
5011 Too many objects found in step n Locator: The number of objects found in step #n is
higher than the set maximum.
5012 Quality too poor in step n Locator: The objects found in step #n are below the
configured quality threshold.
5013 Average Quality too poor in step n Locator: The objects found in step #n are below the
set average quality threshold.
5014 Match error tolerance exceeded in step n Locator: The match performed in step #n was not
successful because the number of match errors was
higher than the maximum number permitted.
5015 Position tolerance exceeded for object m in step n Locator: The position of object m in step #n is outside
the maximum permitted deviation.
5016 Rotation tolerance exceeded for object m in step
n
Locator: The rotation angle of object m in step #n is
outside the maximum permitted deviation.
10.2.5
Filter error messages
If there is a filter error, the following message strings are displayed in English. For further
information, please refer to "Overall results" in the online help.
Error text (%s)
For filter mode only
Description
Symbol does not use GS1-
encoding
GS1
The code read does not begin with the GS1
start symbol "]d2".
"[Number]" is no valid GS1 Ap-
plication Identifier
GS1 The string selected in the "Filter ID" box
contains an invalid application identifier tag.
GS1 Application Identifier
"[Number]" not found in symbol
content
GS1 An application identifier specified in the
"Filter ID" box was not found in the read
code.
Symbol content shorter than
given "start position"
Position The read code is shorter than the selected
"Start position"
ID or separator not found in
symbol content
ID An ID (field: "Filter ID") or a separator
character (field: "Separators") was not
found in the read code.
Alarm, fault and system messages
10.2 Reporting diagnostics information
SIMATIC MV420 / SIMATIC MV440
Operating Instructions, 10/2015, C79000-G8976-C334-03 389
10.2.6
Error messages when writing a trigger-synchronized match string (XMATCH)
Apart from protocol errors in the structure of the XMATCH command (Page 350), the
following errors are logged in the diagnostics data records as temporary errors (self-
acknowledging).
Error message in the diagnostics data
records
Error
XMATCH command discarded. Permanent
flag and Trg-ID: 0 expected.
The image acquisition control is set to "Auto trigger".
An XMATCH command was received that:
• (1) does not have a permanent flag.
• (2) has a trigger ID ≠ 0.
XMATCH command discarded. Permanent
flag mandatory for Trg-ID: 0.
An XMATCH command with the trigger ID 0 but without
a permanent flag was received.
XMATCH buffer full. Matchstring discarded
(Trg-ID: [TrgId], Program No: [Program
number], Step No: [Step number], Match-
string Idx: [Matchstring Index]).
The received match string cannot be buffered.
The inability to buffer can have two reasons:
• (1) The trigger ID sent is more than 20 triggers
(SIMATIC MV420: 10 triggers) away from the cur-
rent counter.
Note
XMATCH commands with a permanent flag can con-
tain any trigger ID. Permanent settings can, howev-
er, only be buffered for a maximum of two different
trigger IDs. If a further permanent setting is received,
the last sent setting is overwritten.
• (2) The total size of all stored match strings exceeds
200 KB (SIMATIC MV420: 100 KB).
XMATCH command discarded. Program
No: [Program number] is not active or does
not use match.
An XMATCH command has been received whose pro-
gram number refers to a program which:
• (1) Is not active
• (2) Was saved with match "Off" (decoder) or without
a string specification (OCR).
XMATCH command discarded. String for
Trg-ID: [TrgId] does not fit match settings
for step no: [Step number], Matchstring
Idx: [Matchstring Index] in program no:
[Program number]
An XMATCH command was received with a match
string that cannot be processed with the selected match
option (decoder) or string specification type (OCR).
Example
Match "Position" with start position 10, but the match
string that was sent only has 9 characters.
XMATCH command discarded.
Program sequence is active.
Program sequence mode is active. In this mode, no
XMATCH commands can be used.
Alarm, fault and system messages
10.3 Diagnostics by evaluating the POWER, ETHERNET, STATE/SF LEDs
SIMATIC MV420 / SIMATIC MV440
390 Operating Instructions, 10/2015, C79000-G8976-C334-03
10.3
Diagnostics by evaluating the POWER, ETHERNET, STATE/SF
LEDs
LED labeling
Meaning
How to remedy the problem
POWER
• GREEN, flashing:
Signals the startup phase after turning
the reader on.
Wait until this is completed and the reader is operational.
• GREEN, lit permanently:
Reader is ready for operation
No error.
ETHERNET
• Permanently off:
No Ethernet connection to the reader.
• Check the connection to the Ethernet cable.
• Check whether the connected switch or other communi-
cations partner is operational.
• Check or replace the Ethernet cable.
• GREEN, permanently on:
An Ethernet connection exists without
data traffic.
To start the user interface of the reader, you also require a
valid network configuration for TCP/IP. Here, you can, for
example, use the Primary Setup Tool to create a valid net-
work configuration for TCP/IP.
• GREEN flashing:
The reader is exchanging data.
No error.
STATE/SF
• Off permanently:
The reader is in "Stop" mode (no error)
No error.
• GREEN on permanently:
The reader is in RUN mode (no error)
No error.
• RED, lit constantly:
The reader is in the "Group error" status
Possible cause when working with onboard
PROFINET IO:
1. Bus error (no physical connection to a
subnet / switch).
2. Wrong transmission speed,
Full duplex transmission is not enabled.
Start the user interface to display the error message. Follow
the suggested remedies, see section "Error messages
(Page 376)".
• RED, flashing
When using onboard PROFINET IO:
1. Bus communication is interrupted.
2. The IP address is incorrect.
3. Bad configuration.
4. Bad parameter assignment.
5. Bad or missing device name.
6. I/O controller does not exist / turned off.
• Check whether the IP address or device name occurs
more than once in the network.
• Check the settings of the I/O controller.
Alarm, fault and system messages
10.4 I/O device diagnostics
SIMATIC MV420 / SIMATIC MV440
Operating Instructions, 10/2015, C79000-G8976-C334-03 391
10.4
I/O device diagnostics
10.4.1
Introduction
Errors, for example, "Error - transfer error PROFINET IO", trigger I/O device diagnostics. The
diagnostic information is read out using STEP 7 depending on the I/O controller.
How to read out I/O device diagnostic information and how it is structured is described briefly
below. You will find a detailed description in the programming manual PROFINET IO – From
PROFIBUS DP to PROFINET IO.
10.4.2
Reading out diagnostics information with S7
If, for example, the error "Error - transfer error PROFINET IO connection error" occurs on the
reader and you are using an S7 CPU as the I/O controller, the diagnostic interrupt OB
(OB82) is started on the I/O controller.
Its local variables OB_82_EV_CLASS, OB_82_MDL_DEFECT and OB82_EXT_FAULT have
the following values:
Variable
Value
Meaning
OB_82_EV_CLASS
B#16#39
Event entering state
OB_82_MDL_DEFECT TRUE Module problem
OB_82_EXT_FAULT
TRUE
External problem
Unfortunately, you cannot identify the actual cause of the problem in the local variables of
OB82. You can find this out as follows:
● With PROFINET IO: By calling SFB 54 "RALRM" in OB 82
The entry "Faulty module" appears in the diagnostic buffer and the corresponding text from
the GSD file, for example, "Error - transfer error PROFINET IO", appears in the module
information of the reader.
After the error has been eliminated and you have acknowledged it in the user interface of the
reader, the diagnostics interrupt OB (OB82) is started again on the I/O controller.
Its local variables OB_82_EV_CLASS, OB_82_MDL_DEFECT and OB82_EXT_FAULT have
the following values:
Variable
Value
Meaning
OB_82_EV_CLASS B#16#38 Event exiting state
OB_82_MDL_DEFECT
FALSE
No module problem
OB_82_EXT_FAULT
FALSE
No external error
The entry "Module OK" now appears in the diagnostics buffer. The text from the GSD file
relating to the previous error no longer appears in the module information of the reader.
Alarm, fault and system messages
10.4 I/O device diagnostics
SIMATIC MV420 / SIMATIC MV440
392 Operating Instructions, 10/2015, C79000-G8976-C334-03
10.4.3
Diagnostics with PROFINET IO
SFB 54 "RALRM" returns the following diagnostics information with PROFINET IO in the
TINFO parameter (task information):
Byte
Value
Meaning
0 ... 19
See OB description
Start information of the OB in which SFB 54 was called.
20 ... 21 Depends on the configuration Address:
• Bit 0 ... 10: Station number (according to configuration)
• Bit 11 ... 14: I/O system ID (according to configuration)
• Bit 15: 1
22 B#16#08 • Bit 0 ... 3: Slave type: 1000 = PNIO
• Bit 4 ... 7: Profile type: 0000
23 B#16#00 • Bit 0 ... 3: Alarm info type: 0000
• Bit 4 ... 7: Structure version: 0000
24 B#16#00 / B#16#01 Flags of the PNIO controller interface module:
• Bit 0 = 0: Alarm from an integrated interface module
• Bit 0 = 1: Alarm from an external interface module
• Bits 1 ... 7: all 0
25 B#16#01 / B#16#00 Flags of the PNIO controller interface module:
• Bit 0 = 1 with incoming alarm
• Bit 0 = 0 with outgoing alarm
• Bits 1 ... 7: all 0
26 ... 27
W#16#8111
PNIO device ident number (fixed).
28 ... 29 W#16#002A Vendor ID (fixed).
30 ... 31
W#16#0001
Identification number of the instance.
SFB 54 "RALRM" returns the following diagnostics information with PROFINET IO in the
AINFO parameter (additional alarm information):
Note
When an alarm exits the alarm state, only bytes 0 to 25 of
the AINFO parameter are written.
Compare the meaning of bytes 2 and 3 of AINFO.
Diagnostics data record SFB 54
Byte
Value
Meaning
0 ... 1
according to PNIO standard
Block type
2 ... 3
W#16#001A / W#16#0016
Length of the diagnostics data with an incoming / outgoing alarm.
4 ... 5
W#16#0100
Version (fixed)
6 ... 7 W#16#0001 / W#16#000C ID for the alarm type: Diagnostics alarm incoming / diagnostics alarm
outgoing.
8 ... 11
DW#16#00000000
API (fixed)
Alarm, fault and system messages
10.4 I/O device diagnostics
SIMATIC MV420 / SIMATIC MV440
Operating Instructions, 10/2015, C79000-G8976-C334-03 393
Diagnostics data record SFB 54
Byte
Value
Meaning
12 ... 13
W#16#0000
Slot (fixed)
14 ... 15
W#16#0001
Subslot (fixed)
16 ... 19 DW#16#00000300 Module identification (fixed)
20 ... 23
DW#16#00000000
Submodule identification (fixed)
24 ... 25 W#16#Bxxx / W#16#xxx Alarm specification for incoming / outgoing alarm:
• Bits 0 to 10: Sequence number
• Bit 11: Channel diagnostics: 0 (fixed)
• Bit 12: Status of vendor-specific diagnostics
• Bit 13: Status of diagnostics for submodule
• Bit 14: Reserved: 0
• Bit 15: Diagnostics status
26 ... 27
W#16#0004
ID for vendor-specific diagnostics (fixed).
28 ... 29 Value from the table under error
messages
ID of the error that occurred.
In contrast to events-related reading out of the diagnostics data with SFB 54, there is also
the option of reading out the diagnostics data status-related.
You read out status-related diagnostics data using SFB 52 "RDREC".
Calling SFB 52:
1. You assign the diagnostics address of the reader to the ID parameter in hexadecimal
format.
2. Assign the value 2 to the INDEX parameter.
Diagnostics data record SFB 52
Byte
Value
Meaning
0 ... 1
W#16#0010
Data record type: Diagnostics data record
2 ... 3
W#16#0012
Data record length starting at byte 4: 18 bytes
4 ... 5
W#16#0100
Version
6 ... 7
W#16#0000
Slot
8 ... 9
W#16#0000
Subslot
10 ... 11
W#16#0000
Channel
12
B#16#08 / B#16#10
Error occurred / no error occurred
13 B#16#05 Identifier indicating that all variables are stored in words starting at byte
14.
14 ... 15
W#16#0004
ID for vendor-specific diagnostics (fixed)
16 ... 17
W#16#0000
Channel number
18 ... 19
W#16#0805 / W#16#1005
Content identical to that of bytes 12 and 13.
20 ... 21 Value from the table under error
messages
ID of the error that occurred.
Alarm, fault and system messages
10.4 I/O device diagnostics
SIMATIC MV420 / SIMATIC MV440
394 Operating Instructions, 10/2015, C79000-G8976-C334-03
SIMATIC MV420 / SIMATIC MV440
Operating Instructions, 10/2015, C79000-G8976-C334-03 395
Service and maintenance
11
11.1
Maintenance and repair
Maintenance
The devices are maintenance-free. Cleaning is unnecessary.
Nevertheless, Siemens AG recommends professional cleaning of the protective lens barrel
when it becomes dirty so that a consistent reading performance is maintained.
Repair
For repairs, send the reader to Siemens AG without its protective lens barrel, lighting unit,
and other accessories.
Service and maintenance
11.1 Maintenance and repair
SIMATIC MV420 / SIMATIC MV440
396 Operating Instructions, 10/2015, C79000-G8976-C334-03
SIMATIC MV420 / SIMATIC MV440
Operating Instructions, 10/2015, C79000-G8976-C334-03 397
Technical specifications
12
12.1
General technical specifications
Mechanical environmental conditions for SIMATIC MV420 and SIMATIC MV440
Mechanical environmental conditions for operation
SIMATIC MV420 and SIMATIC MV440 are designed for fixed
installation in an environment protected
from the weather and meet the conditions for use complying with DIN IEC 60721-3-3:
• Class 3M3 (mechanical requirements);
• Class 3K3 (climatic environmental conditions).
Mechanical environmental conditions, sine-shaped oscillations
Frequency range in Hz
Test values
10 ≤ f < 58
0.075 mm amplitude
58 ≤ f < 500 1 g constant acceleration
Test for mechanical environmental conditions
Test for / test standard
Comments
Vibrations
Vibration test according
to IEC 60068-2-6 (sinus-
oidal)
• Vibration type: Frequency cycles with a rate of change of 1 oc-
tave/minute.
– 10 Hz ≤ f < 58 Hz, constant amplitude 0.075 mm
– 58 Hz ≤ f < 500 Hz, constant acceleration 1 g
– 10 Hz ≤ f ≤ 55 Hz, amplitude 1 mm (only sensor head and lighting
unit)
• Vibration duration: 10 frequency cycles per axis in each of the 3 mutu-
ally perpendicular axes.
Test for / test standard
Comments
Shock Shock test ac-
cording to IEC
60068-2-29
• Type of shock: Half-sine
• Strength of the shock for the reader:
– 10 g peak value
– 16 ms duration
• Direction of shock: 100 shocks in each of the 3 mutually perpendicular
axes
Technical specifications
12.1 General technical specifications
SIMATIC MV420 / SIMATIC MV440
398 Operating Instructions, 10/2015, C79000-G8976-C334-03
Climatic environmental conditions for SIMATIC MV420 and SIMATIC MV440
Table 12- 1
Ambient climatic conditions for operation
Ambient conditions
Permitted range
Comments
Temperature
0 ... +50 °C
Temperature change
Max. 10 °C/h
Relative humidity max. 95 % at +25 °C No condensation, corresponds to rela-
tive humidity degree 2 to IEC 61131-2.
Transportation and storage of SIMATIC MV420 and SIMATIC MV440
Transportation and storage of modules
SIMATIC MV440 exceeds the requirements of IEC 61131-2 for transportation and storage conditions.
The following information applies to modules transported or stored in their original packaging.
The climatic conditions correspond to IEC 60721-3-3, Class 3K7 for storage and IEC 60721-3-2,
Class 2K4 for transportation.
The mechanical conditions correspond to IEC 60721-3-2, Class 2M2.
Conditions
Permitted range
Free fall
≤ 1 m (up to 10 kg)
Temperature
-30 to +70° C
Atmospheric pressure 660 ... 1080 hPa,
corresponds to an altitude of 0 ... 3500 m
Relative humidity (at +25 °C)
5 to 95%, no condensation
Sinusoidal vibrations according to
IEC 60068-2-6
5 - 9 Hz: 3.5 mm
9 - 500 Hz: 9.8 m/s
2
Shock complying with IEC 60068-2-29
250 m/s
2
, 6 ms, 1000 shocks
Power supply for SIMATIC MV420 and SIMATIC MV440
Power supply
Supply voltage (UN)
24 ; (19.2 V DC ...28.8 V DC, safety extra low
voltage, SELV).
Fuse
Max. 4 A
Safety requirements complying with IEC 61131-2 corresponds to DIN EN 61131-2
Electromagnetic compatibility for SIMATIC MV420 and SIMATIC MV440
Electromagnetic compatibility
Pulse-shaped interference
Interference
Test voltage
Corr. to severity
Technical specifications
12.1 General technical specifications
SIMATIC MV420 / SIMATIC MV440
Operating Instructions, 10/2015, C79000-G8976-C334-03 399
Electromagnetic compatibility
Electrostatic discharge accord-
ing to IEC 61000-4-2
• Air discharge:
• Contact discharge:
±8 kV
±6 kV
3
Burst impulses (fast transient
interference) according to
IEC 61000-4-4
• 2 kV (power supply cable)
• 2 kV (signal line)
3
Surge complying with IEC 61000-4-5
Coupling
Test voltage
Corr. to severity
Asymmetrical 2 kV (power supply cable) direct
voltage with protective elements
3
Symmetrical 1 kV (power supply cable) direct
voltage with protective elements
3
Sine-shaped interference
RF interference
(electromagnetic fields)
Test values
Corr. to severity
Conforming to IEC 61000-4-3 10 V/m at 80 % amplitude modula-
tion of 1 kHz in the range from 80 to
1000 MHz
3
Conforming to IEC 61000-4-3 10 V/m at 50% pulse modulation at
900 MHz
3
RF interference on cable/cable
shields
Test values
Corr. to severity
Conforming to IEC 61000-4-6 Test voltage 10 V at 80% amplitude
modulation of 1 kHz in the range
from 9 kHz to 80 MHz
3
Emission
Limit class • Emitted interference of electromagnetic fields according to
EN 55011: Limit class A, group 1;
• Emitted interference via the AC input power supply according
to
EN 55011: Limit class A, group 1.
Technical specifications
12.2 Reader
SIMATIC MV420 / SIMATIC MV440
400 Operating Instructions, 10/2015, C79000-G8976-C334-03
12.2
Reader
SIMATIC MV440
Reader
Image acquisition • CCD chip 1/3", 640 x 480, square pixels; full-frame shutter
• CCD chip 1/3", 1024 x 768, square pixels; full-frame shut-
ter
• CCD chip 1/1.8", 1600 x 1200, square pixels; full-frame
shutter
Image data transmission
Triggered and automatic image acquisition
Casing
Aluminum die-casting
Dimensions (W x H x D) in mm
65 x 122 x 55
Weight • Approx. 0.45 kg without protective lens barrel
• Approx. 0.55 kg with protective lens barrel
Degree of protection
IP67 according to IEC 60529
Supply voltage, current consumption
• Type of supply voltage DC
• Supply voltage from:
– M16 Power/IO connector
– M12 ASM connector
24 V DC ±20%
• Supply voltage from:
– Power over Ethernet accord-
ing to IEEE802.3af (PoE),
however only phantom power
48 V DC, (min: 36 V DC, max: 57 V DC)
• Current consumption (without I/O
signals)
• 24 V DC: Maximum 270 mA
• PoE: Maximum 135 mA
• Making current (at 24 V DC) I1 max. 2 A; < 1 ms
• Mains buffering time
(at 24 V DC)
10 ms
Power over Ethernet (PoE)
• Powered Device (PD) Type 1, class 2 (6.49 W)
• Type of supply Phantom power (IEEE 802.af)
Technical specifications
12.2 Reader
SIMATIC MV420 / SIMATIC MV440
Operating Instructions, 10/2015, C79000-G8976-C334-03 401
Digital output signals*)
OUTPUT1 … OUTPUT5
floating and proof against short cir-
cuit
• With max. load current
Per output: 100 mA
• Max. total load current Across all outputs: 250 mA
• Max. short-circuit current Per output: 240 mA
Delays when
switching on and off
0 … 2 ms
*) All values of the output signals are relative to the OUTPUT_COMMON signal.
Input signals*)
INPUT1:
• Input resistance at 24 V DC
• Input voltage for "1" signal
• Input current for "1" signal
• Input voltage for "0" signal
• Input current for "0" signal
6 kΩ
15 … 30 V
2 ... 5 mA
0 ... 5 V
0 … 1.4 mA
INPUT2 ... INPUT5:
• Input resistance at 24 V DC
• Input voltage for "1" signal
• Input current for "1" signal
• Input voltage for "0" signal
• Input current for "0" signal
16 kΩ
15 … 30 V
0.6 ... 2 mA
0 ... 5 V
0 … 0.3 mA
*) All values of the input signals are relative to the INPUT_COMMON signal.
Strobe signal *)
Fast strobe output
Max. load current at 24 V DC:
25 mA
*) All values of the strobe signal are relative to chassis ground of the power supply.
SIMATIC MV420
Reader
Image acquisition CMOS chip 1/3", 768 x 480 (640 x 480), square pixels; global
shutter
Image data transmission
Triggered image acquisition
Casing
Aluminum die-casting
Technical specifications
12.2 Reader
SIMATIC MV420 / SIMATIC MV440
402 Operating Instructions, 10/2015, C79000-G8976-C334-03
Reader
Dimensions (W x H x D) in mm
53 x 86 x 40
Weight
approx. 0.25 kg
Degree of protection
IP67 according to IEC 60529
Input voltage range:
24 V DC ±20%
Max. current consumption at
24 V DC
170 mA (without I/O signals)
Starting current
I
1
max. 2 A; < 1 ms
Mains buffering time
(at 24 V DC):
10 ms
Digital output signals*)
OUTPUT2 … OUTPUT3
floating and short-circuit proof
• With max. load current
Per output: 100 mA
• Max. total load current Across all outputs: 100 mA
• Max. short-circuit current Per output: 240 mA
Delays when
switching on and off
0 … 2 ms
*) All values of the output signals are relative to the OUTPUT_COMMON signal.
Input signals*)
INPUT1 (trigger):
• Input resistance at 24 V DC
• Input voltage for "1" signal
• Input current for "1" signal
• Input voltage for "0" signal
• Input current for "0" signal
6 KΩ
15 ... 30 V
2 ... 5 mA
0 ... 5 V
0 … 1.4 mA
*) All values of the input signals are relative to the INPUT_COMMON signal.
Strobe signal *)
Fast strobe output
Max. load current at 24 V DC:
25 mA
*) All values of the strobe signal are relative to chassis ground of the power supply.
Technical specifications
12.3 Built-in ring light (SIMATIC MV440)
SIMATIC MV420 / SIMATIC MV440
Operating Instructions, 10/2015, C79000-G8976-C334-03 403
12.3
Built-in ring light (SIMATIC MV440)
6GF3440-8DA11, 6GF3440-8DA21, 6GF3440-
8DA31, 6GF3440-8DA41
Lighting distance
Up to 0.8 m
Light color/wavelength at a relative light intensity
of 0.2 ... 1.0
• 6GF3440-8DA11
• 6GF3440-8DA21
• 6GF3440-8DA31
• 6GF3440-8DA41
• Red/618 nm
• White/440 … 650 nm
• Green/513 … 543 nm
• Infrared/850 nm
Electrical data
Flash mode
• Duty cycle 8 %
• Max. exposure time 10 ms
Current consumption at 24 V DC
• Flash mode 1.6 W
• Continuous operation 2.4 W
Permissible ambient conditions
Operating temperature of total unit
0 … +50 °C
Storage temperature
-20 … +70 °C
Max. humidity
95%, non-condensing
Design, dimensions, weight
Mechanical dimensions
Outer diameter x inner diameter x height (mm)
54 x 34 x 55
Weight
20 g
12.4
External lighting unit
6GF3400-0LT01-7BA1 (IR)
6GF3400-0LT01-8DA1 (RED)
Lighting distance
500 ... 3 000 mm
Light color/wavelength at a relative light intensity
of 0.2 ... 1.0
• Red 625 nm
• Infrared 850 nm
Electrical data
Flash mode
Technical specifications
12.4 External lighting unit
SIMATIC MV420 / SIMATIC MV440
404 Operating Instructions, 10/2015, C79000-G8976-C334-03
6GF3400-0LT01-7BA1 (IR)
6GF3400-0LT01-8DA1 (RED)
• Duty cycle 40%
• Max. exposure time 10 ms
Power supply
24 V (18 ... 30 V)
Current consumption at 24 V DC (max. peak
value)
• Red 0.6 A
• Infrared 1.0 A
Permissible ambient conditions
Operating temperature
0 … +50 °C
Storage temperature
-30 … +80 °C
Max. humidity
95% at 25 °C
Design, dimensions, weight
Mechanical dimensions
Outer diameter x inner diameter x height (mm)
142 x 68 x 42.5
Weight
452 g
Degree of protection
IP67
Pin assignment for connector of 10 m cable (article number: 6GF3440-8BC4) with assignment
diagram
①
Pin 1/brown
24 V power supply
②
Pin 2/white
Trigger input
③
Pin 3/blue
NC
④
Pin 4/black
Ground
⑤
-
Position of the coding
Technical specifications
12.5 Pin assignment of the interfaces
SIMATIC MV420 / SIMATIC MV440
Operating Instructions, 10/2015, C79000-G8976-C334-03 405
12.5
Pin assignment of the interfaces
SIMATIC MV420 and SIMATIC MV440
Power IO RS-232 interface
Figure 12-1 Pin assignment power IO RS-232 connector (front view)
Table 12- 2 Power IO RS-232 connector: M16 with connector at one end (female, 12-pin, straight)
Connector/pin
Wire color
SIMATIC MV440 signal
SIMATIC MV420 signal
H
Red
24 V
24 V
G
Blue
0 V
0 V
K
Violet
INPUT1 (trigger)
INPUT1 (trigger)
D
Yellow
INPUT2/ OUTPUT2
OUTPUT2
L
Gray/pink
INPUT3/ OUTPUT3
OUTPUT3
C
Green
INPUT4/ OUTPUT4
ASM TxD_N
B
Brown
INPUT5/ OUTPUT5
ASM TxD_P
A
White
INPUT_COMMON
INPUT_COMMON
E
Gray
OUTPUT_COMMON
OUTPUT_COMMON
J
Black
Strobe
Strobe
F
Pink
RS-232 TxD
RS-232 TxD or ASM RxD_P
M
Red/blue
RS-232 RxD
RS-232 RxD or ASM RxD_N
Assignment pin assignment connector/wire color of the cable/signal connection reader
Ethernet port
Figure 12-2 Pin assignment Ethernet socket (front view)
Technical specifications
12.5 Pin assignment of the interfaces
SIMATIC MV420 / SIMATIC MV440
406 Operating Instructions, 10/2015, C79000-G8976-C334-03
Table 12- 3 IE connecting cable M12-180/M12-180:
M12 prefitted at both ends (male/male, 4-poe, D-coded)
Connector/pin
Wire color
Signal name
SIMATIC MV420 / SIMATIC
MV440 signal
1
Yellow
TxDP
Send data +
2 White RxD_P Received data +
3
Orange
TxDN
Send data -
4
Blue
RxD_N
Received data -
Assignment pin assignment socket/wire color of the cable/signal connection reader
SIMATIC MV440
ASM interface
Figure 12-3 Pin assignment ASM connector (SIMATIC MV440 only)
Table 12- 4 ASM cable, M12 (male, 8-pin, straight) / M12 (female, 8-pin, straight)
Connector/pin
Wire color
Signal name
SIMATIC MV440
1
White
24 V
24 V DC power supply
2
Brown
TXD_N
Send data -
3
Green
0 V
Ground
4
Yellow
TXD_P
Send data +
5
Gray
RXD_P
Received data +
6
Pink
RXD_N
Received data -
7 Blue Not connected -
8
Red
Shield
-
Assignment pin assignment socket/wire color of the cable/signal connection reader
SIMATIC MV420 / SIMATIC MV440
Operating Instructions, 10/2015, C79000-G8976-C334-03 407
Dimension drawings
13
All dimensions in mm.
SIMATIC MV440 reader
①
Protective cap for lens screw connection
④
Ethernet connection
②
Power IO RS-232 connection
⑤
LED displays
③
ASM connection
Dimension drawings
SIMATIC MV420 / SIMATIC MV440
408 Operating Instructions, 10/2015, C79000-G8976-C334-03
SIMATIC MV420 reader
①
Rotatable protective lens barrel
③
Ethernet socket
②
LED displays
④
Power IO RS-232 connection
Dimension drawings
SIMATIC MV420 / SIMATIC MV440
Operating Instructions, 10/2015, C79000-G8976-C334-03 409
SIMATIC MV440 with attached lighting unit and mounting plate
①
External ring light holder
⑤
Reader
②
Lighting unit MV400 LED ring light metal
red/metal IR clear / Lighting unit SIMATIC
Vision Sensor VS100
⑥
Torx screws M4x8
③
Socket for lighting unit
⑦
Reader mounting plate
④
IP65 protective lens barrel ∅ 65
Dimension drawings
SIMATIC MV420 / SIMATIC MV440
410 Operating Instructions, 10/2015, C79000-G8976-C334-03
Lighting unit MV400 LED ring light metal red/metal IR clear
Lighting unit SIMATIC Vision Sensor VS100
Dimension drawings
SIMATIC MV420 / SIMATIC MV440
Operating Instructions, 10/2015, C79000-G8976-C334-03 411
SIMATIC MV440 ring light holder
SIMATIC MV440 mounting plate
Dimension drawings
SIMATIC MV420 / SIMATIC MV440
412 Operating Instructions, 10/2015, C79000-G8976-C334-03
SIMATIC MV420 mounting plate with mounting bracket
Protective lens barrel SIMATIC MV440
Figure 13-1 Protective lens barrel ∅ 65 mm; metal/glass
Figure 13-2 Protective lens barrel ∅ 65 mm; plexiglass
Dimension drawings
SIMATIC MV420 / SIMATIC MV440
Operating Instructions, 10/2015, C79000-G8976-C334-03 413
Protective barrel extension
Figure 13-3 Protective barrel extension ∅ 65 mm
SIMATIC MV440 built-in ring light
Figure 13-4 Built-in ring light ∅ 54 mm
Dimension drawings
SIMATIC MV420 / SIMATIC MV440
414 Operating Instructions, 10/2015, C79000-G8976-C334-03
SIMATIC MV420 / SIMATIC MV440
Operating Instructions, 10/2015, C79000-G8976-C334-03 415
Components of the product/spares/accessories
14
This section describes the components of the SIMATIC MV420/SIMATIC MV440 readers
and their accessories. The readers can be ordered with various performance characteristics,
for example with standard resolution or high resolution. Depending on the requirements and
the application, the readers can be fitted with accessories.
"SIMATIC MV420 / SIMATIC MV440"
This section details accessories for both types of reader (Page 418).
"SIMATIC MV420"
This section details accessories for SIMATIC MV420 readers (Page 421) only.
"SIMATIC MV440"
This section details accessories for SIMATIC MV440 readers (Page 427) only.
Components of the product/spares/accessories
14.1 Readers
SIMATIC MV420 / SIMATIC MV440
416 Operating Instructions, 10/2015, C79000-G8976-C334-03
14.1
Readers
Note
Connecting cables are not supplied with the device
The connecting cables required are not supplied with the device.
The following tables list the article numbers of the complete packages and the individual
components.
Article number
Reader
Description
6GF3420-0AA20
SIMATIC MV420 SR-B • Basic unit with all essential functions
• Resolution of the reader 768 x 480 or
640 x 480 pixels
• For one- and two-dimensional codes
• Image field and distance variable
• IP67
• Light: red, lens: 6 mm
6GF3420-0AA40
SIMATIC MV420 SR-P • Expanded functionality
• Resolution of the reader 768 x 480 or
640 x 480 pixels
• For one- and two-dimensional codes
• Image field and distance variable
• IP67
• Light: red, lens: 6 mm
6GF3420-0AX20
SIMATIC MV420 SR-B
Body
• Basic unit with all essential functions
• Resolution of the reader 768 x 480 or
640 x 480 pixels
• For one- and two-dimensional codes
• No lighting, lens or protective lens barrel (can be
ordered separately)
6GF3420-0AX40
SIMATIC MV420 SR-P
Body
• Expanded functionality
• Resolution of the reader 768 x 480 or
640 x 480 pixels
• For one- and two-dimensional codes
• Image field and distance variable
• No lighting, lens or protective lens barrel (can be
ordered separately)
Components of the product/spares/accessories
14.1 Readers
SIMATIC MV420 / SIMATIC MV440
Operating Instructions, 10/2015, C79000-G8976-C334-03 417
Article number
Reader
Description
6GF3440-1CD10
SIMATIC MV440 SR • Resolution of the reader 640 x 480 pixels
• For one- and two-dimensional codes
• For OCR and verification (license required)
• Image field and distance variable
• With PoE
• D65 protective lens barrel PC-PC
– IP67 (article numbers 6GF3440-8AC11 and
6GF3440-8AC21)
– IP40 (without article number
6GF3440-8AC118AC11 and
6GF3440-8AC21)
• No lighting, no lens
6GF3440-1GE10
SIMATIC MV440 HR • Resolution of the reader 1024 x 768 pixels
• For one- and two-dimensional codes
• For OCR and verification (license required)
• Image field and distance variable
• With PoE
• D65 protective lens barrel PC-PC
– IP67 (article numbers 6GF3440-8AC11 and
6GF3440-8AC21)
– IP40 (without article number 6GF3440-8AC11
and 6GF3440-8AC21)
• No lighting, no lens
6GF3440-1LE10
SIMATIC MV440 UR • Resolution of the reader 1600 x 1200 pixels
• For one- and two-dimensional codes
• for OCR and verification (license required)
• Image field and distance variable
• With PoE
• D65 protective lens barrel PC-PC
– IP67 (article numbers 6GF3440-8AC11 and
6GF3440-8AC21)
– IP40 (without article number 6GF3440-8AC11
and 6GF3440-8AC21)
• No lighting, no lens
Components of the product/spares/accessories
14.2 Accessories
SIMATIC MV420 / SIMATIC MV440
418 Operating Instructions, 10/2015, C79000-G8976-C334-03
14.2
Accessories
14.2.1
SIMATIC MV420 / SIMATIC MV440
14.2.1.1
Further accessories
You will find the accessories below:
● In catalog ID 10
● On the Internet at SIMATIC Ident home page (http://www.siemens.com/ident) or Industry
Mall Homepage (http://www.siemens.com/industrymall).
Cables
● Ethernet/PROFINET - connectors fitted by user
● For ASM
Lens accessories
● Lenses
● Filter
Plug-in power unit for commissioning and testing
Mechanical holders
● Holder for external MV400 lamps
● Trimetal holders
Lamps
14.2.1.2
External lighting units
Note
See the dimension drawings in the image database for dimensions
You will find the exact dimensions in the dimension
drawings in the Image Database
(
http://www.automation.siemens.com/bilddb/) of Siemens AG.
Components of the product/spares/accessories
14.2 Accessories
SIMATIC MV420 / SIMATIC MV440
Operating Instructions, 10/2015, C79000-G8976-C334-03 419
Lighting units for external lighting
Article number
External lamps
Note
6GF3400-0LT01-7BA1
MV400 LED ring light metal IR clear
• Power supply: 24 V (18 ... 30 V)
• Light source: 850 nm
• Lighting distance: 500 … 3000 mm
• Protective lens barrel, suitable dimensions in mm
(outer diameter x inner diameter x height):
142 x 68 x 42.5
• Degree of protection IP67
• Connector compatible with previous
external 16.5 V ring lamps, e.g.
6GF9004-7BA01.
• Suitable for all SIMATIC MV400
readers
• No mounting brackets ship with the
product.
6GF3400-0LT01-8DA1
MV400 LED ring light metal red clear
• Power supply: 24 V (18 ... 30 V)
• Light source: 625 nm
• Lighting distance: 500 … 3000 mm
• Protective lens barrel, suitable dimensions in mm
(outer diameter x inner diameter x height):
142 x 68 x 42.5
• Degree of protection IP67
• Connector compatible with previous
external 16.5 V ring lamps, e.g.
6GF9004 8DA01.
• Suitable for all SIMATIC MV400
readers
• No mounting brackets ship with the
product.
Ring light holder
Article number
Ring light holder
Note
6GF3440-8CD01
Ring light holder for SIMATIC MV400 ring
lamps:
• 6GF3400-0LT01-7BA1
• 6GF3400-0LT01-8DA1
• Dimensions (W x H x D): 92 x 76 x 46 mm
• Screws are supplied.
• Replaces 6GF3440-8CD
Components of the product/spares/accessories
14.2 Accessories
SIMATIC MV420 / SIMATIC MV440
420 Operating Instructions, 10/2015, C79000-G8976-C334-03
Cables
Article number
Cables
Note
6GF3440-8BC4
Cables suitable for external ring lamps:
• 6GF3400-0LT01-7BA1
• 6GF3400-0LT01-8DA1
• M12, open end, 4-pin, not capable of trail-
ing
• Length 10 m
Cable is suitable for MV400 and
SIMATIC VS100 ring lamps.
6GF3440-8BD1
Adapter cables for external ring lamps:
• 6GF3400-0LT01-7BA1
• 6GF3400-0LT01-8DA1
• Power supply via Power DIO RS-232
(M16, 12-pin female)
• Effective length 25 cm
• Cable is suitable for MV400
ring lamps.
• Cable allows the direct con-
nection of external ring lights
to SIMATIC MV420 and
SIMATIC MV440.
14.2.1.3
Documentation for SIMATIC MV420 and SIMATIC MV440
Free documentation downloads on the Internet
SIMATIC MV420 (https://support.industry.siemens.com/cs/us/en/ps/15148/man)
SIMATIC MV440 (https://support.industry.siemens.com/cs/us/en/ps/15149/man)
SIMATIC Manual Collection on DVD
SIMATIC Manual Collection (https://support.industry.siemens.com/cs/us/en/ps/6ES7998-
8XC01-8YE0)
All manuals for S7-1500/1200/200/300/400, C7, LOGO!, SIMATIC DP, PC, PG, STEP 7,
engineering software, runtime software, SIMATIC PCS 7, SIMATIC HMI, SIMATIC NET,
SIMATIC Ident.
● in 5 Languages
● Article number: 6ES7998-8XC01-8YE0
Components of the product/spares/accessories
14.2 Accessories
SIMATIC MV420 / SIMATIC MV440
Operating Instructions, 10/2015, C79000-G8976-C334-03 421
14.2.2
SIMATIC MV420
14.2.2.1
Fittings for mounting
Article number
Fittings for mounting
Note
6GF3420-0AC00-1AA0
Mounting plate for reader,
SIMATIC MV420
W x H x D (in mm): 40 x 54 x 30,
Material: stainless steel (2 mm)
Versatile application; with holes
14.2.2.2
Reader lens
Reader lenses supported
Note
SIMATIC MV420 SR-B/P
SIMATIC
MV420 SR-B/P (article number 6GF3420-0AA20, 6GF3420-0AA40) is supplied
with the pre
-mounted lens kit 6GF3420-0AC00-0LK0 (focal distance of 6 mm) and the red
internal lamp 6GF34
20-0AC00-1LT0.
Article number
Reader lenses
Remark
6GF3420-0AC00-0LK0
MV420 LENS KIT 6 mm F/5.6 • Fixed focal distance (6 mm)
• Fixed aperture (F/5.6)
• MV420 protective lens barrel
• Fittings for mounting
• IP67
6GF3420-0AC00-1LK0
MV420 LENS KIT 16 mm F/4 • Fixed focal distance (16 mm)
• Fixed aperture (F/4)
• MV420 protective lens barrel
• Fittings for mounting
• IP67
Field of vision depending on camera distance
Note
Values in the diagrams are subject to tolerances
The values in the two diagrams have certain tolerances.
Components of the product/spares/accessories
14.2 Accessories
SIMATIC MV420 / SIMATIC MV440
422 Operating Instructions, 10/2015, C79000-G8976-C334-03
X axis
Height of field of vision (mm)
Y axis
Width of field of vision (mm)
Diagonal Distance from camera to object (mm)
For a focal distance of 6 mm
Figure 14-1 16:10 format
Components of the product/spares/accessories
14.2 Accessories
SIMATIC MV420 / SIMATIC MV440
Operating Instructions, 10/2015, C79000-G8976-C334-03 423
For a focal distance of 16 mm
Figure 14-2 16:10 format
14.2.2.3
Protective tube
Article number
Designation
Note
6GF3420-0AC00-2AA0
MV420 protective lens barrel, set of
spares
• 2 x MV420 protective lens
barrel
• Fittings supplied
14.2.2.4
Built-in ring light
Note
SIMATIC MV420 SR-B/P
In the SIMATIC
MV420 SR-B/P (6GF3420-0AA20, 6GF3420-0AA40), the integrated red
MV420
ring light (6GF3420-0AC00-1LT0) is already fitted.
Components of the product/spares/accessories
14.2 Accessories
SIMATIC MV420 / SIMATIC MV440
424 Operating Instructions, 10/2015, C79000-G8976-C334-03
Article number
Ring light
Note
6GF3420-0AC00-1LT0
Built-in MV420 red ring light for SIMATIC MV420
Light source: Red/amber LED (618 nm)
Fittings supplied
6GF3420-0AC00-2LT0
Built-in MV420 white ring light for SIMATIC MV420
Light source: LED white (425 to 610 nm)
Fittings supplied
6GF3420-0AC00-3LT0
Built-in MV420 IR ring light for SIMATIC MV420
Light source: Infrared LED (888 nm)
Fittings supplied
14.2.2.5
Cables
The SIMATIC MV420 reader is fitted with an industrial M12 plug and an M16 socket. The
connectors have the following functions:
● M12 – Ethernet cable M12/RJ-45
● M16 - Power IO RS-232 cable (plus ASM)
Note
Ordering information
•
Either one or two cables are required depending on the application. The cables are
not part of a complete package and must always be ordered separately.
•
There is more than one version of each cable type. In this case, you simply need to
order one version per reader.
M12 – Ethernet cable M12/RJ-45
This cable connects the reader with a communications partner over Ethernet.
Due to its short length, the following cable is intended only for commissioning and service:
Article number
IE connecting cable M12-180/
IE FC RJ45-145
Note
6XV1871-5TH20
Prefitted IE FC TP trailing cable
GP 2 x 2 (PROFINET type C)
for commissioning, service and
installation with:
• 4-pin M12 connector (D-
coded)
• IE FC RJ45 connector
• Degree of protection
IP65/IP67
• Length: 2 m
Suitable for all SIMATIC MV400
readers.
Other cables of type 6XV1871-
5... can be found in the current
"Industrial Identification Sys-
tems" (ID 10) catalog and the
Industry Mall.
Components of the product/spares/accessories
14.2 Accessories
SIMATIC MV420 / SIMATIC MV440
Operating Instructions, 10/2015, C79000-G8976-C334-03 425
The following industrial cables are used for fixed installation:
Article number
IE connecting cable
M12-180/M12-180 (length)
Note
6XV1870-8AE30
0.3 m
Prefitted IE FC TP trailing cable
GP 2 x 2 (PROFINET type C):
• M12 prefitted at both sides
(male/male) with two 4-pin
M12 connectors (D-coded)
• Degree of protection IP65/67
• Lengths: see adjacent col-
umn
6XV1870-8AE50
0.5 m
6XV1870-8AH10
1.0 m
6XV1870-8AH15
1.5 m
6XV1870-8AH20
2.0 m
6XV1870-8AH30
3.0 m
6XV1870-8AH50
5.0 m
6XV1870-8AN10
10 m
6XV1870-8AN15
15 m
Special lengths with cable outlet
Note
Special lengths with 90° or 180° cable outlet
You can order special lengths with a 90° or 180° cable outlet angle, at:
(
https://support.industry.siemens.com/cs/us/en/view/26999294)
The cables are supplied with M12 plugs fitted at both ends. When necessary, the cables can
be shortened at the other end from the reader and fitted with the following connectors, for
example for an RJ-45 infrastructure:
Article number
IE FC RJ-45 Plug 180
Note
6GK1901-1BB10-2AA0
Pack with 1 plug
RJ45 plug-in connector for In-
dustrial Ethernet with a rugged
metal housing and integrated
insulation displacement contacts
for connecting Industrial Ether-
net FC installation cables; with:
• 180° cable outlet
• For network components
and CPs/CPUs with Indus-
trial Ethernet interface
6GK1901-1BB10-2AB0
Pack with 10 plugs
6GK1901-1BB10-2AE0
Pack with 50 plugs
Note
More cables and connectors
You will find other cables and
connectors in the Siemens AG ordering system.
Components of the product/spares/accessories
14.2 Accessories
SIMATIC MV420 / SIMATIC MV440
426 Operating Instructions, 10/2015, C79000-G8976-C334-03
M16 – ASM cable
This cable is for connection to ASM devices such as RFC180C and ASM456. Power can
also be supplied via this cable allowing the reader to be operated with only one cable. This
cable is suitable only for the SIMATIC MV420.
Article number
Cables
Note
6GF3420-0AC00-2CB0
Adapter cable for RFID commu-
nication modules (ASM)
• M16 connector
(SIMATIC MV420) on M12
connector (communication
module:
M12 (male, 8-pin, straight) /
M16 (female, 12-pin,
straight)
• Length: 2 m
• Can be expanded in any
way with standard communi-
cation module cables
Suitable for readers:
• 6GF3420-0AA20
• 6GF3420-0AA40
• 6GF3420-0AX20
• 6GF3420-0AX40
M16 power cable / power I/O cable / power I/O RS-232 cable
These cables are used for the camera power supply. The power IO RS-232 cable also has
wires for connecting digital inputs/outputs and the RS-232 serial interface.
Article number
Cables
Note
6GF3400-0BH15
1.5 m MV400 push-pull power
cable
• M16 with connector at one
end (female, 12-pin, straight)
• Prefitted push-pull
• For power supply only, no
I/O, no RS 232
• Length: 1.5 m
Suitable for all SIMATIC MV400
readers
6GF3400-1BH20
2 m MV400 push-pull power
cable
• M16 with connector at one
end (female, 12-pin, straight)
• Open end
• Push-pull connector supplied
• For power supply only, no
I/O, no RS-232
• Length: 2 m
Suitable for all SIMATIC MV400
readers
Components of the product/spares/accessories
14.2 Accessories
SIMATIC MV420 / SIMATIC MV440
Operating Instructions, 10/2015, C79000-G8976-C334-03 427
Article number
Cables
Note
6GF3440-8BA2
SIMATIC MV440/
SIMATIC MV420 power IO RS-
232 cable
• M16 with connector at one
end (female, 12-pin, straight)
• Open end
• Length: 10 m
• Power, DI/DO, RS-232 cable
Suitable for all SIMATIC MV400
readers
6GF3440-8BA4
SIMATIC MV440/
SIMATIC MV420 Power IO RS-
232 cable
• M16 with connector at one
end (female, 12-pin, straight)
• Open end
• Length: 30 m
• Power, DI/DO, RS-232 cable
Suitable for all SIMATIC MV400
readers
14.2.3
SIMATIC MV440
14.2.3.1
Fittings for mounting
Article number
Fittings for mounting
Note
6GF3440-8CA
Mounting plate for reader,
SIMATIC MV440
W x H x D (in mm): 80 x 80 x 60,
Material: stainless steel (thick-
ness: 4 mm)
Mounting: Metric thread, photo thread
(1/4", 2 x center)
6GF9002-7AD
Triple plate holding system,
SIMATIC MV440
W x H x D (in mm):
165 x 175 x 65,
Material: stainless steel (thick-
ness: 4 mm)
Suitable for mounting of an MV440
with mounting plate 6GF3440-8CA
Components of the product/spares/accessories
14.2 Accessories
SIMATIC MV420 / SIMATIC MV440
428 Operating Instructions, 10/2015, C79000-G8976-C334-03
14.2.3.2
Reader lens
Reader lenses supported
Article number
Reader lenses
Remark
6GF9001-1BB01
Mini lens 6 mm,
1:1.4 PENTAX C60636KP
• Fixed focal distance
• Aperture and focus adjustable
• D = 32 mm, L = 37.5 mm
6GF9001-1BE01
Mini lens 8.5 mm,
1:1.5 PENTAX C815B(TH)
• Fixed focal distance
• Aperture and focus adjustable
• D = 42 mm, L = 47 mm
6GF9001-1BL01
Mini lens 12 mm,
1:1.4 PENTAX H1214-M(KP)
• Fixed focal distance
• Aperture and focus adjustable
• D = 29.5 mm, L = 35.7 mm
6GF9001-1BF01
Mini lens 16 mm,
1:1.4 PENTAX C1614-M(KP)
• Fixed focal distance
• Aperture and focus adjustable
• D = 29.5 mm, L = 37.2 mm
6GF9001-1BG01
Mini lens 25 mm,
1:1.4 PENTAX C2514-M(KP)
• Fixed focal distance
• Aperture and focus adjustable
• D = 29.5 mm, L = 38.9 mm
6GF9001-1BH01
Mini lens 35 mm,
1:1.6 PENTAX C3516-M(KP)
• Fixed focal distance
• Aperture and focus adjustable
• D = 29.5 mm, L = 41.4 mm
6GF9001-1BJ01
Mini lens 50 mm,
1:2.8 PENTAX C5028-M(KP)
• Fixed focal distance
• Aperture and focus adjustable
• D = 29.5 mm, L = 38 mm
6GF9001-1BK01
Mini lens 75 mm,
1:2.8 PENTAX C7528-M(KP))
• Fixed focal distance
• Aperture and focus adjustable
• D = 34 mm, L = 63.6 mm
Finding the suitable lens and the size of the viewing window
Note
Configuration: necessary for finding the suitable lens
The configuration is used to find the suitable lens.
•
Use the configuration table.
Components of the product/spares/accessories
14.2 Accessories
SIMATIC MV420 / SIMATIC MV440
Operating Instructions, 10/2015, C79000-G8976-C334-03 429
You require the configuration table to find out which lens is suitable for SR, HR and UR
readers.
Table 14- 1 Configuration table
Configu-
ration
Requirements
Components
Article number
Remark
I
Near field
(from 7 to 80 cm)
Built-in ring light red
6GF3440-8DA11
Compact variant, minimal cabling
work required.
PC = Polycarbonate
PMMA = Polymethyl methacrylate
Built-in white ring light 6GF3440-8DA21
Built-in green ring light
6GF3440-8DA31
Built-in ring light, infrared 6GF3440-8DA41
Protective lens barrel
∅ 65 metal/glass
6GF3440-8AC11
Protective lens barrel
∅ 65 metal/PMMA
6GF3440-8AC21
Protective lens barrel
∅ 65 PC/PC
6GF3440-8AC12
E
Far field
(from 0.5 to 3 m)
External ring lamp
Red light, clear
6GF3400-0LT01-
8BA1
Accessories for operating the exter-
nal lamps
• External ring light holder
6GF3440-8CD01
• Connecting cable for the lamp:
– Variant 1
Connection to the cabinet,
cable length 10 m,
6GF3440-8BC4
– Version 2
Direct connection to
SIMATIC MV420 or
SIMATIC MV440. The ring
light is supplied and con-
trolled through the Power
DIO RS-
232 cable along with
the reader. M16 male con-
nector, M16 female connect-
or, M12 female connector,
cable length 25 cm,
6GF3440-8BD1.
External ring lamp
IR light, clear
6GF3400-0LT01-
7BA1
Protective lens barrel
∅ 65 metal/glass
6GF3440-8AC11
Protective lens barrel
∅ 65 PC/PMMA
6GF3440-8AC21
Protective lens barrel
∅ 65 PC/PC
6GF3440-8AC12
T
Protective lens barrel
∅ 65, without internal
lamp
Protective lens barrel
∅ 65 metal/glass
6GF3440-8AC11 Protects wide lenses
Protective lens barrel
∅ 65 metal/PMMA
6GF3440-8AC21
Components of the product/spares/accessories
14.2 Accessories
SIMATIC MV420 / SIMATIC MV440
430 Operating Instructions, 10/2015, C79000-G8976-C334-03
SR reader
The table below shows the suitable lens and the corresponding viewing window for the SR
readers (resolution 640 x 480 pixels) for a data matrix code of the size 44 mm x 44 mm and
a cell size of 1 mm.
Distance lens front edge –
object [in m]
Article number of
the lens
Focal distance
of the lens
[f in mm; light
intensity]
Image width
in mm
Image height
in mm
Configuration
0.3
6GF9001-1BL01
f = 12; 1:1.4
121
90
I; (E; T)
0.4 6GF9001-1BF01 f = 16;1:1.4 123 91 I; (E; T)
0.5
6GF9001-1BF01
f = 16;1:1.4
152
114
I; (E; T)
0.6
6GF9001-1BF01
f = 16;1:1.4
182
136
I; (E; T)
0.7
6GF9001-1BG01
f = 25;1:1.4
134
100
I; (E; T)
0.8
6GF9001-1BG01
f = 25;1:1.4
153
115
I; (E; T)
0.9
6GF9001-1BG01
f = 25;1:1.4
173
129
E; T
1
6GF9001-1BG01
f = 25;1:1.4
192
143
E; T
0.9
6GF9001-1BH01
f = 35; 1:1.6
126
94
E; T
1
6GF9001-1BH01
f = 35; 1:1.6
140
105
E; T
1.1
6GF9001-1BH01
f = 35; 1:1.6
154
115
E; T
1.2
6GF9001-1BH01
f = 35; 1:1.6
167
125
E; T
1.3
6GF9001-1BH01
f = 35; 1:1.6
181
135
E; T
1.4
6GF9001-1BH01
f = 35; 1:1.6
194
145
E; T
1.3
6GF9001-1BJ01
f = 50; 1:2.8
117
87
E; T
1.4
6GF9001-1BJ01
f = 50; 1:2.8
126
94
E; T
1.5
6GF9001-1BJ01
f = 50; 1:2.8
136
101
E; T
1.6
6GF9001-1BJ01
f = 50; 1:2.8
145
108
E; T
1.7
6GF9001-1BJ01
f = 50; 1:2.8
155
116
E; T
1.8
6GF9001-1BJ01
f = 50; 1:2.8
164
123
E; T
1.9 6GF9001-1BJ01 f = 50; 1:2.8 174 130 E; T
2
6GF9001-1BJ01
f = 50; 1:2.8
183
137
E; T
1.8
6GF9001-1BK01
f = 75; 1:2.8
112
84
E; T
1.9
6GF9001-1BK01
f = 75; 1:2.8
118
88
E; T
2.0
6GF9001-1BK01
f = 75; 1:2.8
125
93
E; T
2.1
6GF9001-1BK01
f = 75; 1:2.8
131
98
E; T
2.2
6GF9001-1BK01
f = 75; 1:2.8
137
103
E; T
2.3 6GF9001-1BK01
+ 6GF9001-1BV
f = 75; 1:2.8 163 122 E; T
2.4 6GF9001-1BK01
+ 6GF9001-1BV
f = 75; 1:2.8 163 122 E; T
2.5 6GF9001-1BK01
+ 6GF9001-1BV
f = 75; 1:2.8 163 122 E; T
2.6 6GF9001-1BK01
+ 6GF9001-1BV
f = 75; 1:2.8 163 122 E; T
Components of the product/spares/accessories
14.2 Accessories
SIMATIC MV420 / SIMATIC MV440
Operating Instructions, 10/2015, C79000-G8976-C334-03 431
Distance lens front edge –
object [in m]
Article number of
the lens
Focal distance
of the lens
[f in mm; light
intensity]
Image width
in mm
Image height
in mm
Configuration
2.7 6GF9001-1BK01
+ 6GF9001-1BV
f = 75; 1:2.8 169 126 E; T
2.8 6GF9001-1BK01
+ 6GF9001-1BV
f = 75;1:2.8 175 131 E; T
2.9 6GF9001-1BK01
+ 6GF9001-1BV
f = 75; 1:2.8 182 136 E; T
3.0 6GF9001-1BK01
+ 6GF9001-1BV
f = 75; 1:2.8 188 141 E; T
HR reader
The table below shows the suitable lens and the corresponding viewing window for the HR
readers (resolution 1024 x 768) for a data matrix code of the size 44 mm x 44 mm, a cell size
of 1 mm.
Distance lens front edge –
object [in m]
Article number of
the lens
Focal distance
of the lens
[f in mm; light
intensity]
Image width
in mm
Image height
in mm
Configuration
0.3
6GF9001-1BL01
f = 12; 1:1.4
121
90
I; (E; T)
0.4
6GF9001-1BL01
f = 12; 1:1.4
161
120
I; (E; T)
0.4
6GF9001-1BF01
f = 16;1:1.4
123
91
I; (E; T)
0.5
6GF9001-1BF01
f = 16;1:1.4
152
114
I; (E; T)
0.6
6GF9001-1BF01
f = 16;1:1.4
182
136
I; (E; T)
0.6
6GF9001-1BG01
f = 25;1:1.4
115
86
I; (E; T)
0.7
6GF9001-1BG01
f = 25;1:1.4
134
100
I; (E; T)
0.8
6GF9001-1BG01
f = 25;1:1.4
153
115
I; (E; T)
0.9
6GF9001-1BG01
f = 25;1:1.4
173
129
E; T
1.0
6GF9001-1BG01
f = 25;1:1.4
192
143
E; T
0.9
6GF9001-1BH01
f = 35; 1:1.6
126
94
E; T
1.0
6GF9001-1BH01
f = 35; 1:1.6
140
105
E; T
1.1
6GF9001-1BH01
f = 35; 1:1.6
154
115
E; T
1.2
6GF9001-1BH01
f = 35; 1:1.6
167
125
E; T
1.3 6GF9001-1BH01 f = 35; 1:1.6 181 135 E; T
1.4
6GF9001-1BH01
f = 35; 1:1.6
194
145
E; T
1.3 6GF9001-1BJ01 f = 50; 1:2.8 117 87 E; T
1.4
6GF9001-1BJ01
f = 50; 1:2.8
126
94
E; T
1.5
6GF9001-1BJ01
f = 50; 1:2.8
136
101
E; T
1.6
6GF9001-1BJ01
f = 50; 1:2.8
145
108
E; T
1.7
6GF9001-1BJ01
f = 50; 1:2.8
155
116
E; T
1.8
6GF9001-1BJ01
f = 50; 1:2.8
164
123
E; T
1.9
6GF9001-1BJ01
f = 50; 1:2.8
174
130
E; T
Components of the product/spares/accessories
14.2 Accessories
SIMATIC MV420 / SIMATIC MV440
432 Operating Instructions, 10/2015, C79000-G8976-C334-03
Distance lens front edge –
object [in m]
Article number of
the lens
Focal distance
of the lens
[f in mm; light
intensity]
Image width
in mm
Image height
in mm
Configuration
2.0
6GF9001-1BJ01
f = 50; 1:2.8
183
137
E; T
1.8 6GF9001-1BK01 f = 75; 1:2.8 112 84 E; T
1.9
6GF9001-1BK01
f = 75; 1:2.8
118
88
E; T
2.0 6GF9001-1BK01 f = 75; 1:2.8 125 93 E; T
2.1
6GF9001-1BK01
f = 75; 1:2.8
131
98
E; T
2.2
6GF9001-1BK01
f = 75; 1:2.8
137
103
E; T
2.3
6GF9001-1BK01
f = 75; 1:2.8
144
107
E; T
2.4
6GF9001-1BK01
f = 75; 1:2.8
150
112
E; T
2.5
6GF9001-1BK01
f = 75; 1:2.8
156
117
E; T
2.6
6GF9001-1BK01
f = 75; 1:2.8
163
122
E; T
2.7
6GF9001-1BK01
f = 75; 1:2.8
169
126
E; T
2.8
6GF9001-1BK01
f = 75; 1:2.8
175
131
E; T
2.9
6GF9001-1BK01
f = 75;1:2.8
182
136
E; T
3.0
6GF9001-1BK01
f = 75; 1:2.8
188
141
E; T
UR readers
The table below shows the suitable lens and the corresponding viewing window for a UR
reader (resolution 1600 x 1200 pixels) for a data matrix code of the size 44 mm x 44 mm, a
cell size of 1 mm.
Distance lens front edge –
object in m
Article number of
the lens
Focal distance
of the lens
[f in mm; light
intensity]
Image width
in mm
Image height
in mm
Configuration
0.2
6GF9001-1BL01
f = 12; 1:1.4
121
91
I; (E; T)
0.3
6GF9001-1BL01
f = 12; 1:1.4
177
133
I; (E; T)
0.4 6GF9001-1BL01
Only suitable for
distances of up to
0.5 m!
f = 12; 1:1.4 233 175 I; (E; T)
0.3
6GF9001-1BF01
f = 16;1:1.4
136
102
I; (E; T)
0.4
6GF9001-1BF01
f = 16;1:1.4
181
136
I; (E; T)
0.5
6GF9001-1BF01
f = 16;1:1.4
226
170
I; (E; T)
0.5 6GF9001-1BG01 f = 25;1:1.4 142 107 I; (E; T)
0.6
6GF9001-1BG01
f = 25;1:1.4
169
127
I; (E; T)
0.7
6GF9001-1BG01
f = 25;1:1.4
197
148
I; (E; T)
0.8
6GF9001-1BG01
f = 25;1:1.4
225
169
I; (E; T)
0.9
6GF9001-1BG01
f = 25;1:1.4
253
190
E; T
1
6GF9001-1BG01
f = 25;1:1.4
281
211
E; T
0.9
6GF9001-1BH01
f = 35; 1:1.6
186
140
E; T
Components of the product/spares/accessories
14.2 Accessories
SIMATIC MV420 / SIMATIC MV440
Operating Instructions, 10/2015, C79000-G8976-C334-03 433
Distance lens front edge –
object in m
Article number of
the lens
Focal distance
of the lens
[f in mm; light
intensity]
Image width
in mm
Image height
in mm
Configuration
1
6GF9001-1BH01
f = 35; 1:1.6
206
155
E; T
1.1 6GF9001-1BH01 f = 35; 1:1.6 226 170 E; T
1.2
6GF9001-1BH01
f = 35; 1:1.6
246
185
E; T
1.3 6GF9001-1BH01 f = 35; 1:1.6 266 200 E; T
1.4
6GF9001-1BH01
f = 35; 1:1.6
286
215
E; T
1.3
6GF9001-1BJ01
f = 50; 1:2.8
174
131
E; T
1.4
6GF9001-1BJ01
f = 50; 1:2.8
188
141
E; T
1.5
6GF9001-1BJ01
f = 50; 1:2.8
202
152
E; T
1.6
6GF9001-1BJ01
f = 50; 1:2.8
216
162
E; T
1.7
6GF9001-1BJ01
f = 50; 1:2.8
230
173
E; T
1.8
6GF9001-1BJ01
f = 50; 1:2.8
243
182
E; T
1.9
6GF9001-1BJ01
f = 50; 1:2.8
257
193
E; T
2
6GF9001-1BJ01
f = 50; 1:2.8
270
203
E; T
1.8
6GF9001-1BK01
f = 75; 1:2.8
170
128
E; T
1.9
6GF9001-1BK01
f = 75; 1:2.8
180
135
E; T
2.0
6GF9001-1BK01
f = 75; 1:2.8
190
143
E; T
2.1
6GF9001-1BK01
f = 75; 1:2.8
200
150
E; T
2.2
6GF9001-1BK01
f = 75; 1:2.8
210
157
E; T
2.3
6GF9001-1BK01
f = 75; 1:2.8
219
164
E; T
2.4
6GF9001-1BK01
f = 75; 1:2.8
227
171
E; T
2.5 6GF9001-1BK01 f = 75; 1:2.8 236 177 E; T
2.6
6GF9001-1BK01
f = 75; 1:2.8
246
185
E; T
2.7
6GF9001-1BK01
f = 75; 1:2.8
256
192
E; T
2.8
6GF9001-1BK01
f = 75; 1:2.8
265
199
E; T
2.9
6GF9001-1BK01
f = 75; 1:2.8
275
207
E; T
3.0
6GF9001-1BK01
f = 75; 1:2.8
284
214
E; T
14.2.3.3
Protective lens barrel
Note
See the dimension drawings in the image database for dimensions
You
will find the exact dimensions in the dimension drawings in the Image Database
(
http://www.automation.siemens.com/bilddb/) of Siemens AG.
The protective lens barrel protects the mounted C-mount lenses with a very low IP-class of
protection from influences such as water and oil
Components of the product/spares/accessories
14.2 Accessories
SIMATIC MV420 / SIMATIC MV440
434 Operating Instructions, 10/2015, C79000-G8976-C334-03
Protective lens barrel
Protective lens barrel (diameter: 65 mm) that protects the lens and the internal lamp:
● For built-in metal/glass lamps
● For built-in plexiglass lamps
Protective lens barrel for built-in lamps
Article number
Protective lens barrel
Note
6GF3440-8AC11
D65 protective lens barrel metal/glass
Degree of protection: IP67 for SIMATIC MV440 read-
ers
• Front pane: Glass
• Inner diameter: 57 mm
• Max. lens length: 57 mm
See also "Protective lens barrel extension"
• Suitable lenses (article number): For
example,
– 6GF9001-1BL01
– ...-1BF01
– ...-1BG01
– ...-1BH01
– ...-1BJ01
• Suitable lamps (article number):
6GF3440-8DA1
W x H x D [mm]: 65 x 65 x 60
6GF3440-8AC21
D65 protective lens barrel metal PMMA
Degree of protection: IP67 for SIMATIC MV440 read-
ers
• Front pane: PMMA
• Inner diameter: 57 mm
• Max. lens length: 57 mm
See also "Protective lens barrel extension"
• Suitable lenses (article number): For
example,
– 6GF9001-1BL01
– ...-1BF01
– ...-1BG01
– ...-1BH01
– ...-1BJ01
• Suitable lamps (article number):
6GF3440-8DA1
W x H x D [mm]: 65 x 65 x 60
6GF3440-8AC12
D65 protective lens barrel
polycarbonate-polycarbonate
Degree of protection: IP67 for SIMATIC MV440 read-
ers
• Front pane: Polycarbonate
• Inner diameter: 53 mm
• Max. lens length: 57 mm
See also "Protective lens barrel extension"
• Suitable lenses (article number): For
example,
– 6GF9001-1BL01
– ...-1BF01
– ...-1BG01
– ...-1BH01
– ...-1BJ01
• Suitable lamps (article number):
6GF3440-8DA1
W x H x D [mm]: 65 x 65 x 60
Components of the product/spares/accessories
14.2 Accessories
SIMATIC MV420 / SIMATIC MV440
Operating Instructions, 10/2015, C79000-G8976-C334-03 435
Protective lens barrel extension
Article number
Protective lens barrel extension
Note
6GF3440-8AC13
D65 protective lens barrel extension
Degree of protection: IP67 for SIMATIC MV440 read-
ers
• Inner diameter: 57 mm
• Height: 48 mm
• Effective extension (without thread): 35 mm
Matching the following D65 protective
lens barrels:
• 6GF3440-8AC11
• 6GF3440-8AC21
• 6GF3440-8AC12
Requires an extension of the optical
components; for example, with a configu-
ration for the close-up range by using a
mini lens 75 mm.
14.2.3.4
Built-in ring light
Article number
Ring light
Note
6GF3440-8DA11
SIMATIC MV440 built-in ring light red
• Light source: LED red (618 nm)
• Lighting distance up to 0.8 m
Mounting materials supplied; to
achieve IP67 degree of protec-
tion, one of the protective lens
barrels is also needed:
• 6GF3440-8AC11
• 6GF3440-8AC12
• 6GF3440-8AC21
Without a protective lens barrel,
the camera achieves only IP20
degree of protection.
6GF3440-8DA21
SIMATIC MV440 built-in ring light white
• Light source: White LED
(440 nm ... 650 nm)
• Lighting distance up to 0.8 m
6GF3440-8DA31
SIMATIC MV440 built-in ring light green
• Light source: Green LED
(513 nm ... 543 nm)
• Lighting distance up to 0.8 m
6GF3440-8DA41
SIMATIC MV440 built-in ring light infrared
• Light source: LED infrared (850 nm)
• Lighting distance up to 0.8 m
14.2.3.5
Licenses
Text-Genius license (SIMATIC MV400)
This license is suitable for all SIMATIC MV440 readers and allows reading of plain text
(OCR).
Article number
License
Note
6GF3400-0SL01
SIMATIC MV400 Text-Genius license Suitable for all SIMATIC MV440
readers as of firmware V3.0
Components of the product/spares/accessories
14.2 Accessories
SIMATIC MV420 / SIMATIC MV440
436 Operating Instructions, 10/2015, C79000-G8976-C334-03
Text-Genius Plus license (SIMATIC MV400)
This license is suitable for all SIMATIC MV440 readers. It provides all functions of the Text-
Genius license 6GF3400-0SL01 plus adjustment of plain text reading (OCR) for customer-
specific fonts.
Article number
License
Note
6GF3400-1SL01
SIMATIC MV400 Text-Genius-Plus
license
Suitable for all SIMATIC MV440
readers as of firmware V5.0
Veri-Genius license (SIMATIC MV400)
This license is suitable for all SIMATIC MV440 readers and allows code verification.
Article number
License
Note
6GF3400-0SL02
SIMATIC MV400 Veri-Genius license Suitable for all SIMATIC MV440
readers as of firmware V4.0
Pat-Genius license (SIMATIC MV400)
This license is suitable for all SIMATIC MV440 readers and allows object recognition in
image information.
Article number
License
Note
6GF3400-0SL03
SIMATIC MV400 Pat-Genius license Suitable for all SIMATIC MV440
readers as of firmware V6.0
14.2.3.6
Calibration card
The calibration card is required for reliable operation of the SIMATIC MV440 reader with
verification functionality. The calibration card is supplied with the SIMATIC MV400 Veri-
Genius license 6GF3400-0SL02.
Article number
Calibration card
Note
6GF3440-8CE
(A5E02401759)
Calibration card
Dimensions (W x H x D):
45 x 70 x 75 mm
Suitable for all SIMATIC MV440
readers
Components of the product/spares/accessories
14.2 Accessories
SIMATIC MV420 / SIMATIC MV440
Operating Instructions, 10/2015, C79000-G8976-C334-03 437
14.2.3.7
PoE switch
Note
PoE functionality not available for older devices
The PoE functionality is
not available for older devices with the following article numbers:
•
6GF3440-0CD10
•
6GF3440-0GE10
•
6GF3440-0CD11
•
6GF3440-0GE11
•
6GF3440-0CD21
The following "PoE switches" are suitable for supplying power to the SIMATIC MV440
readers via the Ethernet cable.
Article number
PoE switch
Note
6GK5108-0PA00-2AA3
SCALANCE X108POE
Suitable for SIMATIC MV440 read-
ers with a PoE connector:
• 6GF3440-1CD10
• 6GF3440-1GE10
• 6GF3440-1LE10
6GK5308-2QG00-2AA2
SCALANCE X308-2M POE
6GK5324-4QG00-1AR2
6GK5324-4QG00-1HR2
SCALANCE XR324-12M POE
6GK5324-4QG00-3AR2
6GK5324-4QG00-3HR2
SCALANCE XR324-4M POE
14.2.3.8
Cables
SIMATIC MV440 readers are fitted with three M12 plugs / M16 sockets. The connectors
have the following functions:
● M12 – Ethernet cable M12/RJ-45
● M12 – ASM cable
● M16 - Power IO RS-232 cable
● M16 - Power I/O cable
Note
Ordering information
•
Either one or all three cables are required depending on the application. The cables
are not part of a complete package and must always be ordered separately.
•
There is more than one version of each cable type. In this case, you simply need to
order one version per reader.
M12 – Ethernet cable M12/RJ-45
This cable connects the reader with a communication partner over Ethernet.
Components of the product/spares/accessories
14.2 Accessories
SIMATIC MV420 / SIMATIC MV440
438 Operating Instructions, 10/2015, C79000-G8976-C334-03
Due to its short length, the following cable is intended only for commissioning and service:
Article number
IE connecting cable M12-180/
IE FC RJ45-145
Note
6XV1871-5TH20
Prefitted IE FC TP trailing cable
GP 2 x 2 (PROFINET type C)
for commissioning, service and
installation with:
• 4-pin M12 connector (D-
coded)
• IE FC RJ45 connector
• Degree of protection
IP65/IP67
• Length: 2 m
Suitable for all SIMATIC MV400
readers.
Other cables of type 6XV1871-
5... can be found in the current
"Industrial Identification Sys-
tems" (ID 10) catalog and the
Industry Mall.
The following industrial cables are used for fixed installation:
Article number
IE connecting cable
M12-180/M12-180 (length)
Note
6XV1870-8AE30
0.3 m Prefitted IE FC TP trailing cable
GP 2 x 2 (PROFINET type C):
• M12 prefitted at both sides
(male/male) with two 4-pin
M12 connectors (D-coded)
• Degree of protection IP65/67
• Lengths: see adjacent col-
umn
6XV1870-8AE50
0.5 m
6XV1870-8AH10
1.0 m
6XV1870-8AH15
1.5 m
6XV1870-8AH20
2.0 m
6XV1870-8AH30
3.0 m
6XV1870-8AH50
5.0 m
6XV1870-8AN10
10 m
6XV1870-8AN15
15 m
Special lengths with cable outlet
Note
Special lengths with 90° or 180° cable outlet
You can order special
lengths with a 90° or 180° cable outlet angle, at:
(
https://support.industry.siemens.com/cs/us/en/view/26999294)
Components of the product/spares/accessories
14.2 Accessories
SIMATIC MV420 / SIMATIC MV440
Operating Instructions, 10/2015, C79000-G8976-C334-03 439
The cables are supplied with M12 plugs fitted at both ends. When necessary, the cables can
be shortened at the other end from the reader and fitted with the following connectors, for
example, for an RJ-45 infrastructure:
Article number
IE FC RJ-45 Plug 180
Note
6GK1901-1BB10-2AA0
Pack with 1 plug
RJ45 plug-in connector for In-
dustrial Ethernet with a rugged
metal housing and integrated
insulation displacement contacts
for connecting Industrial Ether-
net FC installation cables; with:
• 180° cable outlet
• For network components
and CPs/CPUs with Indus-
trial Ethernet interface
6GK1901-1BB10-2AB0
Pack with 10 plugs
6GK1901-1BB10-2AE0
Pack with 50 plugs
Note
More cables and connectors
You will find more cables and connectors in the Siemens AG ordering system.
M12 – ASM cable
This cable is for connection to ASM devices such as RFC180C and ASM456. Power can
also be supplied through this cable allowing the reader to be operated with only one cable.
Article number
Cables
Note
6GT2891-4FH20
• M12 (male, 8-pin, straight) /
M12 (female, 8-pin, straight)
• Length 2 m
Connecting or extension cable
RS422, M12 / M12:
• Connecting cable prefabri-
cated between ASM 456,
RF170C, RF180C and read-
er.
• Extension cable for
ASM 456, RF170C and
RF180C with MOBY D/E/I/U
and SIMATIC RF300.
6GT2891-4FH50
• M12 (male, 8-pin, straight) /
M12 (female, 8-pin, straight)
• Length 5 m
6GT2891-4FN10
• M12 (male, 8-pin, straight) /
M12 (female, 8-pin, straight)
• Length 10 m
6GT2891-4FN20
• M12 (male, 8-pin, straight) /
M12 (female, 8-pin, straight)
• Length 20 m
6GT2891-4FN50
• M12 (male, 8-pin, straight) /
M12 (female, 8-pin, straight)
• Length 50 m
Components of the product/spares/accessories
14.2 Accessories
SIMATIC MV420 / SIMATIC MV440
440 Operating Instructions, 10/2015, C79000-G8976-C334-03
M16 power cable / power I/O cable / power I/O RS-232 cable
These cables are used for the camera power supply. The Power IO RS-232 cable also has
wires for connecting digital inputs/outputs and the RS-232 serial interface.
Article number
Cables
Note
6GF3400-0BH15
1.5 m MV400 push-pull power
cable
• M16 with connector at one
end (female, 12-pin, straight)
• Prefitted push-pull
• For power supply only, no
I/O, no RS 232
• Length: 1.5 m
Suitable for all SIMATIC MV400
readers
6GF3400-1BH20
2 m MV400 push-pull power
cable
• M16 with connector at one
end (female, 12-pin, straight)
• Open end
• Push-pull connector supplied
• For power supply only, no
I/O, no RS-232
• Length: 2 m
Suitable for all SIMATIC MV400
readers
6GF3440-8BA2
SIMATIC MV440/
SIMATIC MV420 Power IO RS-
232 cable
• M16 with connector at one
end (female, 12-pin, straight)
• Open end
• Length: 10 m
• Power, DI/DO, RS-232 cable
Suitable for all SIMATIC MV400
readers
6GF3440-8BA4
SIMATIC MV440/
SIMATIC MV420 Power IO RS-
232 cable
• M16 with connector at one
end (female, 12-pin, straight)
• Open end
• Length: 30 m
• Power, DI/DO, RS-232 cable
Suitable for all SIMATIC MV400
readers
SIMATIC MV420 / SIMATIC MV440
Operating Instructions, 10/2015, C79000-G8976-C334-03 441
Appendix
A
A.1
Service and Support
Technical Support
You can contact Technical Support for all Process Industries and Drives products as follows:
● Phone: + 49 (0) 911 895 7222
● Fax: + 49 (0) 911 895 7223
● Internet: Online support request form:
(https://support.industry.siemens.com/My/ww/en/requests)
Contact partner
If you have any further questions on the use of our products, please contact one of our
representatives at your local Siemens office.
The addresses are found on the following pages:
● On the Internet (http://w3.siemens.com/aspa_app)
● In Catalog CA 01
● In the catalog ID 10 for Industrial identification systems
Service and Support at Process Industries and Drives (PD)
You will find various services on the Support homepage
(https://support.industry.siemens.com/cs/de/en/) of PD on the Internet.
There you will find the following information, for example:
● Our newsletter containing up-to-date information on your products.
● Relevant documentation for your application, which you can access via the search
function in "Product Support".
● A forum for global information exchange by users and specialists.
● Your local PD representative.
● Information about on-site service, repairs, spare parts, and much more can be found
under "Our service offer".
SIMATIC Ident home page
For the latest general information about our identification systems, visit us on the Internet at
Identification systems home page (http://w3.siemens.com/mcms/identification-systems/).
Appendix
A.2 Directives and declarations
SIMATIC MV420 / SIMATIC MV440
442 Operating Instructions, 10/2015, C79000-G8976-C334-03
SIMATIC documentation on the Internet
A guide to the technical documentation for the various SIMATIC products and systems is
available on the Internet:
SIMATIC Guide manuals (http://www.siemens.com/simatic-tech-doku-portal)
Online catalog and ordering system
The online catalog and the online ordering system can also be found on the Industry Mall
home page (https://mall.industry.siemens.com).
Training center
We offer appropriate courses to get you started. Please contact your local training center or
the central training center in
D-90327 Nuremberg.
Phone: +49 (0) 180 523 56 11
(€ 0.14 /min. from the German landline network, deviating mobile communications prices are
possible)
For information about courses, see the SITRAIN homepage
(http://sitrain.automation.siemens.com/sitrainworld/).
A.2
Directives and declarations
CE mark
The SIMATIC MV420 and SIMATIC MV440 readers meet the requirements and protective
aims of the following EU directive.
EMC Directive
The devices meet the requirements of the EU directive "89/336/EEC
Electromagnetic Compatibility" (modified by 91/263/EEC, 92/31/EEC and 93/68/EEC) and
are designed for use in an industrial environment in accordance with the CE mark.
Area of applica-
tion
Requirements
Emission
Immunity
Industry EN 61000-6-4: 2007 + A1: 2011 EN 61000-6-2: 2001
Appendix
A.2 Directives and declarations
SIMATIC MV420 / SIMATIC MV440
Operating Instructions, 10/2015, C79000-G8976-C334-03 443
Declaration of Conformity
The EC Declaration of Conformity and corresponding documentation is available for the
responsible authorities according to the above-mentioned EC Directive at the following
address:
Siemens Aktiengesellschaft
Industry Automation
Sensors and Communication
P.O.Box 4848
90437 NUERNBERG
GERMANY
Your marketing contact can provide these if requested.
Installation guidelines
The installation guidelines and safety notices specified in the documentation must be
adhered to during commissioning and operation.
DIN ISO 9001 certificate
The quality assurance system of our entire product manufacturing process (development,
production, and marketing) meets the requirements of DIN ISO 9001 (corresponds to
EN29001: 1987).
This was confirmed by DQS (Deutsche Gesellschaft zur Zertifizierung von
Qualitätsmanagementsystemen mbH).
EQ-Net certificate number: 1323-01
License agreement for supplied software
The device is supplied with software installed. Please note the corresponding license
agreements.
EMC
USA
Federal Communi-
cations Commission
Radio Frequency
Interference State-
ment
This equipment has been tested and found to comply with the limits for a
Class A digital device, pursuant to Part 15 of the FCC Rules. These limits are
designed to provide reasonable protection against harmful interference when
the equipment is operated in a commercial environment. This equipment gen-
erates, uses, and can radiate radio frequency energy and, if not installed and
used in accordance with the instruction manual, may cause harmful interfer-
ence to radio communications. Operation of this equipment in a residential
area is likely to cause harmful interference in which case the user will be re-
quired to correct the interference at his own expense.
Shielded cables
Shielded cables must be used with this equipment to maintain compliance with
FCC regulations.
Appendix
A.2 Directives and declarations
SIMATIC MV420 / SIMATIC MV440
444 Operating Instructions, 10/2015, C79000-G8976-C334-03
USA
Modifications Changes or modifications not expressly approved by the manufacturer could
void the user’s authority to operate the equipment.
Conditions of opera-
tions
This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC Rules. Operation is subject to
the following two conditions: (1) this device may not cause harmful interfer-
ence, and (2) this device must accept any interference received, including
interference that may cause undesired operation.
CANADA
Canadian notice
This Class B digital apparatus complies with Canadian ICES-003.
Avis Canadien Cet appareil numérique de la classe b est conforme à la norme NMB-003 du
Canada.
AUSTRALIA
This product meets the requirements of the AS/NZS 3548 Norm (Class A).
SIMATIC MV420 / SIMATIC MV440
Operating Instructions, 10/2015, C79000-G8976-C334-03 445
ESD guidelines
B
Definition of ESD
All electronic modules are equipped with large-scale integrated ICs or components. Due to
their design, these electronic elements are highly sensitive to overvoltage, and thus to any
electrostatic discharge.
The electrostatic sensitive components/modules are commonly referred to as ESD devices.
This is also the international abbreviation for such devices.
ESD modules are identified by the following symbol:
NOTICE
ESD devices can be destroyed by voltages well below the threshold of human perception.
These static voltages develop when you touch a component or electrical connection of a
device without having drained the static charges present on your body. The electrostatic
discharge current may lead to latent failure of a module, that is, this damage may not be
significant immediately, but in operation may cause malfunction.
Electrostatic charging
Anyone who is not connected to the electrical potential of their surroundings can be
electrostatically charged.
The figure below shows the maximum electrostatic voltage which may build up on a person
coming into contact with the materials indicated. These values correspond to IEC 801-2
specifications.
ESD guidelines
SIMATIC MV420 / SIMATIC MV440
446 Operating Instructions, 10/2015, C79000-G8976-C334-03
Figure B-1 Electrostatic voltages on an operator
Basic protective measures against electrostatic discharge
● Ensure good grounding:
When handling electrostatic sensitive devices, ensure that your body, the workplace and
packaging are grounded. This prevents electrostatic charge.
● Avoid direct contact:
As a general rule, only touch electrostatic sensitive devices when this is unavoidable (e.g.
during maintenance work). Handle the modules without touching any chip pins or PCB
traces. In this way, the discharged energy can not affect the sensitive devices.
Discharge your body before you start taking any measurements on a module. Do so by
touching grounded metallic parts. Always use grounded measuring instruments.
SIMATIC MV420 / SIMATIC MV440
Operating Instructions, 10/2015, C79000-G8976-C334-03 447
List of abbreviations and acronyms
C
Abbreviation/symbol
Explanation
°
Degrees
°C
Degrees Celsius
A
Ampere (SI unit of electric current)
AIM
Association for Automatic Identification and Mobility
ANSI
A
merican
N
ational
S
tandards
I
nstitute - the name of the US institute for
standardizing industrial processes.
ASCII
American Standard Code for Information Interchange
ASM
Interface module, synonym of communication module
STL
St
atement
L
ist
BF
Bus fault
Bit
Binary digit
Byte
Binary term (1 byte = 8 bits)
approx.
approximately
CD
Compact Disc
CCD
C
harge
C
oupled
D
evice
CE
Communautés Européenes (French for European Communities)
cm²
Square centimeters
CPU
Central Processing Unit
CSV
Character Separated Values
DB
Data block
DC
Direct Current
DHCP
Dynamic Host Configuration Protocol
DI
Digital Input
DIN
Deutsches Institut für Normung e. V. (German standards association)
DISA
Disable
DMC
Data Matrix Code
DNS
Domain Name System
DO
Digital Output
DP
Distributed Peripheral I/O
DPM
Direct Part Marking
DVD
Digital Versatile Disc
EEPROM
Electrically Erasable Programmable Read Only Memory
EIA
Electronic Industries Alliance
EMC
E
lectro
M
agnetic
C
ompatibility
EN
Europäische Norm (European standard)
ES
Product version
ESD
Electrostatic Discharge
List of abbreviations and acronyms
SIMATIC MV420 / SIMATIC MV440
448 Operating Instructions, 10/2015, C79000-G8976-C334-03
Abbreviation/symbol
Explanation
FB
Function Block
FBD
F
unction
B
lock
D
iagram
GND
Ground
GSD
G
eneric
S
tation
D
escription
IAQG
International Aerospace Quality Group
I/O
Input/Output
ISO
International Standards Organization (from Greek: "isos"; Engl. "equal")
IEC
International Electrotechnical Commission
IEEE
Institute of Electrical and Electronics Engineers
IP
Internet Protocol or International Protection
HF
High Frequency
H2S
Hydrogen sulfide
hPa
Hectopascal
HR
High Resolution
HTML
Hypertext Markup Language
HTTP
Hypertext Transfer Protocol
kg
Kilogram
LAD
Ladder Diagram
LAN
Local Area Network
LCD
Liquid Crystal Display
LED
L
ight
e
mitting
d
iode
MAC
Media Access Control
max.
Maximum
MB = Mbit
10
6
bits
MHz
Megahertz
mil
milli-inches
min
Min
ute
m
Meter
mm²
Square millimeter
MTBF
Mean operating Time Between Failures
MTTR
Mean Time To Recover
LF
Low Frequency
OCR
Optical Character Recognition
OCV
Optical Character Verification
PC
Personal Computer, a stationary single-user computer
PELV
Protective Extra Low Voltage
PG
Programming device
PIB
Proxy Ident Function Block
PROFIBUS
Process Field Bus, international fieldbus standard to EN 50170/IEC 61158
PTB
Physikalisch-Technische Bundesanstalt (German technical inspectorate)
RAM
Random Access Memory
List of abbreviations and acronyms
SIMATIC MV420 / SIMATIC MV440
Operating Instructions, 10/2015, C79000-G8976-C334-03 449
Abbreviation/symbol
Explanation
RFID standard profile Implementation of the "Proxy Ident Function Block" (PIB), synonym of Ident
profile
ROI
R
egion
O
f
I
nterest
RH
Relative Humidity
Rps
R
eads
p
er
s
econd
RS
Recommended Standard
RS232 (also EIA-232) Identifies an interface standard for a sequential, serial data
transmission.
RS-422 (also EIA-422) Identifies an interface standard for a differential, serial data
transmission.
RS-485 (also EIA-485) Identifies an interface standard for a differential, serial data
transmission.
ROM
Read Only Memory
Rx
Receive (Rx) identifies a receiver
s
Second
SELV
Safety Extra Low Voltage
SF
Group error (German Sammelfehler)
SNTP
Simple Network Time Protocol
SO
2
Sulfur dioxide
PLC
Programmable Logic Controller
SR
Standard Resolution
t
Time
T
T
emperature
TCP
Transmission Control Protocol
TCP/IP
T
ransmission
C
ontrol
P
rotocol/
I
nternet
P
rotocol; a reference model for
communication on the Internet
Tx
Transmit (Tx) identifies a transmitter
URL
Uniform Resource Locator
V
Volt (SI unit of voltage)
VDE
V
erband
d
er
E
lektrotechnik, Elektronik und Informationstechnik (German
Association for Electrical, Electronic and Information Technologies)
WAN
Wide Area Network
XML
EXtensible Markup Language
e. g.
for example
List of abbreviations and acronyms
SIMATIC MV420 / SIMATIC MV440
450 Operating Instructions, 10/2015, C79000-G8976-C334-03
SIMATIC MV420 / SIMATIC MV440
Operating Instructions, 10/2015, C79000-G8976-C334-03 451
Glossary
Actuator
Component at the output section of a controlled system that intervenes in energy or mass
flows and causes changes.
ASM
Interface module, synonym of communication module.
ASM 456
The ASM 456 communication modules are slave modules for operating components via
PROFIBUS DP/DP-V1 on any controller.
Automation system
An automation system is a programmable logic controller consisting of at least a central
processing unit, a variety of input and output modules as well as operator control and
monitoring (HMI) devices.
Bus
A cable or conductor system used for data transfer among the components of a computer
system. An important characteristic of a bus is the number of bits the bus transmits
simultaneously. There are serial bus systems (one bit after the other) and parallel bus
systems (multiple bits simultaneously over several lines).
Communication module
Communication modules can be used to integrate RFID readers and code reading systems
into an automation system, e.g. PROFINET, PROFIBUS, or even ET 200pro distributed I/O.
Integration is independent of the technology actually employed. The reader always
communicates with the communication module via an RS-422 interface.
Contour
Solid line that runs completely along the border of an object, in other words, it consists solely
of border points.
Glossary
SIMATIC MV420 / SIMATIC MV440
452 Operating Instructions, 10/2015, C79000-G8976-C334-03
Counter
A counter registers the state changes (edges) of a digital signal. With each state change, the
counter increases (increments) or decreases (decrements) a value that is then evaluated by
SIMATIC S7 or a PLC.
CSV file
A CSV file is a text file for storage or for exchange of simply structured data; these files can
be read, for example, with Microsoft Excel.
CustomGUI
A custom user interface that communicates with the reader via the Web API.
Debouncing
In electrical switching or key contacts, a permanent electrical contact is not immediately
established when the contact closes. The connection opens and closes several times within
a fraction of a second. With digital input devices (for example, computer keyboards or input
controllers on keypads), this bouncing effect causes each occurrence of the contact to be
registered as a separate input (multiple input). Since the discovery of the phenomenon,
various hardware and software solutions have been developed. Counteracting this effect is
known as debouncing (debouncing circuit or routine).
DHCP client
Each device with network capability that supports communication with a DHCP server to
obtain dynamically leased IP configurations and other optional parameter information.
DHCP server
A computer on which the Microsoft DHCP service runs. This provides active DHCP clients
with dynamic configuration of IP addresses and related information.
Distortion
Image error that becomes evident in the image of a rectangular grid where the straight lines
are bent inwards or outwards.
DNS server
A hierarchically distributed database containing assignments of DNS domain names to
various data types, such as IP addresses. DNS enables computers and services to be
searched for based on user-friendly names. DNS also enables searches for other
information stored in the database.
Glossary
SIMATIC MV420 / SIMATIC MV440
Operating Instructions, 10/2015, C79000-G8976-C334-03 453
Download
In communications, to transfer a data copies from a remote computer to the requesting
computer, for example, to send the operating system from a PC to a controller.
D-sub
Type identification for a connector.
Dynamic Host Configuration Protocol
A TCP/IP service protocol that allows dynamic configurations of host IP addresses for a
certain time and distributes related configuration parameters to authorized network clients.
DHCP provides safe and simple-to-use configuration of TCP/IP networks, prevents address
conflicts and helps to restrict the number of IP addresses required in the network. DHCP
uses a client/server model in which the DHCP server takes over central management of IP
addresses used in the network. Clients with DHCP support can then request and obtain the
lease of an IP address from a DHCP server when the network starts up.
Endian
Data is sometimes saved in a different order in certain computer architectures. Intel-based
computers, for example, save the data differently from the Siemens controllers (S7), namely,
in reverse sequence. The byte sequence from Intel, termed
Little Endian
, is therefore the
reverse S7 byte sequence,
Big Endian
. The following applies to these two forms:
● Little Endian: The most significant byte is located at the right end of a word.
● Big Endian: The most significant byte is located at the left end of a word.
Ethernet
This is a specific type of local network that works according to a standard defined by Intel,
DEC and Xerox.
Firmware
Software routines stored in the Read-Only Memory (ROM). Startup routines and machine-
level I/O commands are stored in the firmware. In terms of user friendliness, firmware takes
an intermediate position between software and hardware.
Function Block Diagram
Function Block Diagram is a graphic representation of control functions. Each control
function has a corresponding symbol.
Gateway
This is a device that is connected to more than one physical TCP/IP network and can
forward or distribute IP packets. A gateway translates various transport protocols or data
Glossary
SIMATIC MV420 / SIMATIC MV440
454 Operating Instructions, 10/2015, C79000-G8976-C334-03
formats (such as IPX and IP) and is added to networks mainly because of this translation
function. Gateways are also known as IP routers.
Host name
The DNS name of a device on a network. These names are used to locate a computer in the
network. Before a computer can be found, its host name must be listed in the host file or be
known to a DNS server. On most computers running Windows, the host name and computer
name are identical.
HR
HR stands for the resolution 1024x768 pixels (width to height ratio 4:3, 12:9) regardless of
other parameters.
Ident profile
Implementation of the "Proxy Ident Function Block" (PIB) from PROFIBUS INTERNATIONAL
for SIMATIC S7. Synonomous to RFID standard profile.
IP address
A 32-bit address to identify a node in an IP network. Each node in the IP network is be
assigned a unique IP address. This consists of the network ID and a unique host ID. This
address is typically represented with the decimal value of each octet separated by a period,
for example, 192.168.7.27. In this version of Windows, you can configure a static IP address
or have it configured dynamically by DHCP.
Ladder diagram
Graphic representation of the control functions based on circuit diagrams from contactor
technology. The current paths are arranged horizontally one below the other and the
symbols used are different.
MAC address
The MAC address is the hardware address for each network device (network card, switch ,
etc.) and is used for unique identification of the device in the network. The MAC address is
burned into a chip and cannot normally be modified.
Main ROI or ROI
R
egion
o
f
I
nterest. The main ROI is the area with characteristics of the specimens relevant
for image processing.
Glossary
SIMATIC MV420 / SIMATIC MV440
Operating Instructions, 10/2015, C79000-G8976-C334-03 455
Master
The device configured as master in a communications system passes on data to the device
configured as slave. The master is always the active partner.
MOBY-ASM
The term MOBY-ASM covers all communication modules (ASM) that use the RFID industrial
standard MOBY, for example SIMATIC RF180C or ASM 456.
N type
The load switches from 0 V to 24 V DC and the input is switched to 24 V DC.
OCR
OCR ("
O
optical
C
character
R
recognition") is a term from the IT sector and refers to
automatic text recognition in images.
This add-on feature enables the reader to detect and read human-readable plain text in an
image in addition to machine-readable codes.
OCV
With the OCV ("
O
ptical
C
haracter
V
erification"), the reader can compare the read plain text
to target specifications and detect deviations in the reading result. The OCV function is very
different from a printing inspection, which involves comparison of the printed image with a
template. This task is not covered by the OCV function.
P type
The load switches from 24 to 0 V DC and the input is switched to 0 V DC.
Persistence
Persistence is the capability of storing data structures or objects in non-volatile storage
media such as file systems or databases. In other words, data is saved to non-volatile
memory in the reader.
PIB
Proxy Ident Function Block from PROFIBUS INTERNATIONAL, article number 3.142.
Pick-and-place
Loading and removal of parts.
Glossary
SIMATIC MV420 / SIMATIC MV440
456 Operating Instructions, 10/2015, C79000-G8976-C334-03
Ping
A utility for checking connections to one or more remote hosts. The "ping" command uses
the echo packets and echo replies of ICMP to check connectivity with an IP system in a
network. Ping is useful in troubleshooting the IP network or the router.
Port or port address
Address for a channel for data transfer between an input or output device and the processor.
From the CPU’s perspective, a port represents one or more memory addresses to which it
can send data or from which it can receive data. Special hardware such as expansion
boards places data from a device in the memory addresses and sends data from these
addresses to the device. Some ports are only for input and some only for output.
Power over Ethernet (PoE)
"Power over Ethernet" (PoE) is the name of a technology with which network devices can be
supplied with power via the 8-wire Ethernet cable.
The main advantage of "Power over Ethernet" is that the power supply cable is no longer
necessary: Devices connected to Ethernet can be installed in less accessible areas or in
areas in which large numbers of cables would be inconvenient. On the one hand, this means
a drastic reduction of installation costs. On the other hand, a central uninterruptible power
supply (USP) that is simple to implement increases the protection against failure of the
connected devices.
PROFIBUS DP
PROFIBUS DP is used to control readers and other actuators using a central controller in
production engineering. It is also used in connection with "distributed intelligence", i.e.
connecting multiple controllers to form a network. It provides data transmission up to 12
Mbps on twisted-pair cables and data transmission over sliding contacts for mobile
subscribers in exceptional cases or optical data transmission in unobstructed space.
PROFINET device
A PROFINET IO system is made up of the following devices:
● An I/O controller is a controller or PC that controls automation tasks.
● An I/O device is a field device that is configured and controlled by an I/O controller.
An I/O device is made up of several modules and submodules.
● I/O Supervisor is a development tool typically based on a PC that is used to assign
parameters to and perform diagnostics on individual I/O devices, and to configure the
entire plant. The I/O controller gets its data from the I/O Supervisor and configures the I/O
device based on this.
An application relation (AR) is formed between an I/O controller and I/O device.
Communication relations (CR) with varying properties are specified for the transfer of
parameters, cyclic data communication and alarm handling based on this AR.
Glossary
SIMATIC MV420 / SIMATIC MV440
Operating Instructions, 10/2015, C79000-G8976-C334-03 457
The properties and options of an I/O device are described in a Generic Station Description
(GSD) file. This file is written in GSDML (GSD Markup Language) - an extension of XML -
and is used as a planning tool to plan the configuration for PROFINET IO systems.
PROFINET IO
PROFINET IO (Input Output) is used for controlling readers and other actuators using a
central controller in production engineering.
Proxy
A computer that receives broadcast name queries and answers to names that do not go to
the local subnet. To evaluate the names, the proxy communicates with a WINS server and
retains the names in the cache for a certain time.
RF180C
The RF180C communication module is a module for operating RFID components via
PROFINET IO on any controller.
RFID standard profile
Synonym of Ident profile.
Sensor
Technically speaking, a (measuring) sensor is a component which can measure, in addition
to certain physical or chemical properties, qualitative material features or quantitative
measured values of its environment.
Physical or chemical properties are, for example:
● Thermal radiation
● Temperature
● Moisture
● Pressure
● Sound pressure
● Sound
● Brightness
● Magnetism
● Acceleration
● Force
Glossary
SIMATIC MV420 / SIMATIC MV440
458 Operating Instructions, 10/2015, C79000-G8976-C334-03
Server
Network station that provides services and resources for other stations. For example, a
computer that manages data and passes this on to other computers as needed.
Shutter speed: Shutter speed
The shutter speed decides how long the CCD sensor of a camera is exposed. When more
light is available, the operator can select a faster shutter speed and vice versa. At slow
shutter speeds, there is greater risk that the image will suffer from "camera shake".
SIMATIC S7
Siemens automation system with the controller families SIMATIC S7-300 and SIMATIC S7-
400.
Slave
The device configured as slave in a communications system receives data from the device
configured as master. The slave is always the passive partner.
SNMP: Simple Network Management Protocol
SNMP is a protocol for managing networks and nodes in the network. To transmit data,
SNMP uses the connectionless UDP protocol.
SNTP: Simple Network Time Protocol
SNTP is a simplified version of NTP. NTP is a standard for synchronizing clocks in computer
systems using packet-based communication networks.
SP1
S
ervice
P
ack 1: Supplementary software for the Microsoft Windows XP Professional
operating system and Internet Explorer 6.0.
SR
SR stands for the resolution 640 × 480 or 768 x 480 regardless of other parameters.
Statement list
Statement List is a user program in which the control functions are listed in the form of
statements.
Glossary
SIMATIC MV420 / SIMATIC MV440
Operating Instructions, 10/2015, C79000-G8976-C334-03 459
STEP 7
STEP 7 is the software package for configuring and programming SIMATIC automation
systems. It is part of the SIMATIC industrial software.
Sub-ROI
The area in the main ROI with characteristics of the specimens of special relevance for
image processing. Sub-ROIs are created when the characteristics of the main ROI are not
adequate for evaluation.
Switch:
A switch is an electronic device for connecting several computers or network segments in a
local network (LAN) - similar to a hub. A switch is also known as an intelligent hub. In its
original form, the switch operates on layer 2 (Data Link layer) of the OSI model. The switch
processes 48-bit MAC addresses and creates an SAT (Source Address Table).
The switch has properties similar to a bridge and is also known as a multi-port bridge.
Ethernet switch is the shortened form, of
switching hub
and indicates the ability to operate
switched Ethernet.
Template
The template contains the default settings. These are used, for example, to create a new
program with just a few clicks of the mouse.
The settings made in the Adjustment – "Set image" task are saved in the template.
The template is the basis for creating a new program in the "Programs" task.
Trigger
A trigger is a switch that activates an action when a specific event occurs.
URL: Uniform Resource Locator
An address uniquely identifying a location on the Internet. A URL for a WWW page is
preceded by http://. A URL can contain other details such as the name of a hypertext page
normally identified by the file name extension HTML or HTM.
User interface
Software: Web server application, in which most operator actions are performed on the PC
screen using a mouse and keyboard. The software processes and displays models.
Web API
The Web API is a web interface that can be used to program a custom user interface.
Parameter values of the reader can be read and written via Web API.
Glossary
SIMATIC MV420 / SIMATIC MV440
460 Operating Instructions, 10/2015, C79000-G8976-C334-03
SIMATIC MV420 / SIMATIC MV440
Operating Instructions, 10/2015, C79000-G8976-C334-03 461
Index
A
Access protection, 33
Additional information, 6
ASM cable
For SIMATIC MV420, 426
SIMATIC MV440, 439
ASM cable length, 151
ASM connection, 407
Automation License Manager
ALM, 177
B
Built-in ring light, 413
SIMATIC MV420, 424
SIMATIC MV440, 435
C
Cable pin assignment
MV400 push-pull power cable, 155
Power IO RS-232 cable, 153
Cable sockets, 152
Cables
Special lengths with cable outlet, 425, 438
Calibration card
SIMATIC MV440, 436
Changing passwords
For security reasons, 12
Character font library
Defining your own character fonts, 233
Using character fonts in OCR steps, 233
Climatic ambient conditions, 398
Climatic conditions
Atmospheric pressure, 398
Temperature, 398
Configuration
Avoiding interference, 149
Configuration
via remote client, 33
Configuration table
Finding the suitable lens, 429
Connecting cables
External lighting unit, 159
Connecting safety extra-low voltage
SELV, 150
Connecting the power supply, 36, 151
Connection
Reader, 149
Contact partner, 441
Contacts worldwide, 6
Control
via an automation system, 197
Courses, 442
D
Device information
Info, 255
Device information, 255
Device replacement, 285
Diag. & monitoring, 248
Options, 248
Diagnostic information, 375
Diagnostics
Error messages, 375
Warnings/notes, 375
Diagnostics, 253
Information, 253
Diagnostics
Read results, 375
Diagnostics functions, 33
Digital out
XMATCH, 354
DISA bit, 258
Disruptions, 149
E
Electromagnetic compatibility, 398
Environmental protection, 11
Error display, 260
Error message
Calibrate, 383
Normalization, 382
ESD guidelines, 445
Ethernet cable M12/RJ-45, 424, 437
Ethernet connection, 407
Example
Archiving diagnostic information on PC, 369
Link with FB79, 369
Index
SIMATIC MV420 / SIMATIC MV440
462 Operating Instructions, 10/2015, C79000-G8976-C334-03
External power supply
Protection, 151, 151
Extras, 250
Options, 250
F
Field of vision depending on camera distance
For a focal distance of 16 mm, 423
For a focal distance of 6 mm, 421
Filter error, 388
Finding the suitable lens
Configuration table, 429
Firmware, 6, 258
Full update, 258
Incremental update, 258
Fittings for mounting
SIMATIC MV420, 421
SIMATIC MV440, 427
Function block FB79, 322
Fuse, 398
G
Guarantee, 36
Guidelines
ESD guidelines, 445
H
Handshaking, 321
History, 6
I
I/O interface
N type, 157
P type, 157
Image acquisition, 32
Image control, 194, 200, 211
Image sensor
Protection against damaging radiation, 37
Incorrect response
due to interference signals, 149
Info
Device information, 255
Statistics, 251
Information
Device information, 251
Diagnostics, 251, 253
Statistics, 251
Initialization
With program selection, 293
Without program selection, 293
Installation guidelines, 149
Installation instructions, 166
Installing
SIMATIC MV420 reader, 142, 145
Integration
PROFINET IO device, 280
Interfaces
Communication, 203
Parameter, 203
J
Job execution, 328
L
LED
ETHERNET, 198, 375
POWER, 375
STATE/SF, 198, 375
Lens
Suitable,
License
Pat-Genius license (SIMATIC MV440), 436
Text-Genius license (SIMATIC MV440), 435
Text-Genius Plus license (SIMATIC MV440), 436
Transferring, 178
Veri-Genius license (SIMATIC MV440), 436
Lighting, 245
Options, 245
Lighting unit
VS100, 410
Lighting unit
MV400 LED ring light metal IR clear, 410
MV400 LED ring light metal red clear, 410
M
Maintenance, 395
MATCH command, 122
MIB, 368
Module
Electrostatic discharge, 36
Module sensitive to electrostatic discharge, 36
Mounting bracket
SIMATIC MV420, 412
Index
SIMATIC MV420 / SIMATIC MV440
Operating Instructions, 10/2015, C79000-G8976-C334-03 463
Mounting plate
SIMATIC MV420, 412
SIMATIC MV440, 411
MV400 push-pull power cable
Cable pin assignment, 155
N
Notes
on installation, 166
O
One-dimensional code, 39
Operating instructions on the Internet, 5
Operating status
Stop, 260
Optical Character Recognition, 90
Optical Character Verification, 90
Options
Diag. & monitoring, 248
Extras, 250
Lighting, 245
Security, 246
Overvoltage protection, 37
P
Parameter, 325
PoE switch
SIMATIC MV440, 437
Power cable, 426, 440
Power I/O cable, 426, 440
Power IO RS-232 cable, 426, 440
Cable pin assignment, 153
Power IO RS-232 connection, 407, 408
Power IO RS-232 interface
N type, 158
P type, 158
Power supply, 398, 398
Processing code, 33
Processing mode, 242
PROFINET IO device
Integration, 280
Program number, 250
Program saving procedure, 339
Program sequence, 250
Programs
Template, 209
PRONETA
Installation, 165
Protection against damaging radiation
Image sensor, 37
Protection of the external power supply, 151
Protective cap for lens screw connection, 407
Protective lens barrel, 412
Protective lens barrel
Installing the SIMATIC MV440 reader, 142
Protective lens barrel
SIMATIC MV420, 423
Protective lens barrel
For built-in lamps (SIMATIC MV440), 434
Protective lens barrel extension, 435
Proxy
Server, 398
Pseudocode example
XML backup, 363
XML restore, 365
R
Reader
Connection, 149
control via an automation system, 197
Diagnostic information, 375
Key functions of the reader, 19
Reader lens
SIMATIC MV420, 421
SIMATIC MV440, 428
Reader operating modes
DHCP, 188
DHCP server, 188
Manual, 188
PROFINET mode, 188
Recycling, 11
Relative humidity, 398
Repair, 395
Ring light holder, 411
ROI
moving with mouse or keyboard, 195, 201
S
Save program, 338
Saving acquired images, 239
Scanner portal, 33
Scanner portal application
Restrictions, 356
Scope
for devices, 3
for licenses, 3
Index
SIMATIC MV420 / SIMATIC MV440
464 Operating Instructions, 10/2015, C79000-G8976-C334-03
Security, 246
Options, 246
Select program, 336
SELV
Connecting safety extra-low voltage, 150
Server
Proxy, 398
SIMATIC documentation
On the Internet, 442
SIMATIC MV420 reader
Degree of protection, 402
Starting current, 402
SIMATIC MV440 reader
Degree of protection, 400
Starting current, 400
SNMP, 368
Start processing, 339
Statistics, 251
Info, 251
Stop, 260
System components, 29
System configuration, 29, 125
System expansions, 36
System requirement
PC/programming device, 31
Reader, 30
System requirements, 30
System setup
PROFINET IO, 128
T
Technical Support, 441
Temperature, 398
Template
key function, 209
Torx, 409
Track&Trace, 33
Training, 442
Transferring
A license, 178
Two-dimensional code, 39
U
User interface, 32
User management, 33
V
Verification library, 76
Calibrate reader for code verification, 229
Define verification settings, 229
Versions
Available versions, 20
W
Worldwide
Contact partner, 6
X
XMATCH
Structure of the user data, 350
XMATCH command, 119, 302, 349
XMATCH user data
Examples, 353